'»'j«n/\inuaiv 


v/\uiuaiia*- 


'JMiini  dui 


BRARYQr^ 


.5MEUNIVER% 


v^lOSANCn% 


<m3DNVS01^ 


%a3A!Nni«^^ 


fjuni  I 


5^t^EUNIVEM{j^ 


^lOSANCOfJ^ 


<I^33NVS01^ 


'%a3AiNn-3v\v'' 


•g  it 


'"^^AHvaan-^ 


"^/^AINn-JftV 


4^1UBRARY^/ 

^  1  trr 


^p.rAiiFnD/ 


UBRARYQc. 


^iSfOJIlVJJO^ 


.5WEDNIVER% 


S       u. 

33NVS01^      ^/J 


^0F-CAIIF0%        ^^WEUNIVERSy^ 


>&Aavaai;- 


^tUBRARY^/^ 


^lOSANCE^r^ 


;55\EUNIVER% 


%a3AINn-3i^'* 
^W3SANCELEf^ 


^l:UBRARYf?,r^ 


<Q133NVS01^     %a3AiNnatt5-^ 


^OFCAtlFO^ 


^; 


^^ 


^lUBRARYOr,      ^^lUBRARYOr, 

siirri  iiirri 


^^WEUNIW^ 


•7«       Si 


'^omm-xi'^      -^c/AHvaan-iv^* 


'JJUDNVSOV^' 


^/ja^AiNnjvw 


^^AHvae 


^  1   1 


I  '-.<-     fi-    M  : 


^l 


^OFCAIIFOR^ 

c  !\ 


^\MtUNIVER%      ^10SANCEI% 


%ia3Nvsoi'^    "^feaaAiNfl-aftv^ 


.5,MFUNIVER%      ^10SANCH% 


<<^3NViur 


"'-jaa/^ii'iirari'' 


f- 


iJUij  1 


^OFCAllFO%. 


"<J^33NVS01^      ^MAlNnmv 


-^OKwm^ 


^I'UBRARYQ^^ 

i/U!?  i 

^OFCAUF01?4^ 


-AlUBRARY^A,      ^lUBRARYOe^        ^^JAEDNIVERy/A       o^lDSANCElfx> 


(/  c^^^-Jl    L(J  ZTf^^^^^^i^ 


trv^ 


THE 

BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 


EDITED  BY 

PAUL   WITHINGTON,    M.  D. 

Assistant   Graduate    Treasurer    Harvard    Athletic    Association, 
1910-1914;    Captain  Harvard  Swimming?  Team,   190S,   1909; 
Member  Harvard  Footliall  Eleven,   190S,   1909;    Member 
Harvard  Eight-Oared  ('row,  1909;    Winner  New  England 
Championship    in    Wrestling,    1909;     Winner    Boston 
Metropolitan  Championship  in  Single  Sculls,   1912, 
1915;  Captain  Union  Boat  Club  Eight,  1914;  Cap- 
tain and  Coach  of  Championship,  89th  Division 
Football  Team,  A.  E.  F.;  Coach  A.  E.  F.  Crew. 


REVISED   BY 
LOTHROP   WITHINGTON 

Member    of    Harvard    Football    Eleven    1909,   Captain,   1910; 

Member    of  Harvard   Eight-Oared  Crew,  1909,    1910,    1911; 

New  England  Champion  Senior  Single  Sculls,  1917;  Member 

Union  Boat  Club  Eight's,  1915,  191c),  Captain,  1916. 

Illustrated  From  Many  Photographs 
of  Athletes  and  Athletic  Events 


BOSTON 
LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO. 


131913 


Copyright,  1914,  by  Lothrop,  Lee  &  Shepard  Co. 
Copyright,  1922,  by  Lothrop,  Lee  &  Shepard  Co. 


All  rights  reserved 


The  Book  of  Athleticb 


vjO 


70/ 

>7^ 

PREFACE 

The   first   ''Book   of  Athletics"   appeared 
^    in  1895.     It  was  edited  by  Norman  W.  Bing- 
_    ham,  Jr.,  at  that  time  Captain  of  the  Harvard 
<^j   Track  Team,  and  was  a  collection  of  articles 
l^,    ''containing  practical  advice  and  suggestions 
7~    from  college  team-captains  and  other  amateurs 
t'^    on  football,  baseball,  rowing,  sprinting,  tennis, 
^.     golf,  bicycling,  swimming,  skating,  yachting, 
^~:    and  other  .allied  subjects,"  and  was  intended 
•*     as  a  guide  to  young  athletes. 
^         An  up-to-date  book  of  the  same  nature  is 
i\^  demanded,  and  the  same  title  has  been  used. 
The  former  book  became  obsolete,  excellent 
as  it  was,  because  within  the  last  twenty  years 
knowledge  of  and  participation  in  athletics 
have  spread  tremendously.     There  are  doz- 
vs  I     ens  of  men  skilled  in  coaching  scattered  over 
"^     the  country,  teaching  men  and  boys  both  the 
elements  and  fine  points  of  our  many  games, 
and  there  is  to-day  a  widespread  and  almost 
^     universal   interest   in  sports   which   far   sur- 
^    passes  that  of  twenty  years  ago.     With  this 
^     spread  of  interest  there  has  grow^n  up  an  ever- 
increasing  desire  and  demand  for  the  expert's 
view,  with  the  result  that  the  daily  papers,  the 
current  weeklies,  and  the  monthly  magazines 


vi  PREFACE 

are  full  of  accounts  of  games,  discussions  and 
criticisms  written  by  star  players  and  expert 
coaches.  Some  of  the  best  of  such  material 
forms  the  nucleus  of  this  book  The  remain- 
der has  been  written  especially  for  the  editor 
by  leading  present-day  athletes,  or  prepared 
by  himself. 

^The  Book  of  Athletics"  is  a  collection  of 
articles  written  by  players,  captains,  coaches, 
and  trainers  of  many  college  teams,  and  by 
others  who  have  had  a  wide  experience  in 
athletics.  While  it  makes  no  pretense  of  con- 
taining exhaustive  treatises  on  all  branches  of 
sports,  or  even  of  being  a  complete  and  suffi- 
cient text-book  on  those  sports  considered,  it 
has  been  the  endeavor  of  the  editor  in  gathering 
material  to  cover  in  an  interesting  and  instruct- 
ive way  the  games  commonly  played  in  school 
and  college  circles.  The  book  is  designed 
to  give  those  interested  a  certain  amount  of 
knowledge  and  insight  into  the  player's  side  of 
athletics.  It  is  intended  that  the  discussions 
shall  not  be  so  technical  as  to  be  intelligible 
to  beginners,  nor  so  elementary  as  to  fail  to 
interest  the  more  expert. 

The  present  book  will  be  found  to  be  some- 
what more  specialized  than  the  first.  This 
seems  to  coincide  with  the  trend  of  the  times. 
The  greatest  space  and  endeavor  have  been 
given  to  what  are  known  in  college  ranks  as  the 
major  sports.     Accordingly,  much  more  space 


PREFACE  vii 

has  been  allotted  to  football,  on  which  there 
are  articles  not  only  on  the  game  in  general, 
but  on  each  position  and  on  the  important 
features  of  the  game.  Track  athletics  like- 
wise have  become  so  important  that  sections 
are  devoted  to  its  several  events.  In  other 
sports,  where  the  general  knowledge  is  so 
advanced  that  teaching-articles  would  be 
more  technical  than  is  the  plan  of  this  book, 
there  have  been  substituted  articles  with 
either  an  historical  or  a  psj^hological  interest. 
Thus  in  baseball,  the  articles  deal  not  so  much 
with  the  coaching  or  playing  of  the  various 
positions  as  with  the  importance  of  team  play, 
quick  thinking,  and  a  thorough  understanding 
of  the  intricacies  of  the  game.  But  though 
the  major  sports  claim  most  attention,  the 
minor  sports  have  been  by  no  means  neglected, 
and  an  effort  has  been  made  to  include  all  the 
forms  of  athletics  common  to  schools  and 
colleges,  the  list  including,  besides  the  above 
mentioned  sports,  rowing,  ice-hockey,  tennis, 
swimming,  soccer  football,  WTestling,  lacrosse, 
basket-ball,  and  golf.  To  have  covered  all 
sorts  of  sports  as  fully  as  in  the  case  of  foot- 
ball would  have  meant  a  book  so  large  and  so 
expensive  that  its  very  aim  would  have  been 
defeated. 

The  w-riters  of  the  various  articles  are  thor- 
oughly familiar  with  their  subjects,  and  each 
division  contains  a  wealth  of  excellent  material. 


viii  PREFACE 

The  men  are  all  experts  in  their  lines,  in  fact, 
in  many  cases  stand  at  the  head  of  their  par- 
ticular branch  of  athletics.  It  would  be  quite 
impossible  to  make  up  a  list  of  the  greatest 
athletes  and  athletic  teachers  of  the  present 
decade  without  including  such  names  as  those 
of  the  late  Michael  C.  Murphy,  the  dean  of 
track  coaches:  Dr.  Alvin  C.  Kraenzlein  of 
Pennsylvania,  who  was  to  organize  and  train 
the  German  OljTiipic  Team  of  1916;  Ralph  C. 
Craig  of  ]\lichigan,  winner  of  two  first  places 
in  the  1912  Olympic  Games;  James  Thorpe  of 
Carlisle,  the  wonderful  Indian  athlete;  Keene 
Fitzpatrick,  Track  Coach  at  Princeton,  for- 
merly at  the  University  of  Michigan;  all  of 
whom  are  contributors  to  this  book.  Quite  as 
impressive  as  any  is  the  football  section,  with 
articles  by  Fielding  H.  Yost,  Coach  of  the 
Michigan  eleven;  Henry  H.  Ketcham  of  Yale; 
E.  J.  Hart,  Sanford  B.  WTiite,  and  J.  M. 
Duff  of  Princeton,  Leland  S.  Devore  of  the 
Army;  John  Dalton  of  the  Navy;  Percy  L. 
Wendell  and  Edw.  W.  Mahan  of  Harvard. 
But  the  other  sports  are  quite  as  well  and  fully 
covered  —  Tennis  by  R.  Norris  Williams  of 
Harvard,  Intercollegiate  Champion  and  mem- 
ber of  several  American  Davis  Cup  Teams; 
Hockey  by  Fred  D.  Huntington  of  Harvard 
and  member  of  the  Boston  Athletic  Associa- 
tion Hocke}^  Team;  Basketball  by  Fred  A. 
Kohler  of  Princeton,  and  Jas.  A.  Reilly  of 


PREFACE  ix 

Yale;  Lacrosse  by  Paul  Gustafson  of  Harvard; 
Rowing  by  Gen  W.  A.  Bancroft;  Soccer  by 
H.  G.  Francke,  Captain  of  the  Harvard  1914 
Association  Team.  Each  sport  included  is 
handled  by  well-known  and  capable  athletes. 
The  personality  of  these  men  is  portrayed  in 
their  work  and  adds  greatly  to  the  interest 
and  value  of  the  book.  Where  no  author  is 
specified,  the  article  has  been  prepared  by  the 
editor,  who  has  covered  the  subject  of  Wrest- 
ling, and  contributed  articles  on  Football, 
Rowing  and  Swimming. 

Paul  Withington. 


The  last  edition  of  the  "Book  of  Athletics" 
was  issued  in  August,  1914.  Since  that  time 
many  radical  changes  have  been  made  in 
many  branches  of  sport  covered  in  the  book. 
The  continued  demand  for  the  book  therefore 
necessitated  a  new  or  revised  edition.  Ar- 
ticles obsoleted  by  these  changes  have  been 
replaced  by  contributions  from  ''stars"  who  are 
still  in  active  competition,  so  that  our  readers 
may  have  the  latest  authoritative  information. 
Contributions  of  this  sort  are  the  articles  by 
Earl  J.  Thomson,  the  peerless  Dartmouth 
hurdler  who  has  made  new  American  and 
world's  records  in  his  collegiate  and  Olympic 
competitions;  Huntington  R.  ("Tack")  Hard- 
wick,   that  remarkable   three-letter  man   at 


X  PREFACE 

Harvard,  who  writes  an  intimate  and  illumin- 
ating article  on  end  play  in  football.  Leroy 
T.  Brown,  twice  Dartmouth  track  captain, 
who  has  just  established  new  indoor  and  inter- 
collegiate high  jump  marks;  George  Owen,  Jr., 
all-round  athlete,  better  known  perhaps  as  a 
football  and  baseball  player  but  who  as  captain 
for  successive  years  of  the  Harvard  Hockey 
team  writes  from  practical  knowledge  and 
experience;  and  Dudley  Pratt,  captain  of  the 
Yale  University  Swimming  Team,  undefeated 
collegiate  champions  for  a  number  of  years. 

The  general  increasing  interest  in  the  game 
of  golf  makes  the  addition  of  an  article  by  that 
national  figure,  Francis  Ouimet,  particularly 
appropriate.  The  re-appearance  of  boxing  in 
college  and  school  athletics  has  made  it 
desirable  to  add  a  chapter  on  this  subject  by 
Larry  J.  Conley,  the  Harvard  Boxing  In-  ^ 
structor. 

Many  new  illustrations  have  been  added, 
most  of  them  being  of  teams  or  individual 
performers  who  have  been  recently  prominent 
in  competition. 

As  a  whole,  however,  the  endeavor  has  been 
to  retain  the  articles  of  those  experts,  whose 
names  will  ever  be  remembered  in  athletics 
circles,  where  the  change  in  the  sport  has  not 
made  the  article  of  little  instructive  value. 

LOTHROP   WiTHINGTON. 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION 


PAGE 


The  Essentials  of  an  Athlete.     By  Paul  Wiihington        3 
Competitive  Athletics:  Theiii  Place  in  School  and 
College  Sports,   and   a   Wokd  about  Training 
for  Athletic  Events.     By  I'aul  Wiihington    .       .         8 

FOOTBALL 

Team-Play;  Types  of  Players,  and  Rules.  By 
Paul  IVithington 21 

Modern  Football  and  How  to  Play  It.  By  Michael 
C.  Mur-phy 27 

Training  for  the  Team.  By  Dr.  Alvin  C.  Kraenzlein, 
University  of  Pennsylvania,  Holder  of  the  World's 
Record  in  the  Low  Hurdles;  Ex-trainer  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Michigan  Football  Team,  and  Coach  of  the 
Track  Team;  Coach  and  Supervisor  of  the  German 
Olympic  Team  for  1916         35 

The  New  Football  a  G.ame  for  Thinkers.  By 
Fielding  H.  Yost,  Coach  of  the  L^niversity  of  Michi- 
gan Football  Team 47 

Football  Generalship:  The  Captain,  and  the 
Quarter-Back.     By  Paul  Wiihington  ....       52 

How  TO  Play  Center.  By  Henry  H.  Ketcham,  Cap- 
tain of  the  Yale  Football  Team,  1913;  All-America 
Center,  1911-1912 61 

How  TO  Play  Guard.  By  Joseph  M.  Duff,  Princeton, 
All-America  Guard,  1911;  Coach  of  the  LTniversity 
of  Pittsburgh  Football  Team,  1913-1914      ...       70 

How  TO  Play  Tackle.  By  Edward  J.  Hart,  Prince- 
ton, All- America  Tackle,  1911;  Coach  at  Princeton, 
1913 75 


xii  CONTENTS 


PAQB 


Tackle  Play,  By  Leland  S.  Dcvorc,  Captain  of  the 
West  Point  Football  Team,  1911,  All-America  Tackle       81 

A  Few  Facts  on  End  Play.  By  Huntington  R. 
("Tack")  Hardimch,  End  and  Half-Back  on  Harvard 
Football  Teams  in  1912,  1913,  and  1914;  Captain  of 
Harvard  Baseball  Team,  and  Shot-Putter  on  Harvard 
Track  Team 91 

How  TO  Play  Fullback.  By  John  P.  Dalton,  U.  S. 
Naval  Academy,  All- America  Fullback        .        .        .104 

The  Play  of  the  Backs.  By  Percy  L.  Wendell,  Har- 
vard, All-America  Back,  1910,  1911,  1912    .        .        .112 

How  TO  Play  Halfback.  By  James  Thorpe,  Carlisle 
Indian  School,  All-America  HaKback;  Winner  at 
Olympic  Games,  1912 120 

Kicking.  By  Edward  W.  Mahan,  Harvard,  All- 
America  Halfback,  1913         134 

Following  the  Ball.  By  Sanford  B.  White,  Prince- 
ton, All-America  End,  1911 141 

TRACK  ATHLETICS 

Track  Athletics.     By  Paul  Withington        .       .       .     153 

How  TO  Become  a  Sprinter.  By  Michael  C.  Murphy, 
Trainer  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  and  of 
the  American  01;yTnpic  Teams  of  1908,  1912        .        .      155 

How  TO  Run  the  Hundred,  and  Two  Hundred- 
Twenty  Yard  Dashes.  By  Ralph  C.  Craig,  Uni- 
versity of  Michigan,  Winner  of  the  220-yard  dash, 
I.  C.  A.  A.  A.  Meet,  1910;  the  100,  and  220-yard 
dashes,  1911,  and  of  the  100,  and  200-meter  runs  at 
the  OljTnpic  Games,  1912;  Joint  Holder  of  the  World's 
220-yard  Record 166 

How  TO  Train  for  the  Distance  Run.  By  Keene 
Fitzpatrick,  Trainer  at  Princeton,  formerly  Trainer 
at  University  of  Michigan 177 


CONTENTS  xiii 

PAQB 

The  Science  of  Huhdling.  By  Earl  J.  Thomson, 
Holder  of  the  following  World's  Record:  70-yds. 
Low  Hurdles,  8)4  sees.;  120yds.  High  Hurdles  (on 
cinders),  14^5  sees.;  120-yds.  High  Hurdles  (on  grass), 
14^  sees.;  110-meters  High  Hurdles,  14^  sees.; 
Olympic  Record  High  Hurdles,  14^  sees 189 

PIELD  ATHLETICS 

How  TO  Throw  the  Weights.  By  Joseph  Homer,  Jr., 
Michigan.  Winner  of  the  Shot-Put,  I.  C.  A.  A.  A. 
Meet,  1911,  and  one  of  America's  Best  All-round 
Athletes 199 

The  Running  Broad- Jump,  the  High-Jump,  and 
the  Pole-Vault.  By  Jay  B.  Camp,  Harvard, 
Winner  of  First  Place  in  the  High  Jump,  I.  C.  A.  A.  A. 
Meet,  1913,  and  Second  Place  in  the  Pole-Vault        .     217 

The  High  Jump.  By  Leroy  T.  Brown,  Dartmouth, 
Holder  of  the  following  records:  Indoor  High  Jump, 
C  4K",  Intercollegiate  High  Jump,  May  1922, 6' 4^" 
National  A.  A.  U.  Champion 235 

THE  OLYMPIC  GAMES  OF   1920 
The  Olympic  of  1920.     By  Earl  J.  Thomson       .       .     243 

BASEBALL 

Science  vs.  Skill  in  Baseball.  By  Irving  E.  San- 
born, Dartmouth,  1889;  Baseball  Editor,  Chicago 
Tribune;  Member  Chalmers  Trophy  Commission 
to  select  each  Season  the  Player  in  each  Major 
League  who  has  been  of  Greatest  Service  to  his 
Team 253 

The  Importance  of  Batting.     By  Irving  E.  Sanborn     264 

Amateur  vs.  Professional.    By  Irving  E.  Sanborn     ,     278 

The  Inside  Game  as  Played  by  Catcher  and 
Pitcher.     By  Irving  E.  Sanborn 292 


xiv  CONTENTS 

PAGB 

How  Inside  Baseball  Has  Decreased  the  Bat- 
TixG  BY  Perfecting  Defensive  Fielding.  By 
Iriing  E.  Satibom 303 

Scoring  the  Game.     By  Irving  E.  Sanborn   .        .        .     314 

ROWING 

Rowing.     By  Paul  WUhington 333 

How  TO  Tr.\in  a  Crew.  By  Gen.  W.  A.  Bancroft, 
Harvard,  1878,  Captain  and  Coach  of  many  suc- 
cessful Harvard  Eights 348 

HOCKEY 

Hockey.  By  Fred  D.  Huntington,  Harvard,  Captain 
of  the  Harvard  Hockey  Team,  1912;  Member  of 
the  B.  A.  A.  Hockey  Team,  1912,  1913,  1914      .        .     363 

Hockey.  By  George  Owen,  Jr.,  Captain  of  Harvard 
Hockey  Teams  1922,  1923;  Member  Harvard  Football 
Eleven  1920-22;  Member  Harvard  Baseball  Team 
1921-22;  Captain,  1923 375 

LAWN  TENNIS 

A  Sermon  on  Lawn  Tennis.  By  James  Dmight,  The 
Father  of  American  Lawn  Tennis  ....      389 

Lawn  Tennis.  By  Richard  Norris  Williams,  2d,  Har- 
vard, Intercollegiate  Champion,  1913;  Member  of 
the  American  Davis  Cup  Team,  1913,  1921,  1922         .      398 

SWIMMING 

Swimming.     By  Paul  Withington 415 

The  Art  of  Swimming.    By  Harry  Rose        .       .       .     420 

The  Development  of  Intercollegiate  Swimming. 
By  C.  Dudley  Pratt,  Captain  Yale  University  Swim- 
ming Team,  1922;  Member  Yale  Relay  Teams  which 
hold  records  for  160,  200,  250,  300,  400,  500,  and  600 
yards,  one  mile,  and  800  feet  430 


CONTENTS  XV 

PAGK 

INTERCOLLEGIATE  SOCCER 

Intercollegiate  Soccer.  By  //.  G.  Francke,  Captain 
of  the  Harvard  1914  Association  Football  Team        .     441 

WRESTLING 
Wrestling,     By  Paul  Withington 455 

BOXING 

Boxing.  By  Larry  J.  Conley,  Instructor  in  Boxing, 
Harvard  University 465 

LACROSSE 

Lacrosse.  By  Paul  Gustafson,  Captain  of  the  Har- 
vard Lacrosse  Team  of  1912,  Intercollegiate  Cham- 
pions of  America;  Coach  of  the  Harvard  Team, 
1913 475 

BASKETBALL 

How  to  Play  Basketball.  By  Fred  A.  Kohler, 
Captain  of  the  Princeton  Basketball  Team,  1912       .     493 

Basketball:  The  Offense.  By  James  A.  Reilly, 
Captain  of  the  Yale  Basketball  Team,  1913        .        .     504 

GOLF 

The  Game  of  Golf.  By  Francis  Ouimet.  Champion- 
ships: Massachusetts  Interscholastic,  1909;  Massa- 
chusetts Amateur,  1913;  United  States  Open,  1913; 
United  States  Amateur,  1914;  Amateur  of  France, 
1914;  Massachusetts  Amateur,  1914;  Massachusetts 
Amateur,  1915;  Western  Amateur,  1917;  North  and 
South  Amateur,  1920;  Massachusetts  Amateur,  1920.     517 


THE 

BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

INTRODUCTION 
THE   ESSENTIALS   OF   AN   ATHLETE 

The  great  majority  of  our  boys  would  like  to 
be  athletes.  There  is  nothing  wrong  or  abnor- 
mal in  this  desire,  and  the  only  thing  to  be  re- 
gretted is  that  all  do  not  follow  up  their  wish 
and  actually  become  athletes.  There  are  few 
boys,  indeed,  who  have  not  the  ability,  the 
strength,  and  the  time  necessary  to  make  them 
proficient  in  some  branch  of  athletics.  The 
essentials  of  a  good  athlete  are  few  and  simple. 

First,  what  are  the  physical  requirements 
of  an  athlete?  A  great  many  boys  would 
like  to  be  athletes,  but  say  to  themselves,  *'  We 
are  too  small  —  we  are  too  light,  we  would  have 
little  chance  against  men  so  much  stronger  — 
others  will  laugh  at  our  attempt."  They 
are  wrong.  A  few  years  ago  Mr.  Wm.  F.  Gar- 
celon,  then  Graduate  Treasurer  of  the  Harvard 
Athletic  Association,  formed  what  he  called  **  a 
class  for  non-athletic  freshmen."  To  begin 
with,  he  chose  seven  boys  in  the  freshman  class, 

3 


4  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

whose  records  in  studies  were  above  the  aver- 
age, but  who  had  never  entered  into  any  ath- 
letic games  and  who  were  consequently  un- 
developed physically.  Three  times  a  week 
throughout  the  winter  and  early  spring  he 
went  with  these  boys  to  the  gymnasium.  He 
saw  that  they  learned  to  run,  to  jump,  to  vault, 
to  tumble,  and  to  hurdle.  They  were  given  a 
few  lessons  in  boxing,  a  few  in  fencing  and  in 
one  or  two  other  forms  of  sport.  None  of  these 
boys  had  ever  attempted  any  of  these  things 
before,  but  every  one  of  them  took  to  it  like 
ducks  to  the  water.  They  enjoyed  it  and  sur- 
prised themselves  when  they  found  that  they 
possessed  ability  in  things  which  they  had  sup- 
posed beyond  their  possibilities.  One  member 
of  the  class  became  so  proficient  in  jumping 
that  he  won  his  numerals  in  an  inter-freshman 
meet.  One  later  became  a  member  of  the  'var- 
sity track  team  and  was  entered  in  all  its  games. 
Since  its  origin  this  class  has  gro^\Ti  in  size 
and  in  compass,  and  each  year  has  thirty  or 
forty  members.  Its  object  remains  the  same  — 
to  interest  the  boy  who  has  always  considered 
himself  non-athletic,  in  athletics  as  a  source  of 
pleasure  and  education.  Hardly  a  year  passes 
but  one  or  two  of  these  boys  become  leading 
candidates  for  some  one  of  the  many  Harvard 
teams.  I  have  followed  this  class  each  year, 
and  I  can  think  of  no  boy  that  worked  conscien- 
tiously, who,  at  the  end  of  the  given  time,  was 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

Paul  Witiiington Frontispiece 

FACING   PAOB 

The  FoKWAiiD  Pass 28 

A   well-planned   Forward   Pass    in   the   Harvard- 
Yale  Game,  1913. 
Hardwick  running  for  a  Touchdown  after  receiv- 
ing   a    Forward    Pass    in    the    Harvard-Brown 
Game,  1913. 

Fish  of  Harvard  about  to  receive  a  Forward  Pass 

in  the  Harvard- Yale  Game,  1908. 
Potter  of  Harvard  tlirowing  the  Ball  to  Felton  in 

the  Harvard-Brown  Game,  1911. 

Quarter-Back  Play,  and  Tackling 56 

Handling  the  Ball  in  the  Back-Field. 
Harvard  Football  Men  practising  Tackling  on  the 
Dummies  at  Soldiers'  Field,  Cambridge. 

Punting 74 

A  Savage  Attack  on  the  Kicker. 

Flynn  of  Yale  Punting  in  the  Harvard- Yale  Game, 

1913. 
Guernsey  of  Yale  Punting  in  the  Harvard- Yale 

Game,  1913. 
Shepard  of  Maine  getting  away  a  60- Yard  Punt 

in  the  Harvard-Maine  Game,  1912. 

The  Value  of  Interference 92 

Mahan  of  Harvard  making  a  long  End  Run  in 

the  Harvard-Holy  Cross  Game,  1913. 
Thorpe  of  Carlisle  starting  on  a  long  End  Rim 

in  the  Harvard-Carlisle  Game,  1911. 
Hardwick  of  Harvard   making  a  successful  End 

Run  in  the  Harvard-Yale  Game,  1913. 


xviii      LIST   OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

Pacing  page 

The  Drop-Kick 108 

Brickley  kicking  One  of  liis  Five  successful  Field- 
Goals  in  the  Harvard- Yale  Game,  1913. 
Guernsej'    scoring    for    Yale    by    a    Drop-Kick. 

Harvard- Yale  Game,  1913. 
The  Fake  Kick.     One  Method  of  Protecting  the 
Kicker.     Harvard- Yale  Game,  1913. 

Play  OF  THE  Backs 112 

Captain  Wendell  of  Harvard  making  a  good  Gain 

in  the  Harvard-Dartmouth  Game,  1912. 
Wilson  of  Yale  running  back  a  Kick  for  35  Yards  in 
the  Harvard-Yale  Game,  1913. 

E.  W.  Mahan  of  Harvard  Punting       .      .      .      .      .     134 

The  Sprints 166 

Ralph  Craig  winning  the  100- Yards  in  Record  Time 
of  9  4-5  Seconds.  Intercollegiate  Games  of 
1911. 

LeConey     winning     100- Yards     in     9.7     Seconds. 

Intercollegiates,  May,  1922. 
Patterson  of  Penn.  winning  the  100- Yards  in  9  4-5 

Seconds.     Intercollegiates,  1913. 

The  Middle-Distance  Runs 184 

Young  of  Amherst  winning  the  Quarter  in  48  4-5 

Seconds.     Intercollegiates,  1911. 
Caldwell  of  Cornell  winning  Half-Mile  Run  in  One 

Minute,  53  2-5  Seconds,  and  Breaking  Record. 

Intercollegiates,  1914. 

The  Distance  Runs 186 

John  Paul  Jones  of  Cornell  making  a  New  World's 

One-Mile  Record  of  4  Minutes,  14  2-5  Seconds. 

Intercollegiates,  1913. 
Higgins,  Columbia,  winning  by  inches  from  Buker 

of     Bates    in     Intercollegiate     Two-mile     Run, 

Harvard  Stadium,  May,  1 922. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS         xix 

FACING   PAGE 

Earl  J.  Thomson  in  Action 190 

Eaul  J.  Thomson.      Showing    Front    Knee    Lift 

AND  Arm  Action 192 

Earl  J.  Thomson.     Showing  Landing  Position. 

The  Shot-Put  and  Hammer-Throw 202 

Joseph   Horner  finishing  liis   Winning  Put  of  46 

Feet,  7  1-8  Inches.     Intercollegiates,  1911. 
L.    A.    Whitney    of    Dartmouth,    Intercollegiate 

Champion  in  1913. 
WilHam  E.  Quinn  at  the  Beginning  of  a  Tlirow. 

The  Broad  Jump 214 

Gourtlin  making  World's  Record  Broad  Jump,  at 

Harvard  Stadium,  August,  1921. 

Mercer  of    Penn.,     Intercollegiate  Champion    iu 

1912  and  1913. 
Piatt  Adams  of  the  New  York  Athletic  Club. 
Throwing  Every  Muscle  into  a  Final  Effort  to 

gain  Distance  before  landing. 

The  Pole- Vault 222 

J.  B.  Camp  of  Harvard. 

Wagoner  of  Yale,  former  Intercollegiate  Record- 

Holder,  poising  his  Pole  before  starting  his  Run. 
J.  B,  Camp  clearing  12  feet  at  the  Olympic  Try- 

Outs,  June,  1912,  for  Third  Place. 
Wagoner  over  12  I'eet,  6  Inches. 

The  High  Jump 236 

The  late  William  E.  Quinn,  Field  Coach  of  Har- 
vard, clearing  Six  Feet  in  Perfect  Style. 
Leroy  T.  Brown  making  Intercollegiate  High  Jump 
Record,  May,  1922. 

Practice  on  the  Machine 336 

The  Catch.     In  the  Middle  of  the  Pull. 
The  Finish.     The  Recover. 


XX         LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

FACING  PAGE 

Some  Eight-Oared  Crews 358 

The  Harvard  Eight  of  1911  just  before  the  Catch. 
The  Cornell  Crew  of  191-2  at  Full  Reach. 
Harvard's  1912  Crew  at  New  Loudon. 
Union  Boat  Club  of  Boston,   winning  from   the 
German  Crew  at  the  English  Henley. 

Harvard  Hockey  Team,  Intercollegiate  Champions, 

1922 376 

Soccer 446 

A  Battle  for  the  Ball  in  a  Harvard-Yale  Soccer 

Game. 
Legal  Body-Checking.         Heading  the  Ball. 

Wrestling  I 456 

The  Referee's  Hold. 

First  Standing   Hold.         Second  Standing  Hold. 

Wrestling  11 458 

Third  Standing  Hold. 

The  Full-Nelson.        The  Half -Nelson. 

Wrestling  HI 460 

The  Body  Scissors  combined  with  a  Half-Nelson. 
Head  Scissors  and  Arm  Hold. 
Finishing  the  Arm  Lock  and  Roll. 
Pinning  Opponent  to  the  Mat. 

Boxing 466 

I.     Straight  Left  to  Head. 
n.     Straight  Left  to  Body. 

Boxing 467 

ni.     Straight  Right  to  Head. 
IV.     Straight  Right  to  Body. 

Boxing 468 

XV.     Left  Hook  to  Head. 
VI.     Left  Hook  to  Body. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS       xxi 

rACIN*  FAQS 

Boxing 469 

VII.    Right  Hook  to  Head. 

VIII.  RightHook  to  Body. 

Boxing 470 

IX.  Left  Upper  Cut  to  Head. 
X.     Right  Upper  Cut  to  Head. 

Boxing 471 

XI.     Left  Cross-Counter  to  Head. 
Xn.     Right  Cross-Counter  to  Head. 

Lacbossk  I 482 

Scrimmage  in  Front  of  Goal.  The  Face-Off. 

Goal.         Body-Check. 

Lacrosse  II 490 

A  Shot  at  Goal.        Dodge. 

Another  Dodge.        Fast  Playing  on  Attack. 


THE 

BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS 

INTRODUCTION 
THE   ESSENTIALS   OF   AN   ATHLETE 


INTRODUCTION  7 

perseverance.  Level-headedness  is  often  gained 
by  continual  practice.  These  all  are  essentials, 
but  they  are  all  secondary  to  perseverance,  and 
this  great  truth  every  athlete  should  bear  in 
mind. 

Lastly,  what  are  the  essentials  morally? 
They  may  be  summed  up  in  the  few  words : 
the  spirit  of  fair  play.  Every  true  athlete 
wishes  nothing  but  what  he  gains  fairly  and 
squarely.  "  It  is  better  to  play  fair  and  lose 
than  to  win  by  foul  means,"  is  told  to  boys  so 
often  that  they  sometimes  feel  it  is  an  idealistic 
statement  which  means  but  little ;  but  not  until 
an  athlete  has  made  this  his  motto  and  acts 
according  to  it  does  he  really  come  to  know  the 
fun  of  competition  and  the  true  pleasure  of 
athletic  games. 

So  if  we  sum  up  our  essentials  we  find  that 
few  boys  indeed  are  so  built  that  they  do  not 
possess  them  all.  God  has  given  most  of  us 
bodies  sufficiently  strong,  perseverance  suffi- 
ciently lasting,  and  the  spirit  of  fair  play.  If 
we  develop  all  of  these  and  abuse  none,  there  is 
little  reason  why  most  of  us  should  not  be 
athletes. 


COMPETITIVE  ATHLETICS:  THEIR 
PLACE  IN  SCHOOL  AND  COLLEGE 
SPORTS,  AND  A  WORD  ABOUT 
TRAINING  FOR  ATHLETIC  EVENTS 

We  live  in  an  age  of  competition.  Wherever 
the  youth  of  America  gathers,  and  wherever 
the  formation  of  a  team  is  possible,  we  find 
competitive  games  going  on.  Schools  and  col- 
leges are  often  judged  in  the  public  eye  more 
by  the  success  of  their  athletic  teams  than  by 
their  attainments  in  the  fields  of  education. 
Athletic  clubs  flourish  all  over  the  country,  and 
in  all  cases  they  flourish  in  almost  direct  rela- 
tion to  their  achievement  in  competitive  games. 
This  condition  is  in  many  respects  compara- 
tively recent,  and  like  all  rapidly  gi'owing  in- 
stitutions, it  has  its  good  points  and  its  bad. 
Few  will  deny  that  the  intense  interest  in  ath- 
letic contests  is  a  factor  in  bringing  about 
democracy  and  in  breaking  down  provincial 
barriers.  Another  desirable  condition  which 
competition  in  athletics  enhances  is  the  increas- 
ing number  of  young  men  who  are  gaining  the 
value  of  physical  exercise.  But  I  am  not  here 
going  to  discuss  the  merits  of  competitive  ath- 
letics, but  shall  rather  point  out  certain  dangers 

8 


COMPETITIVE   ATHLETICS  9 

wliicli  lie  ill  an  over-abundance  of  competition 
for  the  growing  boy. 

Wherever  we  see  boys  at  play,  we  are  always 
amazed  at  the  tremendous  amount  of  muscular 
exertion  which  they  can  endure  without  becom- 
ing fatigued  and  without  serious  after-effects. 
His  ability  to  stand  tremendous  exertion  and 
recuperate  from  it  rapidly  is  at  the  same  time 
the  boy's  greatest  safeguard  and  his  worst 
enemy  in  competition.  In  childhood,  children 
are  incessantly  on  the  go,  but  wliile  their  little 
bodies  become  tired,  their  minds  are  laboring 
with  none  of  the  cares  of  their  older  brethren. 
As  the  boy  grows  up  and  goes  into  preparatory 
school,  he  becomes  wrapped  up  in  his  athletics. 
All  about  him  is  evident  the  glory  of  athletics, 
and  he  wishes  to  have  his  share  in  their  honors. 
He  goes  out  for  his  school  team.  In  the  major- 
ity of  cases  the  actual  physical  work  which  he 
undertakes  is  probably  no  greater  than  that  to 
which  he  is  accustomed.  There  has,  however, 
been  added  to  his  play  a  serious  note,  the  men- 
tal strain  which  comes  with  the  necessity  of 
doing  his  level  best  whenever  he  is  called  upon. 
His  exercise  is  no  longer  the  result  of  im- 
pulse alone,  but  it  is  a  part  of  a  well-formed 
plan.  From  the  educational  point  of  view  this  ^^ 
may  be  a  gain ;  from  the  physical  point  of  view, 
unless  carefully  guided,  it  becomes  a  danger. 

When  a  boy  is  running  and  playing  for  fun, 
although  he  may  be  trying  his  best,  he  will 


10  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

never  drive  himself  beyond  the  breaking  point. 
The  same  boy  placed  on  the  running  track  with 
a  month's  training  behind  him,  with  his  school- 
-mates urging  him  on,  will  fight  until  he  can 

7  do  no  more  and  will  punish  himself  to  the  last 
notch  of  his  endurance.  In  this  case,  the  harm 
is  done,  not  by  the  running,  nor  by  the  exercise, 
nor  by  the  muscular  strain,  but  by  the  addition 
of  mental  anxiety  to  the  physical  strain.  A 
wise  old  Boston  doctor  once  said  that  no  man 
could  work  his  brain  and  his  muscles  at  top 
speed  at  the  same  time  without  breaking  down, 
whereas  any  man  could  work  either  his  brain 
or  his  muscles  at  top  speed  and  thrive.  And 
yet  this  is  what  our  school-boy'  athlete,  who  is 
going  through  a  series  of  strenuous  competi- 
tions, is  actually  trying  to  do.  He  throws  into 
his  competition  not  only  his  arms  and  his  legs, 
but  his  mind,  working  at  its  top  rate  of  speed. 
He  has  not  learned  that  his  spirit  is  developed 
far  beyond  his  physical  strength. 

This  does  not  hold  true  in  all  cases.  There 
are  many  boys  who,  when  they  enter  school, 
have  passed  that  developmental  stage,  or  that 
line  which  divides  the  boy  from  the  man,  and 
are  less  liable  to  suffer  harm.  But  to  the  boy 
who  is  still  growing  fast  and  who  is  working 
hard  on  his  studies,  I  would  advise  a  minimum 

^of  competition,  although  the  amount  of  phys- 
ical exercise  may  be  considerable.  In  the  long 
run,  such  a  course  will  not  prove  unsatisfac- 


COMPETITIVE    ATHLETICS  11 

tory.  I  think  it  can  be  stated  as  a  fact  that  the 
majority  of  great  college  athletes  either  played 
no  part  at  all  or  a  minor  part  in  their  school 
contests.  They  were  either  too  small  for  the 
team,  or  had  not  gained  their  strength  and 
poise.  This  is  probably  more  true  in  such 
branches  of  athletics  as  track  and  rowing, 
where  greater  endurance  is  required  in  every 
race,  than  it  is  in  games  such  as  baseball,  ten- 
nis and  football,  where  lack  of  these  qualities 
may  be  made  up  for  by  particular  skill.  In 
many  cases  the  great  school  athlete  finds  him- 
self passed  in  college  by  boys  who  were  unde- 
veloped in  school. 

Although  competitive  athletics  is  a  danger- 
ous field  for  the  unguided  boy  to  tread,  never- 
theless there  is  so  much  to  be  learned  from  its 
struggles  that  it  has  become  regarded  as  an 
essential  part  of  school  and  college  life.  In 
order  to  make  this  part  as  sane  as  possible,  in 
order  to  guard  against  its  dangers,  there  fol- 
lows a  discussion  of  that  problem  known  as 
training.  There  is  probably  no  factor  in  con- 
nection with  athletic  events  which  has  been  so 
wrongly  interpreted  as  that  of  training.  It  is 
an  essential  part  of  well-conducted  athletics, 
but  sometimes  much  exaggerated  and  grossly 
abused.  To  the  uninitiated,  training,  especially 
at  one  of  our  big  universities,  means  trainers, 
masseurs,  and  training-tables,  all  so  arranged 
as  to  put  the  candidate  through  a  period  of 


/ 


12  THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS 

severe,  gruelling  preparation  for  his  coming 
event.  Unfortunately,  in  many  cases  this  idea 
has  had  more  than  hearsay  for  its  basis.  Many 
weird  practices  have  gone  on  under  the  caption 
of  training.  To  add  to  the  glamor  of  training, 
the  professional  baseball  teams  of  this  country 
arrange  elaborate  spring  training  trips  lasting 
over  a  period  of  a  month  or  more.  But  when 
one  analyzes  training  and  comes  down  to  hard- 
pan,  it  means  merely  getting  the  body  and  the 
mind,  which  is  fully  as  important  in  all  contests 
as  the  body,  into  the  best  possible  condition  to 
undergo  the  strain  of  competition.  The  best 
way  to  accomplish  this  is  the  simplest  way. 
Training  means  nothing  more  than  leading  a 
healthy,  normal  life.  It  means  plenty  of  sleep, 
plenty  of  good,  common  food,  plenty  of  fresh 
air  and  a  moderate  amount  of  well-directed 
exercise;  it  means  doing  the  daily  work  in  a 
business-like  and  systematic  manner,  so  that 
its  cares  may  not  detract  from  the  strength- 
building  process. 

One  mistake  which  young  athletes  are  most 
likely  to  make  while  training  is  to  overdo  the 
amount  of  hard  exercise.  It  takes  very  little 
extra  work  to  get  a  young,  active  boy  into  good 
physical  shape,  and  it  is  a  wise  trainer  or  coach 
who  realizes  that  when  his  charges  are  in  con- 
dition, very  little  work  is  required  to  keep  them 
there,  whereas  a  great  amount  is  sure  to  send 
them  to  the  line  stale.     In  the  beginning,  the 


COMPETITIVE    ATHLETICS  13 

work  should  always  be  light  until  the  muscles, 
the  heart,  and  the  lungs  become  accustomed  to 
the  new  conditions.  The  increase  should  be 
gradual.  If  trying  for  speed,  that  is,  running, 
rowing,  swimming,  a  boy  should  not  attempt 
races  or  time  trials  over  the  full  distance  until 
his  condition  is  good.  The  stop-watch  should 
be  put  away  until  such  time  as  he  is  fit  to  do 
his  best,  and  then  the  watch  should  appear  not 
oftener  than  once  a  week.  If  training  for  a 
team,  the  men  should  not  be  allowed  to  lose 
their  edge  from  overwork.  An  hour  a  day  of 
fairly  active  work  of  any  sort  is  ordinarily 
enough,  and  never  should  the  day's  work  be  so 
long  as  to  leave  the  athlete  exhausted. 

Then  as  to  sleep.  Nothing  is  so  important 
as  plenty  of  sleep  taken  at  regular  hours.  En- 
durance is  directly  dependent  upon  sleep.  No 
boy  in  training  ought  to  do  with  less  than  nine 
hours  of  sleep;  a  great  many  need  a  full  ten. 
As  men  grow  older,  they  can  do  with  less,  but 
even  old-stagers  plan  for  a  good  night's  sleep 
before  their  important  contests,  and  the  best 
athletes  always  make  early  bed  hours  their  rule. 
Ten  o'clock  is  the  usual  bed  hour  for  college 
teams,  nine-thirty  before  important  events. 
Sleep  more  than  anything  else  restores  the 
muscles  to  their  normal  condition,  and  after 
exercise,  it  provides  the  best  means  for  remov- 
ing the  waste  material  and  storing  up  of  new 
fuel  in  the  body  tissues.    So  we  make  the  rule 


14  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

that  plenty  of  sleep  is  essential  to  training  in 
athletics. 

Always  a  much-discussed  question  is  that  of 
the  diet  during  the  training  period.  The  train- 
ing-table in  the  past  has  been  much  abused.  It 
is  now  looked  upon  not  as  an  essential  part  of 
athletics,  but  as  a  pleasant  means  whereby  the 
men  on  a  team  are  brought  together  on  intimate 
terms,  where  they  grow  to  know  one  another, 
and  where  they  can  obtain  good,  plain  food. 
Only  a  few  years  ago  the  idea  was  prevalent 
that  a  great  many  foods  had  no  place  on  the 
training-table.  Sugar  was  ruled  off.  To-day 
we  know  that  there  are  few  dishes  indeed  which 
one  finds  on  a  home  table  that  cannot  be  eaten 
at  the  training-table.  We  no  longer  abide  by 
the  idea  which  grew  up  from  the  days  of  Eng- 
lish prize-fighters,  that  an  athlete  must  live  on 
raw  beef  and  ale,  and  although  our  training- 
tables  are  the  direct  result  of  the  training  of 
these  same  prize-fighters,  we  realize  that  the 
same  methods  are  not  necessary  in  training 
school  boys  and  college  men  that  were  employed 
to  sober  down  the  idol  of  the  ale-house.  It  is 
always  dangerous  to  name  a  diet  because  indi- 
vidual idiosyncrasies  must  be  considered,  and 
such  lists  are  too  often  taken  literally.  How- 
ever, it  is  safe  to  say  that  in  moderation,  all  the 
common  fruits  and  vegetables,  the  ordinary 
meats,  the  common  cereals  and  simple  pud- 
dings may  play  a  part  in  the  training-table  diet. 


COMPETITIVE   ATHLETICS  15 

So  if  a  list  is  to  be  given,  it  should  be  some 
such  as  the  following:  All  sorts  of  plain  soups, 
meats,  fish,  game,  cereals,  milk,  butter  and 
eggs;  all  the  green  vegetables  and  fruits,  sim- 
ple puddings,  stewed  fruits  and  ice-cream. 
Fried  foods  and  pastry  should  be  eaten  only  in 
small  amounts,  and  only  when  most  carefully 
prepared.  They  are  harder  to  digest  and  some- 
times cause  upsets.  The  food  should  be  care- 
fully cooked,  plentiful  and  of  sufficient  variety, 
so  as  not  to  become  monotonous.  Cream,  but- 
ter and  sugar  are  all  desirable  when  used  with 
discretion.  It  is  very  important  that  the  hours 
for  eating  should  be  regular.  In  fact,  during 
training  regularity  is  one  of  the  most  essential 
factors  —  regularity  in  sleeping,  eating  and 
working. 

More  important  than  the  every-day  diet  list 
is  the  choice  of  menu  for  the  day  of  the  contest. 
The  meal  previous  to  the  contest  should  be 
eaten  two  or  two  and  a  half  hours  before  the 
event  is  to  take  place,  so  that  there  will  be  time 
for  the  food  to  get  out  of  the  stomach.  It 
should  be  plain,  but  substantial.  A  good  lunch 
is  made  up  of  chops,  steak  or  broiled  chicken, 
boiled  rice,  toast  and  butter.  It  is  just  as  well 
not  to  include  soups,  desserts  and  milk  before 
a  contest. 

Cleanliness  is  all-important.  Athletes  are 
often  upset  by  boils  and  other  skin  diseases, 
because  they  take  no  care  to  be  clean.    Bathing 


16         THE    BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

too  little  and  wearing  dirty  clothes  while  ex- 
ercising are  causes  for  skin  troubles.  It  is 
often  a  source  of  false  pride  among  athletes 
never  to  allow  their  athletic  clothes  to  be 
washed.  There  is  no  excuse  for  this,  and  many 
an  athlete  has  been  upset  by  the  resulting  at- 
tack of  boils,  through  which  not  only  does  he 
endanger  himself,  but  may  infect  his  team- 
mate by  his  carelessness.  At  Harvard  this  sort 
of  infection  has  been  greatly  minimized  among 
the  athletes  by  seeing  that  their  shirts, 
''  jocks,"  stockings,  and  other  underclothing 
are  washed  at  frequent  intervals.  Besides  this, 
it  is  important  that  the  clothes  should  be  thor- 
oughly aired  daily. 

The  rules  for  training  we  find  sane  and 
simple.  Regular  hours  of  work  and  sleep, 
good,  plain  food,  a  minimum  of  excitement  and 
unusual  strain,  a  moderate  amount  of  well- 
directed  exercise.  In  short,  we  make  our  train- 
ing period  constructive  rather  than  destructive. 
The  body  should  gain  in  weight  and  strength 
each  day.  We  prohibit  the  use  of  tobacco  and 
alcohol  because  they  detract  from  rather  than 
add  to  our  bodily  condition.  The  same  is  true 
of  other  stimulants. 

/  In  conclusion,  no  growing  boy  should  attempt 
^an  excessive  amount  of  athletic  competition. 
The  boy  who  attempts  competition  at  all  should 
do  so  under  the  supervision  of  either  a  compe- 
tent trainer  or  a  trained  physician.    His  plan 


COMPETITIVE   ATHLETICS  17 

of  work  should  be  carefully  mapped  out  so  as 
to  provide  against  overdoing.  With  such  re- 
strictions as  we  have  laid  down,  harmful  results 
from  athletic  sports  will  be  brought  to  a  mini- 
mum. 


FOOTBALL 


FOOTBALL:  TEAM -PLAY;  TYPES  OF 
PLAYERS,  AND  RULES 

Among  the  Englisli-speakiiie:  people,  football 
in  its  various  forms  is  probably  the  most  popu- 
lar of  all  games.  In  Great  Britain  professional 
soccer  attracts  the  widest  attention,  while  rngby 
is  played  in  schools  and  colleges.  In  Australia 
and  New  Zealand  rngby  is  extremely  popular 
both  as  an  amateur  and  professional  sport.  In 
Canada  the  modified  game  of  rugby  has  an  es- 
tablished place  in  school  and  college  seasons, 
and  in  America  no  game  holds  such  undivided 
attention  among  the  student  body  at  large  as 
does  our  intercollegiate  football,  while  soccer 
and  rugby  have  a  strong  following  in  certain 
localities. 

This  popularity  is  not  without  its  reason.  No 
game  so  well  as  football  combines  speed, 
strength,  endurance,  cleverness,  and  quick 
thinking  with  the  elements  of  personal  contact, 
and  no  game  lays  such  stress  on  the  importance 
of  team-play.  This  is  particularly  true  in  our 
American  game.  During  its  forty-odd  years  of 
development,  there  has  been  an  increasing 
value  placed  on  team-play,  so  that  to-day  no 
other  feature  is  so  essential  to  a  team's  success 

21 


22  THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

as  its  unity  alike  in  attack  and  defense.  There 
are  many  different  schools  of  football  coaching. 
There  are  eleven  different  positions  on  every 
team.  There  are  innumerable  details  for  the 
football  player  to  fathom,  but  in  all  schools  and 
in  each  position  and  in  every  lesson  the  under- 
lying current  is  that  of  team-play.  The  great 
coach  is  not  necessarily  he  who  can  invent  new 
and  startling  plays,  but  rather  he  who  can  teach 
his  team  to  play  as  a  unit.  He  drills  his  line 
to  charge  as  one  man  and  his  backs  to  act  with 
one  another  and  with  the  line.  Can  there  be 
anything  more  thrilling  than  a  long  run  in  a 
championship  game  of  football,  and  is  any  ath- 
letic performer  more  deserving  of  the  credit 
which  falls  upon  him  than  the  runner?  Yet  in 
every  case  this  brilliant  run  belongs  in  equal 
measure  to  the  linemen  who  have  opened  the 
hole  and  to  the  backs  who  have  given  interfer- 
ence or  acted  as  decoys  for  the  runner's  pro- 
tection ;  and  likewise  when  play  after  play  fails 
in  its  attempt,  the  failure  is  not  that  of  the 
individual,  as  a  rule,  but  of  the  machine  of 
which  he  is  a  part. 

If  the  young  reader  will  bear  in  mind  this 
importance  of  team-play,  he  will  gain  much 
more  in  his  study  of  his  individual  position,  for 
in  every  case  the  positions  are  so  closely  woven 
together  that  a  complete  understanding  of  one 
involves  a  knowledge  of  the  other.  A  center 
who  learns  only  his  own  play  and  not  that  of 


FOOTBALL  23 

his  quarter-back  and  his  guard,  will  not  fit  on 
his  team.  The  guard  who  is  ignorant  of  his 
tackle's  every  move  will  find  himself  out  of 
play.  The  tackle  and  the  end  must  continually 
call  upon  one  another  for  assistance.  If  the 
bond  between  the  two  is  not  complete,  the  oppo- 
nents will  find  the  weakness.  The  backs  must 
play  in  unison  with  one  another,  and  with  the 
line,  or  their  efforts  are  futile ;  and  the  quarter 
must  reflect  the  whole  team  as  he  performs  his 
work.  It  is  only  when  team-work  is  perfected 
and  such  unity  is  established  that  a  team  accom- 
plishes its  goal  and  surmounts  by  cooperation 
difficulties  which  to  the  individual  would  be  im- 
possible. 

If,  then,  football  is  so  dependent  upon  team- 
play,  why  is  it  that  the  types  of  players  vary 
so?  There  are  several  reasons.  First  of  all, 
the  eleven  positions  offer  opportunities  fpr 
many  styles  of  play.  However,  far  greater 
than  this  is  the  fact  that  football  is  unlimited 
in  its  adaptability  to  the  individual.  Occasion- 
ally one  finds  a  school  of  football  in  which 
making  a  certain  type  of  player  is  an  important 
part,  but  in  the  so-called  new  game,  we  find  the 
leading  coaches  more  and  more  adapting  their 
style  of  play  to  the  men  with  whom  they  are 
dealing.  It  often  happens  on  a  big  university 
field  that  the  plans  of  the  entire  season  are 
gradually  changed  with  the  development  of  the 
material  at  hand.    Instead  of  a  running  game, 


24  THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

a  kicking  game  will  be  developed,  or  the  passing 
game  may  become  the  most  effective  attack,  and 
vice  versa.  As  a  result,  we  see  in  the  papers 
that  this  or  that  coach  has  become  a  strong  ex- 
ponent of  the  kicking  game  and  has  discarded 
the  running  game,  or  that  that  coach  has 
adopted  the  intricate  passing  game  and  is,  as 
a  result,  progressive  in  his  style  of  play.  On 
close  analysis  we  find  that  in  the  majority  of 
instances,  this  change  of  policy  is  dependent  on 
the  ability  of  the  men  who  are  candidates  for 
the  team.  A  man  who  possesses  an  extraordi- 
nary kicking  ability  may  be  the  cause  for  re- 
shaping his  team 's  attack ;  another  set  of  men 
because  of  their  strength  in  the  line  may  lead 
to  the  adoption  of  the  rushing  game;  a  third 
group  of  men  may  possess  peculiar  ability  in 
handling  the  forward  pass  with  an  equally  stri- 
king result.  So  we  find  all  types  of  men  on  the 
football  field  —  short  men  and  tall  men ;  hea\'y 
men  and  light  men  —  and  each  may  be  a  star 
in  his  particular  way.  This  very  fact  gives  to 
the  boy  who  is  ambitious  to  become  a  football 
player  his  greatest  encouragement.  If  he  is 
a  keen  observer,  he  realizes  that  though  his 
physical  endowment  may  be  less  than  his 
brother's  he  may  make  up  for  it  by  his  skillful- 
ness  or  cunning,  for  although  the  game  of  foot- 
ball is  one  in  which  strength  and  endurance  are 
important,  they  are  not  the  only  attributes  nec- 
essary for  good  playing. 


FOOTBALL  25 

The  rules  of  the  American  game  have  under- 
gone many  changes  since  tlieir  first  codification. 
This  is  particularly  true  of  the  last  decade. 
The  result  has  been  that  players  and  spectators 
alike  have  been  somewhat  confused  in  their  in- 
terpretation of  the  rules.  There  are  certain 
fundamental  principles,  however,  which  always 
have  been  a  part  of  the  American  game  of  foot- 
ball, and  with  these  principles  every  player 
should  familiarize  himself.  Failure  to  know 
the  rules  may  cost  the  team  a  victory.  It  be- 
comes the  duty  of  every  player  each  year  to 
familiarize  himself  with  the  rule-book,  and  not 
only  should  he  know  the  rules,  but  let  him  study 
out  the  reasons  which  underlie  them.  In  this 
way  he  will  find  their  interpretation  less  diffi- 
cult and  himself  less  often  in  strange  situations. 
By  studying  the  rules  a  boy  can  do  more  to 
make- himself  valuable  as  a  football  player  than 
in  any  other  single  way,  for  he  then  will  be  less 
liable  by  breaking  a  rule  to  cause  his  team  the 
loss  of  yards  gained  by  hard  work.  In  spite  of 
the  fact  that  players  and  coaches  alike  realize 
this  fact,  every  year  one  sees  on  college  and 
school  football  fields  violations  of  the  rules 
through  nothing  but  ignorance.  Here  I  shall 
endeavor  only  to  call  attention  to  certain  points 
which  are  often  neglected,  and  whose  neglect 
may  prove  costly : 

Firstly,  the  rule  in  regard  to  on  side  play 
should  be  thoroughly  understood.    The  failure 


26  THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

to  realize  when  the  opponents  are  on-side  and 
may  recover  a  free  ball  has  often  cost  a  touch- 
down. The  rules  in  regard  to  holding  and  use 
of  hands  are  frequently  neglected.  The  defini- 
tion of  the  safety  and  touch-back  have  led  to 
many  a  long  discussion.  A  situation  which 
often  arises  through  ignorance  is  the  failure  of 
players  to  realize  that  the  umpire's  horn  does 
not  declare  the  ball  dead  and  that  this  preroga- 
tive belongs  only  to  the  referee.  These  are  but 
a  few  of  the  rules  more  commonly  neglected. 
It  is  not  the  intention  here  to  go  into  detailed 
discussion  of  rules,  but  merely  to  impress  upon 
the  young  player  the  importance  of  knowing 
them  thoroughly.  As  has  been  said,  no  one 
thing  will  go  so  far  toward  a  player's  success 
as  his  thorough  knowledge  of  the  rules. 


MODERN    FOOTBALL    AND    HOW    TO 
PLAY    IT 

BY    MICHAEL    C.    MUKPHY 

There  is  no  reason  under  the  sun  why  any- 
healthy  boy  should  be  denied  the  right  to  play 
football  under  the  present  rules.  I  have  never 
had  any  sympathy  with  those  parents  who  de- 
cline to  let  their  children  take  part  in  this 
greatest  of  American  college  games,  simply  be- 
cause of  a  fear  that  they  may  be  hurt.  I  have 
always  contended  that  participation  in  the  sort 
of  games  that  require  a  certain  amount  of  the 
strenuous  "  give  and  take  "  spirit  is  good  for 
the  normal  boy  and  makes  better  men,  phys- 
ically, morally,  and  mentally.  A  boy  who  is 
afraid  to  play  football  because  it  may  result 
in  bruises  is  the  sort  of  a  boy  who  always  will 
be  afraid  to  take  his  own  part.  They  are  the 
type  who  come  out  of  college  '*  mollycoddles," 
and  we  have  no  room  for  citizens  of  this  stripe. 

New  Types  of  Player  Demanded 

There  is  no  doubt  whatever  that  the  changes 
in  the  rules  and  the  steady  development  of  the 

27 


28  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

game  itself  have  made  it  imperative  that  we 
have  a  somewhat  different  type  of  player  to- 
day from  what  we  had  ten  years  ago.  The 
abolition  of  the  mass  formations  has  taken 
away  the  preminm  on  beef  and  placed  it  on 
brains  and  speed.  Of  course,  weight  and 
strength  are  very  essential  to  a  good  football 
player,  but  they  are  totally  useless  unless  they 
are  reinforced  with  speed  and  the  ability  to 
think  quickly. 

The  forward  pass  emphasizes  the  need  of  a 
man  who  has  speed  and  strength.  When  this 
play  was  first  introduced  the  majority  of 
coaches  had  a  sort  of  good-natured  contempt 
for  it.  They  seemed  to  regard  it  as  unsafe  and 
of  little  value  in  advancing  the  ball.  Conse- 
quently it  was  used  in  only  one  simple  forma- 
tion and  not  enough  attention  was  paid  to  the 
development  of  that. 

But  within  the  last  few  years  a  wonderful 
transformation  has  taken  place  in  the  play.  At 
last  its  offensive  value  is  beginning  to  be  under- 
stood and  many  new  and  startling  formations 
are  sure  to  be  developed  from  it.  The  success- 
ful manipulation  of  this  play  demands  men  who 
are  fast  as  well  as  strong.  The  tendency  of  the 
forward  pass,  I  think,  will  be  to  develop  forma- 
tions in  which  any  one  of  four  players  may  be 
selected  to  do  the  passing.  Further,  I  think 
many  of  these  plays  will  be  executed  while  the 
team  is  on  the  move.    It  will  therefore  be  essen- 


MODERN   FOOTBALL  29 

tial  that  every  player  concerned  be  able  to  pass 
or  catch  the  ball  while  in  motion  and  under  al- 
most any  condition. 

The  new  style  of  play  calling  for  speed,  agil- 
ity and  strength  is  sure  to  result  in  more  care- 
ful training  by  players.  Primarily,  it  is  more 
essential  than  ever  that  the  players  master  the 
rudiments  of  the  game,  such  as  catching  the 
ball,  falling  on  it,  etc.  In  fact,  the  man  who 
can  handle  the  ball  as  one  would  a  baseball  is 
sure  to  attract  the  attention  of  his  coaches  at 
the  start.  He  has  acquired  a  big  advantage 
over  his  rivals  who  have  not  this  skill.  It  is  no 
longer  possible  for  a  player  to  rest  content  in 
his  belief  that  he  is  indispensable  to  the  team. 
The  style  of  game  which  such  a  man  could  al- 
ways play  has  passed. 

More  Careful  Training  Needed 

With  the  improvement  in  the  game  its  pop- 
ularity has  increased  and  the  fight  for  places 
on  the  big  college  elevens  is  keener  than  ever. 
It  is  not  unusuul  now  for  a  big  university  to 
have  enough  men  for  two  elevens,  almost 
evenly  matched.  Two  players  not  infrequently 
work  throughout  almost  an  entire  season  before 
the  coaches  are  able  to  determine  which  is  the 
better  fitted  for  the  position.  It  is  for  this  rea- 
son that  a  playei  who  hopes  to  secure  a  place 
on  his  team  oughii  to  prps^ni  himsolf  in  pretty 


30  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

fair  condition.  The  season  is  so  short  that  the 
man  who  reports  over-weight  and  soft  is  likely 
to  find  himself  hopelessly  distanced  by  the  time 
the  season  is  under  way. 

In  this  connection  players  should  be  cau- 
tioned not  to  allow  themselves  to  be  over- 
trained before  the  season  actually  starts.  I 
have  frequently  seen  players  who,  either  from 
their  anxiety  to  be  in  proper  shape  or  a  fear 
that  otherwise  they  might  not  make  the  team, 
worked  a  whole  summer  and  then  presented 
themselves  at  the  beginning  of  the  season 
under-weight  and  in  no  condition  to  stand  the 
hard  training  required  of  them. 

As  a  result  they  fell  by  the  wayside  before 
the  season  was  half  over  and  were  of  even  less 
value  to  the  coaching  staff  than  men  who  went 
to  the  other  extreme.  The  ideal  system  is  for 
the  candidates  to  do  just  enough  hard  work 
playing  baseball,  tennis  or  swimming  to  present 
themselves  without  too  much  fat,  but  in  condi- 
tion to  work  themselves  into  pretty  fair  shape 
without  being  weakened  by  the  process. 

Inter  scholastic  Football 

Many  times  I  have  been  asked  what  steps 
should  be  taken  to  control  interscholastic  foot- 
ball and  club  games  to  the  end  that  injuries 
might  be  reduced.  I  state  without  hesitation 
that  the  authorities  of  schools  and  athletic  clubs 


MODERN  FOOTBALL  31 

are  guilty  of  gross  negligence  and  are  really  to 
blame  for  most  of  the  injuries.  This  is  because 
they  either  permit  boys  to  play  the  game  with- 
out having  had  the  proper  training  or  allow 
games  between  two  teams  that  are  hopelessly 
unequal.  What  else  can  be  expected  if  a  boy 
weighing  130  pounds  is  pitted  against  a  man 
with  an  advantage  of  from  25  to  50  pounds  in 
weight  and  four  or  five  years  in  experience? 
Under  these  circumstances  injuries  are  bound 
to  occur. 

There  is  also  an  inexcusable  lack  of  precau- 
tion displayed,  when  men  and  boys  are  allowed 
to  continue  in  the  game  when  exhausted,  or 
after  being  injured.  I  have  been  associated 
with  football  almost  from  its  inception  in  this 
country.  Years  ago  the  sport  was  far  rougher 
than  it  is  to-day.  Since  that  time  our  big  uni- 
versities have  not  only  eliminated  many  of  the 
rougher  features  of  the  game,  but  they  have 
surrounded  the  players  with  many  safeguards. 
Those  who  are  constantly  criticising  our  col- 
lege football  would  do  well  to  consider  the  fact 
that  at  the  six  leading  colleges  of  the  East: 
Yale,  Pennsylvania,  Princeton,  Cornell,  Har- 
vard, and  Dartmouth,  football  has  not,  so  far  as 
I  can  recall,  ever  resulted  in  a  fatal  accident. 
I  call  attention  to  this  to  show  what  can  be  done 
to  make  the  game  safe. 

I  am  not  disposed  to  deny  that  football  is  a 
rough  game.    But  when  cleanly  played,  as  it 


32  THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

is  in  our  big  colleges,  and  when  properly  safe- 
guarded, the  element  of  danger  is  almost  en- 
tirely eliminated.  It  is  only  when  the  minor 
colleges  ignore  the  precautions  that  the  big  uni- 
versities take,  when  they  play  injured  and  un- 
trained men,  that  we  hear  of  such  fatal  acci- 
dents. 

I  take  very  little  stock  in  most  of  the  statis- 
tics of  college  football  accidents.  Many  of 
them  are  totally  inaccurate,  some  without  any 
foundation  whatever,  and  nearly  all  of  them 
exaggerated.  It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  more 
people  are  killed  automobiling  in  a  week  than 
in  football  games  in  years,  ^Hiat  would  some 
mothers  think  if  they  were  told  that  they  risked 
more  danger  to  their  lives  in  shoijping  during 
Christmas  holidays,  than  did  their  sons  by 
playing  football!  It  is  a  fact,  nevertheless, 
and  capable  of  ready  proof. 

These  perennial  agitations  against  football 
are  to  be  deplored.  If  the  football  Kules  Com- 
mittee could  be  permitted  to  study  over  the 
problems  that  come  up  and  study  out  reforms 
as  they  are  needed,  the  game  would  work  out 
its  own  salvation.  It  does  little  good  for  agita- 
tors to  raise  a  great  howl  every  time  an  acci- 
dent occurs,  and  then  insist  that  radical 
changes  be  made  forthwith  in  the  rules.  These 
people  by  such  measures  really  defeat  their 
own  object  and  hinder,  rather  than  help,  the 
purification  of  football. 


MODERN  FOOTBALL  33 

A  Good  Training  Diet 

Every  fall  I  am  asked  a  great  many  times  to 
name  a  good  training  diet  for  football  players 
and  other  athletes.  For  a  period  extending 
over  nearly  twenty-five  years  I  have  made  ex- 
periments in  dieting  athletes,  and  have  also 
studied  the  results  of  experiments  on  myself. 
This  subject  of  diet  has  gone  through  a  good 
many  stages.  A  great  many  cranks  have  writ- 
ten concerning  it,  and  there  is  an  idea  in  some 
quarters  that  to  be  a  successful  football  player 
one  must  eat  certain  food.  We  are  getting 
away  from  such  foolish  notions  now,  and  get- 
ting back  to  nature. 

I  always  insist,  first  of  all,  that  the  diet  shall 
be  as  plain  as  possible,  with  enough  nourish- 
ment to  keep  the  men  strong.  It  should  never 
be  forgotten  that  the  stomach  is  the  most  im- 
portant factor  in  condition.  Yet  I  have  known 
football  players  and  other  athletes  to  invite  in- 
digestion by  taking  large  dishes  of  oatmeal  with 
cream  and  coffee.  This  causes  more  indiges- 
tion than  any  other  dish  I  know.  Fresh  fruits 
should  also  be  partaken  of  sparingly,  or  they 
will  disturb  the  digestive  process. 

The  best  training  table  diet  that  I  know  of 
consists  of  the  following: 

Breakfast:  One  chop  (sometimes  two)  or 
eight  ounces  of  beef,  two  soft-boiled  eggs,  one 
baked  potato,  toast  or  bread,  milk  or  mild  tea; 


34  THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

prunes  or  apple-sauce  (no  cream  or  sugar 
added). 

Dinner:  Roast  beef,  lamb,  mutton  or  fowl, 
boiled  or  maslied  potato,  vegetables  and  fruits 
in  season.  Boiled  rice  and  milk,  or  cornmeal 
musli.  A  light  pudding,  milk  or  tea,  toast  and 
bread. 

Supper:  Cold  meat,  roast  beef,  lamb,  mutton 
or  fowl,  one  small  steak,  one  potato,  toast  or 
fresh  Graham  bread,  prunes,  apple-sauce  or 
baked  apple,  milk  or  mild  tea. 

If  a  man  is  over- weight  and  wants  to  reduce 
flesh  he  should  refrain  from  drinking  milk,  for 
this  is  one  of  the  most  fattening  foods  there  are. 
It  is  also  injurious  to  the  wind,  and  should  be 
taken  with  judgment.  In  case  it  is  impossible 
to  have  a  training  table,  athletes  should  not  be 
worried.  The  diet  I  have  given  is  as  good  as 
can  be  secured,  but  if  care  is  exercised  an 
equally  good  diet  can  be  secured  at  one's  own 
home.  What  the  athlete  should  be  most  careful 
about  is  to  chew  his  food  well,  eat  nothing  dif- 
ficult to  digest,  and  always  keep  the  stomach  in 
good  order.  This  can  usually  be  done  with  any 
simple  diet  selected. 


TRAINING    FOR    THE    TEAM 

BY    DR.    ALVIN    C.    KRAENZLEIN 

Years  ago  when  it  was  said  that  a  man  was 
going  into  training,  people  conjured  up  a  pro- 
gram of  some  grilling  sort  of  life,  hampered  by 
countless  rules  which  could  not  be  violated 
without  impairing  the  success  of  the  process. 
That  idea  prevails  to-day  with  some  who  are 
not  familiar  with  the  life  of  an  athlete,  but  it  is 
almost  needless  to  say  that  it  is  a  far-fetched 
misconception. 

To  be  sure,  young  men  in  training  live  in  a 
different  manner  from  what  they  do  when  out 
of  training;  they  are  forced  to  obey  certain 
general  rules ;  they  follow  a  fairly  well-defined 
program.  But,  when  all  is  considered,  every- 
thing looked  over  and  weighed  carefully,  train- 
ing consists  of  just  one  thing  —  good  living. 

There  was  a  time  when  the  life  of  an  active 
athlete  was  narrow  and  hard.  But  that  time  is 
past.  New  ideas  have  replaced  the  old  and  to- 
day training  merely  means  that  a  man  is  taking 
the  best  of  care  of  himself,  both  mentally  and 
physically;   that  he  gives  heed  to  the  rules  of 

35 


36  THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

hygiene  and  that  he  does  not  abuse  the  gifts 
of  nature. 

It  would  be  a  difficult  matter  to  draw  up  any 
program  that  men  could  follow  while  in  ath- 
letics, especially  in  football.  In  track,  each  man 
has  his  specialty  and  must  do  certain  things  in 
order  to  bring  about  the  best  results.  Although 
individuals  do  these  things  in  a  different  way 
and  with  varying  degrees  of  intensity  they  fol- 
low the  same  general  line.  The  same  is  true  of 
basket-ball,  while  in  baseball  very  definite  rules 
can  be  laid  down.  But  football  includes  so 
many  phases  of  physical  and  mental  activity 
that  any  set  of  regulations  compiled  for  the 
direction  of  the  training  of  a  football  squad 
would  be  quite  useless. 

Here  the  individual  must  be  carefully  stud- 
ied. Some  men  need  development  along  certain 
lines;  need  to  be  urged  on  in  some  particular 
activities  and  held  back  in  others.  No  two  bod- 
ies are  alike ;  no  two  hearts  perform  their  func- 
tion in  exactly  the  same  manner;  science  has 
never  found  a  pair  of  lungs  that  exactly  dupli- 
cated another ;  stomachs  are  all  different ;  mus- 
cles and  tendons  vary  greatly.  All  these  things 
must  be  taken  into  consideration,  and  careful 
consideration,  too. 

It  would  be  impossible  to  say  at  what  age  a 
boy  is  strong  enough  to  play  the  gridiron  game. 
We  cannot  reckon  strength  by  age  in  human 
beings.    Some  boys  are  sturdy  and  strong,  pos- 


TRAINING   FOR  THE   TEAM  37 

sessed  of  good  lungs  and  hearts,  well-muscled, 
strong-limbed,  when  they  are  fifteen  years  old. 
Others  are  physically  immature  at  twenty ;  and 
there  are  those  by  the  thousand  who  never  at- 
tain tlie  pliysical  strength  necessary  to  permit 
them  to  play  football  with  any  degree  of  suc- 
cess and  without  endangering  their  own  health 
and,  perhaps,  their  life. 

Football  is  a  man's  game.  It  is  a  game  for 
those  who  can  stand  the  physical  punishment 
of  men,  and  a  game  for  those  who  can  think 
quickly  and  clearly,  as  men  think.  It  is  not  a 
game  for  poorly  developed  youngsters.  They 
cannot  play  it  in  that  stage;  they  may  overdo 
if  they  attempt  to  play  it  and  spoil  any  oppor- 
tunity that  they  may  have  of  playing  football 
in  the  future. 

Every  fall  hundreds  of  boys'  teams  are  or- 
ganized all  over  the  country.  There  are  the 
school  teams,  the  club  teams  and  the  independ- 
ent organizations.  I  believe  that  few  of  the 
latter  ever  do  the  players  any  good ;  I  mean  by 
this  that  they  do  not  tend  to  make  the  boys 
better  players  of  football  to  any  appreciable 
degree,  merely  because  they  are  not,  as  a  rule, 
supervised  by  competent  instructors.  School 
teams,  in  the  majority  of  cases,  have  some  su- 
pervision, and  by  playing  on  them  or  following 
them  closely  the  average  boy  can  learn  much  of 
the  game. 

But  when  you  are  playing  on  a  team  of  boys 


134913 


38  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

you  should  alwaj^s  endeavor  to  keep  within 
your  sphere;  that  is,  you  should  play  against 
boys.  Don't  aspire  to  too  much  glory  and  at- 
tempt to  comj^ete  against  teams  made  up  of 
players  who  are  bigger,  older  and  stronger  than 
you  are.  That  is  one  of  the  grave  dangers  of 
football  and  should  not  be  tolerated  by  the  man- 
agement of  any  eleven. 

I  do  not  mean  to  infer  by  this  that  little 
fellows  can  safely  play  football  against  teams 
which  compare  favorably  in  weight  and  age. 
Although  the  knocks  they  might  get  would  not 
ordinarily  be  dangerous,  their  hearts  may  not 
be  able  to  stand  the  strain  of  competition  that, 
to  the  outsider,  appears  to  be  exceedingly  light. 
The  fact  that  no  boy  can  safely  play  football 
until  his  body  is  well  developed  cannot  be  put 
too  strongly.  Judgment  in  regard  to  this  re- 
mains up  to  the  boy  himself  and  to  his  father 
or  his  physician. 

Another  thing  that  must  be  considered  is  the 
fact  that  sixty  minutes  of  playing,  in  spite  of 
the  three  intermissions,  is  a  long  time.  A  team 
of  boys  can  easily  be  conceived  who  could  play 
half  that  time  without  trouble  and  without  tax- 
ing themselves  too  severely,  while  any  attempt 
on  their  part  to  play  sixty  minutes  of  football 
would  be  foolhardy. 

Do  not  attempt  to  overdo.  That  is  the  one 
warning  that  must  be  sounded  by  every  man 
and  boy  who  is  interested  in  football.     Study 


TRAINING   FOR  THE   TEAM         39 

the  game,  begin  your  work  gradually,  learn  to 
handle  a  ball,  know  mistakes  when  you  see  them 
and  try  to  find  your  way  out  of  difficult  situa- 
tions that  you  may  imagine.  But  do  not  over- 
tax your  strength.  To  be  a  successful  player 
on  a  big  college  eleven  takes  years  of  training, 
and  the  sooner  you  boys  begin  to  study  the 
game  the  better  prepared  you  will  be  to  play 
it  when  the  times  comes.  But  do  not  think  that 
just  because  you  are  not  wearing  a  uniform  and 
exerting  yourself  until  your  heart  pounds 
against  your  ribs  that  you  are  not  progressing. 
Many  a  man  has  learned  enough  football  from 
the  side-lines  to  put  him  on  a  par  with  those 
who  have  been  in  the  game  for  years,  just 
because  he  has  not  abused  his  body  and  is  ready 
to  go  into  a  game  with  a  sound  heart,  deep 
lungs,  and  strong  limbs ;  and,  knowing  the  game 
as  he  does,  he  can  outstrip  the  fellow  who  began 
playing  football  too  early  and  has  called  upon 
some  of  his  organs  to  do  more  than  their  work. 

So  much  for  that. 

AVlien  you  commence  your  training  do  not 
attempt  to  do  it  all  at  once.  Go  at  it  gradually. 
Some  men  could  jump  right  into  the  middle  of 
a  season,  scrimmage  the  first  day,  run,  kick, 
pass,  and  charge  without  suffering  any  lasting 
ill  effects.  But  most  players  cannot  do  that. 
When  they  have  been  out  of  training  for 
months  their  muscles  become  soft  and  they 
must  build  them  up  by  careful,  patient  work. 


40  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

In  the  first  place,  it  is  necessary  to  spend 
some  time  at  the  beginning  of  every  football 
season  in  practising  the  rudiments  of  the  game. 
No  man  can  properly  pass  or  kick  without  prac- 
tice and  until  he  can  do  those  things  he  cer- 
tainly cannot  play  the  game.  So  if  you  devote 
the  first  few  days  to  that  sort  of  activity  you 
will  be  undergoing  a  necessary  part  of  your 
preparation  and,  at  the  same  time,  avoid  many 
dangers.  To  be  sure,  stiffness  and  minor  in- 
juries will  arise  from  even  this  light  work,  but 
they  can  be  guarded  against  to  a  certain  extent. 
If  the  weather  be  warm,  do  not  load  yourself 
down  with  too  much  clothing.  As  soon  as  you 
have  finished  your  daily  practice  —  which 
should  not  be  too  long  for  the  first  few  days; 
a  couple  of  hours  is  enough  —  take  a  cold 
shower,  or,  better  still,  if  conditions  permit  it, 
take  a  plunge  in  some  stream  or  body  of  water. 
Do  not  enter  the  water  in  an  overheated  condi- 
tion, because  such  a  thing  is  apt  to  bring  about 
bad  results. 

It  will  be  well  to  watch  your  ankles  during 
these  first  few  days.  A  turned  ankle  early  in 
the  season  has  put  many  a  good  man  out  of  the 
game  for  weeks.  If  your  ankles  are  weak,  bind 
them  up  comfortably  with  bandages.  Also 
watch  your  feet  carefully.  In  hot  weather 
heavy  football  shoes  and  coarse  stockings  often 
blister  feet.  Keep  any  chafed  parts  bound  up 
in  cotton  and  adhesive  tape  while  you  are  work- 


TRAINING   FOR  THE   TEAM         41 

ing.  Wash  them  often  and  apply  any  of  the 
numerous  healing  preparations  that  are  com- 
monly known  to  athletes. 

Stiffness  is  to  be  expected.  No  man  has  ever 
trained  for  football  and  avoided  it  entirely. 
The  bath  will  help  alleviate  this  discomfort 
and,  if  possible,  have  a  rub-down  after  your 
work-out.  There  is  almost  as  much  in  the  rub- 
bing itself  as  in  the  preparation  applied,  of 
which  there  are  many  equally  good. 

After  the  first  soreness  has  worn  off  you  will 
be  ready  for  harder  work.  While  you  have 
been  mastering  the  art  of  passing  and  kicking 
and  running  through  signal  practice  you  will 
find  that  your  wind  has  improved  steadily.  To 
my  mind,  road  work  —  that  is,  merely  jogging 
across  country  —  is  unnecessary  in  training  for 
football.  Most  men  get  all  the  running  that 
they  can  stand  in  their  signal  practice  and,  in 
reality,  they  are  doing  two  things  at  once :  mas- 
tering their  style  of  play  and  building  up  their 
wind.  But  take  to  this  harder  work  gradually. 
Do  not  jump  into  it  at  once.  Remember  that 
football  is  a  hard  game  and  that  the  season  is 
long  and  that  you  must  build  a  firm  foundation 
for  your  condition  in  the  last  few  days,  which 
are,  in  most  cases,  the  all-important  ones.  Take 
things  gradually.  Make  your  first  scrimmages 
short  and  you  will  profit  in  the  end. 

Here  again  we  can  draw  no  sharp  lines.  Some 
men  are  ready  for  hard  work  two  weeks  after 


42  THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

tliey  commence  training;  others  will  require  a 
month  to  enable  them  to  stand  the  strain.  It  all 
depends  on  your  own  strength.  Don't  overtax 
that  strength.  That  cannot  be  said  too 
often. 

When  the  hard  work  of  the  season  is  at  hand, 
when  you  are  playing  weekly  games  and  scrim- 
maging four  or  five  afternoons  between  games, 
running  signals  and  chasing  punts,  you  must 
watch  yourself  with  all  care.  Don 't  stick  to  the 
cold  bath  at  this  time.  Take  a  warm  shower 
after  every  work-out.  It  will  help  take  out  the 
soreness  and,  above  all,  will  keep  the  pores  open 
and  allow  free  exit  to  all  the  waste  material 
that  your  body  is  continually  throwing  off.  Use 
soap ;  keep  clean.  It  is  an  essential  to  training. 
The  rub-down  has  now  become  an  exceedingly 
important  part  of  your  training.  Do  not  neg- 
lect it  if  you  can  possibly  have  one.  It  is  not 
necessary  to  be  rubbed  down  by  another.  You 
can  do  it  yourself  if  you  will  take  the  time. 
Keep  the  muscles  of  your  limbs,  shoulders,  and 
back  well  massaged. 

And  now  we  will  take  up  the  eating.  This  is, 
as  every  one  knows,  one  of  the  problems  of 
training.  But  what  you  eat  isn't  such  a  big 
problem  as  is  the  one  of  proper  preparation 
and  proper  eating.  There  are  few  forms  of 
food  that  are  injurious  if  properly  cooked ;  but 
no  form  of  food  will  do  you  much  good  unless 
it  is  properly  eaten.    Do  not  allow  food  to  go 


TRAINING   FOR  THE   TEAM         43 

down  to  your  stomach  until  it  is  made  ready 
by  proper  chewing. 

Plenty  of  eggs  and  milk ;  beef,  chops,  roasts, 
will  all  help  you.  Keep  away  from  fried  meats. 
Food  fried  in  heavy  fat  is  likely  to  upset  your 
stomach,  and  when  that  organ  is  not  working  as 
it  should  no  man  can  be  at  his  best.  As  for 
vegetables  —  well,  almost  any  fresh  vegetable, 
properly  prepared,  will  help  you.  Luckily,  the 
football  season  is  at  that  time  of  the  year  when 
fresh  vegetables  are  obtainable. 

The  desserts  should  be  light.  Custards  and 
light  puddings  will  hurt  no  one,  but  I  would  ad- 
vise keeping  away  from  rich  dishes  and  pies. 
A  soggy  pie-crust  is  well  nigh  indigestible.  Eat 
plenty  of  fruit,  but  do  not  gorge  yourself  on  it. 
Excess  of  any  kind  is  dangerous. 

It  is  best  to  let  tea  and  coffee  entirely  alone, 
but  if  you  have  been  accustomed  to  drink  such 
beverages  do  not  cut  them  off  suddenly,  for 
such  will  have  a  worse  effect  than  their  con- 
tinued use.  And  while  we  are  dealing  with 
drinking  it  might  be  well  to  warn  against  too 
great  a  consumption  of  water.  Do  not  drink 
with  your  meals,  of  all  things.  Drink  before 
and  after,  if  you  will,  but  let  it  alone  while  you 
are  actually  eating.  Do  not  drink  while  you  are 
practising  or  overheated.  If  your  mouth  and 
throat  get  dry,  take  a  swallow  of  water,  but 
don't  drink  like  a  thirsty  horse.  Too  much 
water  will  ruin  your  wind. 


44  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

Eat  slowly.  Chew  your  food  well.  Your 
stomach  has  a  certain  important  function  to 
perform  and  you  are  supposed  to  help  it  in 
every  possible  way.  Thorough  mastication  is 
the  greatest  aid  you  can  give  your  digestive  ap- 
paratus. The  man  who  bolts  his  meals  will  find 
that  his  stomach  will  not  endure  the  strain  very 
long  and  when  he  cannot  properly  nourish  his 
system  then  is  the  time  when  he  cannot  play 
football. 

I  take  for  granted  that  any  boy  in  athletics 
knows  that  tobacco  and  alcohol  are  to  be  ta- 
booed. No  matter  how  strong  you  may  be,  you 
can  not  summon  all  your  strength  in  the  time  of 
need  if  your  throat  and  lungs  are  irritated  with 
tobacco  smoke  or  if  your  stomach  and  intestines 
are  irritated  by  alcohol.  Let  tobacco  and  drink 
alone.  They  are  the  biggest  handicaps  that  an 
athlete  can  have  put  on  him. 

Sleep  regularly  and  soundly.  You  can  do 
this  by  training  yourself  to  keep  your  mind  off 
certain  subjects.  If  you  become  so  deeply  en- 
grossed in  football  that  you  think  of  it  while  in 
bed  you  may  not  sleep.  This  you  must  not  do, 
because  sleep  is  an  essential.  Wlien  you  are 
ready  to  crawl  in  for  the  night  forget  every- 
thing. Don't  worry  about  your  own  standing 
on  your  team  or  the  welfare  of  the  eleven.  By 
so  doing  you  will  only  be  impairing  your  effi- 
ciency and  the  efficiency  of  the  eleven.  Get 
eight  hours  of  good,  sound  sleep  every  night  at 


TRAINING   FOR  THE  TEAM         45 

the  very  least.  And  don't  take  this  all  after 
midnight.  Retire  early  in  the  evening  if  pos- 
sible and  be  out  early  in  the  morning.  Have  all 
the  air  that  you  can  get  in  your  sleeping-apart- 
ments. If  you  sleep  in  a  close  room  it  will  have 
a  bad  effect,  while  a  good  sleep  in  pure  air  is 
doubly  invigorating. 

Do  not  think  about  football  all  the  time.  Of 
course,  it  is  the  natural  thing  to  do,  but  you  will 
find  that  by  diverting  your  attention  you  will 
avoid  that  nervousness  which  sometimes  comes 
to  football  players  and  which  makes  them  hesi- 
tate in  tight  places.  You  cannot  hesitate  in 
football.  The  game  has  changed  so  greatly  in 
the  last  few  years  that  it  takes  a  different  type 
of  man  to  succeed  on  the  gridiron  from  that  of 
a  decade  ago.  The  big  football  men  of  to-day 
are  of  alert  minds.  They  can  foresee  what  will 
be  the  result  of  some  little  action  and  they  will 
be  on  hand  either  to  aid  or  repulse  that  action. 
This  requires  instantaneous  thought  and  action. 
Punting  has  grown  to  be  such  a  big  factor  in 
football  that  better  eyes  are  required.  It  takes 
a  good  eye  to  judge  a  punted  ball. 

Your  mind  will  be  active,  your  nerves  will  be 
steady,  and  your  eye  will  be  clear  if  you  live 
well  and  think  well.  Let  me  repeat:  do  not 
overdo,  but  be  content  to  accomplish  a  little  at 
a  time;  keep  your  body  clean;  eat  good  food 
and  eat  carefully ;  keep  away  from  tobacco  and 
alcohol;    sleep  well;    don't  worry;   don't  keep 


46  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

your  mind  too  closely  on  football,  but  when  you 
do  think,  think  hard.  And  when  you  get  into 
a  game,  throw  every  ounce  of  energy  into  the 
fight.  Don't  be  foolish,  but  don't  quit.  Foolish 
players  who  take  foolish  risks  and  men  who  quit 
do  not  win  football  games. 


THE  NEW  FOOTBALL  A  GAME  FOR 
THINKERS 

BY    FIELDING    H.    YOST 

Football  has  been  changed ;  changed  for  the 
spectator,  and  changed  for  the  player.  The 
former  sees  an  open,  running  game ;  the  latter 
is  forced  to  think  faster  than  ever  before  and 
must  be  able  to  cope  with  many  new  and  novel 
situations  that  are  bound  to  arise. 

The  game  as  it  is  played  under  the  new  rules 
is  a  game  for  strategists,  for  thinkers.  The  boy 
or  man  who  cannot  think  quickly  and  reason 
clearly  cannot  hope  to  play  football  success- 
fully. 

The  forward  pass  has  become  a  great  factor 
in  football  within  the  last  two  or  three  years. 
The  rule  revision  has  done  much  to  make  its 
use  more  effective  and  I  believe  that  it  will  be 
the  principal  form  of  attack.  In  the  first  place, 
the  old  mass  play  is  gone  absolutely  and  some- 
thing must  take  its  place.  The  ruling  which 
prohibits  the  pulling  or  pushing  of  men,  coupled 
with  -that  which  demands  that  the  team  on 
offense  have  seven  men  on  the  line,  has  made 
the  mass  play  all  but  an  impossibility.     This 

47 


48  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

is  obvious.  Suppose  that  an  eleven  should  at' 
tempt  to  direct  a  mass  play  on  guard.  What 
would  they  do  ?  The  only  thing  that  they  could 
do  would  be  to  send  three  of  the  backiield  play- 
ers crashing  into  the  line  and  let  the  man  with 
the  ball  follow  them,  trusting  to  the  possibility 
that  those  before  him  could  open  a  hole.  The 
yards  that  were  made  by  mass  plays  were  not 
made  in  this  way.  They  were  made  because  the 
player  who  carried  the  ball  was  dragged  into 
the  line  and  then  pushed  forward  by  others  on 
his  team.    That  is  an  impossibility  now. 

Let  us  see  what  has  been  done  to  encourage 
the  use  of  the  forward  pass.  In  the  first  place 
it  can  now  be  thrown  over  any  point  in  the  line. 
That  is  a  great  improvement,  because  many 
forward  passes  were  declared  illegal  by  officials 
who  did  not  think  that  they  crossed  the  line 
five  yards  to  one  side  of  the  spot  on  which  the 
ball  rested  when  put  in  play.  Again,  the  pen- 
alty has  been  changed  for  an  incompleted  for- 
ward pass.  "WHien  the  ball  touched  the  ground 
before  being  touched  by  a  player  a  few  years 
ago,  it  cost  the  offending  team  a  penalty  of 
fifteen  long  yards.  This  was  very  discour- 
aging. But  now  the  penalty  is  much  lighter 
and  captains  can  afford  to  take  the  chance 
more  often. 

Greater  accuracy  is  required  of  centers. 
Many  balls  have  to  be  passed  at  an  angle,  and 
it  requires  a  vast  amount  of  steady,  sincere 


FOOTBALL  A  GAME   FOR  THINKERS   49 

endeavor  on  the  part  of  a  man  playing  center 
to  do  this  accurately.  The  man  who  is  to  play 
center  cannot  have  too  much  practice  in  pass- 
ing. 

The  trick  play,  the  cunning  generalship,  the 
taking  advantage  of  openings  that  are  only  of 
an  instant's  duration  will  be  the  means  of  win- 
ning football  games  from  now  on.  The  ar- 
rangement of  the  backs  will  help  deceive  the 
men  who  are  on  the  defensive.  The  direct  pass 
has  so  quickened  the  game  that  a  man  waiting 
to  break  up  a  play  has  little  opportunity  to  find 
which  way  it  is  going  until  it  is  actually  in 
progress. 

The  elimination  of  the  mass  play  makes  it 
possible  to  draw  from  the  primary  defense  and 
build  a  stronger  secondary  defense.  The  line 
need  not  be  as  strong  as  it  once  was  because 
it  does  not  have  to  bear  the  strain  that  it  once 
did.  On  the  other  hand,  the  secondary  defense 
must  be  stronger  because  it  is  on  these  men, 
who  are  placed  in  a  way  that  makes  it  possible 
for  them  to  shift  easily  and  quickly,  that  the 
responsibility  of  breaking  up  open  plays  rests. 

It  is  a  faster  game  and  a  better  game; 
also,  it  is  a  safer  game.  The  serious  injur- 
ies that  befell  men  while  playing  football  were, 
in  my  opinion,  brought  on  by  exhaustion,  with 
only  a  few  exceptions.  For  this  reason  I  think 
that  the  division  of  the  game  into  four  periods 
does  more  than  any  other  one  thing  to  bring 


50  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

about  safer  conditions.  The  men  have  an  op- 
portunity to  rest  every  fifteen  minutes.  Even 
though  this  rest  period  be  a  minute,  it  is  enough 
to  freshen  a  man  up.  Besides,  this  new  game 
involves  so  many  penalties  that  a  man  has  time 
to  rest  while  the  officials  are  working.  In  the 
game  that  was  played  a  half-dozen  years  ago 
the  penalties  were  few  and  far  between.  It 
was  a  steady  grind  with  little  chance  to  rest 
and  it  was  the  sort  of  a  thing  to  wear  men  down. 
That  has  all  changed,  however,  and  any  normal 
man  who  is  in  good  condition  should  be  able 
to  stand  the  labor  that  is  involved  in  playing 
a  game  of  football.  The  opportunities  for  re- 
substituting  men  also  help  greatly.  Many 
coaches  were  tempted  to  leave  a  good  man 
in  the  game  despite  the  fact  that  he  had  played 
until  he  was  not  capable  of  protecting  himself. 
They  were  so  tempted  because  they  knew  that 
if  they  once  called  him  to  the  side-lines  they 
could  not  send  him  in  again.  As  it  now  stands, 
they  can  take  this  man  out  and  then  return  him 
later  in  the  game.  The  prohibiting  of  body 
blocking  on  forward  passes  and  kicks,  and  the 
passing  of  mass  plays  will  also  do  much  to 
eliminate  danger.  On  the  whole,  the  game 
under  the  revised  rules  should  be  such  that  it 
will  endanger  no  life  or  limb. 

Football  is  a  game  only  for  those  who  study 
it.  No  man  can  play  it  who  does  not  study 
its  various  phases  and  place  himself  in  every 


FOOTBALL  A  GAME  FOR  THINKERS    51 

situation  that  his  imagination  can  conjure  up. 
It  is  a  game  for  thinkers.  The  boy  who  is  not 
sincere,  determined,  and  possessed  of  the  right 
sort  of  fighting  spirit  cannot  excel  in  footbaU. 


FOOTBALL    GENERALSHIP:    THE    CAP- 
TAIN  AND    THE    QUARTER -BACK 

Genekal,ship  in  football  falls  under  three 
lieads,  first  the  planning  and  manoeuvering  of 
plays  and  men  by  the  coach  or  coaches,  sec- 
ondly, the  leadership  of  the  captain,  and 
thirdly,  the  actnal  selection  of  plays  by  the 
player,  usually  the  quarter-back,  who  is  chosen 
to  direct  the  plan  of  attack  and  defense.  Of 
the  first  nothing  will  be  said,  as  this  book  is 
written  for  players  rather  than  coaches. 

Successful  captains  may  differ  widely  in 
personality,  ability  as  players,  and  in  their 
methods  of  leading,  and  yet  there  are  certain 
characteristics,  which  are  common  to  all  good 
leaders.  If  a  captain  has  a  strong  personality 
and  is  a  man  of  deeds  and  action,  it  will  go  a 
long  way  in  gaining  the  confidence  of  his  men, 
but  even  men  who  possess  these  attributes  may 
fail  as  captains  if  they  do  not  possess  certain 
other  qualifications.  Some  captains  find  suc- 
cess by  driving  their  men,  others  by  leading, 
but  the  great  captain,  whether  he  leads  or 
drives,  must  always  be  sure  of  his  ground.  A 
certain  amount  of  self-assurance  and  assertive- 
ness  is  essential;  pig-headedness  is  sure  to  be 
detrimental.     Above  all,  a  captain  must  keep 

52 


FOOTBALL  GENERALSHIP  53 

his  head,  be  cool,  and  always  master  of  the 
situation.  A  quick  temper  is  always  a  handi- 
cap to  a  leader. 

In  planning  his  season,  the  captain  should 
remember  that  it  is  a  long  strenuous  siege,  and 
realize  that  if  he  begins  at  once  to  assert  him- 
self to  the  limit,  his  influence  by  the  time  the 
big  games  come  will  have  worn  off  its  effective- 
ness. It  is  wise,  therefore,  to  start  slowly,  and 
in  the  early  developmental  period  of  the  team 
try  to  guide  and  mould  the  organization  rather 
than  attempt  to  drive.  At  this  period  it  is  bet- 
ter for  the  captain  to  say  little  on  the  field  of 
play  and  have  that  little  count.  A  word  of 
encouragement  is  always  in  order,  criticism 
and  sarcasm  rarely  accomplish  the  ends  to 
which  they  are  directed.  Many  of  the  best 
captains  often  stand  somewhat  aloof  from  their 
men  during  the  early  season  and,  if  not  carried 
too  far,  this  often  adds  to  the  respect  in  which 
their  men  regard  them. 

As  the  important  games  draw  near,  the  cap- 
tain should  take  his  players  to  his  heart,  so  to 
speak.  Then  more  than  ever  should  he  make 
his  presence,  on  the  field  and  off,  felt  by  his 
men.  Encouragement  is  helpful,  and  at  times  a 
sharp  W'Ord  of  command  addressed  to  the  whole 
team  may  add  to  the  esprit  de  corps.  Individ- 
ual criticism  is  always  unpleasant,  and  a  dan- 
gerous implement. 

In  regard  to  the  choosing  of  the  plays,  the 


64  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

captain  should  usually  not  interfere  with  the 
quarter-back,  who  is  specially  trained  in  this 
work.  However,  the  captain  should  himself 
have  studied  the  plays  and  be  able  to  detect 
the  errors  in  his  quarter.  In  this  way,  without 
openly  interfering,  he  may  often  show  the  quar- 
ter-back a  new  opportunity,  or  even  correct  his 
mistake. 

To  the  quarter-back  falls  the  big  task  of  pilot- 
ing the  team  in  its  entire  offensive  play.  He 
chooses  the  style  of  attack.  If  his  team  comes 
off  the  field  without  having  used  its  strongest 
plays  and  used  them  correctly,  he  must  bear 
the  brunt  of  the  blame.  The  quarter-back's 
position  is  important  and  arduous,  and  no  place 
demands  such  careful  and  persistent  training, 
for  not  only  must  he  play  his  own  individual 
part  well  but  he  must  plot  and  plan  for  the 
whole  eleven  that  they  may  put  forth  their  best 
and  strongest  front. 

The  play  of  the  quarter-back  may  be  divided 
into  four  large  headings.  First,  the  handling 
of  the  ball.  Second,  the  handling  of  the  plays. 
Third,  the  handling  of  the  team  on  the  offense. 
Fourth,  the  play  on  the  defense.  Under  the 
first  and  last  headings  come  his  own  individual 
play,  while  under  the  second  and  third  fall  his 
part  as  field  general  for  the  team. 

In  handling  the  ball,  the  quarter  should  be 
sure  there  are  no  fumbles.  He  pays  attention, 
first,  to  getting  the  ball  from  the  center.    There 


FOOTBALL  GENERALSHIP  55 

should  be  perfect  coordination  between  these 
two,  as  a  fumble  here  means  that  the  play  called 
for  will  not  be  run  off  successfully.  The  quar- 
ter stands  with  his  hands  and  arms  well  under 
the  center,  forming  three  baskets  with  them, 
the  first  with  his  hands,  the  second  with  the 
bend  in  his  arms  at  the  elbow  —  the  elbows 
being  held  close  together  —  and  the  third 
formed  by  the  hands,  arms,  stomach  and  knees 
combined.  The  ball  should  be  handled  in  the 
first  basket,  but  the  other  two  are  maintained 
so  as  to  make  doubly  sure  there  are  no  fumbles. 
In  getting  the  ball  and  in  passing  it  to  his  backs, 
the  quarter  should  work  low  and  at  top  speed 
so  that  the  opponents  will  have  as  little  chance 
as  possible  to  see  where  the  ball  is  going.  As 
a  further  means  of  baffling  the  opponents,  he 
learns  to  assume  a  varying  position  each  time 
he  crouches  under  the  center,  so  that  his  stance 
shall  not  give  the  play  away. 

In  passing  the  ball  to  the  backs,  the  quarter 
faces  a  difficult  task.  His  work  must  be  so 
clean  and  clever  that  the  back  does  not  have 
to  slow  up  or  even  think  where  the  ball  is  com- 
ing from.  Especially  is  this  true  on  line  plunges 
where  the  distance  is  short  and  speed  must  be 
gained  instantly.  The  quarter  has  to  pass  very 
rapidly  or  the  back  will  have  plunged  by  and 
the  opening  be  lost.  On  such  plays  the  quarter 
tucks  the  ball  into  the  basket  which  the  back 
forms  with  his  hands  and  stomach  and  holds 


56  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

it  there  until  he  is  sure  no  fumble  can  come. 
This  pass  must  be  quick  but  not  too  hard.  On 
end-plays  the  pass  need  not  be  made  so  quickly 
but  the  accuracy  is  even  more  important  as  the 
pass  is  longer  and  if  the  back  has  to  stoop  or 
reach  to  get  the  ball,  he  will  surely  lose  speed. 
As  was  said  before,  the  ability  to  hold  on  to 
the  ball  and  not  fumble  is  the  first  requisite 
of  quarter-back  play. 

While  no  boy  who  fumbles  continually  will 
ever  be  chosen  for  the  quarter-back  position, 
there  are  many  who  handle  the  ball  well  but 
do  not  possess  the  ability  to  handle  their  plays 
successfully.  On  this  one  point  may  depend  the 
final  choice  in  a  close  competition  of  men. 
What,  then,  are  some  of  the  points  for  the 
quarter  to  remember  in  choosing  plays?  First 
of  all,  he  should  never  lose  the  ball  on  downs. 
Instead  let  him  get  the  full  price  of  it,  which 
means  the  distance  his  best  kicker  can  punt,  or 
if  it  be  near  the  opponent's  goal,  try  for  a  goal. 
In  choosing  plays  he  should  always  consider  the 
score,  the  time  left  to  pW,  whether  the  wind  is 
with  him  or  against,  and  whether  the  sun  makes 
the  catching  of  punts  difficult  or  not.  All  of 
these  points  have  often  won  and  lost  games. 
The  quarter-back  should  know  his  men  and  use 
them  to  the  best  advantage.  Thus  he  should 
not  tire  out  a  good  hne-plunger  by  making  him 
run  the  end  when  he  has  a  better  man  for  that 
purpose  in  his  backfield. 


II  \  MM.i  N(,    r.  \  I.I,  IN    u  \i  K  I  1 1  111.     Mill;   POSITION  or  i.'t   \  K  1  i.i;-i-  '. '  k  , 
iiiiw    in;  Hoi, us    iiii;   n\i,i.,   ANii    I  hi;  "i; askkt"  whh  h    im.    hai.i- 

B.\(  K  MAKES  TO  UKCKIVE  THE  liALL.     HAU\  AKD-IXDIAN  GAME,  1911. 


HARVARD  FOOTBALL  MEX   PRATTISTNO   TArKr.IXd   DrjIMIES    AT 
SOLDIERS    FIELD,    fAMHRIIXJE. 


QUARTER-BACK  PLAY,  AND  TACKLING 


FOOTBALL  GENERALSHIP  57 

In  choosing  the  play  and  the  formation  for 
play,  the  quarter  should  study  the  opponents 
carefully,  looking  for  weak  spots  in  the  line 
or  openings  in  the  backfield.  The  position  of 
the  opponents  in  the  line-up  is  very  important. 
An  experienced  lineman  on  his  team  may  often 
be  of  great  aid  in  giving  the  quarter  informa- 
tion as  to  the  weak  points  in  the  opponent's 
line  as  well  as  the  strong  ones.  Then  he  should 
have  his  plays  so  well  learned  that  he  can  group 
them  in  his  mind  and  be  able  to  attack  a  point 
in  several  different  ways.  He  should  know  his 
scoring  plays,  his  strong  running  plays,  and  his 
gambling  plays,  and  when  to  use  each  kind  to  its 
best  advantage.  If  the  score  is  six  to  nothing 
against  him  and  there  is  a  minute  to  play,  a 
good  quarter  is  not  going  to  waste  the  time 
trying  to  plunge  through  the  line  from  midfield 
to  the  goal  line  but  instead  he  will  try  one  of 
his  gambling  plays.  Or  if  he  be  ahead  with 
the  same  conditions,  he  will  know  enough  to 
play  safe  and  not  use  a  gambling  play. 

The  kicking  game  should  be  thoroughly  mas- 
tered and  used  to  the  limit.  In  doing  this  the 
quarter  should  bear  in  mind  his  position  in  the 
field.  The  side-lines  and  the  goal-lines  are  im- 
portant. Then,  too,  the  kicker  should  be  well 
guarded  by  the  skillful  use  of  fake  kicks.  In  all 
kicking  the  quarter  should  do  his  part  in  pro- 
tecting by  blocking  an  opponent. 

A  good  quarter  never  uses  the  forward  pass 


58  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

except  when  be  is  willing  to  take  a  chance,  as  it 
may  prove  a  boomerang.  The  pass  is  an  essen- 
tial to  modern  football  and  the  team  which  has 
not  perfected  it,  is  not  going  to  win  many 
games,  but  its  unguarded  use  is  dangerous. 
Every  pass  should  be  well  covered,  so  that  if  it 
goes  wrong  it  will  not  result  disastrously.  In 
the  opponent's  territory,  not  in  his  own,  is  the 
time  for  the  quarter  to  call  for  the  forward 
pass.  In  approaching  the  opponent's  goal  line 
he  always  uses  the  strongest  plays  on  first 
down  and  makes  them  go.  He  gathers  his  team 
before  the  attack  and  drives  them  into  the  play 
at  top  speed. 

No  quarter  is  good  until  he  is  an  actor  to 
such  an  extent  that  he  can  fool  his  opponents 
by  his  eyes  and  his  actions.  This  is  a  little 
point,  but  little  points  must  be  mastered  by  the 
great  quarter-back. 

In  handling  the  team  the  quarter  must  have 
absolute  command.  He  can  only  do  this  by 
gaining  the  entire  confidence  of  his  team,  and 
his  attitude  and  the  character  of  his  voice  will 
do  much  in  accomplishing  this.  Never  should 
he  become  discouraged  or  captious.  Never  let 
things  lag,  but  always  be  alert  and  eager.  In- 
stil in  all  the  team  a  spirit  of  unity  and  action. 

When  his  team  is  on  the  defense,  the  quarter- 
back usually  plays  in  the  backfield,  and  from 
a  casual  glance  one  would  say  that  he  had  little 
to  do  save  catch  punts  when  they  came  to  him. 


FOOTBALL   GENERALSHIP  59 

This  would  be  enough  in  many  games  but  it 
is  far  from  all  the  quarter's  duty  at  this  time. 
First  of  all  he  must  study  the  opponents  and 
think  and  plan  out  the  attack  he  is  to  start  when 
his  team  gets  the  ball  again.  Then  he  must  be 
in  constant  touch  with  his  team  to  encourage 
or  to  warn  of  a  weakness.  Often  he  can  fore- 
tell a  play  from  his  removed  position  better 
than  the  men  in  close.  As  the  play  develops, 
he  should  run  up  to  give  support  to  his  team, 
keeping  the  runner  between  himself  and  the 
side-lines,  so  that  he  can  either  tackle  him  or 
drive  him  out  of  bounds.  He  is  the  last  line 
of  defense  and  must  play  it  safe.  Oftentimes 
by  advancing  he  can  save  his  team  ten  or  fif- 
teen yards.  Or  again  he  may  be  able  to  inter- 
cept a  long  forward  pass.  As  the  opponents 
approach  his  goal  line,  the  quarter  closes  in  and 
gives  more  active  support,  always  guarding 
particularly  against  passes,  wide  end  runs  or 
trick  plays. 

In  catching  kicks,  the  quarter  is  all-impor- 
tant. Poor  handling  of  kicks  in  the  back-field 
has  cost  many  a  good  team  the  game.  Here, 
too,  the  quarter  is  in  command  and  calls  direc- 
tions as  to  who  shall  catch  the  ball,  calling  as 
well  when  he,  himself,  essays  the  task.  In 
catching  a  kick,  the  first  point  is  to  get  under 
the  ball  fast,  concentrating  all  attention  on  the 
ball.  The  catcher  should  never  be  set  but  al- 
ways ready  to  move  with  the  ball.     It  is  best 


60  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

to  raise  the  hands  well  and  catch  the  ball  on 
the  chest,  grasping  it  tightly  the  instant  it 
strikes.  In  running  in  the  kick,  always  remem- 
ber that  a  step  ahead  is  ground  gained,  while 
a  step  to  the  side  is  time  lost.  However,  a  suc- 
cessful runner  uses  all  the  wiles  of  dodging, 
side-stepping,  and  reversing,  but  always  goes 
ahead  fast  when  the  chance  comes.  A  good 
point  to  remember  is  that  when  pressed  hard,  a 
fair  catch  is  good  policy,  for  the  ball  safe  is  far 
better  than  the  chance  of  a  short  run  back  with 
a  possible  fumble. 


HOW   TO   PLAY    CENTER 

BY    HENRY    H.    KETCHAM 

In  writing  on  the  center  position  I  may  be 
inclined  to  give  it  undue  importance  and  at  the 
outset  I  want  to  say  that  there  is  not  any  one 
player  that  is  going  to  make  the  team  a  good 
one.  Most  people  will  consider  the  backfield 
positions  the  most  important  ones  to  fill,  and  of 
these,  that  of  the  quarter-back  probably  the 
most  difficult  one.  This  is  in  a  measure  true, 
and  a  good  quarter-back  is  essential  for  suc- 
cess, but  in  looking  over  the  other  positions, 
forming  the  backfield  and  the  line,  it  seems  to 
me  that  they  are  both  absolutely  essential  and 
a  good  backfield  with  a  poor  line  is  helpless. 

Too  generally  the  idea  prevails  that  the  back- 
field  men  alone  have  responsible  positions. 
They  do  have  the  most  spectacular  parts,  and 
too  often  the  line  is  absolutely  lost  sight  of. 
Plays  that  do  not  bring  all  eleven  men  into 
them  are  usually  discarded  by  the  coaches. 
Every  man  has  something  to  do  in  every  play 
and  the  man,  no  matter  who  he  is,  who  is  not 

61 


62  THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

doing  his  particular  part  in  every  play,  is  apt 
to  spoil  that  play,  and  when  only  three  downs 
were  allowed  for  ten  yards  this  was  a  serious 
handicap. 

The  point  which  a  Minnesota  coach  used  to 
lay  most  stress  on  was  that  every  time  a  man 
was  tackled  in  practice  or  in  a  game  the  rest 
of  the  team  should  find  out  "  who  got  him," 
and  whose  fault  it  was,  and  see  that  the  same 
thing  was  not  repeated. 

Great  size  is  not  essential  to  modern  foot- 
ball, but  any  boy  with  a  fairly  good  physique 
to  start  on  may  build  himself  up  by  winter  work 
when  others  are  wasting  time  in  idleness.  I 
know  of  several  fellows  who  barely  made  a 
school  team  but  who,  nevertheless,  kept  work- 
ing right  ahead  every  winter  and  working  hard 
to  develop  their  bodies,  and  ended  by  making 
the  university  team. 

Some  years  back  the  center  position  had 
nothing  like  the  responsibilities  that  are  now 
attached  to  it.  In  the  old  games  it  was  quite 
essential  for  a  player  to  be  big  and  heavy. 
Ordinarily  the  largest  man  was  put  in  that  posi- 
tion. Then  his  work  was  simple.  His  only 
duty  was  to  be  able  to  pass  the  ball  reliably  to 
two  places,  namely,  the  quarter-back,  and  the 
long  pass  for  the  kick.  On  the  defense  the  cen- 
ter generally  played  in  the  line  and  was  respon- 
sible only  for  the  little  patch  of  ground  that  he 
would  ordinarily  cover. 


HOW  TO   PLAY   CENTER  63 

The  Center's  Responsibility 

Now,  in  the  present  game,  a  heavy  man  can 
still  be  used  but  is  not  essential,  and  a  heavy 
man  without  speed  is  useless.  A  center  to-day 
has  to  be  wide-awake  for  all  emergencies.  No 
longer  are  the  passes  restricted  to  two  persons. 
A  center  may  have  a  dozen  passes  to  make  now 
when  formations  are  so  numerous  and  in  all 
these  passes  a  center  has  to  use  his  head  and 
help  his  backs. 

On  a  run  around  end  if  the  ball  comes  back 
a  little  bit  behind  the  man  who  is  to  carry  it 
the  play  may  be  delayed  a  fraction  of  a  second 
and  that  moment  may  be  ^dtal  to  the  success  of 
the  play.  For  end  plays  a  center  can  greatly 
aid  the  speed  of  his  backs  by  passing  the  ball 
just  far  enough  ahead  of  them  to  make  them 
run  hard  for  it.  It  is  also  quite  necessary  to 
be  able  to  pass  the  ball  in  the  same  spot,  as  it 
is  the  little  things  that  are  going  to  aid  the 
backfield  materially. 

For  the  last  few  years  the  majority  of  cen- 
ters have  played  out  of  the  lines  on  the  defense, 
when  the  other  side  is  going  to  kick.  This 
greatly  aids  the  center  who  is  going  to  pass. 
He  ceases  to  worry  about  charging  his  opponent 
and  has  a  free  opening  to  go  down  the  field 
under  a  punt.  On  the  offense,  then,  watch  your 
passes,  but  after  that  is  done  follow  the  ball. 
On  a  kick  your  place  is  down  with  the  ends; 


64  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

on  a  mass  play  or  end  run  get  in  the  inter- 
ference. 

On  the  defensive,  too,  the  possibilities  for  the 
center  position  are  much  greater  than  ever. 
The  little  plot  of  ground  which  the  old  center 
used  to  cover  is  the  smallest  part  of  the  duty 
that  the  new  game  requires.  Here  speed  is 
required  more  than  ever.  A  center  is  respon- 
sible for  end  runs,  for  forward  passes,  for 
blocking  off  men  going  down  the  field  under 
kicks,  and  for  handling  his  individual  opponent 
in  his  own  little  bit  of  territory. 

A  center  should  stand  two  or  three  yards 
behind  the  scrimmage  where  he  will  be  able  to 
size  up  a  play  by  the  time  it  reaches  the  scrim- 
mage line.  As  soon  as  the  play  is  seen  to  be 
an  end  run  the  defensive  center  should  have 
time  to  get  out  there  as  soon  as  the  man  with 
the  ball,  and,  with  the  help  of  the  end,  ought 
to  drive  the  man  to  the  side-lines,  or  get  him 
if  he  tries  to  run  in.  This  style  of  play  made 
the  Yale  center  of  1910  great,  and  in  the  Yale- 
Harvard  game  this  man  made  nearly  half  of 
the  tackles,  either  getting  the  runner  from  be- 
hind, or  helping  the  end. 

Stopping  Forivard  Passes 

In  forward  passing  the  center  ought  to  be 
able  to  get  a  pretty  good  idea  as  to  when  this 
play  is  going  to  be  attempted.     Football  is  a 


HOW  TO  PLAY  CENTER  65 

game  of  brains  and  it  consists  in  trying  to  out- 
wit the  opponents.  In  one  Princeton-Harvard 
game  Harvard  tried  a  forward  pass.  Blumen- 
tlial,  the  center,  who  is  a  short  man,  did  not  rush 
in,  but  from  behind  the  scrimmage  line,  diag- 
nosed the  play  and  when  the  pass  was  made 
he  intercepted  it.  Such  a  play  is  not  a  lucky 
one  but  is  a  matter  of  figuring  out  what  the 
other  team  will  do,  and  a  thoughtful  player  can 
often  decide  pretty  accurately  when  a  certain 
play  is  coming.  Quarter-backs  often  give  away 
the  play  they  are  planning  to  use  by  a  glance 
or  a  change  in  position.  The  difference  in  pos- 
ture of  a  backfield  man,  be  it  ever  so  slight,  may 
serve  as  a  pointer  as  to  what  play  is  going  to 
be  used. 

On  a  third  down,  when  there  is  still  some  dis- 
tance to  gain,  and  a  kick  is  inevitable,  a  center 
will  often  fall  back  six  or  seven  yards  toward 
his  own  goal.  On  a  good  team  the  center  men 
have  very  little  chance  to  break  through  and 
block  a  kick  and  the  only  advantage  in  staying 
in  the  line  is  to  bother  the  opposing  snapper- 
back.  This  annoys  a  good  center  but  little,  and 
so  a  man  can  be  of  much  more  use  in  blocking 
off  a  man  running  down  the  field  and  help  save 
his  own  backs  in  catching  punts.  With  three 
backfield  men  and  the  center  helping  to  protect 
the  man  who  is  catching  the  punt,  the  latter  has 
a  fairly  good  chance  to  gain  five  or  ten  yards 
in  running  back. 


m  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

Most  plays  coming  against  the  center  are  de- 
layed plays  and  a  center  has  to  be  careful  that 
he  is  not  pulled  in  and  blocked  out  of  the  play. 
If  you  are  playing  a  couple  of  yards  back,  and 
are  watching  the  ball,  you  can  delay  a  moment 
until  you  are  sure  where  the  play  is  directed 
and  then  go  in.  I  think  it  poor  policy  to  try  to 
break  through,  but  that  you  ought  rather  to 
check  the  opponent  for  a  moment  and  after 
diagnosing  the  play  rush  for  it. 

This  new  game  affords  endless  opportunities 
for  a  man  who  can  think  quickly  and  is  fast. 
It  is  hard  to  mention  what  chances  will  occur, 
but  a  heady  player  is  one  who  is  going  to  be 
ready  for  the  chances  that  do  come.  Wliite, 
1911 's  All-American  end,  may  have  had  some 
luck  in  having  the  chances  he  had  against 
Yale  and  Harvard,  but  it  was  because  he  was 
wide-awake  that  he  could  take  advantage  of 
them.  Opportunities  to  recover  fumbles  are 
perhaps  offered  to  a  center  more  often  than 
to  other  members  of  the  team  because  he  is 
more  or  less  of  a  free  agent  after  his  pass  has 
been  completed  and  it  is  his  business  to  be  near 
the  ball. 

Passing  for  Field  Goals 

Too  often  the  man  who  runs  with  the  ball 
or  who  makes  a  kick  receives  all  the  reward, 
while  the  snapper-back  is  lost  sight  of.     How 


HOW   TO   PLAY   CENTER  67 

many  people  remember  the  name  of  the  center 
on  the  Harvard  team  which  beat  Yale  4-0  in 
1908?  The  name  of  Kennard  has  gone  down 
in  football  history  as  one  of  the  heroes  of  the 
game,  while  Nourse  is  probably  forgotten.  To 
my  mind,  Nourse  did  almost  as  much  toward 
winning  that  game  as  Kennard  did.  Imagine 
a  team  rushing  the  ball  down  the  field  until  it 
reaches  the  thirty-yard  line.  There  is  a  pause 
and  a  new  man  hurries  on  the  field.  Everj^ 
one  knows  what  is  going  to  happen.  Nourse 
and  Kennard  have  been  jjractising  together  for 
a  good  many  months  and  now  comes  the  crucial 
test.  Both  men  know  what  it  means.  If  the 
pass  is  high  or  low  the  opportunity  is  lost,  and 
the  strain  on  both  is  intense.  The  pass  comes 
back  true  and  the  goal  is  kicked.  But  can't  you 
understand  what  the  center  had  to  undergo 
and  how  much  depended  on  him!  That  is  the 
reason  why  the  center 's  position  is  difficult,  and 
wh}- 1  think  he  plays  almost  as  important  a  part 
as  the  kicker. 

I  want  to  call  attention  to  one  center  whom 
I  have  already  mentioned.  A  center  handi- 
capped by  a  small  physique  has  to  learn,  so  to 
speak,  * '  the  tricks  of  the  trade. ' '  This  is  what 
one  famous  Yale  center  did.  He  was  not  a  big 
man  but  he  was  an  accurate  passer  and  could 
stop  any  other  center  with  whom  he  came  in 
contact,  and  was  able  to  do  so  because  he  had 
learned  how  to  get  the  most  out  of  himself.  For 


68  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

instance,  when  playing  a  man  larger  than  your- 
self it  is  necessary  to  get  below  him  and  raise 
his  head.  In  opposing  a  center  you  can  use 
your  hands  on  the  defense  either  by  straight- 
arming  him,  or  raising  his  head  by  bringing 
one  arm  under  his  head  and  charging  at  the 
same  time.  If  one  is  quick  enough  this  will  stop 
any  man.  This  speed  and  skill  made  Morris 
able  to  ojDpose  and  better  nearly  every  center 
he  met. 

A  center  should  always  remember  that  his 
is  the  ''  pivotal  "  position.  He  is  at  the  center 
of  the  line  and  in  a  position  to  give  inspiration 
to  those  on  either  side  of  him.  This  is  an  addi- 
tional reason  why  he  should  keep  close  to  the 
ball  and  put  spirit  and  dash  into  his  work, 
appreciating  his  responsibilities.  He  is  the 
man  about  whom  the  team  lines  up.  He  should 
be  close  to  the  ball  when  it  is  downed,  ready  to 
step  up  and  take  possession  of  it.  If  the  center 
springs  to  his  position  with  confidence  and 
vigor  it  will  put  spirit  into  the  entire  team,  and 
spirited  team-play  wins  games. 

In  conclusion  let  me  state  what  I  think  are 
the  three  fundamentals  for  a  good  center  and 
which  ought  to  be  thought  of  continually.  First 
and  uppermost,  watch  your  passes  and  realize 
that  the  success  of  every  play  depends  upon 
you  and  your  passes.  Second,  use  your  hands 
on  the  defense.  This  use  of  the  hands  is  of  the 
greatest  importance  and  does  not  want  to  be 


HOW  TO  PLAY  CENTER  69 

neglected.  Third,  watch  the  ball  all  the  time. 
If  a  fellow  thinks  of  these  things  and  practises 
them  in  a  scrimmage,  he  may  help  his  own  game 
greatly. 


HOW    TO    PLAY    GUABD 

BY   JOSEPH    M.    DUFF 

As  we  were  told  down  at  Princeton,  the  main 
essentials  of  a  football  player,  no  matter  what 
his  position,  are :  1.  Follow  the  ball ;  2.  Fight, 
and  if  there  was  a  third  it  was  to  keep  on  fight- 
ing. By  * '  fight  "  I  do  not  mean  ' '  dirty  ' '  play, 
but  simply  hard  play ;  making  the  man  against 
you  know  that  you  are  there.  It  also  means  to 
keep  at  it.  Never  let  up  at  all,  for  a  let-up 
might  give  the  man  against  you  confidence, 
whereas  you  want  him  to  fear  you. 

The  first  five  minutes  in  a  game  between  two 
evenly  balanced  and  well  trained  teams,  usually 
sees  the  game  lost  or  won.  Perhaps  not  in  the 
score,  but  by  putting  confidence  in  one  team  and 
taking  it  away  from  the  other.  Therefore, 
when  you  go  into  a  game,  go  in  and  play  the 
first  five  minutes  with  all  your  might,  and  you 
will  find  that  as  the  game  goes  on  your  work 
will  get  easier  and  easier. 

The  first  thing  that  a  young  player  should 
learn  to  do  is  to  take  the  right  position  in  the 
line.  He  wants  to  take  a  position  that  is  both 
comfortable  and  easy,  that  is,  he  does  not  want 

70 


HOW  TO  PLAY  GUARD  71 

to  play  his  position  a  certain  way  because  he 
has  seen  some  one  else  do  it  that  way.  The 
position  should  be  crouching,  balancing  on  the 
toes,  so  that  the  opposing  players  cannot  easily 
push  him  back  or  to  the  side.  The  head  should 
be  up  in  the  air  so  that  he  can  watch  the  player 
opposite.  The  back  must  be  kept  straight  and 
stiff  in  order  to  have  strength. 

When  a  player  once  has  good  form  in  his 
position  all  he  needs  is  the  necessary  ''  never 
say  die  "  spirit  in  order  to  be  a  good  player. 
In  the  old  game  the  guard  had  a  limited  ground 
to  cover,  that  is,  the  opening  between  himself 
and  the  center  and  also  between  himself  and 
the  tackle.  But  in  the  new  game  there  is  no 
special  place  for  him  to  cover.  Of  course,  he 
must  above  all  else  see  that  no  gains  are  made 
through  him,  but  he  is  just  as  responsible  for 
plays  aromid  end  and  on  the  other  side  of  the 
line. 

To  do  these  things  a  good  guard  has  to  break 
through  the  opposing  line,  and  to  break  through 
that  line  he  has  to  charge  harder  and  faster 
than  the  men  opposed  to  him,  every  time.  This 
means  a  good  deal,  but  practice  in  sprint  start- 
ing will  soon  make  you  good  at  this.  Above  all 
else  when  charging,  charge  low.  To  charge 
high  is  the  same  as  not  charging  at  all  because 
as  soon  as  a  player  can  get  his  body  against 
yours  it  is  the  easiest  thing  in  the  world  to  stop 
you.    Now  when  I  say  charge  low,  I  do  not  mean 


72  THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

that  you  are  to  bury  your  head  and  go  in  blind. 
You  have  to  keep  your  head  up  in  order  to  see 
where  the  play  is  going.  A  good  method  of 
getting  a  low  charge  is  to  tie  a  string  between 
two  poles,  from  two  to  three  feet  (varjdng  with 
the  size  of  the  player)  and  practise  about  ten 
minutes  each  day  charging  under  the  string. 

Defensive  Play 

On  the  defense  a  good  guard  should  play 
about  a  yard  and  a  half  from  the  center,  and 
a  little  outside  the  man  opposed  to  him.  Watch 
the  ball  closely.  As  soon  as  it  is  snapped  by 
the  center,  charge  through  if  you  are  reason- 
ably sure  where  the  play  is  going.  If  you  are 
not  sure  where  it  is  going,  stiff-arm  the  player 
opposite  you  and  wait  to  see  where  the  play  is 
going  before  you  make  any  false  move. 

It  is  easy  to  stiff-arm  a  player,  for  you  know 
you  can  shift  your  hands  much  faster  than  you 
can  your  feet.  Wlien  you  stiff-arm  a  man  you 
place  your  arms,  with  your  hands  outstretched, 
against  his  head  or  shoulders,  and  hold  him  in 
this  way  at  arm's  length.  The  whole  use  of  this 
is  that  it  gives  you  time  to  see  the  play,  and  at 
the  same  time  keeps  your  opponent  from  push- 
ing you  back  and  thus  keeping  you  out  of  the 
play. 

On  the  offense  a  guard  has  a  hard  job.  Don't 
think  when  the  play  is  on  the  side  opposite  to 


HOW  TO  PLAY  GUARD  73 

you  that  you  have  nothing  to  do.  Your  duty 
is  to  go  through  and  get  the  secondary  defense. 
When  the  play  is  through  center,  you  must 
charge  shoulder  to  shoulder  with  the  center  and 
tackle.  When  the  play  is  on  the  tackle  you  must 
help  your  tackle  get  the  opposing  men  out  of 
the  way. 

On  the  kicks  the  guards  do  not  have  such 
hard  work.  If  the  kicker  is  slow  they  must 
check  their  man,  but  if  fast,  as  DeWitt  of 
Princeton,  they  check  just  for  an  instant  and 
then  go  down  the  field  with  the  ends  and  tackles. 
But  they  are  nevertheless  responsible  for  any 
man  that  gets  through  and  blocks  a  kick,  for  a 
blocked  kick  is  a  bad  thing,  and  often  leads  to 
the  losing  or  winning  of  a  game,  as  was  the  case 
in  the  Princeton-Harvard  and  Harvard-Dart- 
mouth games  of  1911.  There  is  no  excuse  for 
the  player  who  lets  another  block  a  kick,  for  the 
check  of  an  instant  is  generally  long  enough  to 
allow  the  kick  to  get  off  safely. 

The  Kicking  Game 

When  your  opponents  call  for  a  kick  forma- 
tion there  are  several  things  to  remember.  In 
the  first  place  if  the  ball  is  in  your  opponent's 
territory  it  will  generally  be  a  kick,  but  if  the 
ball  is  inside  your  forty  or  forty-five  yard  line 
you  have  to  watch  out  for  one  of  four  things :' 
1,  A  fake  play  through  the  center;    2,  A  for- 


74  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

ward  pass;  3,  A  run  around  the  end;  4,  A 
drop-kick. 

When  a  Mck  formation  is  called,  and  the  op- 
ponents take  their  positions,  look  to  see  if 
there  is  a  man  close  up  to  the  center,  who  is 
in  a  position  to  take  the  ball  from  center  and 
charge  through  the  line.  If  there  is  no  one  in 
this  position  a  guard  can  shift  out  pretty  far, 
but  if  there  is  a  man  there  the  guard  must  play 
in  close  and  keep  an  eye  on  this  man,  and  see 
that  he  does  not  take  the  ball  and  try  to  gain 
through  the  line. 

A  guard  is  directly  responsible  for  all  plays 
on  center.  You  are  not  responsible  for  a  for- 
ward pass,  but  you  should  try  to  block  it. 
When  you  see  them  try  a  run  around  end,  do 
not  run  directly  for  the  man  if  he  is  trying  to 
get  around  you,  but  run  right  straight  across 
the  field  so  that  you  will  either  meet  him  or 
drive  him  out  of  bounds  before  he  has  gained 
many  yards. 

My  last  admonition  is,  play  hard,  fast,  and 
clean,  and  above  all  never  give  up,  but  have  a 
determination  to  win  no  matter  how  great  the 
odds  against  yon.  This  is  the  spirit  that  counts 
in  football,  and  in  no  other  game  are  more  man- 
liness and  restraint  required. 


HOW    TO    PLAY    TACKLE 

BY    EDWARD    J.    HART 

To  play  the  position  of  tackle  well  the  young- 
man  must  be  fitted  for  the  place.  He  must  de- 
velop his  legs,  arms,  and  back  because  these 
parts  are  used  often  throughout  a  game.  After 
this  he  should  not  neglect  to  practise  quick 
starts,  and  so  train  his  muscles  to  act  instantly 
when  called  upon.  After  developing  and 
strengthening  the  important  parts  and  training 
the  muscles  for  speed  he  should  not  neglect  to 
gain  as  much  endurance  as  possible,  because, 
no  matter  how  big  his  muscles  may  be  or  how 
much  speed  he  has,  if  he  doesn't  have  a  fair 
amount  of  endurance  he  will  be  very  much 
handicapped.  One  cannot  develop  a  high  de- 
gree of  endurance  if  he  abuses  his  body  by 
smoking  or  other  dissipation. 

Remember  that  you  have  a  head  and  a  pair 
of  arms  and  use  them  every  second  of  the  game. 
On  the  defense  the  tackle  should  never  be  afraid 
of  playing  too  far  away  from  his  guard.  He 
should  take  his  position  directly  opposite  his 
end  or  in  fact  a  little  to  the  outside.  Right  here 
I  would  like  to  impress  upon  the  mind  of  the 

75 


76  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

young  tackle  that  lie  be  careful  not  to  play 
between  two  opponents  and  depend  on  his 
strength  to  go  between  them  to  get  the  man 
with  the  ball.  I  have  heard  of  big,  powerful 
tackles  doing  this  but  after  asking  them  if  they 
did  this  they  all  said  no.  They  would  appear 
to  the  spectator  to  be  playing  directly  between 
two  opponents,  but  just  as  soon  as  the  ball  was 
snapped  they  would  instantly  change  their  posi- 
tion to  the  outside  man,  and  either  charge  him 
on  to  his  help-mate  or  side-step  him. 

The  great  tackles  who  are  noted  for  giant 
strength  were  masters  at  using  their  brains. 
These  men  often  played  men  who  were  just  as 
powerful,  but  outplayed  them  because  they 
didn't  depend  upon  their  strength  entirely. 
The  great  players  are  constantly  figuring  how 
they  are  going  to  outguess  their  opponent  on 
the  next  play.  The  tackle  cannot  use  the  same 
tactics  throughout  the  contest.  He  has  to  have 
at  least  a  half-dozen  ways  of  charging  his  oppo- 
nent and  use  these  different  ways  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  opponent  cannot  diagnose  what 
he  is  going  to  do  next.  As  long  as  you  have 
your  opponent  guessing,  you  will  have  an  easy 
time,  but  just  as  soon  as  he  has  you  sized  up, 
no  matter  how  strong  you  are,  you  will  find 
much  trouble  ahead  of  you.  Just  as  soon  as 
the  ball  is  snapped,  the  heady  tackle  will  at- 
tempt to  be  at  a  point  different  from  where  his 
opponent  expected  him  to  be. 


HOW  TO  PLAY  TACKLE  77 

Use  Your  Arms 

mg  man  feels  that  lie  can  keep 

^'.-zd  he  must  learn  to  use  his 

.^istant  the  ball  is  snapped 

M  at  full  length,  and  with 

'■  '^^Joeed   " '         '  ■'"he 


n 

th 

out 

/  be 

.ul  to 

.  when 

itil  you 

J  get  the 

ays  to  do 

ickle  place 

opponent's 

IS  right  arm 

arm-pit.     If 

.  can  turn  him 

i  I  said  before, 

he  opponent  will 

'ms.     If  you  once 

,  well,  you  will  find 

rival. 


76 


THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 


young  tackle  that  he  be  careful  not^^'" 

between    two    opponents    and   depen "" 

strength  to  go  between  them  to 

with  the  ball.     I  have  hear'^ 

tackles  doing  this  but  aftei<^% 

did  this  they  all  said  no 

to+^ 


s\ 
TL 

po^ 

didn 

The  fe 

they  a^^ 

the  nex 

tactics  ti 

at  least  a 

nent  and 

manner  tha. 

he  is  going 

your  opponen  ^^^ 

time,  but  just 

no  matter  how 

much  trouble  ah 

the  ball  is  snapp 

tempt  to  be  at  a  pc 

opponent  expected 


HOW  TO  PLAY  TACKLE  77 

Use  Your  Arms 

After  a  young  man  feels  that  he  can  keep 
cool  and  use  his  head  he  must  learn  to  use  his 
arms.  Just  at  the  instant  the  ball  is  snapped 
he  must  shoot  his  arms  at  full  length,  and  with 
every  ounce  of  strength  and  speed,  against  the 
upper  portion  of  his  opponent's  body,  remem- 
bering at  the  same  time  to  keep  his  legs  as  far 
away  from  him  as  possible.  If  his  opponent 
gets  under  the  player 's  arms  so  that  he  has  him 
boxed,  the  one  that  is  boxed  should  never  try 
to  force  his  opponent  back  by  sheer  strength 
but  instead  back  away  and  get  to  the  man  with 
the  ball  at  once.  If  the  tackle  tries  to  get  out 
of  the  box  in  any  other  way  he  will  only  be 
wasting  his  time  and  energy.  So  be  careful  to 
see  that  your  arms  are  on  your  opponent  when 
the  ball  is  snapped,  and  hold  him  off  until  you 
find  out  what  course  to  take  in  order  to  get  the 
man  with  the  ball.  One  of  the  best  ways  to  do 
this  is  as  follows:  if  playing  left  tackle  place 
your  right  hand  on  the  side  of  your  opponent's 
neck  and  place  the  left  hand  on  his  right  arm 
around  the  triceps  or  under  the  arm-pit.  If 
you  get  him  in  this  position  you  can  turn  him 
in  any  direction  you  wish.  As  I  said  before, 
you  must  vary  your  attack  or  the  opponent  will 
be  able  to  get  under  your  arms.  If  you  once 
get  so  you  can  use  your  arms  well,  you  will  find 
little  trouble  handling  your  rival. 


78  THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

The  tackle  should  also  remember  to  charge 
everything  towards  the  middle  of  the  Ime.  For 
example,  as  soon  as  the  ball  is  snapped  he 
should  charge  in  on  the  outside  of  the  opposing 
end  and  be  in  such  a  position  that  the  man  with 
the  ball  will  be  unable  to  circle  around  his  end. 
When  the  man  with  the  ball  sees  a  big  tackle 
charging  in  so  that  he  can't  get  around  the  end 
he  will  try  to  cut  in  close  to  the  center  where 
it  will  be  much  harder  to  gain.  Very  often  the 
tackle  who  uses  his  arms  well,  will  be  able  to 
get  by  the  end  and  then  charge  in  so  as  to  get 
the  player  before  the  three  center  men.  Every 
instant  gained  in  this  way  counts  for  much. 

The  tackle  and  end  should  work  in  harmony 
with  each  other.  They  should  work  out  a  set 
of  signals  independent  of  the  team  signals;  in 
this  way  they  can  improve  their  game  to  such 
an  extent  that  they  will  be  a  hard  combination 
to  overcome.  By  working  together  I  have  seen 
many  a  tackle  gain  a  big  reputation  because  he 
had  a  good  end  helping  him,  and  vice  versa.  If 
the  tackle  runs  up  against  a  player  who  is  more 
than  his  match,  the  clever  end  can  save  him; 
on  the  other  hand,  a  clever  tackle  who  uses  his 
head  and  arms  can  stop  plays  from  reaching 
his  end,  thereby  saving  his  end  so  that  he  can 
keep  his  strength  to  do  other  things  such 
as  receiving  the  forward  pass,  running  down 
punts,  and  taking  the  ball  himself.  If  the  end 
is  obliged  to  do  the  tackle's  work  he  will  be  in 


HOW  TO  PLAY  TACKLE  79 

no  condition  to  cany  out  the  above  work  suc- 
cessfully. By  working  together  they  can  make 
each  other's  work  very  easy. 

Play  Hard 

Play  hard,  keep  cool,  fall  in  love  with  your 
position;  no  matter  how  tired  you  are  remem- 
ber that  your  opponent  is  just  as  tired,  and 
perhaps  more  so,  and  this  is  the  time  when  you 
should  charge  against  him  harder  than  ever. 
Make  him  believe  that  you  are  as  fresh  as  you 
were  the  moment  you  started. 

On  the  offense,  the  tackle  should  play  close 
to  his  guard.  As  a  rule,  on  all  plays  inside  of 
tackle  he  should  help  his  guard  and  on  all  plays 
outside  help  the  end.  Of  course,  if  the  guard 
is  able  to  handle  his  man  alone  the  tackle  can 
help  the  end.  If  the  end  can  handle  his  man, 
the  tackle  can  use  his  judgment  and  so  play  as 
to  get  the  maximum  efficiency  out  of  both  his 
partners  and  himself.  On  the  offense  the  tackle 
should  play  as  close  to  the  ground  as  possible 
and  charge  with  a  terrific  drive  from  his  legs. 
Charge  low  and  hard  and  never  straighten  up 
unless  you  have  your  opponent  on  your  shoul- 
ders. The  tackle  who  charges  low,  quick,  and 
hard  will  be  a  hard  player  to  defeat.  Here 
again  I  would  strongly  advise  the  tackle  to 
charge  neither  ahead  nor  behind  his  guard  or 
end,  they  must  be  shoulder  to  shoulder  or  a 


80  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

clever  opponent  will  side-step  and  get  in  be- 
tween them. 

In  conclusion,  don 't  forget  to  use  your  hands 
and  arms.  Go  at  your  work  to  make  it  enjoy- 
able. Remember  that  a  player  who  won't  be 
outplayed  can't  be  outplayed.  After  each 
charge  and  tackle,  make  up  your  mind  to  do  a 
little  better  the  next  time.  Never  be  satisfied 
that  you  have  done  well;  there  is  always  a 
chance  for  improvement.  The  best  tackle  that 
ever  lived  learned  something  in  his  last  game. 
Work  from  the  time  the  official  blows  his  whistle 
until  the  finish.  If  you  walk  off  the  field  not 
feeling  tired  you  can  rest  assured  that  you  have 
not  done  your  duty,  but  if  you  give  every  ounce 
that's  in  you  for  every  second,  win  or  lose,  you 
will  always  have  a  clear  conscience. 


TACKLE    PLAY 

BY   LELAND   S.   DEVORE 

The  key  to  successful  football  playing,  as 
well  as  to  any  other  athletic  success,  is  largely 
experience.  That  which  applies  to  a  tackle  is 
applicable  in  many  ways  to  any  man  on  a  foot- 
ball team.  To  be  a  player  who  can  hold  his 
own  in  the  game  of  to-day,  it  is  necessary  to 
have  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  fundamen- 
tals, which  can  only  be  obtained  by  practice  — 
by  years  of  experience  from  boyhood  up.  No 
matter  what  class  of  team  one  plays  on,  the 
football  sense  is  bound  to  come  if  the  player 
has  the  energy  and  ambition  to  keep  at  it.  He 
should  benefit  by  the  bad,  as  well  as  by  the  good 
plays;  by  his  opponent's  style  of  offense  as 
well  as  defense.  In  a  season  of  eight  or  nine 
games,  by  getting  even  one  point  from  each  op- 
ponent, a  player's  all-round  ability  should  be 
strengthened. 

There  are  ''  knacks  "  in  all  our  games,  but 
probably  more  at  football  than  any  other.  The 
little  fellow  who  knows  how  is  of  more  service 
to  his  team  than  the  big,  lubberly  man  put  in 
on  account  of  his  weight  and  strength.    Brute 

81 


82  THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

force  can  accomplish  some  things,  bnt  can  never 
hope  to  match  science  in  anything  along  the  line 
of  athletics,  or  in  any  other  direction  where  the 
force  of  brains  and  energy  have  play.  Obvi- 
ously, the  strapping,  big  fellow  who  can  combine 
science  with  cultivated  natural  abilities  is  what 
we  want  on  our  college  teams,  and  an  effort  is 
made  to  obtain  material  which  will  develop  up 
to  this  standard. 

When  the  freshmen  come  in  in  the  fall  you 
do  not  see  all  the  ''  last  year  "  men  looking 
over  the  runts,  for  in  the  end  it  is  better  to 
spend  two,  three,  or  even  four  years  to  develop 
a  big  man  into  a  'varsity  player  than  to  work 
on  a  likely  small  man  for  a  year  or  so,  and  at 
last  have  to  discard  him,  or  keep  him  on  the 
scrubs  because  of  his  lack  of  weight.  Of  course, 
there  are  exceptions  to  this,  but  they  are  not 
many. 

The  tackle,  in  the  running  game  particularly, 
is  the  man  upon  whom  most  of  the  work  falls, 
and  for  a  team  to  make  a  successful  season,  it 
is  up  to  him  to  make  good.  On  the  offensive, 
both  in  line  plunging  and  running  the  ends,  he 
must  do  effective  work  in  opening  holes  and 
making  interference.  The  man  with  the  ball  is 
absolutely  helpless  without  a  space  opened  up 
for  him  to  go  through.  If  the  tackle  does  not 
get  his  opponent  out  of  the  way,  his  back  carry- 
ing the  ball  either  bumps  into  his  own  men  or 
runs  into  the  arms  of  the  linemen  on  the  other 


TACKLE   PLAY  83 

side.  The  reason  that  this  work  falls  upon  the 
tackle  is  that  most  line  plays  in  the  present 
game  are  "  skin  tackle,"  plays  in  which  the 
back  goes  over  the  taclde  or  jnst  outside.  If  the 
offensive  taclde  does  not  put  his  man  clear  out, 
the  back  would  save  himself  a  strenuous  effort 
by  yelling  '^  Down!  "  He  is  helpless  without 
his  helpers. 

The  success  of  every  team  depends  upon 
every  man  doing  his  assigned  duty,  for  if  one 
man  out  of  the  eleven  shirks,  the  play  is  spoiled. 
When  a  hole  is  once  made  and  the  man  carrying 
the  ball  safely  through,  the  majority  of  players 
think  they  have  done  their  share  of  the  work, 
but  they  have  not.  It  is  up  to  them  to  be  up 
and  away,  looking  all  the  time  for  another  man 
who  may  be  dangerous  to  the  success  of  a  play ; 
to  keep  hustling  until  the  ball  is  down.  Never 
stop  for  a  horn  when  you  hear  it,  unless  you 
see  the  ball  is  down,  but  play  harder  than  ever, 
for  if  it  is  a  penalty  against  your  opponents 
you  may  have  your  choice  of  a  tifty-yard  run 
or  a  five-yard  gain  for  off-side  play.  But  if  you 
see  that  the  ball  is  down,  there  is  no  use  in  your 
piling  on,  shoving,  or  pulling,  because  the  ball 
will  be  brought  back  and  the  offending  man  will 
cause  a  penalty  loss  of  five,  ten,  or  fifteen  yards 
to  his  team  instead  of  gaining  a  measly  yard 
or  two. 

Wlien  the  ball  is  going  over  the  opposite  side 
of  the  line,  the  tackle  has  his  hardest  work  to 


84  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

do,  for  if  his  running  mate  does  his  work  well, 
it  de^Dends  on  him  whether  the  back  makes  a 
gain  of  five  yards  or  lengthens  it  into  fifteen, 
twenty,  or  even  a  touchdown.  It  is  his  duty 
then  to  put  out  the  men  playing  back,  for  they 
spoil  ninety  per  cent,  of  all  plays.  In  one  of 
our  biggest  games  of  a  recent  season  we  went 
over  for  a  touchdown  in  less  than  three  min- 
utes from  the  kick-off  just  because  our  linemen 
broke  through  and  put  the  opposing  secondary 
defense  out  of  the  play.  It  would  be  a  safe 
wager  now  to  say  that  team  does  not  know  how 
we  went  through  them  as  we  did.  It  was  sim- 
ply a  case  of  blocking  the  men  who  could  spoil 
the  play. 

On  the  defensive,  the  tackle  is  the  most  val- 
uable man  to  his  team,  and  he  should  be  made 
to  understand  that  he  is  directly  responsible 
for  all  line  plays  and  end  runs  on  his  side  of 
the  line.  No  interference  has  ever  been  in- 
vented that  cannot  be  absolutely  ruined  by  a 
tackle  and  his  side  partner,  the  end.  With  a 
heavy  end  next  to  you,  either  can  break  up  the 
interference  and  the  other  get  the  man,  but  with 
a  light  end  the  tackle  must  scatter  the  inter- 
ference, and  if  possible,  get  the  man  carrying 
the  ball.  On  seventy-five  per  cent,  of  line-bucks 
on  his  side  of  the  line  he  should  get  the  man 
carrying  the  ball  before  he  reaches  the  line  of 
scrimmage;  it  takes  fast  and  powerful  work, 
but  a  tackle  can  never  hope  to  be  a  first-class 


TACKLE   PLAY  85 

player  unless  he  has  speed  and  muscle.  In  case 
of  a  forward  pass  the  tackle  is  responsible  for 
the  man  on  the  end  of  the  opposing  line  who 
is  eligible  to  receive  it.  He  must  get  him  out. 
Stay  on  the  job  and  keep  busy;  do  something 
every  moment.  Every  play  of  every  man 
should  be  clean  and  above  reproach.  No  one 
should  attempt  to  wantonly  injure  another,  or 
let  his  temper  interfere  with  his  judgment  or 
his  gentlemanly  action.  The  spirit  of  sport  and 
friendly  rivalry  should  be,  and  can  be,  fostered 
by  manly  aggressiveness. 

A  tackle's  position  on  the  offense  is  practi- 
cally the  same  as  the  guard's.  He  should  be 
facing  the  line  squarely,  with  legs  well  under 
him,  feet  separated  far  enough  to  keep  from 
being  pushed  sideways,  with  most  of  the  weight 
on  the  feet,  but  both  hands  resting  on  the 
ground  even  with  the  near  end  of  the  ball,  with 
sufficient  weight  on  them  to  carry  him  forward 
when  they  are  taken  off  the  ground.  The  back 
should  be  straight  and  sloping  slightly  from  the 
shoulders  to  the  rear.  Hold  the  head  always 
erect.  Play  as  close  to  the  guard  as  is  possi- 
ble without  impeding  your  movements.  Have 
a  complete  set  of  signals  with  your  guard  so 
that  you  can  work  together  successfully.  Im- 
press upon  him  that  he  is  to  help  you  put  the 
opposing  man  out  when  you  touch  him  on  the 
hand;  or  that  you  will  help  him  put  his  man 
in  when  you  hit  his  arm  or  shoulder.     This 


86  THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

coordination  is  necessary  for  effective  work. 
When  the  signal  is  sounded  to  snap  the  ball 
back,  be  off  with  it.  You  can  or  should  be  into 
your  man  before  he  knows  the  ball  is  in  play; 
keep  low  so  that  you  can  get  under  him;  keep 
your  hands  down  and  jDut  your  shoulder  and 
body  into  him.  The  man  who  gets  the  jump  is 
the  man  who  can  handle  his  opponent.  If  you 
want  to  put  your  man  in,  let  your  head  be  on  the 
outside  of  him  so  that  he  has  to  pass  inside  of 
you  to  get  through,  and  as  the  play  is  going  on 
the  outside  just  put  your  inside  shoulder  against 
him  and  see  that  he  keeps  on  the  outside.  You 
have  your  body  between  him  and  the  play,  so 
there  is  no  reason  for  his  getting  into  the  play 
at  all.  If  you  are  not  required  to  make  a  hole, 
as  soon  as  the  ball  is  snapped  back  you  should 
be  away,  hit  your  opponent  and  go  down  the 
field  after  the  secondary  defense.  Follow  the 
ball  so  that  when  it  is  down  you  will  be  near  it ; 
help  your  backs  up,  and  get  into  your  place  in 
the  line.  Rest  on  one  knee  until  your  quarter 
starts  his  signals  when  you  take  your  charging 
position.  On  kicks,  hold  until  you  know  the  ball 
has  been  kicked  and  not  blocked,  then  hustle 
down  the  field. 

In  plajdng  the  tackle  position,  when  your 
team  kicks,  a  great  deal  depends  on  whether 
you  play  on  the  right  or  left  side  of  the  line, 
and  also  on  whether  your  kicker  boots  with  his 
right  or  left  foot.    Most  men  kick  with  their 


TACKLE   PLAY  87 

right  foot,  and  if  you  are  playing  right  tackle 
you  must  take  especial  care  that  no  one  breaks 
through  you.  You  are  not  only  responsible  for 
the  player  opposite  you,  but  also  for  any  one 
else  who  tries  to  get  through  your  position  and 
block  the  kick.  But  remember  that  your  first 
responsibility  is  your  immediate  opponent.  If 
you  play  left  tackle  there  is  little  likelihood  that 
an  opposing  player  who  is  opposite  you  can 
reach  a  man  kicking  with  his  right  foot.  The 
punter  naturally  steps  a  bit  to  the  right  in  kick- 
ing, and  so  away  from  any  one  breaking 
through  on  the  left  side  of  the  line.  Thus  the 
left  tackle  has  less  responsibility  in  blocking  in 
the  case  of  a  ''  right-footed  "  kicker.  If  you 
are  playing  that  position  you  need  worry  only 
about  your  immediate  opponent,  and  should 
endeavor  to  throw  him  back  and  off  his  balance 
so  that  you  can  be  in  a  position  to  hustle  down 
the  field  as  soon  as  you  know  the  punt  is  away 
safely.  Do  not  depend  upon  the  end  to  get  the 
man  who  received  the  punt.  The  end  may  have 
been  blocked  and  you  have  an  almost  equally 
good  opportunity  to  make  the  tackle.  Use  your 
speed  and  follow  the  ball  down.  If  it  is  caught, 
get  the  man.  If  it  is  fumbled,  be  on  top  of  it. 
You  have  an  especial  responsibility  if  the  punt 
has  been  short,  for  the  ends  have  probably 
dashed  farther  down  the  field  and  are  not  in 
a  position  to  stop  the  man  who  receives  the 
ball.    In  this  case  the  duty  devolves  upon  the 


88  THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

tackle.    All  this  is  reversed  if  your  punter  kicks 
with  his  left  foot. 

There  is  more  knack  in  defensive  play  than 
in  offensive.  The  position  of  the  tackle  is  dif- 
ferent; he  should  always  play  a  foot  or  two 
outside  the  man  on  the  end  of  the  line.  Play 
rather  high,  legs  slightly  bent  with  hands  on 
the  knees,  or  on  the  ground,  but  the  weight 
should  be  on  the  legs.  It  is  on  the  defensive 
that  a  tackle  has  a  chance  to  display  his  foot- 
ball sense.  Keep  your  head  up.  Over  half  the 
time  you  will  know  where  the  ball  is  going 
before  it  is  even  put  in  play.  When  you  know, 
yell  out,  so  that  the  opposing  team  will  know 
you  know,  and  your  own  team  will  benefit  by 
your  knowledge.  Wlien  the  ball  is  snapped,  be 
sure  of  getting  the  end.  Put  your  inside  hand 
on  his  neck  or  shoulder,  the  other  near  his  hip ; 
keep  him  away  from  you.  Hold  your  head  up 
all  the  time  watching  the  ball  every  instant.  If 
you  see  a  line  play  coming  throw  him  into  it 
if  you  possibly  can.  Otherwise  pivot  around 
him  and  get  into  it  yourself.  If  an  end  run  is 
being  attempted,  put  the  end  out  of  the  play  and 
go  into  the  interference  with  the  idea  of  getting 
the  man  carrying  the  ball.  Use  your  hands  all 
the  time;  efficiency  in  their  use  means  your 
success  on  the  defensive.  When  you  get  near 
the  man  with  the  ball  tackle  him  —  which  is  a 
lot  easier  said  than  done.  When  you  tackle  go 
into  the  man  hard;    wrap  both  arms  around 


TACKLE  PLAY  89 

his  legs,  and  wrap  them  with  all  the  strength 
you  have.  Keep  your  hands  closed  and  thus 
save  broken  fingers.  For  the  average  player 
a  point  about  the  knees  is  the  best  place  to  aim 
for.  A  big  man  can  do  good  tackling  around 
the  neck,  but  this  takes  weight  and  confidence 
in  one's  ability  to  hold.  The  tackle  about  the 
legs  is  more  sure. 

Never  slow  down  before  tackling,  for  the 
man  going  the  slower  will  get  the  harder  bump. 
Just  before  you  get  within  tackling  distance  put 
all  the  power  and  energy  you  have  into  the  last 
two  or  three  steps  before  you  meet  the  runner, 
and  instead  of  having  him  fall  forward  and 
gaining  two  or  three  yards,  you  will  throw  him 
back  for  a  loss.  This  tackle  successfully  played 
encourages  every  man  on  the  team,  puts  ginger 
into  his  nerves,  and  makes  him  brace  up  ready 
and  alert  for  any  regular  or  surprise  play  which 
the  opposition  may  uncover.  It  is  catching,  and 
every  man  on  the  team  tries  to  do  better  than 
any  other.  This  spirit,  with  team-work  and 
friendly  fighting,  is  what  accomplishes  things 
worth  while  and  wins  games. 

In  a  few  words,  the  work  of  a  tackle  consists 
in  playing  low  and  charging  hard  when  on  the 
offensive,  and  using  the  hands  when  on  the 
defensive.  Aggressiveness  at  all  times  is  a 
winning  quality,  other  things  being  equal. 
Quickness  to  diagnose  a  play  is  a  very  helpful 
element  to  success.     When  you  have  made  up 


90  THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

your  mind  as  to  what  is  coming,  or  what  is  to 
be  done,  act  quickly,  and  put  forth  all  the  power 
you  have.  Talk  to  the  men  near  you,  help  them 
when  you  can,  always  be  on  the  jump.  Take 
advantage  of  every  opportunity,  profit  by  every 
misplay,  and  keep  on  the  firing  line,  using 
every  missile  of  science  and  strength,  of  skill 
and  energy  until  a  victory  is  won  —  or  a  cred- 
itable game  lost. 


A   FEW   FACTS   ON   END   PLAY 

BY   HUNTINGTON    R.    HARDWICK 

A  COMPREHENSIVE  study  of  end  play  would 
make  a  book  in  itself.  In  this  instance  I 
shall  undertake  to  show  merely  the  skeleton 
structure  of  correct  end  play,  supplemented 
with  a  few  examples  of  the  finer  points. 

The  subject  can  conveniently  be  divided 
into  three  parts,  viz: 

1.  The  Forward  Pass. 

2.  The  Kicking  Game. 

3.  The  Running  Attack. 

These  I  shall  treat  in  the  above  order,  from 
the  defensive  and  offensive  points  of  view. 

Forward  Pass 

Defensively 

Under  ordinary  conditions,  the  fundamental 
defensive  requirement  for  an  end  against  the 
forward   pass   is   to   develop   the   play.     By 

91 


92       THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

^'develop  the  play,"  I  mean  by  aggressively 
attacking  the  passer  to  force  him  to  pass  at 
once,  —  to  hurry  his  pass.  If  you  permit  the 
passer  plenty  of  time  to  look  over  the  field, 
pick  his  receiver,  and  have  an  opportunity  of 
carefully  timing  his  speed,  the  chances  greatly 
favor  a  successful  completion  of  the  play. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  you  can  press  him  so 
closely  that  his  one  idea  is  to  get  rid  of  the 
ball,  his  choice  of  receiver,  judgment  of  dis- 
tance, and,  most  important,  his  timing  are 
thrown  out,  as  in  the  final  analysis  the  forward 
pass  boils  down  to  a  question  of  accurate 
timing,  the  play  seldom  succeeds.  Care 
must  be  exercised  in  not  committing  yourseK 
too  quickly,  only  to  see  the  play  develop  into 
a  fake  pass  and  then  sweep  around  your 
end. 

No  rule,  of  course,  can  be  definitely  set; 
—  there  being  always  exceptions.  There  are 
times  when  it  is  evident  from  either  the  down 
and  distance  to  be  gained,  the  time  of  play,  or 
the  formation  employed,  that  a  long  forward 
pass  is  your  opponent's  only  recourse  and  that 
the  chances  of  an  end  run  are  practically  nil. 
In  that  case  it  is  frequently  advisable  to  drop 
back  off  the  line  of  scrimmage,  tending  wide, 
and  assist  your  defensive  backs  in  covering 
the  dangerous  area  open  to  passes.  For 
example,  your  team  leads  7  to  3,  it  is  nearing 
the  end  of  the  final  period,  your  opponents 


11  \  M  \  \     \  i:  s    \UD    MAKINO    A    LONd     1  x  i'     i:  I    \     1  \     ii  \  i:  \    \  i: 

Hui.v  (  i;().^,-,  i.A.MK,  1913.    FOUK  HOLY  cuo.ss  i'i.AVi;i:.>  nA\i.i;i.;.: 

PUT  Ol  T   OF    THE    PLAY     BY    THE    HAKVAKO    INTKIU' K1{EN(  t, 
AND    THE    Ul'NNEK    IS    (;IVKX    A    Sl'LKNDIIJ    nPESINCi. 


1  11,  'i;  II,  Ml    '  A  i;  I,  IS  1.1,  s  1  VK  iiNi;  I  IN   v  i.km,  i;mi  kin  in  iiak\  a  k: 

t  AltHSLE    (;A>IE,     I'Jll.        NHTi;     INTI,liH;Kli.N(-K 
GIVEN    THE    INDIAN     I'LAVEK. 


aasrfT,i*^ 


lr\ri>\\l'   K      '1       l.\l   \    \RD     MAKINd       -       ■■  I  >SFl'L     END     Rl'N     IN 

I1AU\  AUI'-'.    VI  1,    u  OIE,   1913.       NiM,       IN  I      l:l  ERENCE    ON    END, 

AND  Nl  MBE14  OF  YALE  PLAYEli.1  VI  H  OLT  OF  THE  PLAY. 

THE  VALVE  OF  INTERFERE^'CE 


A  FEW   FACTS  ON  END  PLAY    93 

have  the  ball  on  their  own  30-yard  line  — 
only  a  touchdown  can  win  the  game  —  it  is 
only  intelligent  to  expect  a  pass  and  you  can 
afford  partially  to  weaken  your  defense 
against  a  running  attack  to  make  sure  that  no 
wild  gambol  in  a  forward  pass  turn  almost 
certain  victory  into  last-minute  defeat. 

Press  The  Passer 


Offensively 

The  forward  pass  is  employed  in  so  many 
ways,  —  some  depending  on  plain  speed, 
others  on  delay  and  deception  —  that  the 
subject  can  be  treated  only  by  general  rules. 

An  end  must  be  able  to  handle  the  football 
as  though  it  were  a  baseball.  Constant 
practice  in  catching  it  in  one's  hands,  either 
high  or  low,  running  or  standing,  is  essential. 
Toss  a  ball  about  in  odd  moments  with  a  team- 
mate or  friend  until  it  is  almost  second  nature 
to  catch  it. 

The  actual  plays  themselves  depend  largely 
on  perfect  cooperation  between  passer  and 
receiver.  They  must  constantly  practice  so 
that  the  passer  can  accurately  judge  the  speed 
of  the  end  and  time  his  pass  accordingly,  as 
well  as  have  a  complete  understanding  of  the 
little  finished  points  pertaining  to  the  indi- 
vidual plays. 


94       THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

Kicking  Game 

Defensively 

The  defensive  work  of  an  end  against  the 
kicking  game  is  very  similar  to  that  employed 
against  the  forward  pass  —  that  is,  develop 
the  play.  Hurry  the  kicker.  Block  it  if  you 
can,  of  course,  but  make  him  kick  as  quickly 
as  possible.  This  pressing  hinders  his  accur- 
acy, frequently  resulting  in  short  kicks  and 
also  permitting  the  opposing  ends  and  line 
less  time  to  get  down  the  field  to  cover 
them. 

Here  again  care  must  be  exercised  not  to 
commit  yourself  too  quickly  and  leave  your 
end  vulnerable  to  a  sweeping  run.  A  knowl- 
edge of  the  down  and  distance  to  be  gained 
and  the  position  on  the  field  —  in  other  words 
a  bit  of  common  sense  as  to  whether  a  kick  is 
the  opponents'  intelligent  choice  of  play  — 
usually  takes  care  of  this  difficulty. 

There  are  times,  however,  when  you  will  be 
fooled.  I  personally  distinctly  remember  one 
such  case.  Yale  had  the  ball  on  her  own  14- 
yard  line,  third  down  and  12  yards  to  gain  — 
they  lined  up  in  a  kick  formation.  A  kick  was 
the  orthodox  play  to  call  in  such  a  precarious 
position.  I  cut  in  sharply  to  block  the  kick, 
only  to  see  the  Yale  backs  skirt  my  end  for 
40  yards.     A  run,  however,  under  such  cir- 


A  FEW  FACTS  ON   END  PLAY    95 

cumstances  will  seldom  be  called  and  a  think- 
ing player  can  almost  invariably  anticipate 
the  play. 

Nothing  so  upsets  a  team's  confidence  and 
destroys  the  effectiveness  of  their  attack  as 
to  have  their  kicker  harried,  or  a  kick 
blocked. 

There  are  innumerable  little  tricks  that  the 
end  and  tackle  can  work  up  to  fool  the  pro- 
tecting back.  The  chances  of  blocking  the 
kick  are  greatly  facilitated  if  they  work  in 
conjunction  with  the  idea  of  getting  one  or  the 
other  clear  into  the  kicking  zone,  rather  than 
both  individually  attempting  to  do  it  by  them- 
selves. 

A  close  scrutiny  of  your  opponent's  kickers 
as  they  warm  up  in  kicking  practice  before 
the  game  can  be  of  considerable  assistance  in 
blocking  a  kick.  Watch  each  kicker  to  see 
whether  he  steps  straight  ahead  in  kicking  or 
whether  he  steps  off  on  an  angle.  Also  notice 
the  number  of  steps  he  takes  in  getting  the 
kick  off.  A  common  fallacy  in  blocking  punts 
or  drop  kicks  is  to  watch  W'here  the  kicker 
stands  and  then  charge  that  spot,  only  to  find 
that  in  stepping  fo^v^'ard  to  kick  his  leg  is 
inside  you  and  although  you  are  close  to  his 
body,  the  kick  is  safe.  Remember,  he  kicks 
with  his  foot,  not  his  body,  and  your  task  is 
to  be  in  front  of  his  foot.  So,  study  the  kicker 
in  practice,  and  you  can  easily  gauge  the  exact 


96       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

spot  in  which  you  must  be  successfully  to 
block  the  kick. 

If  you  fail  to  block  the  kick,  follow  the 
kicker  and  backs  down  the  field  prepared  to 
make  interference  if  your  receiving  back  gets 
loose  on  a  long  run. 

Press  The  Kicker 


Offensively 

Offensively  the  kick  is  one  of  the  strongest 
plays  in  football  and  the  duties  of  an  end  are 
of  great  importance.  The  first  feature  is  to 
give  protection  to  the  kicker,  to  be  sure  he  has 
time  to  get  his  kick  off  well.  It  is  a  sound 
rule  on  your  first  kick  to  bump  the  opposing 
tackle,  forcing  him  outside  you  before  you  go 
down  the  field.  You  can  soon  judge  whether 
he  is  dangerous  to  the  play.  If  he  is  an 
aggressive,  charging  player,  go  inside  him 
always  and  sacrifice  speed  in  covering  the 
kick  to  safety  in  protection.  If,  however,  he 
is  playing  a  waiting  game,  you  can  afford  to 
break  wide  and  go  down  outside  him. 

Assured  that  you  have  given  ample  pro- 
tection the  next  duty  is  to  cover  the  kick  as 
quickly  as  possible.  The  defensive  backs  are 
prepared  to  block  your  way.  There  are  two 
methods  generally  employed  by  them.  First, 
to  bump  you  shortly  after  you  cross  the  line 


A  FEW  FACTS  ON   END  PLAY    97 

of  scrimmage,  and  second,  to  follow  you  down 
the  field  and  take  you  out  just  before  you  are 
to  make  the  tackle.  In  the  former  case  the 
end  should  have  no  excuse  if  he  is  stopped. 
A  good  open-field  runner  feels  disgruntled  if 
a  tackier  pulls  him  down  in  a  clear  field.  In 
that  case  the  tackier  can  use  both  arms  to  pull 
the  runner  down,  and  the  runner  has  only  one 
arm  free  to  ward  him  off.  Whereas  an  end 
going  down  under  a  kick  has  both  arms  free, 
and  the  interferer  is  not  permitted  to  use 
either  of  his.  No  difficulty  should  be  en- 
countered in  getting  by. 

The  latter  case,  however,  is  more  difficult, 
as  the  defensive  back  attacks  you  when  your 
attention  is  centered  on  the  receiver  of  the 
kick.  The  best  weapons  for  protection  in 
this  case  are  speed  and  use  of  hands.  Out- 
run him.  If  failing  that,  prevent  him  from 
getting  into  your  body  by  using  your  hands. 
Hold  him  off. 

Once  underway  and  shortly  after  you  hear 
the  thud  of  the  kick,  look  over  your  inside 
shoulder  to  ascertain  the  length  and  direction 
of  the  kick.  By  practice  you  can  learn  to 
judge  this  at  a  glance.  A  good  outfielder 
after  a  long  fly,  turns  almost  at  the  crack  of 
the  bat  and  runs  with  back  to  the  diamond 
turning  just  in  time  to  relocate  the  ball  and 
make  the  catch.  The  same  accuracy  and 
speed  of  judgment  can  be  acquired  by  an  end. 


98       THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

In  addition  by  watching  the  eyes  and  feet  of 
the  receiver  you  can  pretty  thoroughly  gauge 
the  flight  of  the  ball. 

Guard  the  outside  so  that  in  case  you  mis- 
judge the  ball  or  miss  the  tackle  the  back  does 
not  run  outside  you,  but  inside  where  the 
majority  of  your  linemen  are  following  you 
down.  Be  on  the  lookout  for  fumbles  which 
happen  even  with  the  surest  of  receivers,  and 
which  if  you  are  on  the  alert  can  be  turned 
into  a  long  gain  for  your  team,  if  not  a  touch- 
down. 

Remember,  Protection  First,  then  Cover 
THE  Kick 

The  Running  Attack 

I  have  treated  this  department  of  football 
last,  as  I  consider  it  the  most  important. 
Recoveries  of  fumbles,  fluke  plays,  and  long 
passes  occasionally  bring  victories,  but  a  team 
to  be  consistently  successful  must  be  able  to 
gain  through  its  running  attack.  Other  de- 
partments bring  the  "breaks"  or  opportunities 
that  put  a  team  in  a  scoring  position,  but  then 
the  running  attack  must  be  able  to  take  advan- 
tage of  the  opening.  Gaining  ground  through 
a  running  attack  is  the  very  foundation  on 
which  the  game  is  built. 


A   FEW   FACTS   ON   END   PLAY     99 

Defensively 

There  are  two  main  forms  of  defensive  end 
play,  — one  a  waiting  defense  on  the  line  of 
scrimmage,  the  other  an  aggressive  game 
across  the  line  of  scrimmage.  The  latter,  to 
my  mind,  is  far  more  sound,  and  therefore  I 
shall  not  discuss  the  former  method. 

The  moment  the  ball  is  snapped,  get  across 
the  line  of  scrimmage.  The  main  requisite  is 
to  prevent  any  play  from  going  outside  you. 
Turn  it  in  where  your  line  and  defensive  backs 
have  a  better  opportunity  of  making  the 
tackle  for  a  little  or  no  gain.  If  the  play 
comes  on  your  side,  unquestionably  inter- 
ferers  will  be  sent  against  you.  Do  not  allow 
them  to  get  into  your  body.  This  can  be 
prevented  only  by  use  of  hands.  With  your 
body  well  forward,  get  your  hands  on  the 
shoulder  or  shoulders  of  the  interferers^and 
keep  them  at  arms  length.  If  they  are  com- 
ing too  hard  to  hold,  you  can  retreat  with 
them,  but  always  holding  them  off  and  al- 
ways being  in  a  position  to  break  out  or  in, 
in  accordance  with  the  movement  of  runner. 
With  practice  you  can  readily  learn  to  handle 
the  interferers  and  still  keep  an  eye  on  the 
runner.  If  the  play  develops  on  the  other 
side,  follow  at  full  speed  after  making  certain 
that  the  play  does  not  develop  into  a  criss- 
cross and  catch  you  off  your  guard.     Often  a 


100     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

good  end  can  get  a  play  around  the  opposite 
side  when  the  runner  slows  up  to  dodge  or  is 
partially  stopped  by  a  tackier.  Also  many  a 
fumble  can  be  recovered  if  you  are  alert. 

Remember,  Get  Your  Hands  on  the  In- 
terferers  and  let  nothing  go  out- 

SIDE   You 

Offensively 

There  are  so  many  fascinating  and  varied 
fine  points  of  offensive  end  play  on  the  run- 
ning attack  that  I  am  bewildered  as  to  where 
to  start.  No  part  of  football  can  give  more 
fun  than  end  play  on  the  offense  if  done 
intelligently,  and  no  part  can  be  more 
drudgery  if  the  true  conception  of  your  func- 
tion in  the  success  of  the  play  is  not  under- 
stood. Your  duties  are  legion,  and  how  far 
you  carry  them  out  is  dependent  solely  on  how 
willing  you  are  to  play  the  game  to  your  limit. 

With  plays  directed  on  your  side  of  the 
line,  ordinarily  your  duty  is  to  box  the  tackle 
—  putting  him  either  in  or  out.  Now^  almost 
invariably  a  tackle  is  a  big,  powerful,  and 
aggressive  player,  whereas  quite  frequentl}''  an 
end  is  considerably  more  slight.  The  task 
looks  hopeless.  But  a  small  man  playing 
with  both  body  and  head  can  handle  a  far 
bigger  tackle.  There  is  a  mistaken  theory 
that  properly  to  give  interference  you  must 


A  FEW  FACTS  ON  END  PLAY    101 

knock  your  opponent  on  his  back.  It's  wrong. 
A  lot  of  satisfaction  is  tliereby  derived,  he  is 
unquestionably  temporarily  out  of  the  play, 
but  frequently  you  are  worse  off  because  you 
fall  with  him  and  are  out  of  further  participa- 
tion in  that  play. 

Tackling  is  dependent  on  timing  —  a  frac- 
tion of  a  second  in  meeting  the  running  back 
—  thus  if  you  can  block  the  tackier  that  vital 
fraction  of  a  second  the  job  is  done.  His 
timing  must  be  correct  to  make  the  tackle, 
your  timing  must  be  correct  to  block  the 
tackle. 

The  ideal  position  is  to  get  your  shoulder 
against  his  body  with  your  own  feet  under  you. 
He  naturally  will  attempt  to  hold  you  off  with 
his  hands.  There  are  innumerable  tricks  of 
feints,  ducks,  delays,  etc.  ...  to  dodge  his 
hands  and  get  next  his  body.  These  must  be 
worked  out  on  your  man  in  the  game.  Ob- 
serve his  style  of  play  and  fit  your  attack  to  it. 
If  you  find  him  too  powerful  to  hold  up 
momentarily  with  your  feet  under  you  it  is 
often  necessary  to  get  on  your  hands  and  knees 
after  you  have  hit  him.  Get  into  his  body 
and  legs  and  tangle  him  up,  so  to  speak. 

Leaving  your  feet  should  be  avoided  if 
possible  as  once  committing  yourself  you 
cannot  change  direction  quickly  if  he  side- 
steps or  retreats. 

When  you  have  carried  out  the  assignment 


102     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

and  have  blocked  the  tackle  the  tendency  is 
to  sclf-complaccntl}'  pat  yourself  on  the  back. 
Why,  your  work  has  just  started!  Go  dowTi 
the  field,  take  out  a  defensive  back,  then 
another,  and  so  on  until  the  whistle  blows.  I 
have  kno^Ti  players  to  get  four  men  on  one 
long  dodging  run. 

AVhenthe  play  is  on  the  other  side,  cut  down 
and  take  out  a  defensive  back.  This  is  dirty 
but  fascinating  work.  Time  after  time  you 
go  down  and  dive  at  the  defensive  back.  He 
has  seen  the  play  stopped  at  the  line  and  can 
pay  his  entire  attention  to  you,  sidestepping 
or  pushing  you  off  or  into  the  turf  with  his 
hands.  Often  he  will  sidestep  quickly  while 
you  flop  with  a  crash  on  the  ground  missing 
him  completely,  —  humiliating,  uncomfort- 
able, tiresome  work.  Eight  or  nine  times  you 
fail,  but  the  tenth  time  you  go  down  with  the 
same  speed  and  determination,  this  time  your 
runner  is  clear,  the  defensive  back  has  his  eyes 
glued  on  the  approaching  ball,  your  oppor- 
tunity has  arrived.  Crash!  Down  he  goes 
and  the  long  run  is  assured.  There's  the 
original  ''grand  and  glorious  feeling."  And 
furthermore  the  nine  failures  are  essential  to 
the  tenth  success.  You've  got  to  play  it  your 
hardest  every  time  as  you  never  know  when 
the  big  moment  will  arrive. 


A  FEW  FACTS  ON  END  PLAY  103 

Conclusion 

I  have  given  you  a  skeleton  of  end  play 
which  I  believe  correct.  There  are  many 
layers  of  flesh  over  that  skeleton's  bones  which 
the  length  and  nature  of  this  article  preclude. 
But  above  all,  I  wish  to  leave  this  one  vital 
fact  —  and  it  applies  to  all  other  positions  as 
well  as  to  the  ends.  Successful  play  depends 
on  the  willingness  of  the  individual  to  give  his 
all,  his  willingness  to  subordinate  himself  to 
the  good  of  the  team  play  and  to  everendingly 
keep  plugging.  Many  a  player,  either  slower 
of  foot,  or  lacking  the  physique  of  his  oppo- 
nents, has  attained  the  heights  because  his 
attitude  was  right.  He  gave  more  to  the 
game  and  you  may  be  certain  he  derived  more 
from  it. 


HOW  TO  PLAY  FULLBACK 

BY   JOHN   P.    DALTON 

'Necessity  of  Good  Physical  Condition 

It  is  my  purpose  in  this  article  to  offer  a  few 
suggestions  to  the  young  man  who  is  starting 
out  on  a  football  career  and  who  has  ambitions 
to  play  the  fullback  position.  There  are  many 
points  which  he  will  very  likely  not  be  familiar 
with,  and  unless  they  are  pointed  out  to  him  he 
will  probably  proceed  blindly  and  with  no 
thought  of  the  rudimentary  principles  which 
are  all-important  in  football. 

Primarily,  he  must  fit  his  body  to  withstand 
the  strain  imposed  upon  it,  all  of  which  is 
summed  up  in  the  word  training.  The  result 
of  failure  to  regard  this  necessity  has  been 
brought  home  to  me  on  so  many  occasions  that 
I  unhesitatingly  state  that  under  no  conditions 
would  I  permit  a  player  who  failed  to  observe 
training  to  engage  either  in  practice  or  in 
games,  because  being  untrained  he  is  much 
more  liable  to  injury,  and  such  injuries  received 
might  mean  the  loss  of  a  valuable  player  in 
later  games. 

104 


HOW  TO  PLAY  FULLBACK        105 

In  dealing  with  the  body,  a  clean,  healthy 
mind  is  absolutely  essential  since  it  is  the  mind 
which  governs  the  actions  of  the  body.  One 
cannot  afford  to  have  a  sluggish  mind  in  the 
game  of  football,  for  it  is  the  man  who  thinks 
quickly  with  judgment  emanating  from  a  clean 
mind  who  succeeds. 

On  the  football  field  there  is  only  one  way  to 
do  things  and  that  is  the  right  way.  Do  every- 
thing with  earnestness,  exerting  every  effort  to 
do  it  well. 

A  most  requisite  quality  of  the  fullback  is  his 
ability  to  analyze  the  opponent's  play  and  to 
act  quickly  in  order  to  prevent  its  success.  This 
can  only  be  had  by  years  of  experience,  but  with 
close  application  and  continued  observation, 
watching  the  smallest  points,  such  as  facial  ex- 
pressions, unconscious  shifting  of  positions  by 
opposing  players,  it  is  very  remarkable  how 
proficient  one  may  become  in  diagnosing  plays. 
The  fullback  who  studies  this  will  in  the  major- 
ity of  cases  be  prepared  for  the  attack,  and  con- 
sequently his  chances  of  stopping  it  are  greatly 
increased. 

On  the  defensive  the  fullback  should  occupy 
a  position  from  four  to  eight  yards  behind  the 
line  of  scrimmage,  depending  upon  where  the 
center  plays.  If  the  center  plays  well  back 
from  the  line  the  fullback  plays  farther  back; 
if  the  center  plays  close  to  the  line  the  fullback 
should  play  closer  accordingly.    Whether  cen- 


106        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

ter  and  fullback  play  close  up  or  back  depends 
upon  the  ability  of  the  center  and  whether  the 
opponents  are  using  a  line-plunging  or  forward- 
passing  game. 

The  fullback  should  stand  fairly  erect  so  that 
he  can  see  the  opponents'  backfield  and  note 
their  formations.  He  should  vary  his  position 
relative  to  the  opponents'  formation,  moving  in 
a  direction  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  oppo- 
nents'  shift.  Be  careful  to  realize  that  certain 
shifts  are  employed  only  as  a  ruse  to  weaken 
the  defensive  at  designed  point  by  removing 
fullback  from  backing  up  the  line. 

Follow  the  Ball 

The  fullback  should  constantly  keep  in  mind 
the  necessity  of  watching  the  ball  from  the  mo- 
ment it  is  put  in  play.  If  the  location  of  the 
ball  is  doubtful,  his  duty  is  first  to  ascertain 
where  it  is  or  is  most  likely  to  be,  and  as  soon 
as  its  direction,  or  rather  the  direction  of  the 
runner  carrying  the  ball,  is  noted  he  must  get 
quickly  into  position  to  meet  the  runner  at  the 
earliest  possible  moment.  How  to  meet  such 
plays  most  effectively  is  a  question  which  rests 
entirely  upon  the  physical  make-up  of  the  full- 
back and  in  fact  upon  the  team  as  a  whole. 
Should  the  fullback  have  a  reliable  rush-line 
capable  of  eliminating  a  greater  portion  of  the 
runner's   interference   his   work   is    compara- 


HOW  TO   PLAY   FULLBACK         107 

tively  easy  and  his  duty  is  then  to  play  for  the 
runner  alone.  If,  however,  his  line  is  weaker 
than  that  of  the  opponents'  he  must  direct  his 
efforts  to  meet  the  interference  as  a  whole, 
which  is  a  far  greater  tax  upon  his  strength. 
The  fullback  should  not  permit  himself  to  be 
drawn  back  by  any  assumed  punt  formation ;  at 
least  not  until  he  is  quite  certain  that  the  oppo- 
nents will  kick.  In  the  first  place  his  efficacy 
in  handling  punts  is  not  a  matter  of  particular 
importance  since  it  is  seldom  that  he  would 
have  such  opportunity.  The  number  of  plays 
possible  from  the  kick  formation  warrants  his 
remaining  near  the  scrimmage  line.  In  this  in- 
stance good  judgment  is  a  sheer  necessity,  for 
supposing  the  opponents  have  eight  or  ten 
yards  to  make  on  the  third  or  fourth  down  it  is 
almost  certain  that  they  will  punt,  if  they  are 
in  their  own  territory  and  they  have  not  been 
gaining  consistently.  In  this  case  the  full- 
back should  drop  back  about  ten  or  fifteen  yards 
from  his  regular  defensive  position  and  en- 
deavor to  get  into  the  interference  for  the 
**  running  back  "  of  the  punt. 

The  Art  of  Kicking 

Ability  to  punt,  place-kick,  or  drop-kick  is  one 
of  the  most  valuable  assets  a  fullback  can  pos- 
sess. It  takes  years  of  practice  and  patience  to 
develop  one's  eye  and  boot  and  to  instill  suf- 


108        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

ficient  self-confidence  to  kick  successfully  from 
behind  the  line  of  scrimmage.  The  young 
aspirant  may  labor  along  ignorantly  and  won- 
der why  his  efforts  bring  no  apparent  success. 
Men  who  have  worked  consistently  with  the 
kicking  game  for  years  may  suddenly  find  them- 
selves in  a  so-called  "  slump  in  kicking."  From 
personal  experience  I  have  found  that  this  is 
entirely  due  to  the  kicker's  failure  to  keep  in 
mind  small  details. 

The  holding  of  the  ball  just  prior  to  the  in- 
stant of  kicking  is  perhaps  the  greatest  secret 
in  the  art  of  kicking.  If  held  properly  it  is  most 
surprising  how  great  a  distance  may  be  gotten 
with  but  comparatively  little  effort.  On  the 
whole  the  '^  spiral  "  is  the  most  effective  kick 
for  distance  but  not  always  the  most  advan- 
tageous. A  kicker  must  vary  his  kicks,  consid- 
ering the  wind,  the  ability  of  the  opponents  to 
'*  run  back  kicks,"  and  the  territory  in  which 
he  is  playing.  In  saying  this  I  presuppose  that 
the  player  or  kicker  has  ability  to  drop  his  kicks 
approximately  where  he  wishes  them  to  fall. 

I  would  advise  the  lad  who  is  desirous  of 
learning  how  to  kick  to  think  and  reason  out 
the  best  way  to  kick  the  ball.  Keep  in  mind  the 
relative  position  of  shoe  and  ball,  the  point  of 
impact  on  both,  and  decide  for  yourself  the  rel- 
ative merits  of  a  short,  choppy  swing  of  the  leg 
to  meet  the  ball  or  a  long  "  follow  through  " 
swing.    I  taught  myself  how  to  punt  and  believe 


UKICKLICV    KI(  Kl^'Lt  ONE   OF   III.S   FIVK    .SU(J(  .E.SSFUL    FIELD-GOALS 
IN  THE   HAKVAKD-VALE  (iAME,   1913.      KOTE  THE  I'EKFECT 
I-ROTEITION    tinEN    THE    KKKIOK    BV    TEAM-MATE.S. 


GUERXSEV   SCOKIM;    for  YALE   BY  A    DRor-KKK.   HARVARD-YALE 

GAME,   1913.      KOTE   THAT  ALTHOl'GH  PROTECTION  OF  KICKER 

IS  FAIR,   THE    BALL  WAS   NEARLY   BLOCKED    BV 

THE      ilAKNAKIi     KH-Hl'     TAlKLE. 


THE  FAKE  KICK,  TO  PRO  I  I  <   V  KI<  KI  R.      HARVARD- YALE  GAME,  1913. 

BRICKLEY  DROPPED  BACK  As  IF  TO  TRY  FOR  A  GOAL.      BRADLEE 

WAS   GIVEN  THE   BALL   AND  GAINED   EIGHTEEN   YARDS.      ON 

THE  NEXT   PLAY    BRICKLEY   SCORED  A  FIELD  GOAL. 


THE  DROP-KICK. 


HOW   TO   PLAY   FULLBACK         109 

any  young  fellow  can  do  likewise  with  equal 
success  if  he  follows  the  above  general  sugges- 
tions. Hard  and  fast  rules  for  kicking  cannot 
be  laid  down.  If  the  aspirant  has  football  sense 
he  can  reach  conclusions  for  himself  and  in  a 
short  time  marked  improvement  in  his  efforts 
will  be  noted. 

Drop-kicking  and  place-kicking  are  seldom 
done  equally  well  by  the  same  kicker.  Each 
requires  an  entirely  different  form  of  kicking 
and  I  would  advise  the  beginner  to  take  up  one 
or  the  other,  rather  than  both. 

Place-kicking  ability  can  be  acquired  by  con- 
sistent practice  with  both  kicker  and  holder 
using  thought  and  foresight.  Apparently  it  is  a 
difficult  matter  to  place-kick  and  most  of  us  are 
inclined  to  feel  discouraged  at  repeated  fail- 
ures. The  first  and  most  important  phase  of 
place-kicking  is  the  time  available  to  accom- 
plish it.  A  fraction  of  a  second  must  be  thor- 
oughly appreciated  in  order  that  the  ball  may 
be  kicked  clear  of  scrimmage  before  the  defense 
can  get  within  blocking  distance.  The  kicker 
must  cultivate  confidence  in  his  snapper-back 
and  holder  to  such  an  extent  that  he  should 
have  his  swing  under  way  to  meet  the  ball  be- 
fore it  reaches  the  holder's  hands. 

Carrying  the  Ball 

A  fullback  must  be  able,  and  know  how,  to 
carry  the  ball  both  in  end  running  and  through 


no        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

the  line.  End  running  requires  that  the  player 
carrying  the  ball  be  quick  to  pick  his  openings, 
ward  off  pending  tackles,  and  primarily  he  must 
have  ability  to  run  and  to  know  how  to  use  his 
speed.  In  the  majority  of  cases  the  fullback  is 
not  called  upon  to  carry  the  ball  on  end  plays. 
This  has  arisen  from  the  fact  that  in  the  old 
style  of  games  the  fullback  was  used  for  plun- 
ging especially,  and  no  dependence  was  placed 
upon  his  end-running  possibilities.  With  the 
new  game,  however,  the  fullback  must  perform 
all  the  duties  of  a  halfback.  In  fact,  there  is 
little  to  distinguish  these  two  positions  now. 

It  is  difficult  to  lay  down  any  ironclad  rule  as 
to  how  a  fullback  should  carry  the  ball  in  line 
plays.  In  oif-tackle  plays,  the  ball  may  be 
safely  carried  in  the  ordinary  side  forearm 
position.  Inside  of  tackle  it  is  apparent  that 
the  danger  of  losing  the  ball  increases.  I  be- 
lieve that  the  safest  way  is  to  carry  the  ball 
with  both  arms  across  the  front  of  the  body, 
holding  the  ball  by  its  ends  and  against  the 
upper  part  of  the  abdomen.  In  running  I  sug- 
gest that  the  knees  be  carried  up  as  far  as  pos- 
sible, giving  a  sort  of  reciprocating  motion, 
chest  well  forward  Lud  head  erect.  The  greater 
momentum  the  fullback  has  on  hitting  the  line 
the  greater  are  the  chances  of  success  for  the 
play. 

Again  I  state  that  it  is  a  difficult  matter  to 
lay  down  any  set  of  rules  which  the  beginner  5.g 


HOW  TO   PLAY  FULLBACK         111 

to  follow.  Football  simply  amounts  to  apply- 
ing a  little  common  sense  to  physical  ability.  If 
you  don't  use  your  brains  in  football  you  never 
will  succeed  at  it  or  derive  the  pleasures  which 
participation  in  the  game  holds  in  store. 

It  is  a  strenuous  game  and  some  of  the  les- 
sons it  teaches  are  dearly  learned,  but  it  is 
worth  the  while.  Play  "  cleanly,"  no  matter 
what  the  irritation  is  that  may  tempt  you  to 
play  otherwise.  Play  to  win,  but,  in  defeat,  ac- 
cept your  lot  in  the  true  spirit  of  sportsman- 
ship. 


THE    PLAY   OF   THE   BACKS 

BY    PEKCY   L.    WENDELL 

Propeely  speaking,  the  term,  backs,  refers  to 
the  quarter-back,  the  two  halfbacks,  and  the 
fullback.  This  article,  however,  will  deal  only 
with  the  three  latter  positions.  These  three 
backs,  as  we  shall  learn,  are  closely  associated 
in  everything  that  they  do.  On  the  offense  they 
alternate  in  carrying  the  ball  and  in  making  in- 
terference for  one  another,  while  on  the  de- 
fense, at  least  two  of  them,  and  sometimes  all 
three,  are  called  upon  to  help  the  rush-line  and 
at  the  same  time  cover  forward  passes. 

First  of  all,  a  back  should  enter  into  his  work 
with  the  proper  spirit.  Unless  he  is  willing  to 
subordinate  his  personal  wishes  to  the  general 
welfare  of  the  team,  and  what  is  more,  to  do  so 
heartily  and  enthusiastically,  he  cannot  hope 
ever  to  be  a  great  player,  even  though  he  have 
marked  individual  ability  along  every  line  of 
play.  Team-play  is  the  essence  of  successful 
football,  and  he  who  is  looking  first  of  all  to  his 
own  interests  will  never  make  a  **  team  " 
player. 

112 


\IT\IN    W  i:m>i:i.i.   or  HARVARD  MAKINi;    A    aiN   in  HARVARD- 

liAKTMOUTU     GAME,    1912.        WENDELL    IS    HOWLING    OVER    A 
WOULD-BE  TACKLER   IN    CHARACTERISTIC    STYLE. 


WILSON  OF    YALE  RUNNING   BACK   A   KI(  K    FOR  35  YARDS    IN   HARVARD- 

Y'ALE  GAME,   1913.     AVILSON    HAS  JUST    REVERSED   HIS   FIELD  AND 

THROWN     HARVARD     TACKLERS     OFF     THEIR    BALANCE. 


PLAY  OF  THE  BACKS 


THE   PLAY   OF  THE   BACKS        113 

A  back  who  can  run,  kick,  and  pass  is  an  ideal 
back,  and  although  a  back  may  not  be  able  to 
learn  to  run  well  with  the  ball,  the  average  back 
can  learn  to  kick  and  pass.  Backs  should  have 
enough  practice  in  passing  the  ball  to  feel  at 
home  with  it.  They  should  learn  to  throw  it 
with  accuracy  and  speed.  Every  year  sees  an 
improvement  in  throwing  the  ball,  which  shows 
that  it  is  practice  that  makes  a  player  better 
able  to  throw  it.  To  kick  is  difficult  and  takes 
much  time  and  hard  work,  but  a  good  kicker  is 
a  very  valuable  man,  and  time  spent  on  learning 
to  kick  is  time  well  spent. 

Carrying  the  ball  is  the  main  function  of  the 
backs,  of  course,  hence  the  need  of  knowing  the 
way  to  hold  the  ball.  For  end  runs,  one  end  of 
the  ball  should  be  tucked  under  the  arm  —  not 
too  far  under  so  that  it  can  be  knocked  out  — 
while  the  other  end  should  be  firmly  grasped 
and  covered  with  the  hand.  In  bucking,  the  ball 
should  be  held  against  the  stomach  with  a  hand 
on  each  end.  After  the  line  has  been  pierced 
either  hand  may  be  taken  off  to  ward  away  the 
tackier.  The  grip  on  the  ball  should  always  be 
firm,  yet  it  is  often  well  to  shift  it  from  one  side 
to  the  other  so  that  the  arm  toward  the  oppo- 
nent may  be  free.  Use  both  hands  to  shift  the 
ball,  always  holding  it  firmly. 

To  interfere  is,  in  the  new  game,  a  big  factor. 
To  tell  a  back  how  to  do  this  is  very  difficult.  It 
is  well  to   throw  yourself  at  the   opponent's 


114        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

knees  with  all  the  power  you  can  muster.  This 
method  is  effective  if  the  opponent  is  advancing 
or  standing  still.  If  he  is  retreating,  as  an  end 
should  do  at  times,  the  back  is  in  a  difficult  posi- 
tion, and  the  only  thing  to  do  is  to  keep  him 
going  and  not  let  him  pass  by  on  either  side. 
The  essentials  of  good  interfering  are  to  keep 
low,  go  hard,  and  be  fierce. 

No  back  can  be  eifective  who  does  not  start 
quickly.  An  offense  which  is  so  slow  in  reach- 
ing its  objective  as  to  allow  a  concentration  of 
opponents  at  that  spot  before  the  play  hits  is 
worthless.  The  attack  must  be  quick  and  hard. 
For  this  reason  backs  should  constantly  prac- 
tise getting  off  quickly.  The  "  sprint  start  " 
position  with  only  one  hand  on  the  ground  — 
and  that  only  sufficiently  to  steady  the  runner 
—  is  a  very  good  way  to  start.  In  general, 
backs  should  exercise  extreme  care  to  prevent 
unevenness  in  starting.  A  slow  man  may  spoil 
the  entire  backfield. 

The  work  of  a  back  is  very  tiring  under 
the  new  rules,  and  therefore  he  must  be 
in  good  condition  —  full  of  life  and  vigor  and 
light  on  his  feet.  The  offensive  position  of 
the  backs  will  depend  upon  the  style  of  game 
that  is  adopted.  The  possibilities  of  forma- 
tions are  never  ending.  Whatever  the  system, 
the  backs  should  always  assume  the  same  rela 
tive  position  to  each  other,  precision  being  ab 
solutely  necessary  to  well-developed  team  work. 


THE   PLAY   OF   THE   BACKS        115 

Furthermore,  this  position  should  be  assumed 
as  soon  as  possible  after  the  ball  is  down. 
When  in  position  just  previous  to  starting,  the 
backs  should  take  every  precaution  to  prevent 
giving  away  the  direction  of  the  play  by  uncon- 
scious glances,  movements,  or  "  leanings."  A 
back  should,  however,  key  himself  up  internally 
just  before  starting  and  go  off  with  a  plunge 
and  keep  *'  digging,"  never  letting  up  an  in- 
stant for  anything. 

The  Offense 

In  end  running,  a  back  should  be  careful  not 
to  run  too  close  to  his  interference  when,  in  case 
the  interference  is  upset,  he  is  likely  to  fall  over 
his  protectors.  Instead,  he  should  run  with  an 
interval  of  not  less  than  two  yards  between  him- 
self and  his  interference,  thus  giving  himself  a 
chance  to  see  where  they  are  going,  and  to  take 
instant  advantage  of  any  upset. 

In  plunging,  one  of  the  very  important  points 
to  be  kept  in  mind  is  that  of  keeping  the  eyes 
open.  A  back  who  closes  his  eyes  as  he  makes 
his  plunge  is  likely  to  fall  flat  on  his  face  when 
an  opening  in  the  line  presents  itself  suddenly 
where  he  had  expected  to  find  the  passage 
choked.  A  back  should  never  allow  himself  to 
slow  up  on  reaching  the  line.  Strike  it  at  max- 
imum speed.  It  is  well  for  a  back  to  crouch  in 
bucking,  or,  perhaps  better  to  double  up,  ma- 


116        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

king  himself  a  plough  with  head  and  shoulders 
as  the  point.  Worm  yourself  along,  turning  the 
body  from  the  waist  up,  but  keeping  the  rest 
of  the  body  aiming  straight  ahead  or  the  power 
of  your  attack  will  be  lost.  Lift  the  knees  well 
up  and  try  to  prevent  the  tackier  from  getting 
his  arm  into  your  waist  by  blocking  it  with  your 
knees.  The  minute  a  back  is  through  the  line 
he  should  open  up  a  little,  if  an  opponent  is  not 
right  on  him,  and  look  for  an  open  place,  in  the 
meantime  warding  off  players  with  his  shoul- 
der or  straight  arm.  On  approaching  the  line 
keep  the  back  stiff  so  that  the  opponents  will  be 
driven  back;  thus  they  cannot  straighten  the 
back  up.  Just  because  a  player  has  his  hands 
on  a  back,  the  back  should  not  slow  up,  but 
should  keep  on  digging,  and  if  caught  should 
force  himself  forward  when  falling. 

In  case  a  back  feels  any  doubt  about  the  sig- 
nal for  a  play  he  should  at  once  call  out  ''  Sig- 
nal! "  Otherwise,  collisions,  fumbles,  and  con- 
fusion will  result.  No  matter  what  a  back 
thinks,  he  should  invariably  carry  out  the  sig- 
nal, appearing  to  have  absolute  confidence  in 
the  quarter-back. 

Another  rule  which  should  invariably  be  fol- 
lowed is  that  of  never  running  back  —  a  back 
should  never  lose  ground.  If  a  back  fumbles 
he  should  fall  on  the  ball  at  once,  never  attempt- 
ing to  pick  it  up  unless  it  bounces  high.  A  back 
is  responsible  for  a  ball  if  it  comes  to  him  well, 


THE   PLAY   OF   THE   BACKS        117 

and  he  should  always  remember  that  the  pos- 
session of  it  is  of  the  first  importance. 

It  is  the  halfback's  duty  to  afford  proper 
protection  to  his  kicker.  He  should  always  be 
reliable  in  getting  any  particular  opponent  who 
may  be  assigned  to  him  out  of  the  play. 

In  the  midst  of  play,  whether  on  the  defense 
or  offense,  the  backs  should  seek  to  encourage 
each  other  by  a  word,  a  touch  or  a  look.  Such 
simple  though  effective  aids  to  thorough  har- 
mony between  them  should  never  be  overlooked. 
A  hearty  word  of  confidence  spoken  immedi- 
ately after  a  bad  fumble  or  other  blunder  will 
always  cause  the  unfortunate  player  to  put  new 
life  and  determination  into  his  work,  while  a 
bit  of  cutting  sarcasm  will  drive  him  to  anger 
or  else  dishearten  him. 

Under  the  new  rules  the  backs  on  the  defense 
hold  an  important  and  difficult  position.  They 
have  to  be  in  two  places  at  once.  They  are  re- 
sponsible for  men  who  break  through  the  line 
and  must  stop  them  before  they  make  a  sub- 
stantial gain,  and  they  are  responsible  for  all 
forward  passes.  The  defensive  back  must  be 
awake.  He  should  keep  his  eye  on  the  ball  and 
advance  as  he  sees  the  opposing  back  charge 
into  the  line.  He  must  be  careful  not  to  commit 
himself  too  soon.  When  the  opposing  back  has 
practically  hit  the  line,  the  defensive  back 
should  immediately  advance  with  more  speed, 
but  not  so  fast  that  the  back  with  the  ball  will 


118        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

be  able  to  dodge  him  if  he  breaks  through  the 
defensive  line. 


The  Defense 

In  general,  the  position  of  the  defensive  back 
should  be  between  his  tackle  and  end,  and  about 
seven  or  eight  yards  back  of  the  line  of  scrim- 
mage. He  should  vary  his  position  so  the  op- 
posing quarter  will  not  know  where  to  find  him 
or  where  he  is  going  to  be.  The  fullback  as  a 
rule  plays  two  yards  or  so  in  back  of  the  line 
of  scrimmage,  but  the  formations  on  the  de- 
fense, like  the  formations  on  the  offense,  vary 
and  are  unlimited  in  number. 

In  the  backfield,  the  main  duty  of  the  back  is 
the  handling  of  kicks,  and  it  is  one  of  the  most 
trying  functions  of  all  in  football.  Under  the 
new  rules,  however,  a  back  can  let  the  ball  fall 
to  the  ground  and  then  pick  it  up  or  call  it  down 
as  he  chooses.  In  this  the  new  rules  take  away 
a  big  and  difficult  factor  of  the  game.  It  means 
also  that  only  one  back  need  be  kept  back  what- 
ever the  conditions  may  be. 

When  the  ball  is  picked  up  or  caught  the  back 
must  pay  attention  to  the  opposing  ends  the 
moment  he  has  the  ball.  He  should  not,  how- 
ever, take  his  eyes  off  the  ball  until  he  has  it  in 
his  hands,  and  in  watching  the  ball  as  it  comes 
down,  the  back  can  tell  to  some  extent  how  it 
will  bounce,  especially  if  it  is  a  spiral. 


THE  PLAY  OF  THE  BACKS        119 

In  dodging,  a  back  should  dodge  as  little  and 
as  quickly  as  possible.  It  is  no  game  to  stop 
and  then  start  again,  or  to  run  zigzag  down  the 
field.  The  back  must  run  as  straight  as  possible 
and  make  his  dodges  at  as  high  a  speed  as  pos- 
sible. It  is  not  wise  to  run  slowly  so  that  a 
dodge  is  easier ;  always  run  at  top  speed  what- 
ever the  situation  and  slow  down  here  and  there 
to  side-step  or  fool  the  tackier.  It  is  often  well 
to  slow  down  and  then  sprint  away  again,  but 
this  is  only  good  when  one  tackier  is  attempting 
to  tackle  the  back.  Good  dodging  is  not  com- 
plete unless  there  is  added  to  it  the  power  to 
use  the  arms  well.  A  back  should  never  run 
back. 


HOW   TO   PLAY   HALFBACK 

BY   JAMES    THORPE 

In  order  to  fill  the  position  of  halfback  satis- 
factorily the  player  must  be  heavy-set,  and  of 
medium  weight.  The  large  player  is,  of  course, 
in  demand,  but  activity,  strength,  and  speed  are 
prime  requisites  for  success  as  a  halfback.  The 
backfield  candidate  must  be  closely  knit  so  that 
he  can  stand  the  knocks,  should  be  quick  to 
think  and  act,  and  above  all,  fearless.  The  back, 
more  than  any  other  player,  must  be  thoroughly 
drilled  in  the  rudiments  of  the  game.  He  must 
be  especially  adept  at  handling  and  falling  on 
the  ball,  interfering,  tackling,  punting,  and 
catching  punts.  To  be  a  successful  ground- 
gainer  requires  cleverness  in  dodging  opposing 
tacklers  and  skill  in  the  use  of  the  stiff-arm. 

The  halfback's  position,  when  his  team  is  in 
possession  of  the  ball,  will  vary  according  to 
the  formation  used.  Ordinarily  his  place  is 
from  four  to  five  yards  back  of  the  scrimmage 
line,  and  a  good  arm's  length  from  the  fullback, 
who  stands  behind  the  center.  A  back  on  the 
offensive  should  stand  with  his  feet  about  two 
feet  apart,  and  with  one,  or  better  still  with 

120 


HOW  TO   PLAY  HALFBACK         121 

both  hands  on  the  ground,  with  his  head  up  and 
with  no  part  of  his  body  higher  than  his  head 
and  shouhlers.  The  feet  should  be  about  even 
with  each  other.  While  playing  halfback  the 
foot  nearest  the  fullback  may  be  a  little  back 
of  the  outside  foot,  bringing  the  player  into  the 
position  of  a  runner  upon  his  mark,  except  that 
his  legs  are  farther  apart.  The  halfback's 
weight  should  be  borne  equally  by  his  feet  and 
hands.  If  the  player  places  himself  upon  a  two- 
foot  square,  his  feet  planted  upon  the  rear  cor- 
ners and  his  hands  resting  upon  the  forward 
corners,  with  his  shoulders  almost  directly  over 
his  hands  and  his  knees  almost  touching  his  el- 
bows, he  will  find  himself  in  the  proper  position. 
Thus  he  may  start  quickly  forward,  or  to  the 
right  or  left.  This  position  or  style  of  the  of- 
fensive backs  was  first  introduced  by  the  In- 
dians when  they  defeated  Columbia  University 
45  to  0  on  Thanksgiving  Day,  1899,  and  has 
since  been  adopted  by  every  team  of  promi- 
nence in  the  country. 

When  in  position  the  back  should  watch  the 
ball,  and  start  the  instant  it  is  snapped  or  the 
starting  signal  given.  If  he  is  to  take  it  outside 
of  tackle,  he  should  receive  it  upon  the  run,  and 
quickly  place  it  under  the  arm  which  is  farthest 
away  from  the  greatest  number  of  his  oppo- 
nents, so  that  he  can  use  the  other  arm  to  ward 
off  tacklers.  One  end  of  the  ball  should  be 
placed  between  the  arm  and  body  with  the  hand 


122        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

grasping  the  other  end.  On  plays  through  the 
line  the  back  should,  as  a  rule,  hold  the  ball 
against  his  body  or  under  one  arm  with  both 
hands,  otherwise  there  is  danger  of  his  arm 
being  jerked  away  from  the  ball.  Thus  there 
is  less  possibility  of  the  back  losing  the  ball 
while  forcing  his  way  through  a  mass  of  play- 
ers. Now  that  the  rules  permit  the  first  man 
receiving  the  ball  to  run  with  it  without  cross- 
ing the  line  five  yards  from  the  center,  there  is 
much  more  direct  passing  from  center  to  backs, 
and  therefore  the  backs  need  much  practice  in 
receiving  the  ball  on  the  run  in  order  to  avoid 
disastrous  fumbles. 

On  end  runs  or  plays  outside  of  tackle,  the 
back  carrying  the  ball  should  follow  his  inter- 
ference closely  as  long  as  it  affords  him  pro- 
tection and  not  depend  upon  his  individual  ef- 
forts. He  should  turn  towards  the  opponents' 
goal  whenever  he  sees  an  opening  and  not  try 
to  circle  the  end  unless  he  is  reasonably  sure 
of  being  successful.  A  wide  run  of  this  kind 
usually  results  in  no  gain  or  a  big  loss,  whereas 
a  quick  turn  straight  down  the  field  will  usually 
gain  something,  and  at  least  not  result  in  a  loss. 
In  trjdng  to  avoid  tacklers  I  find  from  my  ex- 
perience that  the  man  carrying  the  ball  should 
use  his  free  arm  to  push  the  would-be  tacklers 
out  of  his  way.  Meet  them  on  the  head,  shoul- 
ders, or  neck  with  the  heel  of  the  open  hand  and 
the  arm  rigidly  straight.     At  the  same  time 


HOW  TO   PLAY   HALFBACK        123 

swing  the  legs  and  body  as  far  from  the  tackier 
as  possible.  When  tackled,  the  runner  should, 
if  possible,  fall  toward  the  opponents'  goal  and 
work  his  way  forward  until  held  or  the  whistle 
is  blown. 

A  back  must  remember  that  his  part  in  nearly 
every  play  when  another  carries  the  ball  is  just 
as  important  as  when  he  himself  carries  it. 
Some  backs  are  inclined  to  run  hard  when  they 
carry  the  ball,  and  rest  up  or  make  a  feeble 
effort  when  some  one  else  is  trying  to  advance 
it.  Such  a  player  should  not  be  tolerated  on  any 
team.  Blocking  and  interfering  are  fully  as 
much  of  a  back 's  duties,  and  as  valuable  a  part, 
as  carrying  the  ball. 

The  Defensive  Halfback 

On  defense  the  positions  and  duties  of  backs 
vary  under  different  systems  of  play.  In  one 
system  of  defense  quite  generally  used  the  half- 
backs are  stationed  about  three  yards  back  of 
the  scrimmage  line,  and  just  outside  the  tackles. 
Another  style  of  defense  places  the  halfbacks 
about  five  yards  outside  of  the  tackles  and 
about  two  or  three  yards  back  from  the  line. 
In  both  systems  the  backs  move  to  the  right  or 
left  if  the  opponents  use  a  side  formation.  In 
the  first  system  the  halfbacks  are  supposed  to 
back  up  the  line  and  guard  against  all  running 
plays    of    the    opjDonents,    while    the    fullback 


124        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS     . 

watches  for  forward  passes.  The  halfback  in 
the  other  style  of  play  looks  out  for  kicks  and 
passes  as  well  as  other  plays,  being  in  an  espe- 
cially good  position  to  stop  end  runs  or  plays 
outside  of  tackle. 

The  defensive  backs  should  all  stand  with 
their  feet  about  two  feet  apart  and  their  hands 
upon  their  knees  so  as  to  be  able  to  start  quickly 
in  any  direction.  They  should  watch  the  oppo- 
sing backs  closely,  and  if  they  form  on  one  side 
of  the  line  notify  the  rest  of  their  team  as  the 
linemen  are  watching  the  ball  and  may  not 
notice  the  formation  of  the  opposing  backs. 
The  defensive  backs  shift  with  the  opposite  of- 
fensive formation  so  as  always  to  be  in  the  same 
relative  position  to  the  center  of  the  offensive 
strength  of  their  opponents,  no  matter  where 
the  ball  may  be.  The  backs  should  watch  the 
heads  of  the  opposing  backs  because  their  heads 
will  be  the  first  part  to  move  and  indicate  the 
direction  of  the  play.  If  the  play  is  aimed  at 
the  line,  it  should  be  met  hard  and  low.  If  there 
is  a  hole  opened  for  the  runners,  do  not  wait  for 
the  play  to  come  through  but  dive  into  the  open- 
ing and  nail  the  runner,  or  spill  the  man  in  front 
of  him  before  he  has  reached  the  line.  Every 
play  should  be  quickly  headed  off  whether  go- 
ing forward,  back  or  around  the  opposite  end. 

Hard-tackling  defensive  backs,  who  get  into 
every  play,  are  a  most  powerful  factor  in  any 
team's  defense.     On  the  best  teams  the  backs 


HOW  TO   PLAY  HALFBACK         125 

are  chosen  as  mucli  for  their  defensive  ability 
as  for  their  skill  in  carrying  the  ball  and  inter- 
fering. 

Kicking  is  naturally  part  of  the  duties  of  a 
finished  back.  Almost  any  player  can  acquire 
accuracy  and  fairly  good  distance  in  punting 
by  practice  and  study.  Care  should  be  taken 
not  to  practise  too  much  early  in  the  season,  as 
the  leg  is  liable  to  become  sore  and  lame  for  the 
rest  of  the  season.  This  occurs  for  the  same 
reason  that  a  ball-player's  arm  goes  wrong,  and 
it  is  no  easy  matter  to  get  the  leg  in  shape  again 
when  straining  or  overdoing  has  once  injured 
it.  The  spiral  punt,  which  is  now  universally 
used  because  a  ball  kicked  in  this  way  goes 
farther,  can  with  practice  be  punted  just  as 
accurately,  and  is  much  harder  to  catch.  In 
order  to  get  the  necessary  distance,  and  punt 
the  spiral  with  accuracy,  some  practice  should 
be  devoted  to  it  every  day  and  great  attention 
should  be  paid  to  form.  It  is  correct  form  to 
hold  the  ball  as  far  away  from  the  body  as  pos- 
sible, directly  in  front  of  the  kicking  foot,  with 
one  hand  on  each  side  of  it  and  the  outer  point 
of  the  ball  slightly  lower  than  the  end  nearest 
the  body,  at  the  same  time  taking  a  short  step 
forward  with  the  kicking  foot.  Then  take  a 
regular  step  with  the  other  foot,  drop  the  ball 
so  that  it  falls  without  turning,  and  meet  it  with 
the  instep  of  the  kicking  foot  about  two  and 
one-half  feet  from  the  ground.    The  foot  should 


126        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

be  extended,  and  the  leg  should  swing  mostly 
from  the  hip  and  but  little  at  the  knee.  The 
punt  should  be  followed  through  with  the  leg  as 
far  as  possible  with  the  body  bent  backward  so 
as  to  get  the  full  weight  into  the  kick. 

Kicking  Goals 

The  place-kick  is  used  in  several  different 
ways:  for  goal-kicking  after  fair  catches,  for 
kicking  goals  from  the  field  from  scrimmage 
formation,  and  in  kicking  off. 

The  place-kick  from  scrimmage  formation  is 
easier  to  develop  than  the  drop-kick,  can  be 
gotten  off  quicker  and,  in  my  opinion,  is  more 
accurate  and  better  suited  to  kicking  field  goals. 
The  player  who  is  to  receive  the  ball  should 
kneel  on  his  left  knee  about  seven  or  eight  yards 
from  the  center,  and  facing  to  the  left,  that  is 
if  the  holder  is  right-handed  and  the  kicker  uses 
his  right  foot.  The  holder  should  mark  the  spot 
on  the  ground  where  he  intends  to  place  the  ball 
to  enable  the  kicker  to  get  his  aim  and  position. 
Upon  receiving  the  ball  he  should  quickly  place 
it  upon  the  spot  he  has  marked.  Receiving  and 
placing  the  ball  is  an  important  part  in  place- 
kicking  from  scrimmage  and  must  be  practiced 
fully  as  much  as  the  kick  itself.  The  kicker 
should  not  kick  any  harder  than  is  necessary  to 
get  the  ball  over  the  bar.  When  placed  the  ball 
should  be  in  a  perpendicular  position. 


HOW  TO   PLAY   HALFBACK         127 

In  judging  punts  the  catcher  should  always 
have  in  mind  the  direction  and  velocity  of  the 
wind  and  the  effect  it  will  have  upon  the  ball. 
He  should  regulate  his  position  and  distance 
from  the  kicker  with  this  and  the  ability  of  the 
opposing  punter  in  mind.  Any  player  of  good 
common  sense  would  remember  this,  but  there 
is  another  thing  to  consider  which  few  players 
remember  in  judging  punts.  This  is  the  effect 
of  the  air  upon  the  course  of  the  ball,  and  espe- 
cially its  effect  upon  spiral  punts.  There  are 
two  kinds  of  spirals  commonly  punted:  one 
where  the  long  axis  upon  which  the  ball  re- 
volves maintains  the  same  relative  position 
with  regard  to  the  ground  throughout  its 
course;  the  other  where  the  axis  gradually 
varies  its  position  and  follows  the  course  of  the 
ball,  keeping  its  front  end  always  pointed  in  the 
direction  in  which  it  is  going,  like  the  head  of 
an  arrow. 

The  two  kinds  of  punts  or  spirals  travel 
through  the  first  half  of  their  course  practically 
alike,  and  it  is  only  in  the  last  half,  or  after  the 
ball  begins  to  descend,  when  the  difference  in 
their  position  with  reference  to  their  course  be- 
comes apparent,  and  causes  the  air  resistance 
to  affect  them  differently.  The  ball  which  keeps 
the  front  end  pointed  in  the  direction  of  its 
flight  will  carry  farther,  because  of  less  resist- 
ance to  the  air.  But  this  is  not  the  only  reason. 
The  ball  in  descending  will  tend  to  fall  in  the 


128        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

direction  toward  wliicli  its  lower  end  points, 
since  that  is  the  direction  or  line  of  least  re- 
sistance. Consequently  the  ball  which  main- 
tains the  same  position  with  reference  to  the 
ground  throughout  its  course  will,  in  descend- 
ing, not  only  meet  more  air  resistance  but  will 
tend  to  slide  down  on  the  air  in  the  direction 
pointed  to  by  its  rear  end.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  ball  which  keeps  its  end  pointed  in  the  di- 
rection of  its  course,  exposes  the  smallest  pos- 
sible surface  to  the  air  throughout  its  course 
and  consequently  the  air  resistance  is  less,  and 
it  will  travel  faster  and  farther  than  will  a 
round  ball  following  a  normal  course. 

Catching  Punts 

The  catcher  should,  therefore,  watch  the  ball 
in  its  course  and  be  governed  in  getting  under 
it  by  the  direction  towards  which  its  lower  end 
is  pointing  while  descending.  When  the  spiral 
descends  with  its  forward  end  nearest  the 
ground,  the  catcher  will  understand  that  the 
ball  will  carry  much  farther  than  it  will  when 
it  descends  with  its  rear  end  inclined  down- 
ward. "When  the  punt  is  judged  correctly  the 
catching  of  it  is  simply  and  easily  accomplished, 
providing  the  player  practises  faithfully,  and 
has  obtained  a  correct  knowledge  of  how^  it  is 
done. 

I  have  observed  a  great  many  coaches  teach- 


HOW  TO   PLAY   HALFBACK         129 

ing  their  backs  to  catch  punts  by  forming  a  sort 
of  a  pocket  with  their  arms,  body,  and  the  thigh 
of  one  leg,  into  which  the  ball  is  supposed  to 
fall  and  be  held  by  the  arms.  I  believe  this 
method  is  not  the  best  form,  and  that  very  few 
players  catch  punts  that  way,  even  when 
coached  to  do  so.  My  observation  and  experi- 
ence have  convinced  me  that  the  best,  simplest, 
and  surest  method  of  catching  punts,  is  simply 
to  pin  the  ball  to  the  body  with  the  hands  the 
instant  it  lands  there.  The  hands  should  be 
extended  towards  the  ball  as  it  is  descending, 
so  as  to  come  down  to  the  body  with  the  ball, 
and  no  attempt  should  be  made  to  catch  the  ball 
with  the  hands  alone,  except  in  cases  where  the 
ball  has  to  be  caught  very  close  to  the  ground, 
or  above  the  head. 

An  important  fact  to  remember  in  catching 
punts  is  that  the  eyes  should  not  leave  the  ball 
an  instant  until  it  is  caught.  Many  punts  are 
fumbled  because  players  take  their  eyes  off  the 
ball  an  instant  to  see  where  the  opposing  ends 
are  and  in  what  direction  to  run,  and  this  habit 
usually  proves  disastrous.  While  watching  the 
ball  descend  the  catcher  can  usually  see  out  of 
the  corner  of  his  eye  where  his  opponents  are, 
and  in  what  direction  to  run  or  have  a  better 
start.  Whether  he  can  or  not,  the  catching  of 
the  ball  is  the  all-important  matter  to  attend  to 
first,  the  running  of  it  back  being  an  after  con- 
sideration.   The  punt  having  been  caught,  un- 


130        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

less  it  is  a  fair  catch,  tlie  ball  should  be  quickly 
placed  under  the  arm,  and  the  plaj^er  should 
start  quickly  and  at  top  speed  towards  the  op- 
ponents' goal.  Let  no  time  be  lost  in  looking 
for  an  opening  or  in  dodging  back  and  forth 
across  the  field. 

Usually  the  best  plan  is  to  shoot  straight 
ahead.  Dodging  back  and  forth  looks  jDretty, 
and  eluding  several  tacklers  may  create  some 
enthusiasm  among  the  spectators  who  know 
little  about  the  game,  but  the  opposing  forces 
are  gathering  all  the  time,  and  such  tactics 
usually  result  in  no  gain  or  a  loss.  The  player 
is  not  raised  any  in  the  estimation  of  the  coach, 
or  of  those  who  understand  and  appreciate  good 
football. 

TacMing 

No  player  should  hope  to  be  placed  upon  a 
team  unless  he  is  a  good  tackier.  This  is  one 
of  the  most  important  rudiments  of  the  game 
which  every  player  should  thoroughly  master. 
It  tests  a  player's  nerve  more  than  anything 
else  he  has  to  do,  and  a  sure,  fearless  tackier 
is  valuable  to  any  team,  no  matter  what  his 
other  qualifications  may  be.  Innumerable 
games  have  been  saved  by  a  well-executed 
desperate  leap  at  an  opponent  speeding  for  the 
coveted  goal.  Practice,  head-work,  and  nerve 
are  necessary  in  acquiring  ability  in  this  im- 


HOW  TO   PLAY   HALFBACK         131 

portant  feature  of  football.  Different  methods 
of  tackling  should  be  used  for  different  situa- 
tions, and  these  should  be  practised  and  thor- 
oughly mastered.  A  man  coming  straight  at  a 
tackier  should  be  met  squarely  with  the  shoul- 
ders just  above  the  knees.  The  tackier  should 
drive  his  body  forward  by  straightening  his 
legs,  keeping  his  feet  on  the  ground.  His 
straight  body  and  legs  present  a  solid  brace 
which  the  momentum  of  the  oncoming  player 
cannot  topple  over.  If  correctly  met,  the  mo- 
mentum of  the  man  tackled,  thus  meeting  a 
solid  brace,  will  lift  him  off  his  feet,  and  the 
tackier  can  carry  him  back  to  the  ground  with 
his  shoulders  in  the  pit  of  his  stomach. 

While  this  is  the  ideal  way  to  meet  an  on- 
coming man  with  the  ball,  it  more  often  hap- 
pens that  the  runner  will  try  to  pass  to  the  right 
or  left,  and  therefore  a  player  should  be  able 
to  take  mth  equal  ease  a  runner  passing  either 
to  the  right  or  left  of  him.  The  correct  method 
of  tackling  in  such  cases  is  not  to  depend  upon 
the  shoulder,  but  more  upon  the  body.  The 
player,  with  all  the  power  and  speed  possible, 
should  shoot  his  body  across  the  path  of  the 
runner,  grasping  both  legs  and  pinning  them 
tightly  to  his  breast.  It  is  well  to  go  farther 
than  it  seems  necessary,  because  the  runner 
may  partly  hold  the  tackier  back  by  his  free  arm 
and  at  the  same  time  try  to  get  his  legs  farther 
away  from  him.    If  he  tackles  from  the  side  by 


132        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  slioulder,  unless  he  knocks  the  runner  over, 
the  tackier  will  only  have  his  arms  to  stop  him 
with,  and  often  the  runner  can  free  himself  and 
continue  his  course.  Some  players  have  the 
fault  of  grasping  one  leg  in  each  arm,  while  the 
correct  method  is  to  pin  both  legs  firmly  to- 
gether mth  the  arms  locked.  A  tackier  should 
remember  that,  as  a  rule,  a  hard  tackle  hurts 
the  opponent  more  than  it  does  the  tackier,  and 
when  met  fiercely  a  few  times  a  runner  is  in- 
clined to  slow  up  and  try  to  save  himself.  On 
the  other  hand,  if  the  tackier  shows  signs  of 
fear,  or  weakens,  the  runner  will  come  at  him 
more  fiercely  each  time. 

In  practising  tackling,  it  is  well  to  keep  the 
hands  closed  so  as  to  learn  to  depend  upon  the 
body  and  arms.  It  is  too  often  the  case  that 
tacklers  depend  upon  securing  a  grasp  upon  the 
runner's  clothes  or  legs  with  their  hands.  It  is 
better  to  reach  too  far,  in  intercepting  a  runner, 
than  not  far  enough,  because  some  part  of  the 
body  will  then  bring  the  runner  down.  Nine 
times  out  of  ten  a  tackier  who  runs  up  to  the 
runner  and  attempts  to  grab  him  without  using 
the  low,  crouching  attack  will  be  warded  off  by 
the  stiff  arm.  The  low  crouch  and  the  hard  leg 
drive  are  necessary  to  enable  the  tackier  to  get 
under  and  break  down  the  runner's  guard. 
Tackling  is  a  knack  easily  acquired  by  some 
players  and  difficult  to  learn  for  others,  but 
when  once  learned  it  is  never  forgotten.     No 


I 

HOW  TO  PLAY  HALFBACK        133 

team  can  make  many  long  runs  or  run  up  a 
large  score  against  a  team  whose  men  are  all 
good  tacklers,  and  nervy,  no  matter  how  much 
they  may  be  outclassed. 


KICKING 


BY    EDWAED   W.    MAHAN 


EvEEY  punter  will  have  his  own  peculiar  way 
of  going  through  the  motions  of  kicking.  Some 
depend  upon  power  to  send  the  ball  away  on  a 
long  flight,  while  others  rely  upon  skill.  Great 
strength  is  not  a  requisite  for  first-class  punt- 
ing, although  when  combined  with  other  quali- 
ties it  is  a  valuable  asset.  Most  of  the  best 
punters  have  been  tall  men  of  the  rangy  type. 
In  the  days  of  medieval  football  such  men  as 
Haughton,  Dewitt,  and  Brooke  were  all  over 
six  feet  tall.  In  late  years  the  best  kickers  have 
been  tall  '\\dth  long  slender  legs.  Foremost 
among  the  men  of  this  class  were  Burr,  Coy, 
Felton,  Flynn,  and  the  younger  Dewitt.  There 
are  several  reasons  why  a  tall,  rangy  man 
should  make  the  best  sort  of  punter.  In  the 
first  place  he  makes  a  good  target  for  the  center 
to  pass  the  ball  to.  Such  men  usually  have  long 
arms  and  are  able  to  reach  passes  that  smaller 
men  could  not  touch.  Then,  their  legs  are 
longer  and  they  can  get  a  long  sweeping  swing 
at  the  ball.     Again,  their  feet  are  larger  and 

134 


E.    W.    MAHAN    OF    HAKVARD    PUTTING. 


KICKING  135 

offer  a  larger  surface  on  the  instep  for  strikinj^- 
the  ball.  Finally,  the  tall  man  meets  the  ball 
with  his  foot  a  matter  of  a  few  inches  higher 
from  the  ground  than  does  the  short  man,  and 
these  few  inches  count  immensely  when  ag- 
gressive linemen  are  continually  pressing  the 
kicker. 

The  distance  which  the  punter  should  retreat 
from  the  line  of  scrimmage  when  he  is  about  to 
kick  should  be  determined  by  the  circumstances. 
At  the  beginning  of  a  game  he  should  stand 
fully  ten  yards  behind  the  ball.  It  is  danger- 
ous to  go  back  farther  than  ten  yards  since  this 
gives  the  opposing  ends  a  straight  course 
towards  the  punter's  foot.  After  the  first  few 
punts  the  kicker  should  know  if  he  is  being 
pressed  by  his  opponents  and  if  his  kicks  are 
in  danger  of  being  blocked.  If  the  opposing 
linemen  are  not  aggressive  and  do  not  threaten 
to  block  a  kick,  the  punter  need  not  retreat  so 
far  back  of  the  line  of  scrimmage.  Eight  or 
nine  yards  will  suffice  in  this  case,  but  it  is  not 
advisable  to  approach  nearer  than  eight  yards. 
If  he  is  kicking  from  behind  a  balanced  line, 
when  there  are  three  men  on  each  side  of  the 
center,  he  should  stand  directly  behind  the  cen- 
ter. But  if  the  line  is  unbalanced  he  should 
take  up  a  position  behind  the  man  in  the  center 
of  the  line.  If  there  are  four  men  on  the  right 
side  of  the  center  and  two  on  the  left  he  should 
stand  behind  the  player  on  the  right-hand  side 


136        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

of  the  center,  wlio  under  ordinary  conditions 
would  be  the  right  guard. 

Three  of  the  members  of  the  backfield  form 
protection  for  the  kicker,  two  on  the  side  of  his 
kicking  foot  and  one  on  the  other  side.  The  two 
backs  on  the  side  of  the  punter's  foot  stand  in 
line  directly  behind  the  guard  on  that  side. 
When  the  play  is  about  to  start,  the  first  back 
should  be  at  arm's  length  from  the  guard  and 
the  second  at  arm's  length  from  the  first.  From 
these  positions  they  may  run  the  ball  through 
any  part  of  the  line  or  around  the  ends.  The 
formation  is  especially  strong  for  line  plays. 
When  the  ball  is  snapped  back  for  a  kick  these 
men  immediately  break  back  about  three  yards 
each  so  that  one  is  back  about  seven  yards  and 
the  other  directly  in  front  of  him.  It  is  essen- 
tial for  these  men  to  stand  one  behind  the  other 
and  close  together,  shoulder  to  shoulder.  Their 
feet  should  be  on  a  straight  line  and  their  bod- 
ies turned  towards  the  side-line.  If  the  punter 
kicks  with  his  right  foot  the  line  of  scrimmage 
should  be  on  their  left.  They  should  be  in  a 
crouching  position  ready  to  spring.  From  this 
position  they  can  get  the  use  of  the  full  length 
of  their  bodies  in  blocking.  Usually  the  tackle 
and  end  on  the  side  of  the  kicker's  foot  are  the 
dangerous  men.  It  is  always  well  to  force  them 
to  go  on  the  outside  of  the  kicker.  The  protect- 
ors should  be  careful  not  to  let  either  of  these 
men  get  between  them.    They  must  keep  close 


KICKING  137 

together  until  they  believe  that  the  kicker  is  on 
the  point  of  kicking  the  ball,  then  they  may 
break,  if  necessary,  and  each  ward  off  an  oppo- 
nent. They  must  use  their  own  judgment  as  to 
which  are  the  most  dangerous  men. 

The  quarter-back  alone  forms  protection  on 
the  side  away  from  the  kicker's  foot.  When 
the  ball  is  snapped  he  is  either  behind  the  snap- 
per-back or  four  yards  back  of  the  guard.  If  he 
is  in  position  behind  the  center  he  can  receive 
the  ball  from  that  player  and  feed  it  to  one  of 
the  backs  or  run  with  it  himself.  Wlien  the  ball 
is  snapped  for  a  kick  he  must  wheel  and  run 
back  to  meet  any  opponent  who  might  sift 
through  the  line.  He  also  must  not  let  the 
tackle  or  end  get  inside  him.  His  method  of 
blocking  is  similar  to  that  used  by  the  other 
two  backs. 

The  kicker  should  stand  with  his  weight 
evenly  distributed  on  both  feet  so  as  to  be 
ready  to  jump  in  front  of  the  ball  if  he  should 
get  a  poor  pass.  He  should  tell  his  center  just 
how  and  where  he  likes  to  receive  the  ball  and 
insist  upon  getting  the  ball  just  as  he  likes. 
Never  reach  for  a  wide  pass,  always  jump  out 
in  front  of  it. 

Some  kickers  stand  with  their  kicking  foot 
forward  and  other  foot  back,  others  take  this 
step  back  just  as  the  ball  is  about  to  reach  them. 
The  object  of  this  is  to  get  a  good  drive  when 
stepping  forward  to  kick.    The  next  thing  to  be 


138        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

considered  is  the  catching  of  the  ball  from  the 
center.  It  should  be  caught  as  near  the  height 
from  which  it  is  to  be  kicked  as  possible.  The 
ball  may  be  caught  at  arm's  length  with  the 
arms  stiff.  This  is  commonly  called  ''  fighting 
the  ball."  The  surest  way  is  to  meet  the  ball 
at  arm's  length  and  to  give  with  it  until  it 
strikes  the  body.  Next  the  ball  is  shoved  out 
in  front.  All  this  time  it  is  being  revolved  so 
that  it  will  be  in  the  proper  position  to  drop  to 
the  foot.  Most  kickers  have  a  habit  of  placing 
the  ball  so  that  the  lacing  is  on  the  top  or  a 
little  to  the  outside.  A  good  football  will  go 
just  as  well  if  kicked  on  the  lacing,  and  twist- 
ing the  ball  about  in  the  hands  takes  time. 
Little  time  should  be  spent  in  catching  the  ball 
on  the  pass  from  the  center  and  in  placing  it  in 
position  to  be  kicked,  as  every  fraction  of  a 
second  counts.  The  ideal  way  to  punt  is  to 
kick  the  ball  out  of  the  hands,  but  very  few  are 
able  to  do  this.  At  least  the  ball  should  be  al- 
lowed to  drop  the  shortest  distance  possible 
from  the  hands  to  the  foot,  since  this  is  where 
most  of  the  kicks  go  wrong.  The  slightest 
twist  of  the  ball  in  its  passage  from  the  hands 
to  the  foot  may  be  Just  enough  to  spoil  the  kick. 
Some  kickers  like  to  meet  the  ball  high  up  on 
the  instep,  while  others  prefer  to  meet  it  on  the 
instep  nearer  to  the  toes.  The  ball  should  be 
struck  with  the  instep  just  a  trifle  on  the  out- 
side of  the  foot.    There  are  two  ways  of  drop- 


KICKING  139 

ping  tlie  ball  on  the  instep.  One  is  to  drop  it 
so  it  falls  diagonally  across  the  foot,  and  the 
other  is  to  drop  it  so  that  its  long  axis  points 
straight  ahead.  When  the  ball  is  dropped  diag- 
onally across  the  foot  the  kicker  must  kick 
straight  ahead.  Meeting  the  ball  in  this  way 
gives  it  a  peculiar  spiral  twist.  When  the  ball 
is  held  so  that  its  axis  points  straight  ahead  the 
kicker  must  swing  his  foot  across  the  ball  to 
give  it  the  spiral  twist.  The  foot  hits  the  ball 
on  the  bottom  and  cuts  it,  causing  it  to  revolve. 

After  the  kicker  has  learned  to  place  the  ball 
on  the  foot  properly  and  to  kick  it  accurately 
there  is  a  snap  of  the  leg  which  he  should  learn. 
This  snap  permits  the  kicker  to  kick  without 
much  exertion  and  send  the  ball  a  good  dis- 
tance. Wlien  the  kicking  leg  is  started  forward 
to  kick  the  ball  it  should  not  be  held  stiff,  but 
just  a  trifle  bent.  Just  as  the  ball  meets  the 
foot  the  leg  should  be  snapped  so  as  to 
straighten  it  out.  This  snap  sends  the  ball 
farther  than  the  power  of  the  leg  would  be  able 
to  do. 

High  kicks  are  harder  to  catch  than  low  ones 
and  the  punter  should  bear  this  in  mind.  He 
should  learn  just  how  far  his  ends  can  run  down 
the  field  to  cover  kicks  and  he  should  kick  ac- 
cordingly. If  they  are  slow  he  should  kick 
high.  If  they  are  fast  he  should  still  kick 
high,  but  he  may  get  more  distance  into  it.  He 
should  learn  to  place  the  ball  down  the  field 


140        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

accurately.  This  can  be  accomplished  by  trying 
to  place  the  ball  out  of  bounds  at  a  certain  point. 
Keep  the  spot  at  which  you  are  aiming  in  mind, 
but  keep  the  eye  on  the  ball. 

The  passing  and  catching  of  the  ball  as  ex- 
plained above  also  apply  in  drop-kickiug.  The 
first  difference  comes  in  placing  the  ball  in  the 
hands.  It  is  best  to  get  a  low  pass  from  the 
center  so  that  no  time  is  lost  in  pulling  the  ball 
down.  The  center  should  aim  at  a  spot  just 
above  the  right  knee,  provided  the  kicker  is  to 
kick  with  his  right  foot.  The  long  axis  of  the 
ball  must  be  held  so  that  it  is  perpendicular  to 
the  ground.  The  right  hand  should  be  held  on 
the  back  of  the  ball  and  the  left  hand  on  the 
side  so  as  to  guide  it.  Better  results  can  prob- 
ably be  obtained  by  tilting  the  ball  slightly 
back  in  dropping  it. 

The  kick  may  be  described  as  a  quick  shove. 
The  toe  is  slightly  pointed  up  and  held  rigid. 
Such  a  shove  will  send  the  ball  over  the  bar 
from  the  thirty-five-yard  mark.  The  kicker 
should  practise  kicking  inside  the  twenty-five- 
yard  line  and  should  practise  from  all  angles. 
He  should  above  all  things  keep  the  goal-posts 
in  mind  and  his  eye  on  the  ball. 

The  place-kick  also  is  more  or  less  of  a  shove. 
The  foot  is  held  much  the  same  as  in  drop-kick- 
ing. Here  again  the  main  rule  to  be  remem- 
bered is  to  keep  the  goal-posts  in  mind  and  the 
eye  on  the  ball. 


FOLLOWING   THE    BALL 

BY    SANFORD    B.    WHITE 

Each  year,  early  in  September,  the  candi- 
dates for  the  various  elevens  report,  the  coaches 
gather  from  various  parts  of  the  country,  and 
everything  is  put  in  readiness  for  the  coming 
season's  work.  The  first  few  ''  work-outs  " 
are  of  a  very  light  order,  for  the  summer 's  rest 
and  vacation  have  left  the  men  in  poor  condi- 
tion, but  during  these  first  practices  the  men 
are  taught  the  rudiments  of  the  game,  prepara- 
tory to  their  harder  work  later  in  the  season. 
The  rules  are  carefully  gone  over  and  dis- 
cussed, a  few  simple  plays  are  rehearsed,  and 
some  of  the  fundamental  principles  hammered 
into  the  minds  of  the  men.  Of  these  elements 
none  is  more  important,  to  my  mind,  than  the 
one  I  have  chosen  for  my  subject,  "  Following 
the  Ball." 

Suppose  we  happen  down  some  day  early  in 
October  to  see  the  men  in  one  of  their  regular 
afternoon  work-outs.  We  will  choose  any  of 
the  larger  colleges,  for  it  matters  little  which 
one  we  pick,  as  the  practices  are  nearly  all  the 
same.    The  men  report  rather  late  in  the  day 

141 


142        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

ill  order  to  escape  the  noon  heat,  so  about  four 
o'clock  we  see  players  come  straggling  on  the 
field.  Usually  there  has  been  a  preliminary 
meeting  held  in  the  club-house,  where  the  rules 
and  various  plays  have  been  discussed,  but  we 
need  not  bother  any  more  about  that  side  of  the 
work,  but  go,  instead,  right  out  on  the  field 
with  the  men  themselves  where  we  can  hear  and 
see  everything.  In  one  part  of  the  field  the  can- 
didates are  practising  falling  on  the  ball,  per- 
haps at  the  other  end  the  men  are  tackling  the 
dummy,  while  the  linemen  can  be  seen  working 
on  the  pushing-machine.  All  sorts  of  kicking 
will  be  tried,  the  punters  are  perfecting  their 
long,  high  spirals,  seeking  to  gain  speed  and 
direction  in  each  kick;  the  place-kickers  and 
drop-kickers,  upon  whose  ability  so  much  rests 
in  the  modern  game  of  football,  are  peppering 
the  goal-posts,  striving  in  their  work  to  gain  the 
finish  and  perfection  which  late  in  the  season 
may  mean  so  much  towards  a  victory  or  per- 
haps even  a  championship. 

In  all  this  elementary  work  the  coaches  have 
been  giving  advice  and  supervision,  but  now, 
after  an  hour's  practice  of  this  sort  of  work, 
the  men  are  called  together  and  various  teams 
picked  out  for  signal  drill.  In  this  later  prac- 
tice the  individual  playing  is  developed  with 
the  one  aim  of  wielding  all  eleven  parts  into  a 
machine,  and  as  we  follow  the  men  up  and  down 
the  field  oftentimes  we'll  hear  some  coach  call 


FOLLOWING   THE   BALL  143 

out,  **  Follow  the  ball,"  Can  any  better  ad- 
vice be  given  to  any  man  who  is  trying  to  make 
good  on  a  college  team,  or  on  any  football  team 
in  fact?  I  surely  know  of  none.  Just  think  for 
a  minute  what  those  three  words  mean.  If  you 
follow  the  ball  you  follow  the  man  who  is  carry- 
ing the  ball,  that  is,  when  you  are  on  the  de- 
fensive. So  you  are  always  '*  Johnny  on  the 
Spot,"  so  to  speak,  and  in  a  position  where  you 
can  do  the  most  good. 

Let  us  look  into  the  thing  a  little  closer  and 
see  the  possibilities  a  man  may  have  who  plays 
with  that  one  idea  of  keeping  his  eye  glued  on 
the  ball.  As  we  all  know,  there  are  two  kinds 
of  football,  the  offensive  and  the  defensive 
game,  and  while  this  advice  applies  to  both 
games  it  is  more  applicable  to  the  defensive 
game. 

The  linemen  in  the  attacking  game  are  not 
in  the  position  to  follow  the  ball  as  well  as  some 
of  the  other  men,  for  they  are  usually  making 
holes  for  the  play  to  be  run  through,  pushing 
aside  the  opposing  men,  or  boxing  them  in.  But 
in  every  play  they  should  know  where  the  play 
is  going  and,  when  their  work  is  done,  ''  cut 
through  "  and  get  around  the  ball,  forming  in- 
terference for  the  runner.  The  backfield  men, 
however,  can,  and  should  follow  the  ball  unless 
they  are  sent  in  some  direction  different  from 
that  of  the  attacking  point  in  hopes  of  deceiving 
their  opponents.    In  this  modern  game  where 


144        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

pushing  and  pulling  i&  forbidden  they  should 
constantly  be  on  the  watch  for  fumbles.  There 
are  bound  to  be  fumbles  in  football,  that  is  one 
small  part  of  the  sport  which  makes  it  the  in- 
teresting game  it  is,  and  sometimes  with  these 
fumbles  goes  a  victor5^  If  every  man  is  on  the 
watch  for  just  such  an  occurrence,  is  following 
it,  and  ready  to  fall  on  that  ball,  how  much 
better  chance  there  is  for  a  recovery  by  one  of 
the  players  on  whose  side  the  fumble  was  made ! 
Then  there  are  kicks,  kicks  of  all  sorts,  from 
which  any  circumstance  may  arise  offering  a 
chance  to  the  man  who  is  following  the  ball.  A 
kick  may  be  blocked  and  an  alert  man  may  re- 
cover it  or  tackle  his  opponent  who  has  picked 
it  up  and  is  on  his  way  to  a  touchdown.  This 
very  sort  of  play  occurred  in  one  of  the  big 
games  in  1911  when  Huntington  of  Harvard 
had  broken  through,  blocked  a  kick,  and  was  on 
his  way  to  a  score  when  tackled  by  Pendleton, 
captain  of  the  Princeton  team  the  next  year. 
This  one  player's  vigilance  and  watchfulness 
saved  the  game,  for  had  Pendleton  not  followed 
the  ball  Huntington  would  in  all  probability 
have  scored. 

On  punts  is  a  place  where  a  man  can  prove 
his  worth  in  following  the  ball.  Perhaps  the 
ball  is  dropped  or  fumbled  by  the  man  playing 
back,  and  it's  anybody's  ball.  If  the  ends  and 
the  tackles  are  down  the  field  and  under  that 
ball,  why  haven 't  they  an  even  chance  to  fall  on 


FOLLOWING  THE  BALL  145 

it  and  gain  that  much  ground  for  their  team? 
A  play  of  this  sort  may  change  the  whole  game, 
it  forces  the  fighting  so  much  nearer  the  ene- 
mies' goal  line,  sometimes  puts  the  team  in  a 
position  to  score  a  drop-kick  or  placement  kick, 
and  then  again  in  some  cases  there  is  the  pos- 
sibility that  the  ball  may  be  picked  up  and  the 
man  make  the  score  himself.  In  any  of  these 
cases  one  thing  is  necessary,  the  man  must  be 
on  hand  and  he  must  follow  the  ball.  We  are 
not  so  apt  to  think  of  this  recovered  fumble  as 
a  gain  of  forty  yards,  assuming  that  the  punt 
has  gone  that  distance,  but  how  does  it  differ 
so  much  from  the  gain  of  the  dashing  half- 
back who  has  skirted  an  end  for  a  run  of 
that  length?  It  is  not  as  spectacular  from  a 
spectator's  point  of  view  but  it  really  makes 
no  difference  how  the  gain  is  made  so  long  as 
it  is  made.  They  both  amount  to  the  same 
thing,  both  are  an  advance  of  forty  yards 
towards  the  touchdo^vn  and  the  score,  and 
that's  precisely  what  those  eleven  men  are 
striving  and  working  for. 

In  turning  to  the  defensive  play  we  see  even 
greater  chances  offered  to  the  team,  all  of 
whose  eleven  men  follow  the  ball.  In  this  style 
of  play  every  man  on  the  defense  is  in  a  posi- 
tion to  watch  the  ball  and  to  follow  it.  It  is 
where  the  ball  goes  that  the  play  goes;  of 
course  there  are  forward  passes  which  must  be 
guarded  against,  but  by  following  the  ball  a 


146        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

team  will  win  out  in  the  end.  There  are  all 
sorts  of  attack,  and  one  very  common  is  to 
shoot  the  first  man  in  the  tandem  in  a  cross- 
buck,  fake  the  pass  to  him  to  draw  the  defense 
towards  him,  but  in  reality  run  the  second  or 
third  man  straight  through  the  line.  Now  if 
each  man  is  awake  and  follows  that  ball,  how 
can  he  be  '*  sucked  in,"  as  they  call  it  in  foot- 
ball terms  !  Plays  of  this  nature  are  constantly 
met  and  it's  the  man  who  keeps  his  eyes 
open,  and  tracks  after  that  ball,  who  nine  times 
out  of  ten  stops  the  play,  and  prevents  the  gain. 
Then  there  are  fumbles  to  be  gotten,  as  in  the 
offensive  game,  only  in  this  case  a  fumbled  ball 
gained  means  more  than  the  recovered  ball.  It 
puts  a  team  on  the  offense  at  once  and  some- 
times may  result  in  a  score.  Big  games  have 
been  won  indirectly  by  the  watchfulness  of  one 
man,  whose  getting  a  fumbled  ball,  insignificant 
in  itself,  was  the  real  cause  of  the  victory.  It 
all  resulted  from  his  following  the  ball.  Then 
there  are  ''  series  plays,"  where  a  man  may  be 
caught  sound  asleep  by  watching  his  opponent, 
but  had  he  been  alert  and  watching  the  ball  in- 
stead of  the  man  he  would  have  been  ready  for 
the  play  in  place  of  being  caught  off  his  guard. 
There  are  all  the  chances  in  the  kicking  game 
which  I  have  mentioned  in  the  outline  of  offen- 
sive playing,  only  in  this  case  the  chances  are 
even  greater  to  those  who  are  playing  with  the 
idea  of  following  the  ball.     There  are  wrong 


FOLLOWING  THE  BALL  147 

signals,  crossed  signals,  bad  passes,  and  many 
other  plays  constantly  offering  chances  to  the 
wide-awake  man  so  that  by  his  own  work  and 
by  his  ever  readiness  to  grab  that  ball  he  may 
not  only  stave  off  a  score  and  defeat  but  score 
a  victory  by  his  own  watchfulness. 

It  matters  very  little  whether  your  team  is 
playing  on  the  offense  or  the  defense.  You 
should  know  every  second  just  exactly  where 
the  ball  is,  and  at  the  same  time  should  be  try- 
ing to  figure  out  where  it  will  go.  It  is  the 
team  that  plans  or  the  player  who  plans  that 
achieves  success  in  playing  the  game.  If  your 
own  team  has  the  ball,  of  course  the  signal  will 
tell  you  where  it  is  going.  But  the  signal  does 
not  tell  you  whether  the  ball  is  to  be  fumbled. 
Be  ready  for  that.  Let  us  suppose  the  ball  is 
not  in  play.  It  lies  on  the  ground  between  the 
two  opposing  teams;  your  center's  hands  are 
on  its  cover.  From  the  moment  the  signal  is 
called,  do  not  let  your  eyes  wander  from  that 
ball  if  you  can  help  it.  See  it  when  the  center 
passes  it  to  the  quarter;  see  it  till  the  play 
starts;  see  it  as  long  as  you  can,  and  if  it  hap- 
pens the  play  is  going  around  the  end  of  the 
line  opposite  to  that  you  are  playing  on,  you 
can  keep  it  in  view  until  it  is  downed. 

If  you  are  watching,  if  you  are  ready,  and 
the  quarter  fumbles  the  ball,  you  have  the  best 
chance  of  anybody  to  recover  it,  because  you 
have  been  thinking  about  that  very  thing  and 


148        THE   BOOK  OF   ATHLETICS 

are  prepared  to  dive  for  it  the  minute  it  escapes 
your  team-mate's  grasp.  It  is  this  readiness 
that  counts. 

But  do  not  let  your  eyes  do  all  the  work. 
There  is  some  left  for  your  hands  and  legs  and 
for  all  your  body.  Follow  the  ball  with  your 
eyes,  but  follow  it  with  the  rest  of  you  as  well. 
If  a  ball  is  fumbled  a  hundred  feet  from  you, 
the  fact  that  you  see  it  roll  on  the  grass  will  do 
little  good.  But  if  you  are  right  there,  watch- 
ful, ready  to  dive  for  it,  that  fact  may  mean 
just  the  difference  between  defeat  and  victory 
in  an  important  game. 

If  you  are  on  the  defensive,  it  is  equally  im- 
portant to  follow  the  ball  with  eye  and  body. 
The  end  or  half  or  tackle  who  knows  every  play 
is  more  valuable  to  his  team  than  the  best 
tackier  in  the  world  who  loses  track  of  the  play, 
if  only  for  an  instant.  Do  not  let  that  ball  elude 
you  for  the  tenth  part  of  a  second,  for  that  in- 
finitesimal bit  of  time  may  give  your  opponents' 
play  just  the  start  it  needs  to  make  a  big  gain. 
If  you  know  just  who  has  the  ball  and  which 
way  he  is  running,  no  trick  play  can  deceive 
you. 

Of  course,  every  player  and  every  team  is 
eager  for  victory.  It  would  be  a  very  poor 
player  and  a  very  poor  sportsman  who  went 
into  a  game  not  caring  whether  his  team  lost  or 
won.  If  you  really  want  to  win,  you  must  be 
willing  to  work  and  develop  your  skill,  and  the 


FOLLOWING   THE   BALL  149 

collective  skill  of  your  team.  There  is  physical 
hard  work  about  football,  and  there  is  mental 
hard  work ;  not  the  least  of  which  is  watching 
the  ball  and  trying  to  figure  out  what  your  op- 
ponents are  going  to  do  with  it.  It  demands 
close  attention;  it  demands  that  your  thoughts 
do  not  wander  to  the  crowds,  or  to  the  man  you 
are  playing  against,  or  to  anytliing  but  just 
that  pigskin  ball  and  where  it  is  going  to  go. 
As  soon  as  it  starts  get  near  it.  Stay  near  it 
until  it  is  downed.  Maybe  you  cannot  make  the 
tackle,  maybe  you  cannot  seize  the  ball  if  it  is 
dropped,  but  you  may  be  able  to  make  it  possi- 
ble for  a  team-mate  to  tackle  by  breaking  the 
interference,  or  you  may  be  the  means  of  al- 
lowing one  of  your  own  men  to  seize  the  ball  by 
tumbling  over  an  opponent  who  is  headed  for  it. 

A  great  many  games  are  won  and  lost  on  so- 
called  **  flukes."  But  there  are  a  great  many 
of  these  startling,  unexpected  plays  that  are 
not  accidents  at  all.  One  team  wins  because  of 
them,  and  the  other  team  loses,  and  for  no  other 
reason  than  that  the  lucky  team  had  its  men 
trained  to  follow  the  ball. 

I  have  very  lightly  touched  upon  a  few  of  the 
possibilities  offered  by  following  the  ball.  I 
purposely  have  neglected  the  forward  pass,  but 
in  this  as  in  every  other  phase  of  the  game  a 
man  must  know  where  that  ball  is,  and  I  think 
we  will  all  agree  that  if  you  are  with  the  ball 
you  are  ''  in  it,"  and  that's  where  a  man  does 


150        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  most  good  in  this  game  of  football  —  right 
*'  in  it,"  and  in  the  middle  of  it.  If  I  were 
asked  to  give  briefly  the  best  advice  I  could  give 
for  playing  football,  I  would  quickly  answer: 
Keep  your  wits  about  you,  your  eyes  wide  open, 
and  follow  that  ball. 


i 


TRACK  ATHLETICS 


TRACK   ATHLETICS 

With  the  resumption  of  the  Olympic  games 
and  their  establishment  as  the  meeting-place  of 
the  athletes  of  all  nations  in  competitive  games, 
track  and  field  athletics  increased  tremendously 
in  popular  favor,  assuming  a  place  unique  in 
the  world  of  sport.  The  rapid  development  in 
this  country  of  such  games  as  tennis,  golf,  and 
basket-ball  had  at  one  time  threatened  the 
popularity  of  track  athletics.  The  Olympic 
games,  afforded  the  stimulus  needed  to  bring 
into  track  athletics  the  mass  of  latent  mate- 
rial which  the  country  possessed.  As  a  result 
America  stands  to-day  supreme  in  this  branch 
of  sport.  Her  athletes  are  admired  the  world 
over  and  her  coaches  sought  as  teachers  in 
foreign  lands.  At  home  the  ever  increasing 
number  of  boys  and  men  entering  meets  has 
had  a  splendid  effect  upon  the  youth  of  the 
country.  Our  big  track  meets,  attended  as  they 
are  by  thousands  of  spectators  and  run  off  in 
an  orderly,  sportsmanlike  way,  are  a  tremen- 
dous factor  in  disseminating  a  healthy  spirit  of 
rivalry,  fairness,  and  square  play.  No  sport  is 
more  democratic  or  more  easily  freed  from 
objectionable  features.    They  offer  opportunity 

153 


154        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

to  thousands  of  boys  in  running,  jumping, 
vaulting,  and  deeds  of  strength  with  weights, 
all  of  which  are  so  much  a  part  of  the  life  of 
the  average  boy.  Their  interest  is  but  natural. 
Track  athletics  organized  as  they  are  in  this 
country,  with  important  meets  held  in  every 
section,  afford  boys  the  opportunity  of  seeing 
good  athletes  in  action  and  good  coaches  at 
work  to  an  extent  which  is  equalled  in  no  other 
branch  of  sport,  with  the  possible  exception  of 
baseball.  There  is,  however,  in  this  very  width 
of  opportunity  the  danger  of  overdoing  compe- 
tition, and  it  becomes  the  duty  of  all  interested 
in  the  welfare  of  the  boys  to  see  that  they  are 
carefully  watched  if  they  attempt  strenuous 
competition  during  their  developmental  stage. 


HOW  TO  BECOME  A  SPRINTER 

BY   MICHAEL   C.    MUEPHY 

One  often  hears  it  said  nowadays  that 
''  sprinters,  like  poets,  are  born,  not  made." 
In  a  measure  this  is  a  true  statement,  because 
it  is  just  as  natural  for  some  men  to  outstrip 
their  fellows  in  a  foot-race,  as  it  is  for  others 
to  pass  their  mates  in  any  mental  or  physical 
task.  It  would  be  a  hopeless  undertaking  to  try 
to  develop  a  cart-horse  into  a  trotter,  for  they 
are  built  for  totally  different  purposes.  So  it  is 
almost  as  hard  to  make  sprinters  out  of  some 
athletes.  At  the  same  time  any  man,  no  matter 
how  slow  he  is,  can  improve  his  speed  wonder- 
fully by  constant  practice  and  without  any  harm 
to  himself.  It  requires  a  peculiar  combination 
of  strength,  agility,  and  nervous  energy  to  make 
a  successful  sprinter.  But  sprinting  is  some- 
thing that  every  man  ought  to  learn,  because  in 
learning  how  to  run  one  acquires  the  faculty  of 
quick  thinking  and  physical  control. 

Before  taking  up  the  technical  requirements 
of  the  sprinter,  I  want  to  correct  a  popular  fal- 
lacy that,  to  be  a  successful  sprinter,  some  par- 
ticular build  is  necessary.  This  is  a  big  mis- 
take, for  in  the  twenty-five  years  that  I  have 

155 


156        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

been  training  athletes  I  have  seen  and  trained 
champions  of  nearly  every  conceivable  build. 
Some  were  short  of  stature  and  inclined  to  be 
too  heavy ;  some  very  tall  and  thin,  while  others 
had  what  is  generally  considered  an  ideal  phys- 
ical build.  Consequently  a  man's  shortness  of 
stature  is  not  proof  that  he  cannot  sprint,  nor 
should  he  be  dismayed  if  his  physical  dimen- 
sions run  to  the  other  extreme. 

If  there  is  any  advantage  to  either  type  of 
man,  I  should  say  that  it  lies  with  the  one  who 
is  tall  and  strong.  But  what  he  should  consider 
above  all  other  things  is  whether  he  has  the 
nervous  energy  that  will  enable  him  to  leave 
his  mark  and  get  under  way  without  the  loss 
of  a  fraction  of  a  second,  and  the  strength  to 
carry  him  through  to  the  tape  without  a  falter. 
In  sprinting,  as  in  no  other  athletic  event,  suc- 
cess depends  upon  the  ability  to  get  the  maxi- 
mum return  from  every  ounce  of  energy  with- 
out the  loss  of  any  of  it.  To  do  this  is  an  art 
that  requires  intelligent,  determined  and  con- 
scientious training. 

There  are  three  points  of  which  the  sprinter 
must  make  a  scientific  study  if  he  expects  to  be 
a  champion.  These  are:  1,  The  Start.  2,  Get- 
ting into  your  stride.    3,  Learning  to  finish. 

/.  The  Start 

Every  successful  sprinter  nowadays  uses  the 
**  crouching  "  start.    The  standing  start  used 


HOW  TO  BECOME  A  SPRINTER   157 

for  long-distance  races  is  impracticable  for  the 
sprinter  who  needs  to  get  away  from  the  mark 
at  top  speed.  The  importance  of  a  good  start 
cannot  be  overestimated,  for  conditions  being 
equal,  a  poor  or  slow  start  means  certain  de- 
feat. The  athlete  who  has  mastered  the  start 
can  usually  gain  from  a  yard  to  two  yards  at 
the  very  beginning  of  his  race  on  the  man  who 
has  not  mastered  it.  The  crouching  start  was 
first  used  by  me  in  professional  work  in  1880, 
and  introduced  in  1887  when  C.  H.  Sherrill,  of 
Yale,  the  intercollegiate  champion,  demon- 
strated it.  Needless  to  say,  he  was  laughed  at 
when  he  got  down  on  all  fourSj  but  to-day  no 
good  sprinter  ever  thinks  of  trying  any  other 
start. 

The  object  of  a  good  start  is  to  get  off  the 
mark  and  into  your  natural  stride  without  the 
waste  of  strength  or  time.  The  first  thing  the 
runner  should  do  is  to  dig  the  holes  for  start- 
ing. As  no  portion  of  the  body  can  touch  the 
ground  in  front  of  the  starting  line,  the  holes 
should  be  so  dug  that  the  runner  can  get  as 
close  to  the  starting-line  as  possible  and  yet  be 
in  a  position  to  get  away  as  naturally  and  as 
quickly  as  possible.  To  determine  where  to  dig 
the  holes  the  runner  should  first  assume  the  cor- 
rect crouching  position.  First,  get  down  on  one 
knee.  The  knee  of  the  back  leg  should  be  about 
even  with  the  inner  ankle  of  the  forward  foot. 
This  is  the  position  you  should  have,  the  back 


158        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

laiee  only  being  on  the  ground  when  the  starter 
gives  the  first  of  his  three  signals,  "  Get  on 
your  marks."  With  the  next  signal,  which  is 
' '  Get  set, ' '  you  rise  on  the  hands  and  feet,  lean- 
ing forward  as  far  as  possible.  In  this  position 
you  wait  for  the  report  of  the  pistol  with  which 
you  spring  forward.  The  runner  should  be 
most  careful  to  keep  his  mind  concentrated  on 
the  gun.  If  he  thinks  of  anything  else  he  is 
sure  to  lose  an  instant  before  he  realizes  that 
the  race  is  on. 

As  soon  as  you  have  found  an  easy,  natural 
position  for  your  crouch,  you  should  dig  small 
holes,  which  you  can  easily  do  with  your  spiked 
shoes,  one  hole  for  each  foot.  Be  sure  that 
these  holes  are  deep  enough  and  strong  enough 
to  give  you  a  firm  grip  as  you  get  your  position. 
In  preparing  the  holes  they  should  be  so  located 
that  the  hands,  which  are  on  the  starting-line, 
are  not  more  than  six  inches  in  front  of  the  for- 
ward foot.  As  the  hands  cannot  be  ahead  of 
the  starting-line,  you  will  give  away  distance  by 
having  your  feet  farther  back  than  I  have  indi- 
cated. Some  runners  with  very  long  legs  and 
arms  give  away  more  distance  than  this,  but  the 
positions  I  have  indicated  are  best  for  the  nor- 
mal man.  Above  all,  see  that  you  are  well  bal- 
anced and  can  get  off  your  mark  without  a  tend- 
ency to  wabble. 

The  most  important  part  of  the  start  is  that 
of  holding  your  body  in  perfect  control  after 


HOW  TO   BECOME   A   SPRINTER   159 

you  have  been  told  to  get  set,  and  while  waiting 
for  the  pistol.  Let  the  weight  of  the  body  rest 
on  the  front  leg,  a  little  forward,  so  that  the  first 
drive  of  the  legs  will  send  you  forward  and  up- 
ward. It  will  be  found  that  the  fingers  will  be 
of  great  aid  in  keeping  the  body  properly  bal- 
anced and  directing  the  first  forward  spring 
when  the  pistol  is  fired.  At  the  same  time  be 
sure  that  you  have  enough  weight  on  the  back 
foot  to  keep  it  firmly  in  the  hole,  and  remember 
that  the  spring  should  be  off  both  feet.  It  will 
take  some  time  to  acquire  the  perfect  control 
of  the  body  that  will  enable  you  to  wait  for  the 
pistol.  Do  not  get  into  the  habit  of  swinging 
back  and  forth.  This  will  either  make  you  go 
off  the  mark  too  soon  and  subject  you  to  a  pen- 
alty, or  you  will  find  yourself  left  at  the  mark. 
Also  avoid  the  trick  of  some  runners  who  aim 
gradually  to  move  the  body  forward  after  get- 
ting set,  on  the  assumption  that  they  can  time 
themselves  to  reach  the  farthest  point  forward 
just  as  the  pistol  sounds.  This  practice  loses 
more  races  than  it  wins. 

II.  Getting  Into  Your  Stride 

The  same  careful  attention  to  details  must  be 
observed  after  the  start,  for  getting  into  your 
stride  without  loss  of  energy  and  without  wab- 
bling is  just  as  important  as  the  correct  start. 
As  you  rise  from  the  mark  you  should  spring 


160        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

forward  "with  the  impetus  which  your  crouch 
gives  you.  Make  it  a  point  to  run  straight  and 
true,  always  remembering  that  the  straightest 
course  is  also  the  shortest.  Many  runners  make 
the  mistake  of  taking  too  long  or  too  short 
strides  at  the  first  spring.  Make  it  a  point  to 
take  these  first  strides  naturally  and  easily. 
You  will  be  rising  gradually  and  will  have  cov- 
ered twenty  or  twenty-five  yards  before  you  are 
running  erect.  Be  careful  not  to  try  to  get  erect 
too  quickly,  or  you  will  lose  speed  in  conse- 
quence. In  order  to  take  your  strides  and  pre- 
serve your  equilibrium  as  you  are  rising,  you 
should  take  these  first  few  strides  as  easily  and 
quickly  as  possible.  Careful  observation  of 
these  points  will  enable  you  to  be  running  eas- 
ily when  you  get  erect  and  you  will  be  able  to 
put  every  ounce  of  strength  into  your  work. 

For  the  first  few  weeks  of  your  training  you 
will  find  that  you  will  have  plenty  to  do  in  mas- 
tering the  start  and  getting  into  your  stride. 
The  third  portion  of  your  training,  the  final 
burst  over  the  last  quarter  of  your  course,  must 
be  delayed  until  you  have  gotten  sufficient 
strength  and  mastered  the  two  essentials  al- 
ready mentioned.  No  sprinter,  whether  his 
distance  be  one  hundred  yards  or  two  hundred 
and  twenty  yards,  should  attempt  to  run 
through  the  full  distance  at  anything  like  his 
best  speed  during  the  first  three  weeks  of  his 
training.    This  time  should  be  devoted  to  prac- 


HOW  TO  BECOME   A   SPRINTER   161 

tising  starts,  learning  to  get  into  your  stride 
quickly  and  naturally,  with  one  or  two  jogs  a 
day  through  your  full  distance,  but  not  at  your 
best  speed  nor  a  speed  that  will  tire  you  too 
much. 

Sprinters  should  be  careful  to  get  as  much 
out  of  their  arms  as  possible.  Make  them  help 
the  legs  by  ripping  them  forward  and  upward 
or  by  a  good,  hard  cross  motion.  Never  let 
your  hands  get  behind  your  hips. 

It  will  require  a  great  deal  of  careful  prac- 
tice to  master  the  start.  You  should  try  it  half 
a  dozen  or  more  times  a  day,  working  at  good 
speed  for  about  twenty  yards,  then  slowing 
down  gradually.  After  a  rest,  conclude  your 
day's  work  with  a  jog  of  one  hundred  and 
twenty  or  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards,  though 
at  about  four-fifths  speed.  With  a  few  weeks 
of  this  kind  of  training  you  will  find  that  you 
are  gradually  mastering  the  start  and  that  you 
are  having  no  trouble  to  maintain  your  speed 
and  equilibrium  as  you  run  into  an  erect  posi- 
tion from  twenty  to  twenty-five  yards  from  the 
start. 

in.  The  Final  Burst 

The  candidate  is  now  ready  for  some  real 
speed  work,  which  brings  me  to  the  third  por- 
tion of  his  training.  First  of  all,  young  sprint- 
ers, I  would  caution  you  not  to  overstride,  even 


162        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

after  you  have  gotten  into  your  running.  To 
do  so  will  certainly  cause  you  to  overbalance 
and  lose  some  of  your  speed.  After  you  have 
learned  the  art  of  being  natural  in  your  stride, 
its  length  will  adjust  itself.  Let  your  aim  be  to 
run  naturally  and  use  every  ounce  of  your 
strength.  Above  all,  keep  your  mind  strictly  on 
your  own  work,  and  do  not  allow  yourself  to  be 
pulled  out  of  your  stride  by  your  opponents. 

It  is  assumed  that  by  this  time  the  sprinter 
has  been  training  for  at  least  three  weeks,  and 
is  ready  for  some  speed  work.  During  the 
third  week  the  sprinter  who  is  training  for  the 
one  hundred  yards  dash  should  try  himself  out 
for  one  hundred  yards  against  the  watch.  This 
will  give  him  an  idea  of  what  he  is  doing,  and 
at  the  same  time  show  him  whether  or  not  he 
has  enough  strength  to  go  the  full  distance. 
Probably  he  will  experience  a  tightening  of  the 
muscles,  or  what  athletes  term  a  "  tie-up  "  in 
the  last  twenty-five  or  more  yards  of  the  run. 
Under  such  conditions  the  runner  wabbles  over 
the  last  quarter  of  his  course  and  has  difficulty 
in  finishing.  To  correct  this  and  enable  him  to 
go  through  the  entire  distance  without  slacken- 
ing his  speed,  and,  above  all,  to  have  a  final 
burst  as  he  approaches  the  tape  is  the  climax 
of  his  training.  Nothing  but  conscientious 
work  will  enable  him  to  overcome  this  weaken- 
ing. But  practice  will  bring  about  the  desired 
result,  and  soon  his  legs  will  be  strong  enough 


HOW  TO  BECOME  A  SPRINTER   163 

to  carry  liim  through  the  full  distance  without 
a  let-up  in  his  speed. 

After  you  have  been  training  for  three  weeks 
and  started  to  run  trials  at  the  end  of  three  or 
four  weeks,  care  should  be  exercised  in  keeping 
them  down  to  no  more  than  two  a  week.  If  it 
is  possible  to  run  them  in  a  set  of  games,  so 
much  the  better.  I  usually  advise  sprinters  to 
limit  their  trials  to  about  four-fifths  the  dis- 
tance of  the  race  they  expect  to  run.  Thus  if 
a  man  is  training  for  one  hundred  yards  he 
should  confine  most  of  his  trials  to  eighty  yards, 
going  the  full  distance  about  once  a  week.  By 
working  out  at  his  best  speed  for  eighty  yards 
he  will  depend  upon  the  excitement  of  the  con- 
test to  carry  him  the  remaining  distance  with- 
out a  let-up  in  his  speed,  a  theory  that  seldom 
fails.  Sprinters  should  not  underestimate  the 
amount  of  training  and  hard  work  it  requires 
t^  enable  one  to  run  one  hundred  yards  in  ten 
or  even  ten  and  one-fifth  seconds.  It  takes  long 
and  faithful  practice  to  enable  one  to  get  every 
ounce  of  strength  into  his  running. 

The  Two  Hundred  and  Twenty  Yards  Dash 

The  technical  part  of  training  for  the  two 
hundred  and  twenty  yards  dash  is  much  the 
same  as  for  the  one  hundred  yards,  but  the! 
longer  race  requires  far  greater  endurance  and 
more  judgment.    The  start  for  the  two  hundred 


164        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

and  twenty  is  much  the  same  as  for  the  one 
hundred  yards,  the  same  crouching  start  being 
necessary.  The  runner  should  jump  into  his 
stride  as  quickly  as  he  can,  and  then  let  his  legs 
do  all  the  work  without  too  much  urging,  and 
then  if  he  has  anything  left  for  the  finish  he  can 
put  in  his  whole  strength  for  the  last  twenty- 
five  or  thirty  yards.  Good  judgment  counts  for 
everything  in  this  race.  No  man  can  "  try  " 
all  the  way  without  tying  up  at  the  finish. 
Therefore  the  runner  must  learn  by  experience 
just  how  much  power  he  can  put  on  at  the  start. 
At  the  same  time  he  must  remember  that  he 
cannot  loaf  at  any  part  of  this  distance.  Most 
of  the  champions  at  this  distance  have  been 
able  to  go  a  little  further  than  the  full  two  hun- 
dred and  twenty  yards.  Sherrill,  Wefers, 
Owen,  Jewett,  Schick,  Lee,  Tewkesbury,  and 
Cartmell  were  all  able  to  go  three  hundred 
yards.  Therefore,  after  the  runner  has  gotten 
into  pretty  fair  shape,  he  should  run  a  little 
over  the  distance,  possibly  twice  a  week.  This 
will  insure  him  with  more  strength  for  the 
finish. 

Without  going  too  much  into  detail  for  this 
event,  the  runner  can  utilize  the  instructions 
given  for  the  one  hundred  yards  dash,  altering 
the  distance  proportionately  for  the  longer 
event. 

In  conclusion,  let  me  say  that  I  know  of  no 
better  exercise  for  boys  and  young  men  than 


HOW  TO  BECOME  A  SPRINTER   165 

sprinting.  If  indulged  in  moderately,  it  can't 
injure  any  one.  On  the  contrary,  it  will 
strengthen  the  heart  and  build  up  the  whole 
body.  And  there  is  nothing  finer  for  teaching 
a  youngster  to  think  quickly  and  to  give  him  the 
physical  poise  which  every  boy  ought  to  seek. 


HOW  TO  RUN  THE  HUNDRED  AND  TWO 
HUNDRED  TWENTY  YARD  DASHES 

BY   RALPH    C.    CRAIG 

Training  for  the  ''  hundred  "  and  ''  two- 
twenty  "  dashes  is  one  of  the  most  interesting 
forms  of  work  that  a  boy  can  do  on  the  track 
team.  There  is  a  snap  and  a  dash  about  it 
which  appeals  to  every  boy,  and  whether  he  is 
proficient  in  the  dashes  or  not,  he  is  instinc- 
tively interested. 

The  dashes,  and  I  use  the  plural  because  of 
the  fact  that  an  athlete  usually  runs  both  the 
''  hundred  "  and  '^  two-twenty,"  in  any  meet, 
are  among  the  most  strenuous  events  of  the  day, 
and  as  such  the  work  in  preparation  for  these 
races  is  most  important. 

Of  course,  any  one  ''  hundred  "  or  *'  two- 
twenty  "  cannot  be  compared  to  the  quarter, 
half,  or  mile  runs,  but  when  he  considers  the 
fact  that  a  sprinter  has  to  run  from  two  to  four 
or  five  races  in  one  afternoon,  and  that  in  each 
race  he  is  straining  every  muscle  and  every 
nerve  to  their  utmost  throughout  the  entire 
race,  and  the  fact  that  in  less  than  a  fifth  of 
a  second  his  physical  and  nervous  machinery  — 

166 


RALPH  cilAlft  ■\viNMN<.  Tin:  100  ^  Ai;i)^  IN    Ki:.  Mi;ii   i  nn 
9  4-5  SECONDS.     i.N  I'laccdLLiiuiATi';  (;ami:s,   I'Jll. 


LBCONET   WINNING    100- YARDS    IN   9.7    SECONDS    IN    THE    IXTER- 
COLLEGIATE8  IN  1922.        OTHERS  ARE,  LEFT  TO  RIGHT,  LOVE- 
JOY,    CORNELL;    SUDDEN,     STANFORD;    RtTSNAK,    YALE; 
WOODRING,  SYRACUSE;      McKIM,    PRINCETON. 


PATTERSON   OF  PESN.  WINNING  Till     100 -^    \  RDS    IN    9  4-5    SECONDS 

IN  THE   INTERCOLLEGIATE8  IN  I'JIJ.      Lll'PINCOTT,  WINNER 

OF  THE  220-YAUDS,  SECOND  MAN  FROM  LEFT.     RELLER 

OF      CORNELL     WAS     SECOND     IN     THIS     RACE. 

THE  SPRINTS 


HOW   TO  RUN   THE   DASHES      167 

if  I  may  use  the  word  —  has  passed  from  a  state 
of  being  normal  to  the  state  of  maximum  strain, 
I  think  that  every  boy  will  see  my  point,  and 
will  agree  that  the  sprints  are  one  of  the  hard- 
est events  of  the  day. 

Hence  the  sprinter  must  be  like  a  finely  tem- 
pered steel  spring,  so  that  allowing  a  short 
period  for  rest  after  each  race  or  heat,  he  will 
still  be  able  to  do  his  best. 

In  order  to  do  this,  a  boy  who  wishes  to  be 
proficient  in  sprinting  must  not  pay  his  atten- 
tion wholly  to  running,  but  must  pay  careful 
attention  to  the  general  condition  of  his  health. 
He  must  take  exercises  which  have  no  direct 
bearing  on  running,  but  which  will  build  him 
up  and  keep  him  in  the  best  possible  general 
condition. 

Another  point  that  most  boys  do  not  realize 
the  importance  of,  is  that  the  legs  are  not  the 
all-important  part  of  a  good  runner.  They  are 
the  most  important  part  to  be  sure,  but  the 
muscles  of  the  hips,  the  back,  the  shoulders,  and 
the  arms  all  play  their  part,  and  it  is  an  impor- 
tant part.  A  sprinter  need  not  have  the  heav-| 
ily  developed  arms  of  a  weight  man,  but  he 
must  have  arms  which  will,  by  their  swing  and 
drive,  help  him  through  the  end  of  a  hard  race. 
His  hips  must  have  highly  developed  muscles, 
and  the  muscles  of  the  back  and  shoulders  are 
all  very  important.  Those  muscles  need  not  be 
heavily  developed,  and  in  fact  that  should  not 


168        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

be  the  aim;  but  they  should  be  of  fine  quality 
and  capable  of  quick  movements  and  of  with- 
standing sudden  great  strains. 

One  of  the  chief  troubles  with  the  boy  athlete 
is  that  he  does  not  realize  these  things  and  their 
importance  to  him.  He  may  hear  of  them,  and 
practise  exercises  for  a  couple  of  weeks,  which 
develop  these  other  muscles  and  tone  up  his 
system  generally,  but  then  he  cannot  see  that  it 
makes  any  difference  to  him  and  he  gradually 
neglects  them  for  the  more  interesting  work  on 
the  track  itself. 

This  general  development  is  of  great  impor- 
tance to  a  sprinter,  and  in  order  that  his  whole 
system  may  be  in  the  best  of  health,  thereby 
giving  him  the  reserve  force  which  is  so  neces- 
sary to  him,  and  in  order  that  his  arms,  shoul- 
ders, back  and  hips  be  developed,  as  well  as  his 
legs,  the  boy  athlete  should  take  regular  daily 
exercise,  with  the  chest  weights,  dumb-bells  or 
Indian  clubs.  He  should  not  overdo  it  one  day 
and  neglect  it  the  next,  but  take  a  regular 
amount,  as  will  be  prescribed  to  him  by  his 
coach,  or  if  he  is  not  fortunate  enough  to  have 
a  good  coach,  by  his  own  common  sense  and 
feeling. 

And  right  here  is  the  core  of  the  whole  mat- 
ter: a  certain  regularity  about  the  daily  work 
is  essential  to  success  in  any  kind  of  athletics, 
and  by  that  I  do  not  mean  the  same  work  day 
after  day  —  but  I  do  mean  that  the  boy  should 


HOW   TO  RUN   THE  DASHES      169 

not  go  out  and  overdo  one  day  and  because  of 
that,  underdo  for  three  or  four  days.  The  best 
judge  of  this  is  the  boy  himself.  He  can  tell  by 
the  way  he  feels,  the  amount  of  work  which  is 
best  for  him,  and  now  I  want  to  give  an  impor- 
tant warning!  Always  stop  when  you  feel  that 
you  can  do  more,  and  never  go  on  with  the  exer- 
cise, either  on  the  track  or  with  the  apparatus, 
until  you  become  exhausted.  The  object  of  all 
training  is  to  build  up  the  system.  This  object 
is  necessarily  defeated  if  the  boy  athlete,  in  his 
own  enthusiasm  and  high  feelings  does  more 
than  he  should,  and  so  drains  the  supply  of  re- 
serve force  which  is  so  necessary  in  all  compe- 
tition. This  is  especially  true  in  the  case  of 
boys  between  the  ages  of  twelve  and  eighteen  or 
twenty.  A  great  deal  of  their  strength  is  used 
in  maturing  their  growth,  and  consequently 
they  do  not  have  the  reserve  force  which  a  man 
of  twenty-two  years  or  older  has. 

This  is  very  important,  and  I  want  to  warn 
every  boy  of  the  evils  of  too  violent  exertions 
and  of  overdoing  his  training.  A  great  many 
promising  boys  have  spoiled  their  chances  by 
trying  to  do  too  much  in  high  school.  But  in 
connection  with  this  warning  I  want  to  give 
another  warning  which  seems  to  exactly  con- 
tradict the  first,  and  that  is,  that  success  in 
sprinting  —  and  by  success  I  mean  becoming  as 
good  as  is  possible  for  the  individual  athlete  — 
can  be  attained  only  by  hard,  consistent  work. 


170        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Those  two  statements  do  not  seem  to  jibe  at 
all,  do  they?  But  if  you  will  substitute  stick- 
to-itiveness  for  hard,  consistent  work  you  will 
see  what  I  mean;  I  mean  that  a  boy  should 
work  hard  every  day,  doing  as  much  as  he  can 
without  overdoing;  that  his  work  should  be 
regular  and  persistent  and  that  he  should  keep 
at  it  every  day,  even  though  he  does  not  seem 
to  be  improving;  but  that,  on  the  other  hand, 
in  his  daily  work  he  should  be  very  careful  not 
to  overdo,  for  any  one  day. 

When  a  boy  decides  to  get  out  for  any  form 
of  athletics  he  should  first  of  all  be  examined 
by  a  physician  or  a  man  who  has  made  physical 
culture  his  profession.  For  if  he  has  a  weak 
heart  or  lungs  or  his  physical  machinery  is 
weak  in  any  way,  he  cannot  go  into  hard  work 
w^ith  any  hope  of  success,  and  what  is  worse,  he 
works  a  positive  injury  to  himself.  The  aver- 
age boy,  however,  is  sound  in  body  and  mind; 
and  any  who  are  not  may  console  themselves 
by  the  sure  knowledge  that  they  can  build  up 
their  bodies  by  gradual  work. 

After  the  boy  has  been  examined  and  knows 
that  his  physical  machinery  has  no  flaws,  he 
should  begin  in  the  gymnasium  and  work  out 
three  times  a  week  during  the  cold  weather. 
The  exercise  that  he  takes  should  be  with  the 
idea  of  developing  the  lighter  faster  muscles 
and  no  heavy  lifting  or  heavy  work  should  be 
done.    In  this  way  the  whole  system  is  built  up, 


HOW   TO   RUN   THE   DASHES      171 

and  when  the  outdoor  season  opens  the  boy  has 
a  good  beginnmg  for  his  sprinting. 

The  first  week  of  outdoor  work  should  be 
long,  slow  work.  Never  try  any  speed,  and 
above  all  never  break  off  your  marks.  Right 
here  I  might  give  an  important  warning  good 
for  any  time  in  the  season,  —  never  break  off 
your  marks  until  you  are  thoroughly  ''  warmed 
lip,"  and  if  it  is  a  cold,  raw  day,  do  not  attempt 
it  at  all.  But  returning  to  the  first  week :  dur- 
ing the  first  few  days  the  boy  will  feel  so  good 
over  getting  out  of  doors  that  there  will  be  a 
strong  tendency  to  do  too  much.  This  must  be 
guarded  against,  for  if  you  do  too  much  one 
day,  an  almost  inevitable  result  w^ill  be  that  you 
will  do  too  little  for  a  day  or  so  after  that. 

After  the  first  week  of  outdoor  work,  the 
starts  should  be  practised  every  day  —  remem- 
bering, of  course,  to  never  **  take  your  marks  " 
without  being  well  warmed  up.  The  start  of 
the  sprints  is  very  important,  and  especially  is 
this  true  in  the  ''  hundred."  The  boy  who  can 
get  away  with  the  gun  and  into  his  running  in 
fifteen  yards  has  a  great  advantage  over  his 
competitors.  Personally,  this  has  been  the 
weakest  point  in  my  own  sprinting  and  it  has 
been  something  which  I  have  tried  for  seven 
years  to  improve,  and  while  I  am  still  a  very 
poor  starter  there  has  been  improvement  and 
I  am  still  working  aw^ay  on  it. 

In  general,  the  holes  should  be  dug  deep  —  a 


172        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

few  notches  in  the  track  are  not  sufficient  —  and 
they  should  be  placed  so  that  the  knee  resting 
on  the  ground  is  on  a  line  with  the  instep  of  the 
front  foot.  The  holes  should  be  far  enough 
apart  so  that  the  back  foot  drives  straight 
ahead  on  the  first  step.  That  is,  do  not  dig  the 
rear  hole  directly  behind  the  front  one,  nor,  on 
the  other  hand,  dig  it  too  far  to  one  side  of  the 
front  hole,  but  choose  a  happy  medium  and  dig 
the  holes  so  that  when  walking  off  your  marks 
the  rear  foot  moves  directly  ahead. 

The  front  hole  should  be  dug,  as  a  rule,  about 
ten  inches  behind  the  starting  line,  although  the 
individual  cases  vary.  In  coming  to  the  position 
*'  on  your  marks,"  the  athlete's  eyes  should  be 
straight  ahead  and  every  faculty  and  every 
nerve  intent  upon  the  fact  that  the  instant  the 
pistol  is  fired  he  must  make  every  effort  to 
reach  the  goal  as  soon  as  possible.  At  the  com- 
mand "  get  set  "  the  athlete  raises  the  knee 
which  has  been  on  the  ground  and  leans  for- 
ward, his  eyes  still  fixed  straight  ahead  on  the 
goal  and  every  muscle  tense  and  ready  to  drive. 

A  proper  balance  is  essential  in  good  start- 
ing, for  on  the  amount  of  drive  depends  largely 
the  merit  of  the  start.  If  a  boy  is  not  well  bal- 
anced when  he  is  "  set,"  he  is  not  going  to  get 
a  good  drive  —  and  the  legs  alone  do  not  give 
all  the  drive,  but  the  arms  and  entire  body 
enter  in. 

With  the  report  of  the  pistol,  make  every  ef- 


HOW   TO   RUN    THE    DASHES      173 

fort  to  get  into  your  running.  This  is  most 
important.  Do  not  jump  up  in  the  air,  and  do 
not  try  to  see  how  long  you  can  make  your  first 
stride,  but  make  every  effort  to  get  into  your 
running.  By  that  I  mean  that  you  should  as 
soon  as  possible  get  into  the  position  you  as- 
sume after  you  are  running  at  full  speed. 

Many  boys  get  a  good  drive  and  for  the  first 
stride  seem  to  have  an  advantage,  but  in  the 
next  four  or  five  they  lose  it  all  and  their  com- 
petitors who  have  gotten  into  their  running 
sooner  are  leading  them  at  the  thirty-yard 
mark. 

The  start  having  been  made  and  the  speed 
attained,  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  body,  arms,  head,  etc.  This  is,  of 
course,  only  in  practice.  In  a  race  the  one  idea 
is  intense  concentration  upon  the  thought  of 
*'  getting  there."  But  in  practice  you  must 
keep  your  mind  upon  Jiow  you  are  running, 
until  your  faults  are  eliminated,  and  until  your 
form  is  second  nature  to  you. 

Every  boy  can  attain  the  best  results  by  run- 
ning naturally  and  eliminating  his  faults.  No 
general  rules  can  be  made  which  will  suit  every 
case  and  every  boy  will  run  differently.  But 
there  are  certain  general  principles  which  can 
be  modified  for  every  case.  In  general,  the 
arms  should  be  held  rather  high,  the  elbows 
bent  and  the  hands  clenched.  It  is  advisable  to 
use  a  pair  of  grips  of  cork  or  any  other  light 


174        THE   BOOK  OF   ATHLETICS 

material,  that  will  fit  the  hand  and  give  the 
runner  something  to  clench  down  upon. 

The  arms  are  a  great  aid  in  sprinting  and 
their  movement  should  be  sharp  and  forceful, 
and  the  greatest  force  should  be  used  in  the 
forward  stroke.  That  is,  strike  forward  with 
your  arms  harder  than  you  draw  them  back.  A 
large  number  of  athletes  do  not  do  this,  and,  of 
course,  the  idea  of  swinging  the  arms  is  to  bal- 
ance the  body  and  to  utilize  the  force  of  inertia 
in  aiding  its  forward  movement. 

Another  common  fault  is  in  running  too 
straight  up  in  the  air.  The  best  results  gen- 
erally are  obtained  from  holding  the  body  in- 
clined slightly  forward.  The  reason  for  this  is 
simple.  Stand  with  your  feet  together  and  lean 
forward.  As  you  lean  forward  you  find  that  one 
foot  instinctively  comes  forward  to  keep  your 
balance.  If  the  leaning  is  continued,  your  other 
foot  comes  forward  and  soon  you  are  running 
in  spite  of  yourself.  In  this  way  the  force  of 
gravity  is  used  to  help  your  running. 

When  the  body  is  held  straight  it  is  muscular 
effort  alone  which  moves  it,  and  surely  muscu- 
lar effort  plus  gravity  is  better  than  muscular 
effort  alone. 

Another  common  fault  in  boys  who  are  work- 
ing out  for  the  sprints,  is  that  they  do  not  keep 
their  minds  upon  the  goal.  They  are  thinking 
of  the  ''  other  fellow  "  and  are  looking  over 
their  shoulders  to  see  where  he  is.    More  dashes 


HOW   TO  RUN   THE   DASHES      175 

have  been  lost  in  this  way  than  any  other  way 
that  I  know  of.  It  is  absolutely  essential,  in 
order  to  do  your  best,  to  keep  your  eyes  on  the 
tape  or  string  throughout  the  entire  race. 

Now,  as  to  a  weekly  program:  as  I  have 
said  before,  no  one  rule  can  be  set  down  for 
every  boy  who  is  working  out  for  the  sprints 
as  every  one  has  to  do  a  little  different  sort  of 
work  in  order  to  get  the  best  results.  But  a 
good  general  program  would  read  something 
like  this,  except  that  the  first  week  or  two 
should  be  devoted  to  long,  slower  work : 

Monday  —  Practise  starts,  about  fifteen 
yards  from  four  to  six  starts;  fifty  yards  at 
full  speed.  Swing  through  one  hundred  and 
fifty  yards  faster  than  a  jog,  but  not  at  top 
speed. 

Tuesday  —  Starts,  four  to  six ;  two  forty- 
yard  dashes;  swing  through  two  hundred  and 
twenty. 

Wednesday  —  Starts,  four  to  six ;  one  hun- 
dred yards.  Then  after  a  good  rest  jog  slowly 
around  for  three  hundred  yards. 

Thursday  —  Starts,  four  to  six ;  a  fairly  fast 
one  hundred  and  ten  yards,  but  not  at  top 
speed.  Then,  after  a  rest,  smng  through  one 
hundred  and  fifty  yards. 

Friday  —  If  there  is  a  meet  on  Saturday  jog 
through  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards;  if  not 
work  same  as  Tuesday. 

Saturday  —  If  there  is  a  meet,  keep  off  the 


176        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

feet  as  much  as  possible  and  rest;  if  not,  do 
whatever  work  you  feel  like  doing. 

That  is,  of  course,  a  very  general  pro- 
gram, and  every  boy  will  have  to  vary  it  to 
meet  his  own  individual  requirements.  If  his 
starting  is  slow  the  greater  part  of  his  work 
will  have  to  be  on  the  starts.  If  he  cannot  finish 
well,  he  must  work  up  the  stamina  and  endur- 
ance necessary  for  a  hard  finish. 

Now,  as  to  dieting.  This  is  not  necessary  in 
the  case  of  a  high  school  boy,  and  the  ordinary 
table  diet  is  satisfactory  except  that  the  boy 
should  avoid  pastries,  candy,  etc.,  and,  of 
course,  every  boy  knows  the  evil  effects  of  to- 
bacco and  liquors  of  any  sort,  and  so  a  warning 
against  them  is  not  necessary. 

Another  thing  to  remember  is  that  a  sprinter 
is  not  made  in  a  day,  or  a  year,  or  two  years. 
It  is  only  by  steady,  consistent  plugging  away 
that  you  will  be  able  to  accomplish  anything, 
and  remember  that  the  object  of  athletic  con- 
tests is  to  find  out  which  is  the  best  man  or  the 
best  team,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  that  if  you 
cannot  beat  the  other  man  fairly  you  do  not 
want  to  beat  him;  that  if  you  are  beaten  it  is 
simply  an  incentive  to  you  to  work  harder  so 
that  in  the  next  race  you  can  win. 


HOW  TO  TKAIN  FOR  THE  DISTANCE 
RUN 

BY    KEENE    FITZPATRICK 

We  can  lay  down  rules  for  the  training  of 
football  players;  we  can  make  out  a  general 
plan  of  training  for  a  baseball  squad;  jump- 
ers, vaulters,  and  weight  men  can  be  developed 
along  the  same  general  lines.  But  when  it 
comes  to  developing  men  for  the  distance  runs, 
no  one  can  lay  down  rules.  Everything  de- 
pends on  the  man  himself.  True,  he  can  be  told 
what  to  eat  and  what  not  to  eat;  he  can  be 
given  some  general  orders  that  will  apply  to  all 
men.  But  his  case  must  be  studied  and  studied 
carefully  before  actual  development  of  the 
runner  begins.  A  trainer  might  have  a  squad 
of  a  dozen  milers.  Should  he  give  them  but  one 
set  of  rules,  it  is  likely  that  not  more  than  one 
of  the  twelve  would  derive  any  great  benefit 
from  following  them.  The  distances  given  out 
for  the  daily  run  might  be  too  long  for  some 
and  not  long  enough  for  others ;  one  man  might 
need  work  in  the  sprints,  while  another  might 
need  long  walks  across  country  to  develop  his 
endurance. 

177 


178        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

And  so,  tlie  first  thing  to  do  in  training  for 
the  longer  runs  is  to  study  the  candidate.  This 
should  not  rest  entirely  with  the  trainer.  The 
runner  himself  should  try  to  locate  his  weak 
points.  He  should  know  what  work  he  needs. 
Then,  after  this  knowledge  is  accumulated, 
earnest  training  may  follow. 

It  is  difficult  to  say  when  a  man  should  begin 
running.  Some  boys  develop  with  surprising 
rapidity,  while  others  are  men  in  years  before 
they  are  physically  able  to  undergo  the  re- 
quired training.  However,  I  should  say  that  no 
boy  should  begin  running  distances  until  he  is 
sixteen  years  old.  The  normal  boy  at  that  age 
can  stand  a  reasonable  amount  of  exertion 
without  injuring  his  heart  or  lungs.  Of  course 
there  are  many  exceptions  to  the  rule.  Some 
boys  may  be  able  to  stand  hard  work  before 
they  are  sixteen  years  old,  but  to  say  that  it  is 
safe  for  them  to  begin  training  is  a  mistake. 
Many  high  school  boys  ruin  any  chance  they 
might  have  had  by  beginning  track  work  before 
they  are  developed  to  the  necessary  degree.  I 
have  had  numbers  of  cases  of  men  at  Michigan 
who  came  up  for  examination,  to  be  told  that 
their  heart  had  developed  a  * '  murmur. ' '  This, 
in  many  instances,  was  undoubtedly  due  to 
overwork  in  athletics  before  they  were  suffi- 
ciently mature.  When  a  man's  heart  is  af- 
fected, his  chances  of  ever  becoming  an  athlete 
are  gone.    A  good  heart  is  the  very  foundation 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  FOR  DISTANCE     179 

of  prowess  on  the  track  or  field.  No  trainer 
will  allow  a  man  who  has  a  weak  heart  to  do 
even  the  lightest  work. 

When  the  young  athlete  is  considered  suffi- 
ciently strong  to  conimence  running,  he  should 
not  start  work  on  his  own  assurance  or  that  of 
his  trainer.  He  should  be  carefully  examined 
by  a  physician.  There  may  be  a  defect  that  will 
wear  off  in  a  year  or  so,  and  there  may  be  a 
defect  that  would  endanger  the  boy's  life  should 
he  exert  himself  to  the  degree  required  in  run- 
ning. 

And  then  the  first  step  in  training  is  to  stop 
smoking.  The  boys  who  use  tobacco  in  any 
form  before  their  athletic  careers  end  are  heav- 
ily handicapped.  ^'  Oh,  pshaw,"  they  will  say, 
' '  I  only  smoke  a  pipe,  and  I  cut  that  out  when  I 
begin  work."  Perhaps  they  do.  Perhaps  they 
let  tobacco  entirely  alone  for  weeks  before  their 
training  season  opens  and  never  touch  it  again 
until  the  last  meet  has  been  fought  out.  But 
nicotine  will  leave  its  mark.  This  mark  may 
be  ever  so  slight  and  the  smoker  may  never 
realize  that  he  has  been  injured  by  the  habit. 
But  his  efficiency  has  been  impaired  to  a  greater 
or  less  degree.  Boys,  as  a  rule,  do  not  realize 
this.  Their  parents  and  teachers  warn  them 
against  the  use  of  tobacco.  Still  they  give  no 
heed.  If  they  could  only  know  great  athletes 
and  know  their  habits  it  would  be  a  lesson  to 
them.    Many  are  the  men  who  have  been  ren- 


180        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

dered  unfit  for  track,  baseball  and  football,  all 
on  account  of  tobacco.  And  they  need  not  be- 
come inveterate  smokers  to  ruin  themselves, 
either.  The  men  who  have  been  the  strongest 
assets  to  the  big  university  teams  have  let  to- 
bacco entirely  alone  until  their  college  days 
were  things  of  the  past. 

Dieting  is  an  important  part  of  preparation 
for  track  work.  Here  again,  it  is  difficult  to  lay 
down  rules.  Some  food  stuffs  that  may  be 
nutritious  when  cooked  in  one  form,  may  be 
injurious  when  prepared  in  another  way.  Pas- 
try should  be  let  alone  entirely ;  so  should  fried 
dishes.  Well-cooked  meats,  eggs,  fresh  vege- 
tables and  milk  make  a  substantial  diet.  Don't 
gorge.  It  is  just  as  bad  to  overeat  even  prop- 
erly cooked  food  as  it  is  to  fill  up  on  pies  and 
cake. 

After  the  candidate  for  long  distance  run- 
ning honors  has  been  thoroughly  examined  and 
his  habits  of  living  fixed,  he  should  begin  active 
work  as  soon  as  possible. 

Training  for  track  work  generally  begins  in 
the  spring,  when  the  weather  is  still  unsettled. 
Weather  plays  an  important  part  in  the  train- 
ing of  a  distance  man,  because  his  work  neces- 
sarily takes  more  time  than  that  required  to  fit 
men  to  enter  other  events.  He  must  be  out  in 
the  open  many  hours  a  week.  There  is,  of 
course,  no  danger  as  long  as  the  days  are  warm, 
but  when  a  cold  spell  sets  in  it  is  likely  to  have 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  FOR  DISTANCE     181 

a  bad  effect  unless  the  runner  takes  due  pre- 
cautions. Never  work  out  on  a  cold  day  with 
your  legs  and  arms  exposed.  Many  high  school 
boys  insist  on  running  across  country  on  cold 
days  in  nothing  but  an  ordinary  track  suit. 
This  is  likely  to  cause  lameness,  stiffness,  and 
bring  on  colds. 

Don't  begin  things  with  a  rush.  It  will  not 
pay  in  the  long  run  and  most  certainly  will  do 
you  no  immediate  good.  Cross-country  walks 
and  runs  are  the  best  things  to  fit  a  man  for 
hard  competition  on  the  track.  Here  again, 
everything  depends  on  the  individual.  Some 
men  can  travel  several  miles  without  tiring, 
while  others  will  be  worn  out  with  only  a  short 
jaunt.  Do  not  begin  running  at  once.  Start 
out  and  walk.  Walk  long  distances  and  run  a 
little  now  and  then.  Do  not  allow  yourself  to 
tire.  For  the  first  week  confine  yourself  to 
work  every  other  day  and  walk  most  of  the 
time.  Breathe  deeply  and  walk  briskly,  taking 
every  bit  as  much  care  of  yourself  as  if  you 
were  working  to  the  limit  of  your  endurance. 
After  this  preliminary  preparation,  begin  run- 
ning a  little  more,  always  keeping  well  within 
the  limits  of  your  strength.  Leave  your  train- 
ing quarters  slowly.  When  you  begin  to 
breathe  heavily  or  your  legs  tire  —  be  it  even 
a  trifle  —  drop  back  to  a  walk  and  rest  your- 
self. Then  run  again.  Keep  this  up  day  after 
day  and  you  will  find  that  your  endurance  is 


182        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

rapidly  increasing.  Now  and  then  a  man  will 
have  an  "  off  "  day.  Don't  think  because  you 
tire  in  a  quarter  of  a  mile  where  you  could  run 
a  full  half  the  day  before  that  you  must  do 
that  half-mile.  Always  remember  that  to  tire 
yourself  is  only  to  hamper  your  progress. 

The  distance  you  should  cover  in  these  walks 
and  runs  depends,  once  more,  on  the  individual. 
For  the  average  boy  of  sixteen  years  from  one 
to  three  miles  should  be  sufficient.  After  a  few 
weeks  you  will  find  that  you  can  run  almost  the 
entire  distance  where  it  tired  you  to  walk  it 
before.  Don't,  above  all  things,  increase  your 
work  before  you  feel  that  you  can  do  it  without 
tiring  out. 

When  you  finish  your  work-out  it  is  well  to 
bathe.  Take  a  good  warm  shower  and  rub 
yourself  down  well.  Many  high  school  boys  as 
well  as  college  students  seem  to  believe  that 
they  cannot  properly  train  without  a  rubber  to 
go  over  their  bodies  after  they  have  taken  their 
daily  exercise.  Of  course,  a  rub-down  is  advan- 
tageous, but  it  is  not  at  all  necessary.  It  will 
loosen  stiff  muscles  and  take  out  the  soreness, 
but,  as  I  have  said  before,  it  is  not  essential. 
However,  a  man  can  rub  himself  down  when 
necessary.  It  may  be  a  trifle  irksome  after 
taking  a  hard  work-out,  but  will  prove  to  be  a 
benefit  in  the  long  run. 

And  then,  after  you  have  rested,  eat.  Do  not 
exercise  immediately  after  a  meal,  or  eat  at 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  FOR  DISTANCE     183 

once  after  exercising.  One  is  equally  as  bad  as 
the  other.  It  hurts  your  digestive  organs,  and 
without  a  stomach  in  good  working  order  no 
man  can  become  strong  in  athletics. 

Get  plenty  of  sleep.  Remember  that  you  are 
working  hard  every  day.  You  are  eating  care- 
fully selected  food  to  keep  up  your  body.  But 
sleep  is  an  essential.  Sleep  eight  hours  at  least 
out  of  every  twenty-four.  Sleep  in  a  well-ven- 
tilated room.  The  air  need  not  be  cold,  but  it 
must  be  fresh.  To  sleep  in  a  tightly  closed 
room  is  harmful.  You  are  using  up  much 
muscle  tissue  and  the  waste  is  being  largely 
carried  away  through  your  lungs.  This  re- 
quires plenty  of  fresh  air,  and  to  inhale  stale 
air  for  hours  at  a  time  is  just  like  taking  so 
much  poison.  Have  your  room  well  ventilated 
and  you  will  awaken  in  the  morning  with  a  clear 
head  and  a  desire  for  more  work. 

Gradually,  as  you  follow  this  course  of  prep- 
aration, you  will  be  able  to  go  the  full  distance. 
And  this  brings  up  the  question  of  how  far  a 
boy  should  run.  No  growing  boy  should  at- 
tempt to  run  more  than  a  mile.  He  can  do  the 
sprints  and  the  four  hundred  and  forty-yard 
dash  and  the  half-mile  and  the  full  mile.  But 
there  he  should  stop.  The  longer  races  are  a 
tremendous  drain  on  a  man's  strength  and  are 
meant  to  be  run  only  by  those  who  have  a  full 
development. 

You  should  have  commenced  training  early 


184        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

enough  so  that  you  will  feel  able  to  run  your 
distance,  or  over,  at  least  four  weeks  before 
your  first  serious  competition.  If  you  are  try- 
ing out  for  the  half-mile,  run  three-quarters  of 
a  mile  for  a  time.  If  you  desire  to  run  the  mile, 
go  a  little  over  that  distance.  Do  not  run  at 
your  best  speed.  Accustom  yourself  to  the  dis- 
tance and  learn  to  know  your  pace.  Know  how 
fast  you  are  going  and  how  long  you  can  hold 
the  pace  without  tiring.  If  you  are  exceeding 
your  limit,  slow  up.  When  you  can  finish  your 
distance  or  a  little  over  at  a  reasonably  good 
rate  of  speed  without  feeling  tired  and  weak, 
begin  to  increase  your  speed.  The  time  for  do- 
ing this  all  depends  on  the  man.    He  knows  best. 

While  you  are  getting  your  pace  and  going 
the  distances  that  you  are  to  go  in  competition, 
vary  the  running  with  short  sprints.  Start 
from  the  mark  and  run  thirty  or  forty  yards  at 
top  speed.  Do  this  half  a  dozen  times  every 
day.  Then  move  about  to  avoid  taking  cold,  but 
rest  yourself  before  starting  out  to  run  the 
daily  distance. 

When  you  can  run  more  than  the  distance 
which  is  to  be  raced  at  good  speed  and  finish 
in  good  condition,  cut  off  the  extra  yards  and 
begin  working  faster.  Don't  run  at  top  speed 
every  day.  If  you  feel  listless  and  are  without 
energy  it  is  a  sign  that  you  are  doing  too  much 
or  not  living  properly.  Cut  down  on  the  work 
for  &  few  days  and  take  things  easier.    Even 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  FOR  DISTANCE    185 

when  you  are  feeling  in  the  best  of  condition 
do  not  exert  yourself  day  after  day.  Run  your 
distance  two  or  three  times  each  week,  then 
take  things  easier  for  a  day  or  two. 

At  least  two  weeks  before  the  first  race,  the 
runner  should  know  what  he  can  do.  It  is  well 
to  have  timers  take  your  time  by  quarters.  In 
this  way,  and  only  in  this  way,  will  you  learn 
your  pace.  You  will  know  that  if  you  go  the 
first  quarter  too  fast  you  are  bound  to  be  too 
tired  for  the  final  burst  of  speed,  and  if  you  are 
lagging  you  will  be  forced  to  overdo  in  the  final 
stages  of  the  run.  Every  truly  great  runner 
can  judge  his  speed.  He  knows  when  the  pace 
is  too  fast  and  he  knows  when  he  should  be 
moving  faster  to  avoid  the  danger  of  a  hard 
race  in  the  final  few  yards. 

Of  course,  it  is  almost  useless  to  give  instruc- 
tions for  a  race.  You  know  —  or  should  know 
—  how  much  you  can  do,  and  there  are  count- 
less things  that  may  arise  during  the  running 
of  a  half  or  a  mile  that  will  upset  the  most  care- 
fully laid  plans.  But  if  a  man  can  judge  his 
time  and  knows  his  limit,  he  can  rely  upon  this 
knowledge,  and  it  is  the  greatest  asset  he  has 
when  he  steps  on  a  track  to  compete  with 
strangers. 

If  a  runner  is  strong  and  knows  the  men 
against  whom  he  is  running,  it  may  be  well  to 
set  the  pace.  But  this  again  depends  entirely 
on  conditions.    If  some  one  else  sets  the  pace 


186        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

and  you  feel  it  is  more  than  you  can  do,  don't 
worry.  You  are  out  there  to  run  the  distance 
in  the  fastest  possible  time  and,  if  you  have 
trained  properly,  you  know  of  how  much  speed 
you  are  capable.  Go  the  fastest  you  can  in  the 
early  stages  and  still  retain  strength  for  the 
finish.  If  the  others  draw  away  from  you  when 
you  are  doing  your  best,  don't  worry.  To  fol- 
low them  would  only  be  to  wear  yourself  out, 
and  they  may  tire  and  give  you  your  opportun- 
ity at  the  finish.  Keep  going  at  the  best  speed 
you  can  maintain.  Should  the  others  lag,  don't 
congratulate  yourself.  They  may  be  reserving 
much  strength  for  the  last  fraction  of  the  dis- 
tance. Run  your  own  race,  regardless  of  what 
the  others  may  do. 

Many  distance  races  are  won  in  the  last  few 
yards.  Be  ready  for  the  final  burst  of  speed. 
If  you  feel  that  you  have  the  race  safe  and  are 
strong  enough  to  beat  any  one  who  might  sprint 
to  the  finish,  be  satisfied.  Hold  yourself  for 
this  possible  struggle.  At  the  same  time  do  not 
take  chances.  Should  some  of  the  others  begin 
to  sprint  in  the  last  few  yards,  follow  them. 
Run  your  best.  Pay  attention  to  your  stride. 
Keep  it  up  as  well  as  possible.  Glue  your  eyes 
on  the  tape  and  determine  that  you  will  reach 
it  first.  Think  of  nothing  but  keeping  yourself 
well  together  and  bringing  every  ounce  of 
energy  to  bear. 

During  the  track  season  you  will  probably  be 


JOHN    PAUL     JO>K.S     OV     CUK^ELL,     MAKlNli    A    HKW    WOKLD'S      ().\E-JV1I1,1<; 
KECOBD  OF  4  MINUTES,  14  2-5  SECONDS.       INTEBCOLLEGIATES.   1913. 


HIGGINS,  COLTJMIUA,  ^\  IWM;  BY  IN(Mn-;S  Fv;mM  BI-Ki:ii  OF  BATKS  IXTHE 
INTBRCOLLEtJIATE  TWO-MILE  RUN,  HARVARD  STADIUM.  1922. 


THE  DISTANCE  KIINS 


HOW  TO  TRAIN   FOR   DISTANCE     187 

called  on  to  run  in  several  races.  Take  the 
best  possible  care  of  yourself  during  this  pe- 
riod. Watch  your  food  and  watch  your  body. 
After  a  race  and  before  another,  rest  for  an 
entire  day.  This  does  not  mean  stay  in  bed  or 
remain  in  the  house.  Get  plenty  of  fresh  air, 
but  do  not  exert  yourself  in  the  slightest.  Run 
your  distance  once  or  twice  during  the  days  that 
come  between  competitions. 

And  then,  after  the  season  is  over,  let  down 
gradually  on  your  training.  Remember  that 
you  have  been  under  a  severe  strain,  and  do  not 
let  go  at  once.  Get  plenty  of  exercise  and 
plenty  of  sleep.  Cut  down  your  daily  work 
gradually.  Remember  that  there  are  other 
races  before  you  in  the  years  to  come  and  the 
sudden  breaking  off  of  training  may  do  you 
a  great  harm. 

I  have  dealt  with  food,  sleep,  and  tobacco.  I 
have  taken  it  for  granted  that  none  of  the  boys 
who  are  in  high  school  athletics  use  intoxicating 
liquors.  If  they  do  drink  beer  or  any  other  al- 
coholic drink  it  is  a  question  whether  they  will 
ever  amount  to  much  on  the  running  track. 

Always  keep  in  mind  that  it  is  the  high  school 
boy  of  to-day  who  is  to  be  the  great  athlete  of 
the  future.  You  cannot  grow  into  a  Jones,  a 
Meredith,  a  Taylor,  or  a  Rose  in  a  year.  You 
must  keep  steadily  at  it.  Do  not  overdo.  Keep 
your  habits  regular.  Year  by  year  you  will 
become  stronger,  and  when  the  time  comes  for 


188        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

you  to  enter  college,  you  will  be  ready  to  take 
up  the  more  severe  work  that  is  there  required, 
and  possess  a  splendid  foundation  upon  which 
to  build. 


THE   SCIENCE   OF   HURDLING 

BY    EARL  J.    THOMSON 

Hurdling  is  an  artistic  science.  There  is 
probably  no  prettier  nor  more  thrilling  spec- 
tacle for  the  average  spectator  at  the  modern 
field  and  track  games  than  a  hurdle  race. 
Every  one  likes  to  see  the  runner  step  the 
barriers,  but  few  people  know  or  realize  the 
amount  of  time  and  effort  that  is  spent  in 
grooming  and  training  the  modern  hurdler  to 
do  that  ''stepping." 

''Stepping"  over  the  barriers  is  the  whole 
secret  of  present-day  speed  hurdling.  The 
stepping  idea  brings  into  play  all  the  other 
things  that  are  so  essential  to  fast  hurdling, 
such  as  the  thrust  with  both  arms,  the  quick 
snap  over  of  the  back  leg,  and  the  quick  get- 
away so  necessary  to  the  expert  of  this  game. 
But  you  say,  "It  isn't  every  hurdler  that  can 
step  over  a  hurdle  as  it  should  be  done." 
Right  you  are,  and  he  should  not  be  a  hurdler, 
that  is,  a  high  hurdler,  if  he  cannot  step  over 
the  barriers. 

A  high  hurdler  must  have  speed  and  long 
legs  in  order  to  come  near  the  top  in  the 
hurdling  game.     A  man  must  be  able  to  do 

189 


190     THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

the  hundred  in  lOH  seconds  or  better,  and 
have  legs  that  are  strong  and  possess  a  long 
split.  After  such  a  man  has  been  found,  the 
next  move  is  to  get  him  so  that  he  can  handle 
his  long  legs  and  use  that  split  of  his  to  advan- 
tage. Remember  I  am  talking  about  the  high 
hurdler  now,  not  a  low  hurdler.  The  latter 
does  not  have  to  meet  such  exact  requirements. 
The  chances  are  that  this  man,  when  found, 
has  been  plodding  away  at  the  sprint  game, 
but  has  been  just  a  little  too  slow  to  win  any- 
thing better  than  a  third  or  fourth  once  in  a 
while.  In  that  case  he  will  be  able  to  find 
himself  well  enough  to  try  topping  the  ob- 
stacle. He  will  probably  find  that  he  has  to 
jump  it  in  order  not  to  strike  his  knee  on  the 
hurdle  as  he  goes  over.  That  is  where  he 
makes  his  first  mistake.  Do  not  juinp  the 
hurdle.  He  must  insist  on  making  himself 
^'step"  over,  even  at  the  risk  of  skinning  his 
knee.  In  time  he  will  be  able  to  step  over  the 
obstacle  and  hardly  ever  touch  his  knee  on  it. 
'A.  good  exercise  to  practise  before  daily  work- 
outs is  to  sit  on  the  ground  in  the  position  of 
going  over  a  hurdle.  For  a  right-legged  man, 
this  position  would  be  with  the  right  leg 
stretched  out  in  front  and  the  left  leg  drawn 
up  at  the  side,  as  if  just  on  top  of  the  hurdle. 
From  that  position,  lean  forward,  stretching 
the  left  arm  forward  and  parallel  with  the 
right  leg.     Force  the  upper  part  of  the  body 


THE   SCIENCE  OF  HURDLING    191 

forward  and  backward  a  number  of  times, 
keeping  the  upper  part  of  the  body  from 
leaning  to  the  right  side.  This  stretches  the 
muscles  in  both  legs  to  a  good  advantage. 

Writers  have  said  that  there  are  as  many 
forms  of  hurdling  as  there  are  coaches.  Well, 
that  may  be  so,  but  there  are  not  that  number 
of  forms  which  will  get  one  over  the  hurdle  in 
the  proper  time.  Let  us  first  consider  the 
take-off. 

A  hurdler  should  be  very  careful  of  this  part 
of  the  performance,  as  this  is  where  he  starts 
to  do  right  or  wrong.  If  he  takes  off  too  far 
away  from  the  barrier,  he  is  going  to  be  forced 
to  jump  it,  and  that  is  going  to  spoil  the  whole 
thing.  Do  not  take  off  more  than  six  or  seven 
feet  from  the  hurdle.  This  will  cause  one  to 
lift  the  knee  up  as  in  stepping  over  a  curb,  or 
some  such  thing;  then  as  the  front  leg  swings 
up,  shove  the  opposite  arm  forward  as  far  as 
possible  and  the  other  arm  out  about  half- 
way. When  the  leg  swings  up,  it  swings  the 
whole  body  toward  the  opposite  side  and  the 
arm  must  get  in  there  to  counteract  that.  By 
getting  the  ''other  arm"  half-way  out,  one 
has  a  chance  to  work  that  in  on  getting  down 
from  the  hurdle.  Otherwise,  one  would  be 
carrying  it  uselessly  by  the  side.  Now  we 
have  started  off  the  ground.  As  the  top  of 
the  hurdle  is  neared,  the  chest  and  the  front 
leg,  from  the  thigh  to  the  knee,  form  a  sharp 


192     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

"V",  both  arms  still  being  extended.  Now 
on  top  of  the  hurdle,  the  front  leg  has  started 
reaching  for  the  ground  and  the  back  leg  is 
snapping  up  from  the  ground.  Right  here  is 
where  the  work  of  the^ 'other  arm"  comes  in. 
As  the  back  leg  nears  the  top  of  the  hurdle, 
this  arm  gives  a  quick,  short  snap  back,  and 
then  immediately  forw^ard  again,  then,  as  the 
ground  is  neared,  it  snaps  back,  and  then  with 
a  jerk  forward  as  the  back  leg  swings  out  for 
the  next  hurdle.  This  comes  in  the  finer 
points  of  the  game  and  is  rather  indistinct 
double  action,  but  I  mention  it  because  there 
are  so  few  that  use  it  and  I  believe  they  all 
should  try  it.  Of  course,  one  can  never  do  it 
if  he  permits  his  arms  to  fly  out  to  the  side  in 
the  old  flying  fashion.  The  arms  must  be 
kept  by  the  sides  as  near  the  running  position 
as  possible. 

Now,  I  have  gotten  as  far  as  almost  to  the 
ground.  Here  is  another  place  that  counts 
to  a  great  extent,  but  if  the  man  has  taken-off 
for  the  hurdle  as  he  should,  the  chances  are 
good  that  he  will  land  on  the  ground  close  to 
the  hurdle.  The  entire  distance  covered  in 
taking  a  hurdle  should  not  be  more  than  ten 
feet  at  the  most.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  should 
be  about  six  feet  to  the  hurdle  and  three  feet 
beyond  the  hurdle.  If  the  barrier  can  be 
taken  in  this  manner,  very  little  time  will  be 
lost  in  doing  so  and  the  hurdler  will  land  in  a 


EARL  J.   THOMSON 
Showins  front  knee  lift  and  arm  action  on  taking  off  for  hurdles. 


EARL   J.    THOMSON 

Showing  landing-position  for  unimpaired  continuance  of  speed. 


THE  SCIENCE   OF  HURDLING    193 

position  which  will  enable  him  to  continue 
his  speed  to  the  next  hurdle.  Many  hurdlers 
straighten  up  as  they  pass  the  top  of  the  stick, 
but  that  is  sure  death  to  a  man's  speed.  One's 
head  should  never  rise  above  the  level  of  its 
running  position  when  taking  a  hurdle. 

The  low  hurdles  are  somewhat  different 
from  the  ''high".  Many  men  make  the 
mistake  that  they  should  be  run  in  the  same 
manner.  The  low  hurdle  should  be  taken  in 
a  big  step.  The  same  arm  movement  here 
applies  as  in  the  highs,  but  the  body  does  not 
come  so  close  to  the  top  of  the  barrier  as  it 
does  in  the  highs.  The  same  rule  applies  as 
to  the  elevation  of  the  body.  Keep  in  the 
regular  running  position,  and  do  not  let  the 
head  bob  up  and  down  as  the  hurdle  is  stepped. 
In  the  low  hurdles  there  is  one  thing  that 
counts  more  than  anything  else  and  that  is 
the  drive  which  comes  just  as  one  takes  off 
for  the  hurdle.  A  new  man  will  use  that 
drive  in  jumping  the  sticks,  but  it  is  used  in 
shooting  oneself  forward  instead  of  up.  Just 
as  the  hurdler  is  about  to  leave  the  ground, 
a  strong  push  directly  forward  and  not  upward 
is  given  off  his  rear  leg.  That  throws  one 
forward  and  also  helps  him  to  keep  close 
to  the  ground  thereby  maintaining  his  running 
speed.  Remember,  the  back-leg  action  is 
the  same  as  in  the  ''highs." 

Seven  strides  is  the  orthodox  number  for 


194     THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  low  hurdles.  These  may  come  easy  for 
a  long-legged  man,  or  they  may  come  too 
close.  In  case  of  the  latter,  one  must  get 
over  the  hurdle  more  quickly  and  shorten  the 
strides  a  little.  Very  seldom  are  the  hurdles 
too  close  together  for  the  hurdler.  A  low 
hurdler  should  be  able  to  run  the  220  yards  in 
23  seconds,  or  thereabouts,  and  he  should  be 
a  man  with  a  quick  start,  as  many  a  low  hurdle 
race  has  been  won  in  the  first  hundred  yards. 

One  thing  that  I  should  like  to  warn  low 
hurdlers  about  is  the  back-leg  action.  Re- 
member the  lows  are  not  run  like  the  highs  as 
regards  to  closeness  of  topping  the  sticks.  If 
one  tries  to  cut  the  low  hurdle  too  close,  he 
wiU  have  to  crouch,  and  that  throws  him  in  a 
crouching  position  when  he  lands.  This 
position  is  not  the  proper  running  angle 
and  it  will  slow  one  up  perceptibly.  Another 
thing,  do  not  snap  the  back  leg  over  too  soon ; 
that  makes  both  feet  land  together  too 
closely  and  shortens  the  stride  too  much.  It 
also  has  a  tendency  to  make  one  jump  the 
hurdle.  Take  the  hurdle  in  a  regular  stride 
as  nearly  as  possible.  That  is  the  whole  secret 
It  is-  very  important  to  get  the  same  arm  action 
as  one  does  in  the  ''highs",  too. 

One  little  thmg  I  might  say  in  regard  to 
running  the  low  hurdles  on  a  curv^e.  You  see, 
the  curve  has  a  tendency  to  throw  one  to  the 
outside  of  his  lane  and  one  may  possibly  get 


THE   SCIENCE  OF  HURDLING     195 

into  the  lane  next  to  him.  At  any  rate,  it 
many  times  raises  much  trouble  with  one's 
stride.  To  avoid  all  this,  run  on  the  inside 
of  the  lane  all  the  way.  The  lanes  are  gener- 
ally marked  with  a  line  on  either  side.  Take 
the  left-hand  line  and  follow  it  all  the  way  and 
you  will  have  no  trouble. 

Invariably  the  man  over  the  last  hurdle  first, 
wins  the  race  if  he  runs  through  and  docs  not 
loaf  on  the  job.  Remember,  too,  that  a  third 
place  this  year  is  good  for  a  second  place  next 
year  if  you  keep  at  it,  for  the  hurdle  game  is  a 
thing  you  can  always  learn  more  about,  no 
matter  how  long  you  have  hurdled.  It  will 
always  keep  you  thinking,  and  it  is  the  man 
who  thinks  out  his  faults  and  the  faults  of  the 
other  fellow  and  improves  his  style  to  counter- 
act other  faults  who  eventually  becomes  the 
top-notcher,  and  everybody  wants  to  try  for 
the  top-notch  if  only  for  the  fun  of  trying. 

You  have  got  to  have  brains  and  learn  to 
use  your  head,  to  hurdle  properly ,  and  you  have 
to  learn  to  stick,  which  are  qualities  that  will 
always  be  useful  in  any  walk  of  life,  where 
there  are  always  obstacles  of  one  kind  or 
another  to  be  overcome. 


FIELD   ATHLETICS 
Throwing  the  Weights 


HOW   TO   THKOW  THE   WEIGHTS 

BY    JOSEPH    HORNER,    JR. 

A  BOY  who  rises  to  fame  and  glory  in  the  ath- 
letic events  of  our  schools  and  colleges  is  gen- 
erally recognized  as  one  whose  skill  in  the 
performance  of  athletic  feats  has  enabled  him 
to  distinguish  himself  above  his  schoolmates. 
To  be  an  athlete  is  one  thing  —  this  requires 
skill.  To  achieve  fame  is  another  thing,  and 
this  has  for  its  foundation  the  ability  to  show 
athletic  skill.  Whether  the  boy  athlete  is  a 
sprinter,  high-jumper,  pole-vaulter,  distance- 
runner  or  weight-thrower,  he  is  credited  with 
having  perfected  himself  to  a  certain  degree  in 
the  art  of  athletics.  The  ability  he  has  to  show 
his  skill  in  competition  with  others,  and  the 
reputation  which  comes  to  him  as  a  result  of 
his  competitive  performances  go  hand  in  hand. 
In  other  words,  a  boy  may  be  able  to  jump  high 
and  sprint  with  great  speed,  but  there  is  a  big 
difference  between  jumping  and  sprinting,  and 
jumping  and  sprinting  in  competition.  Skill  is 
therefore  the  first  essential  in  the  successful 
performance  of  an  athletic  feat.    To  show  skill 

199 


200        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

in  competition  with  others  is  almost  another 
phase  of  athletics. 

If  any  one  should  tell  you  that  there  is  more 
skill  in  weight-throwing  than  in  any  other  track 
or  field  event  it  w^ould  sound  unreasonable,  but 
this  is  the  truth.  Putting  the  shot,  throwing 
the  hammer,  and  throwing  the  discus  have  al- 
ways been  grouped  together  in  a  set  of  three 
as  though  they  were  "  three  of  a  kind."  To 
say  that  a  boy  is  a  weight-thrower  seems  to 
imply  that  he  must  be  built  like  Hercules,  and 
that  if  he  throws  one  of  the  three  weights  he 
must  be  able  to  throw  them  all.  It  is  true  that 
weight-throwers  as  a  rule  are  big  men,  but 
many  times  men  with  comparatively  small 
frames  have  defeated  others  whose  massive 
bulk  towered  above  them.  It  is  also  true  that 
a  boy  athlete  often  becomes  quite  proficient  in 
throwing  all  three  weights,  but  by  practising 
and  performing  all  three  on  all  occasions  he  is 
actually  working  against  great  odds  and  hin- 
dering himself  in  an  effort  to  make  his  per- 
formance represent  the  best  that  is  in  him. 

People  make  a  great  mistake  in  thinking  that 
a  twelve  or  sixteen  pound  shot  or  hammer  is 
so  heavy  that  it  requires  a  two  hundred  and 
twenty-five  pound  man  to  lift  it  and  toss  it  into 
the  air.  The  average  man  carries  ten  pounds 
of  clothing  with  him  all  the  time.  He  could  lug 
a  twenty-pound  suit-case  for  a  block  and  never 
notice  it,  to  say  nothing  of  throwing  it  into  the 


HOW  TO  THROW  THE  WEIGHTS  201 

air  if  he  wanted  to.  Just  because  the  weight 
of  a  shot  or  hammer  is  confined  to  a  small 
sphere  a  few  inches  in  diameter  he  thinks  it  is 
so  heavy  that  it  would  be  absurd  for  him  to 
attempt  to  perform  any  athletic  feat  with  it,  — 
or  if  it  happened  that  he  was  not  possessed  of 
colossal  strength  he  might  even  shirk  from 
touching  it.  But  it  is  a  common  saying  among 
athletic  authorities  that  *'  any  kind  of  a  build 
is  suited  for  any  kind  of  an  event."  This  is  as 
true  of  the  weights  as  it  is  of  any  other  of  the 
track  or  field  events.  Brute  strength  is  not 
essential  in  weight-throwing.  Skill  is  abso- 
lutely necessary. 

Thus  any  boy  who  understands  the  impor- 
tance of  skill  in  weight-throwing  can  feel  sure 
that  he  does  not  need  to  be  the  least  bit  stronger 
than  any  of  his  companions  in  order  to  excel  in 
putting  the  shot,  throwing  the  hammer,  or 
throwing  the  discus.  If  he  tries  to  perform  all 
three  weight  events  he  must  know  what  odds  he 
is  working  against.  If  he  wants  to  reach  the 
point  of  highest  efficiency  in  any  one  of  them, 
he  must  know  what  constitutes  skill  in  the  per- 
formance of  that  event.  He  must  know  where 
to  look  for  it  and  how  to  attain  it. 

The  three  weight  events  differ  from  each 
other  far  more  than  what  may  be  classed  as  the 
three  jumps,  —  the  high-jump,  broad-jump,  and 
pole-vault.  The  "  spring  "  in  the  muscles  of 
the   calf   is   essential  in   all   of  these   events, 


202        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

whereas  different  muscles  are  used  and  exer- 
cised in  each  of  the  three  weight  events.  The 
shot-put  is  a  one-arm  push  with  all  the  body 
behind  it.  The  discus-throw  is  a  one-arm  side 
pull,  and  the  hammer-throw  is  a  straight,  back 
pull  with  both  arms.  A  push  and  a  pull  are  two 
absolutely  different  things  from  the  point  of 
view  of  muscular  exertion  and  development, 
and  although  the  side  pull  of  the  discus  ap- 
proaches the  straight,  back  pull  of  the  hammer, 
the  exertion  of  the  body  as  a  whole  depends 
upon  an  entirely  different  set  of  muscles.  The 
muscles  developed  in  putting  the  shot  and  those 
developed  in  throwing  the  hammer  or  discus 
absolutely  conflict.  That  is  the  reason  why  the 
three  weight  events  are  not  '  *  three  of  a  kind, ' ' 
and  why  a  boy  who  tries  to  become  highly  pro- 
ficient in  one  of  them  can  do  so  much  more 
easily  by  leaving  the  other  two  alone. 

Putting  the  Shot 

In  all  of  the  weight  events,  skill  is  exemplified 
by  the  quick  action,  or  "  snap."  In  putting 
the  shot,  quick  action  is  the  most  important 
factor.  There  is  no  time  for  reflection  after 
the  put  has  once  been  started.  The  right  foot 
should  be  placed  just  inside  the  ring  of  the 
seven-foot  circle  directly  opposite  the  toe- 
board,  or  the  front  of  the  ring.  The  whole 
weight  of  the  body  should  be  balanced  upon  the 


HOW  TO  THROW  THE  WEIGHTS  203 

right  leg  momentarily,  and  the  knee  bent 
slightly  just  before  the  spring  forward  is  be- 
gun. The  left  leg  should  be  extended  with  the 
toe  of  the  left  foot  touching  the  ground  so  that 
a  perfect  balance  can  be  maintained.  The  shot 
should  be  poised  in  the  right  hand  in  front  of 
the  shoulder  so  that  the  weight  of  the  sphere 
rests  upon  the  cushions  of  flesh  covering  the 
knuckle  joints  of  the  first  and  second  fingers. 
The  thumb  and  the  fingers  should  clasp  the  shot 
with  just  enough  pressure  to  hold  the  weight 
in  position.  Unless  the  fingers  are  very  strong 
the  weight  should  not  be  placed  too  high  up  on 
the  cushions  of  the  hand.  The  left  arm  should 
be  extended  straight  out  from  the  shoulder  to 
further  aid  the  balance. 

As  soon  as  this  position  is  assumed  the  weight 
of  the  body  should  be  brought  into  a  nice  even 
up  and  down  swing  by  a  slight  movement  of 
the  left  leg.  Instantly  the  body  should  be 
lurched  forward  without  a  single  change  by 
springing  from  the  right  foot.  The  right  foot 
should  then  strike  the  ground  somewhere  near 
the  center  of  the  circle,  and  the  left  foot  should 
come  down,  too,  a  few  inches  from  the  front  of 
the  ring  on  the  left  of  the  center.  Both  knees 
should  be  bent  when  the  feet  strike  the  ground, 
but  the  right  slightly  more  than  the  left.  From 
this  crouching  position  the  body  should  spring 
upward  with  just  enough  of  a  spiral  to  throw 
the  whole  weight  of  the  body  behind  the  right 


204        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

shoulder,  moving  in  an  upward  and  outward 
direction.  During  this  spiral  spring  the  right 
arm  should  be  thrust  up  and  out  and  the  left 
arm  should  be  brought  down  with  force  to  aid 
the  spiral.  When  the  feet  strike  the  ground 
again  the  right  foot  will  be  flat  up  against  the 
toe-board,  and  the  left  foot  back. 

Important  above  all  else  is  the  way  in  which 
the  shot  leaves  the  right  hand.  The  weight  has 
been  borne  by  the  cushions  over  the  knuckle 
joints  of  the  first  and  second  fingers  from  the 
start,  but  toward  the  end  of  the  upward  and 
outward  thrust  of  the  right  arm  the  ball  should 
roll  up  on  the  fingers  and  leave  them  at  the  tip. 
Virtually,  there  are  four  speeds  in  the  entire 
act  of  putting  the  shot,  —  each  one  piled  on  top 
of  the  other  so  that  the  result  of  them  all  is  the 
final  velocity  which  gives  the  shot  its  momen- 
tum. The  spring  across  the  circle  is  speed 
number  one.  The  spiral  spring  shoving  the 
right  shoulder  upward  and  outward  is  speed 
number  two.  The  thrust  of  the  right  arm  is 
speed  number  three,  and  the  "  slap  "  of  the 
fingers  as  the  ball  rolls  up  and  leaves  the  hand 
at  the  finger-tips  is  speed  number  four.  Each 
one  of  these  four  speeds  is  of  vital  importance. 
To  make  use  of  them  all  and  in  perfect  har- 
mony, getting  the  greatest  value  out  of  each 
one  without  depreciating  the  value  of  any 
other,  constitutes  the  elements  of  skill  in  put- 
ting the  shot. 


HOW  TO  THROW  THE   WEIGHTS  205 

The  problem  of  developing  these  speeds  and 
of  getting  them  to  work  together  is  a  difficult 
one.  They  ought  to  be  learned  just  as  they  are 
to  be  performed,  but  matters  can  be  simplified 
somewhat  by  cutting  out  the  first  spring  for- 
ward into  the  circle  and  by  practising  the  last 
three  speeds  from  the  position  near  the  front 
of  the  circle.  In  other  words,  by  standing  in 
the  starting  position  with  the  left  foot  a  few 
inches  from  the  front  of  the  ring,  the  body  can 
be  brought  into  a  slight  up  and  down  swing  by 
a  slight  movement  of  the  left  leg,  and  immedi- 
ately lurched  into  the  spiral  spring  without  the 
jump  across  the  circle.  This  is  properly  called 
"  putting  the  shot  from  a  stand,"  and  it  may 
be  practised  over  and  over  again  w^ith  ease  until 
the  spiral  spring  itself,  the  thrust  of  the  arm, 
and  the  **  slap  "  of  the  hand  is  perfected. 

^  Throwing  the  Hammer 

In  throwing  the  hammer  the  question  of 
quick  action,  or  "  snap,"  is  again  foremost,  but 
unlike  the  act  of  putting  the  shot,  quick  action 
is  not  called  for  until  the  motion  of  the  weight 
is  well  under  way.  The  position  for  starting 
should  be  taken  by  placing  the  feet  an  easy  dis- 
tance apart  with  the  toes  just  inside  the  ring 
at  the  rear  of  the  circle.  The  body  should  face 
the  direction  opposite  that  in  which  the  ham- 
mer is  to  be  thrown.    The  ball  of  the  hammer 


206        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

should  be  allowed  to  rest  on  the  ground  at  the 
right  and  behind  the  person  holding  it,  and  it 
should  be  placed  just  far  enough  away  so  that 
it  is  necessary  to  bend  the  body  around  to  the 
right.  The  handle  should  be  gripped  firmly 
by  crooking  the  fingers  over  the  straight  wire 
bars.  When  this  position  is  assumed  the 
weight  should  be  lifted  from  its  resting-place 
with  just  enough  speed  to  carry  it  in  front  and 
away  from  the  body,  a  few  inches  from  the 
ground.  At  the  instant  it  reaches  a  point  di- 
rectly in  front  of  the  body  both  arms  should  be 
straight,  and  the  ball  should  then  be  swung 
upward  on  the  left  so  that  the  handle  can  pass 
over  the  head.  As  the  ball  completes  the  first 
circle  by  passing  in  front  of  the  body  at  the  low 
point,  both  arms  should  again  be  straight.  On 
the  second  swing  the  speed  of  the  weight  should 
be  accelerated  a  trifle,  and  on  the  third  swing, 
a  trifle  more.  The  knees  will  bend  but  the 
shoulders  must  be  held  back  as  the  speed  in- 
creases. Then  comes  the  quick  action.  As  the 
ball  comes  to  the  low  point  directly  in  front  of 
the  body,  at  the  end  of  the  third  swing,  the  feet 
should  leave  their  position  and  the  whole  body 
should  whirl  about  with  enough  force  to  in- 
crease the  speed  of  the  hammer  tremendously. 
The  force  of  this  quick  movement  must  come 
from  the  body  and  not  from  the  arms,  for  the 
arms  must  be  held  straight  in  line  with  the 
hammer  handle  all  the  time.     When  the  ball 


HOW  TO  THROW  THE  WEIGHTS  207 

approaches  the  low  point  for  the  last  time  the 
feet  should  strike  a  position  and  hold  it.  Then 
one  hard  pull  with  the  legs  and  back  will  give 
the  weight  its  final  momentum  as  it  rises  to  the 
point  over  the  left  shoulder  where  it  must  be 
released. 

Applying  Centrifugal  Force 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  centrifugal  force  plays 
a  great  part  in  throwing  the  hammer,  but  it  is 
quite  as  easy  to  make  a  grave  mistake  in  think- 
ing that  lifting,  pure  and  simple,  has  something 
to  do  with  it.  Centrifugal  force,  or  the  tend- 
ency of  a  revolving  body  to  fly  in  a  straight 
line  from  central  point,  is  the  whole  thing.  If 
a  lift  is  resorted  to  when  the  centrifugal  force 
cannot  be  controlled  the  throw  will  be  a  failure. 
The  position  of  the  body  on  the  first  three 
swings,  as  the  ball  passes  the  low  point  directly 
in  front  of  the  person  holding  it,  will  serve  to 
show  how  the  centrifugal  force  in  the  weight 
of  the  hammer  acts,  and  how  the  body  reacts 
against  it.  The  ball  is  low  to  the  ground,  the 
knees  bent,  the  arms  straight,  and  the  shoulders 
back.  The  weight  of  the  hammer  is  pulling 
straight  against  the  weight  of  the  body  and,  if 
it  were  not  for  the  feet  pushing  against  the 
earth,  a  line  drawn  through  the  wire  handle  of 
the  hammer  would  pass  directly  through  the 
center  of  the  mass  of  the  body.    Because  the 


208        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

feet  do  push  against  the  earth  this  line  passes 
a  little  above  that  point. 

But  to  size  up  the  situation,  here  are  two 
weights,  —  one  whirling,  and  the  other  turning 
on  a  pivot.  When  the  body  leaves  its  pivot 
it  must  whirl  also.  The  only  difference  between 
the  two  whirling  weights  lies  in  the  fact  that 
the  lighter  body  describes  the  greater  circle. 
Now  if  it  were  possible  for  the  ball  of  the  ham- 
mer to  suddenly  be  held  at  one  point  in  space 
the  momentum  of  this  little  sphere  would  be 
immediately  transmitted  to  the  person  on  the 
other  end  of  the  wire,  who,  in  turn,  would  either 
have  to  hang  on  and  whirl  around  or  fly  oif  at 
a  tangent.  This  is  often  the  case  when  the 
heavy  ball  strikes  into  the  soft  earth. 

Exactly  the  same  thing  takes  place  w^hen  the 
body  of  the  thrower  suddenly  comes  to  a  stop 
by  the  feet  taking  a  position  at  the  end  of  the 
last  whirl.  It  is  obvious  that  at  that  time  all 
the  momentum  of  the  body  being  transmitted 
to  the  ball  would  increase  the  speed  of  the  ball 
to  something  terrific.  A  final  pull  is  absolutely 
necessary  in  an  effort  to  keep  the  body  from 
being  dragged  from  the  point  where  it  is 
anchored. 

The  action  in  throwing  the  hammer  has  been 
described  as  consisting  of  three  swings  and  two 
whirls,  but  this  is  not  the  only  action  or 
*'  form  "  used.  A  double  whirl  is  most  com- 
mon among  hammer-throwers  although  a  sin- 


HOW  TO  THROW  THE  WEIGHTS  209 

gle  whirl  is  sometimes  used  by  beginners  and 
a  triple  whirl  by  experts. 

The  part  that  the  feet  play  in  the  whirl  has 
not  been  mentioned  for  the  simple  reason  that 
the  action  of  the  feet  depends  entirely  upon 
the  weight  and  height  of  the  man.  Some  ex- 
pert hammer-throwers  barely  touch  their  feet 
to  the  ground  except  when  the  ball  passes  the 
low  point.  In  this  case  there  seems  to  be  a 
sort  of  double  action  of  the  body  like  that  of 
a  cat  when  it  is  held  by  the  feet  and  dropped, 
—  the  fore  feet  come  down  first,  and  the  hind 
feet  afterwards.  With  the  hammer-thrower  the 
trunk  of  the  body  seems  to  turn  first.  The  feet 
follow  quickly,  but  are  clear  around  and  on  the 
ground  again  before  the  swing  of  the  hammer 
has  completed  a  circle.  There  is  still  another 
type  of  hammer-thrower  who  pivots  his  weight 
on  the  toe  of  the  left  foot  all  through  the  whirl, 
the  right  foot  striking  the  ground  only  at  the 
low  point.  Such  methods,  however,  are  un- 
common and  are  made  of  practical  value  only 
by  years  of  experience. 

Skill  in  throwing  the  hammer  is  the  outcome 
of  careful  study  in  practice  with  regard  to  the 
relation  between  the  weight  of  the  sphere  and 
the  weight  of  the  body  during  the  time  that 
both  are  whirling  at  a  high  speed.  The  first 
three  swings  of  the  hammer  may  be  practised 
by  releasing  the  handle  over  the  left  shoulder 
at  the  end  of  the  third  swing.    A  throw  of  any 


I 


210        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

distance  cannot  be  hoped  for  without  at  least  ij 

one  whirl,  for  high  speed  is  impossible  unless 
the  whole  body  is  brought  into  action. 

Throwing  the  Discus 

The  discus-throw  is  the  most  graceful  and 
the  most  difficult  to  master  of  the  three  weight 
events.  The  discus  only  weighs  about  four  and 
one-half  pounds,  —  so  here  is  an  event  success 
in  the  performance  of  which  is  surely  based 
upon  a  preponderance  of  skill  —  hence  the  dif- 
ficulty. The  average  man  of  strength  could  put 
the  twelve-pound  shot  from  thirty  to  thirty-five 
feet  without  practice  while  an  expert  could  hurl 
it  only  half  again  as  far.  It  is  well  to  say  that 
the  average  man  of  strength  could  throw  the 
discus  about  sixty  feet,  while  an  expert  could 
sail  it  out  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  feet,  or 
more. 

The  "  form  "  of  throwing  the  discus  is  much 
simpler  than  that  of  either  the  shot  or  the  ham- 
mer —  that  is,  an  idea  of  how  the  act  should  be 
performed  can  be  grasped  very  readily  —  but 
to  perform  the  act  is  another  thing.  The  right 
foot  should  be  placed  just  inside  the  ring  at 
the  rear  of  the  circle  and  the  left  foot  an  easy 
stride  toward  the  center.  The  discus  should  be 
placed  against  the  palm  of  the  right  hand,  just 
allowing  the  tips  of  the  first  three  fingers  to 
turn  on  the  rim.    The  fingers  should  be  quite 


HOW  TO   THROW  THE   WEIGHTS  211 

close  together.  The  edge  of  the  discus  should 
never  be  gripped,  for  it  is  lield  in  phice  by  fric- 
tion against  the  palm  with  the  finger  ends  act- 
ing as  a  stop.  The  position  of  the  discus  can 
be  made  more  secure  by  pressure  against  the 
left  hand  held  near  the  left  shoulder,  or  by  a 
semicircular  swing  of  the  arm  at  the  right. 

The  body  should  twist  with  the  motion  of  the 
right  arm,  and  the  left  arm  should  be  extended 
to  preserve  the  balance.  Such  a  swing  is  the 
very  first  movement  to  be  made  when  the  throw 
is  commenced.  Wlien  the  right  arm  is  in  the 
rearmost  position  on  the  back  half  of  the 
swing,  the  feet  should  leave  their  position  and 
one  quick  snappy  whirl  should  be  made.  All 
through  this  whirl  and  at  the  finish  the  back  of 
the  hand  should  be  up.  The  discus  will  be  held 
in  place  largely  by  centrifugal  force,  and  when 
released  should  spin  on  its  flat  surface,  sliding 
forward  from  the  tips  of  the  fingers  and  rising 
always  with  its  plane  parallel  to  the  face  of  the 
earth.  This  is  the  trick,  to  get  it  to  sail  out 
without  wabbling,  and  to  give  it  great  velocity 
by  performing  the  feat  with  lots  of  **  snap.'* 
When  the  sail  is  perfected,  the  velocity  may  be 
increased  by  a  quick  movement  of  the  wrist, 
causing  an  increased  pressure  of  the  finger-tips 
against  the  rim  of  the  discus  after  it  has 
slipped  from  the  palm  of  the  hand. 

Skill  in  throwing  the  discus  lies  in  getting 
the  greatest  value  out  of  each  of  three  com- 


212        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

bined  speeds,  namely :  the  whirl  of  the  body,  the 
swing  of  the  arm,  and  the  snap  of  the  wrist  at 
the  finish.  The  last  two  may  be  practised  from 
a  standing  position,  and  even  in  throwing  the 
whirl  may  be  omitted  by  jumping  forward  in 
the  circle  when  the  arm  swings  back  on  the 
start.  Centrifugal  force  is  important  through- 
out the  act  of  throwing  the  discus  although  it 
is  more  of  an  incident  to  the  act  than  a  main 
factor  in  it.  It  serves  to  keep  the  discus  from 
falling  out  of  the  hand,  and  it  allows  for  the 
accumulation  of  greater  resultant  speed  than 
is  possible  in  a  straight  throw  by  jumping 
across  the  circle  and  omitting  the  whirl. 

"When  a  boy  has  learned  how  to  throw  the 
weights  and  has  developed  a  certain  amount  of 
skill  in  executing  the  act,  he  ought  to  be  made 
to  realize  that  what  he  has  thus  far  attained  is 
means  to  an  end,  and  not  an  end  in  itself.  The 
underlying  motive  that  we  all  have  when  we 
work  diligently  at  any  one  thing  is  the  desire 
to  excel.  Matching  the  results  of  our  efforts 
against  the  efforts  of  others  and  seeing  and 
recognizing  the  progress  that  we  have  made  is 
the  compensation  which  we  derive  from  our 
labor.  There  is  no  athlete  alive  who  does  not 
know  what  it  is  to  be  defeated.  There  is  not 
an  athlete  in  the  world  who  does  not  know  what 
it  means  to  win.  To  fight  one's  way  through 
the  hazards  of  competition  in  any  kind  of  an 
athletic  event  is  difficult  enough,  but  a  competi- 


HOW  TO  THROW  THE  WEIGHTS  213 

tive  performance  in  the  weight  events,  strange 
to  say,  is  peculiar  to  itself  in  this  respect.  The 
rules  of  competition  allow  only  three  throws 
with  a  weight.  An  athlete  watches  his  progress 
from  day  to  day  by  comparing  his  best  marks 
in  practice,  and  he  is  sure  to  have  taken  from 
twenty-five  to  fifty  tries  before  he  concludes 
that  he  has  reached  his  limit  for  that  day. 
When  he  finds  himself  limited  to  three  throws 
in  competition  he  wants  to  equal  the  best  mark 
that  he  has  made  in  practice  and,  what  is  more, 
he  fully  expects  to.  The  question  is,  how  is  he 
going  to  do  it? 

In  higher  circles  of  athletics  an  athlete 
watches  the  progress  of  his  competitors  by  the 
reports  given  out  in  the  newspapers.  It  often 
happens  that  a  mere  misprint  in  regard  to  the 
distance  of  a  certain  throw  will  lead  to  the  de- 
feat of  a  formerly  victorious  athlete.  He 
knows  his  own  limit  even  though  he  continually 
hopes  for  a  record  throw  to  be  credited  to  him 
as  the  result  of  some  superhuman  effort.  If 
the  newspaper  states  the  distance  "  48  feet  " 
when  it  should  have  been  "  43  feet,"  that  little 
fact  is  quite  likely  to  unnerve  him  and  cause  his 
downfall.  This  serves  to  show  that  weight- 
throwing  is  not  entirely  a  game  of  skill  against 
skill,  but  a  game  of  man  against  man.  Bitter 
experience  is  the  only  teacher  when  it  comes  to 
be  a  game  of  human  nature,  but  a  few  ' '  point- 
ers "  will  help  any  boy  who  wants  to  do  his  best 


214        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

when  he  matches  his  efforts  against  others  of 
liis  class. 

An  effort  to  exert  the  greatest  amount  of 
strength  when  the  weights  are  being  thrown 
accomplishes  the  least.  All  of  the  strength  that 
one  can  sum  up  is  necessary,  but  the  machinery 
of  the  human  body  is  so  constructed  that  all 
acquired  skill  will  vanish  when  an  extreme  ef- 
fort is  made  to  exert  strength.  Skill  being  the 
first  essential,  the  mind  must  forever  nourish 
the  thought  of  skill,  and  must  forever  be  con- 
scious of  the  part  which  skill  plays  in  the  act. 
Too  much  practice  and  too  little  serious  study 
will  turn  the  mind  from  the  right  direction 
quicker  than  anything  else.  When  such  a  cir- 
cumstance exists  there  is  just  one  simple  rule 
to  follow  —  lay  the  weights  on  the  shelf  and 
leave  them  alone.  A  week  of  abstinence  from 
practice  will  not  hurt  any  weight-thrower. 


GOURDIN   MAKING  WORLD'S    RECORD 

BROAD  Jl'MP  OF  25  FT.  3  IN.  ATTGUST, 

1!>'21,    AT  HARVARD  STADII'M. 


MEU(  EU  OK  I'EN.N.,  IM  I.IK  oLl.El.IATE 

CHAMPION  IN  r,ll2  ANI>  1'.I13.       NOTE 

THE  HEIGHT  ATT  A  1  NED,  AND  THE 

POSITION   OF   THE    BODY. 


PLATT    ADAMS    ol"     iiii:     m:\\'     \ ork 

ATHLETIC    CLri:   .11   sT    liKloUE 

LAN  KING. 


THROWlN(;    EVEKY  MUSCLE     INTO  A 

FINAL  EFFORT  TO  G.\IN  DISTANCE 

BEFORE    LANDING. 


THE  BROAD  JUMP 


FIELD  ATHLETICS 
The  Jumps 


THE  RUNNING  BROAD  -  JUMP,  THE 
HIGH -JUMP,  AND  THE  POLE- 
VAULT 

BY   JAY   B.    CAMP 

George  Connors,  who  has  developed  so  many 
athletes  at  Phillips-Exeter  Academy,  among 
them  J.  P.  Jones,  always  insisted  that  anybody 
with  two  good  legs  could  make  good  at  track. 
In  jnmping  and  vaulting  there  is  no  sustained 
effort  to  tax  the  heart  or  other  internal  organ, 
and  two  normal  legs  remain  the  only  require- 
ment. Probably  many  track-men  have  become 
acquainted  with  their  specialty  when  very 
young,  perhaps  as  early  as  at  ten  years  of  age. 
There  is  an  advantage  in  starting  at  such  an 
age  when  the  proper  muscles  may  be  stimu- 
lated and  natural  and  correct  movements  ac- 
quired unconsciously.  But  before  college  age 
there  are  few,  I  believe,  who  profit  by  pro- 
longed concentration,  in  successive  years,  on 
any  one  of  the  field-events.  As  a  steady  diet, 
real  games  like  football,  baseball,  tennis,  or  golf 
are  preferable  preparation  for  college  track.  In 
fact  it  is  only  rarely  that  any  boy  who  has 
trained  seriously  in  high  school  reaches  more 

217 


218       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

than  mediocrity  in  college.  On  the  other  hand, 
men  with  an  all-round  muscular  development 
often  start  green  in  college  and  make  a  phe- 
nomenal success.  The  lack  of  natural  ability 
may  be  offset  by  a  few  years  of  training,  since 
any  type  of  physique  is  adaptable  to  the  three 
field  events  considered  here.  Let  every  one, 
then,  who  is  not  already  occupied  in  some 
spring  training,  consider  the  possibilities  of 
track  athletics  with  the  view  of  giving  them  a 
trial. 

Broad-jumping,  high-jumping,  and  pole- 
vaulting  are  based  on  the  same  rhythms  and 
movements,  and  for  that  reason  are  best  stud- 
ied and  practised  together.  The  two  elements 
of  the  broad-jump  are  spring  and  speed,  i.  e. 
height  and  carry.  Forward  momentum  at  the 
take-off  is  to  be  suddenly  transformed  into  up- 
ward motion,  and  what  is  not  so  used  up  carries 
the  body  on  out  into  the  pit.  The  more  speed 
one  has  at  the  take-off  the  harder  it  is  to  spring 
against  it  high  enough  to  take  advantage ;  and 
if  with  less  speed  it  is  easier  to  spring  high 
there  may  not  be  enough  momentum  left  to  get 
the  benefit  of  the  height.  It  is  the  speed  that 
must  be  subordinated  to  the  spring,  however, 
as  in  both  the  other  events. 

In  working  at  the  broad-jump  it  is  well  to 
insure  a  uniform  run  by  having  three  marks, 
which  one  starts  from  or  touches  with  the 
jumping  foot.     The  first  one  must  be  ninety 


THE  RUNNING  JUMPS  219 

feet  or  more,  and  the  last  between  forty  and 
fifty-five  feet  from  the  take-off.  The  one  indis- 
pensable feature  is  a  steady  stride  which  al- 
ways lands  the  foot  squarely  on  the  board,  a 
connection  which  must  be  made  so  automatic- 
ally that  no  uncertainty  can  slow  up  the  ap- 
proach. Accelerate  your  pace  evenly  over 
every  mark,  gathering  speed  up  to  the  last  four 
strides,  when  you  begin  to  coast  a  little  as  you 
gather  all  your  forces  for  the  last  supreme  ef- 
fort. From  the  shortest  mark  should  be  done 
the  regular  practising  for  height  and  spring, 
with  a  hurdle  in  the  pit  about  six  feet  or  less 
from  the  board.  In  taking-off,  one  springs 
up  the  short  side  of  a  right-angled  triangle 
whose  hypothenuse  is  the  ground,  and  slides 
down  the  long  side  into  the  pit.  The  rise 
should  be  at  an  angle  of  about  sixty  degrees 
with  the  ground,  and  the  hurdle  is  a  help  in 
working  up  to  so  abrupt  a  change  of  direction. 
The  spring  is  largely  controlled  in  the  last  long 
crouching  stride,  from  which  you  straighten  up 
with  a  lift  of  the  back,  arm- swing,  and  sudden 
kick.  This  kick  nearly  splits  the  non-jumping 
leg  from  its  mate;  but  the  latter  chases  along 
behind  as  best  it  can  until  the  man  behind  the 
legs  lifts  them  both  to  his  chest  to  add  the  last 
inches  to  the  distance. 

The  mechanical  basis  of  the  art  of  high- 
jumping  is  the  so-called  hitch-kick.  In  the  fol- 
lowing directions  a  left-footed  jumper  only  will 


220       THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

be  considered,  for  briefness,  and  right-footed 
jumpers  must  reverse  all  the  lefts  and  rights. 
Whichever  foot  one  puts  over  a  hurdle  first,  or 
punts  a  football  with,  is  sure  to  be  the  best  for 
the  non-jumping  foot.  Both  these  exercises, 
especially  the  latter,  are  splendid  for  high- 
jumpers.  To  learn  the  hitch-kick,  stand  on  the 
jumping  foot,  with  the  other,  the  right,  balanced 
eighteen  inches  off  the  ground.  Spring  up  and 
down  on  the  toes  of  the  right  foot  until  you  can 
do  it  energetically  without  thinking.  Now  add 
a  kick  up  to  the  spring  of  the  right  foot,  and 
get  it  back  to  ground  before  the  left  foot  can 
come  down  from  its  perch.  When  you  can  put 
lots  of  style  into  this  performance  try  it  on  a 
little  jump  into  the  pit,  without  a  cross-bar,  and 
without  a  turn.  In  this  way  one  lands  facing 
forward,  and  on  the  jumping  foot.  Practise  this 
also  with  the  cross-bar  from  one  to  three  feet 
high  and  don't  be  afraid  to  hit  the  ground  tail 
first.  Even  when  you  can  kick  the  jumping  foot 
higher  than  your  head,  from  a  stand,  and  bring 
it  down  on  the  same  spot,  while  the  other  leg 
is  left  shoulder  high  in  full  flight,  don't  fool 
yourself  into  thinking  that  you  have  practised 
this  enough.  Mike  Sweeney,  whose  jump  of  six 
feet  six,  made  with  a  simple  hitch-kick  form, 
was  the  world's  record  for  twenty  years,  was 
equally  supreme  at  high-kicking.  In  this  figure 
the  jumping  foot  strikes  the  bar  or  target  and 
gets  back  to  earth  before  the  other,  although 


THE   RUNNING   JUMPS  22  i 

generally  an  instant  later  than  the  back  of  one's 
neck.  The  jig  movements  which  the  other  leg 
does  in  the  air,  in  the  meantime,  are  rather 
amusing  after  one  has  succeeded  in  understand- 
ing them.  Besides  high-kicking,  both  standing 
high  and  broad  jumping  are  excellent  practice 
for  the  running  high-jump.  For  a  standing 
high-jump  one  crouches  with  the  side  toward 
the  bar  and  jumps  off  both  feet,  at  the  same 
time  swinging  the  arms  up  hard  and  lifting  the 
back.  The  scissor-kick  over  the  bar  is  to  be 
extended  into  a  hitch-kick  as  much  as  possible. 
If  you  hit  the  ground  flat  on  your  back  it  will 
help  you  to  realize  how  you  cleared  the  bar,  i.  e. 
with  the  back  down  and  horizontal.  This  is 
called  a  lay-out.  Every  ordinarily  good  jumper 
clears  the  bar  with  this  lay-out,  the  body  show- 
ing a  straight  line  from  knees  to  shoulder  which 
is  parallel  to  the  ground.  Generally,  though 
not  always,  the  back  is  parallel  to  the  cross-bar 
and  flat  to  the  ground,  at  the  moment  of  clear- 
ance. 

Whatever  form  you  may  use  now  is  sure  to 
be  different  before  you  jump  very  much  higher, 
so  that  you  will  do  well  to  start  practising 
right  on  the  correct  basic  form  described  here. 
Start  with  a  wide  sidewise  run  and  the  old- 
fashioned  scissor-kick.  Snapping  the  left  or 
last  leg  over  and  down  before  the  other  gets 
to  ground  will  shift  the  scissor  over  into  a 
hitch-kick.     Make  sure  of  that  lay-out  at  the 


222        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

cost  of  a  hundred  falls  if  necessary,  as  the  in- 
jury to  your  back  is  less  permanent  than  the 
damage  to  your  form  if  you  clear  the  bar  sit- 
ting up  or  doubled  forward.  Keep  trying  a 
more  direct  approach  of  the  bar,  until  you  run 
at  it  at  right  angles.  In  the  last  two  strides  you 
may  cut  across  to  your  left,  but  it  is  better  to 
take  only  one  swerving  step,  that  is  on  the  very 
last  stride.  This  toeing-out  to  the  left  allows 
the  non-jumping  or  kicking  leg  a  longer  swing 
so  that  more  power  is  available  for  the  hitch- 
kick.  In  punting  a  football  the  kicker  does  this 
same  thing  to  increase  the  reach  and  speed  of 
the  kicking  foot.  With  the  aid  of  the  hitch-kick 
this  shift  of  direction  on  the  last  stride  will 
wheel  the  body  enough  in  the  air  to  bring  it 
parallel  to  the  bar,  so  that  one  comes  down  side- 
wise  to  the  bar  or  facing  it.  Don't  try  con- 
sciously for  a  turn,  as  the  less  you  get  the 
better.  Face  the  bar  squarely  as  you  spring, 
with  no  twist  in  the  waist  or  hips.  It  is  per- 
missible after  the  body  has  fully  cleared  to 
twist  down  on  to  the  feet  and  avoid  sprawling 
backwards  into  the  pit.  Even  then  it  helps  the 
jump  not  at  all. 

The  test  of  a  high- jumper  is  his  run.  Only 
one  style  of  stride  mil  fit,  and  this  must  be 
acquired  by  those  who,  unfortunately,  do  not 
have  it  naturally.  It  is  made  up  of  a  succession 
of  bounds,  which  do  not  take  the  runner  up  into 
the    air    but    nearer    the    ground,    and    very 


J.  B.  CAMP  OF  HARVARD.    CAMP  TIED 

FOR  FIRST  PLACE  IN  THE  INTER- 

COLLEGIATES    OF    1914. 


AVAGONER  OF   VALE,   FORMER  INTER- 
COLLEGIATE  RECORD-HOLDER, 
POISING  HIS  POLE  BEFORE 
STARTING     HIS     RUN. 


J.    B.    CAMP     CLEARING    12     FEET   AT  \\A<.UM.U    m\  Lit    I-'   HI. I,   G  INCHES. 

THE    OLYMPIC  TRY-OUTS,  JUNE, 
1912,     FOR    THIRD    PLACE. 

THE  POLE-VAULT 


THE   RUNNING  JUMPS  223 

smoothly  forward.  You  strike  on  the  heels 
first,  but  not  flat-footed,  since  you  roll  across  the 
foot  from  heel  to  toe  and  off,  allowing  the  knee 
to  bend  decidedly  as  the  weight  passes  directly 
over  the  foot.  Approach  the  bar  with  eyes  on 
the  ground  under  it,  as  though  you  were  sneak- 
ing to  a  position  for  a  shot  at  a  deer.  This 
rolling  character  of  the  run  is  closely  dupli- 
cated in  the  vaulting  and  broad-jumping  run, 
though  the  sneaking  into  each  crouched  stride 
and  rising  elastically  out  of  it,  is  much  less 
noticeable  than  here  described,  and  has  little 
up  and  down  motion  and  more  forward  im- 
petus. 

The  marks  for  the  approach  are  best  ad- 
justed so  that  the  first  mark  is  about  twenty 
feet  back  of  the  main  mark,  which  is  itself  ex- 
actly four  good  long  running  strides  from  the 
spot  where  the  last  foot  leaves  the  ground.  As 
you  run  easily  over  the  main  mark  take  from 
it  a  high-step  which  is  twelve  to  eighteen  inches 
longer  than  the  normal  stride.  The  recovery 
from  this  hop  is  the  most  difficult  detail  of  the 
run.  This  high-step  is  long  rather  than  high, 
but  not  so  long  that  you  cannot  alight  from  it 
with  the  weight  well  over  the  forward  leg,  and 
slide  into  the  next  stride  with  no  perceptible 
loss  of  speed.  The  second  and  third  strides 
from  the  main  mark  gather  speed.  In  the 
fourth  and  last  stride  you  plant  your  left  foot 
so  far  ahead  of  you,  and  well  toed  out,  that  you 


224        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

are  pretty  well  down  near  the  ground,  as  if  do- 
ing the  split.  The  right  leg  shoves  off  as 
strongly  as  it  can  to  start  its  kick,  and  the  back, 
leg  and  opposite  arm  swing  np  together.  The 
whole  leg  from  the  waist  down,  but  most  espe- 
cially the  knee,  bears  the  burden  of  such  a  jump, 
which  has  been  described  as  running  against 
and  bouncing  off  one's  leg.  As  in  the  broad- 
jump  the  speed  must  be  reduced  so  that  it  does 
not  kill  the  spring.  However,  most  fellows  fail 
to  realize  the  full  strength  of  their  leg,  as  they 
lack  the  confidence  and  fight  to  run  in  hard  and 
still  get  away  with  a  good  jump.  A  powerful 
man  is  really  not  able  to  run  fast  enough  to 
develop  the  full  recoil  resistance  of  his  jumping 
leg,  provided  his  form  is  natural  enough  so 
that  it  will  not  break  down  under  pressure. 

There  are  many  different  styles  of  jumping 
and  the  most  conspicuous  jumpers  often  have 
the  most  specialized  form.  None  but  a  spe- 
cially gifted  man  can  hope  to  succeed  without 
the  continual  aid  of  a  really  expert  coach.  No 
finished  form  exists  which  can  have  a  better 
beginning  than  the  simple  and  physically  cor- 
rect jump  outlined  above.  This  very  outline 
will  fit  approximately  the  special  details  of  the 
form  practised  by  practically  every  man  who 
has  jumped  six  feet.  A  beginner  must  avoid 
freak  specialties  and  acquire  those  good  habits 
which  will  in  the  end  adapt  themselves  advan- 
tageously to  what  eccentricities  he  may  develop. 


THE  RUNNING  JUMPS  225 

Pole-VauUing 

Pole-vaulting  is  an  art  most  readily  mas- 
tered by  a  good  hurdler,  broad-jumper,  or  high- 
jumper,  in  the  same  way  that  a  good  vaulter 
has  also  an  aptitude  for  the  last-named  events. 
Brute  strength  is  not  worth  its  weight,  although 
many  powerful  fellows  weighing  over  one  hun- 
dred and  sixty  pounds  must  be  conceded  to  be 
of  championship  caliber.  In  any  case  agility  is 
indispensable,  and  it  is  a  general  rule  that  suc- 
cessful vaulters  have  previously  showTi  class 
at  some  other  sport.  R.  A.  Gardner,  of  Yale, 
was  U.  S.  Amateur  Golf  Champion  before  he 
won  the  Intercollegiate  pole-vault.  Babcock,  of 
Columbia,  was  a  high-jumper  and  broad-jumper 
on  the  N.  Y.  A.  C.  team  before  he  competed  as  a 
vaulter  and  won  the  Intercollegiate  and  Olym- 
pic championships.  None  who  cannot  perform 
creditably  at  some  other  field  event  or  sport 
are  likely  to  meet  with  success  at  pole-vaulting. 

Of  the  two  distinct  styles  of  vaulting  the 
most  elementary  is  the  easiest  beginning  for  a 
novice.  This  consists  in  not  shifting  the  hands 
from  the  position  they  hold  when  running  down 
to  the  take-oiT.  Bill  Quinn,  late  field-events 
coach  at  Harvard,  said  of  this  that  it  would 
teach  a  man  more  than  most  coaches  could.  Al- 
though many  coaches  as  well  as  candidates  neg- 
lect it,  the  exercise  of  vaulting  without  shifting 
the  lower   hand    is    the   most  valuable   of  all 


226        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

practice  stunts.  Both  novice  and  expert  should 
practice  this  way  regularly,  as  here  described. 
It  is  taken  for  granted  that  every  one  vaults 
off  his  left  foot,  holding  the  pole  on  the  right 
side  when  running.  It  is  best  to  be  content 
with  a  six-foot  height  at  first,  and  have  a  reg- 
ular practice  mark  of  35  to  40  feet  from  the 
hole.  Hold  the  pole  low,  at  arm's  length  on  the 
right  side,  gripping  tightly  with  the  hands 
about  thirty  inches  apart  and  thumbs  toward 
the  upper  end  of  pole.  In  the  last  two  strides 
swing  the  pole  out  ahead  from  the  side  and  let 
it  slide  along  the  ground  into  the  socket,  and 
quickly  swing  the  arms  over  the  head  in  a  wide 
upward  curve.  Very  little  energy  or  speed 
need  go  into  the  run,  as  the  whole  thing  is  the 
spring  up  under  the  pole.  On  springing,  shove 
down  into  and  against  the  pole  as  if  to  bend  it 
double.  While  the  lower  arm  shoves  desper- 
ately and  the  upper  or  right  is  braced  for  a 
pull,  the  body  lifts  itself  against  this  fulcrum 
so  that  the  chest  grazes  the  pole,  and  the  thighs, 
closely  doubled  up,  slide  along  it.  The  muscles 
connecting  the  shoulders  and  torso  are  the  ones 
which  do  the  work,  and  they  alone  have  license 
to  tire  soon.  A  full  lift  without  any  twist  what- 
soever will  turn  the  back  up  and  the  belly  down 
over  the  bar,  when  the  handstand  on  the  pole 
is  completed.  In  the  last  minute  lift  with  back 
and  arms  into  a  close  jack-knife,  with  the  knees 
near  the  chin  and  the  cross-bar  in  between,  and 


THE  RUNNING  JUMPS  227 

shove  off  clear.  In  this  exercise,  as  in  all  other 
practice  work  and  vaulting  at  low  heights,  the 
standards  should  be  set  a  foot  or  more  back 
from  the  hole  in  order  to  give  distance  as  well 
as  height  and  to  encourage  a  very  long  swing 
and  a  delayed  but  sharp  pull-up.  This  is  in  the 
nature  of  advance  preparation  for  the  greater 
heights. 

Elaborate  coaching  is  confusing  to  a  begin- 
ner, who  starts  worrying  when  he  is  on  top  of 
the  cross-bar  about  what  he  has  been  told  to  do, 
and  forgets  what  he  is  then  about  and  makes 
some  new  blunder.  Of  course  those  rare  can- 
didates who  stop  to  think  before  they  vault, 
and  having  everything  settled  in  their  heads 
then  give  their  whole  souls  to  the  deed,  are 
material  for  future  champions.  However, 
vaulting  itself  is  of  little  use  to  most  men  for 
unvaried  practice,  and  the  simplest  way  to 
court  improvement  is  in  the  repetition  of  fool- 
ish isolated  exercises  until  the  separate  ele- 
ments are  introduced  as  habits  into  the  general 
vaulting.  Of  these,  the  first  and  last  is  vault- 
ing without  a  shift,  w^hich  is,  indeed,  of  little 
help  to  many  because  they  are  so  weak  in  the 
body  and  shoulders  that  it  seems  hard  and  they 
give  it  up  before  they  can  do  it  well.  The  sec- 
ond is  vaulting  with  a  shift,  but  without  a  turn 
and  not  using  a  cross-bar.  Use  the  regular 
practice  mark  of  35  to  40  feet  and,  at  first,  a 
hold  of  only  as  high  as  you  can  reach  on  the 


228       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

pole,  when  it  is  standing  upright  in  the  hole. 
Run  down  slowly,  and  as  you  are  planting  the 
pole  in  the  hole,  slide  the  lower  or  left  hand  up 
close  to  the  right,  and  extend  the  pole  high 
above  the  head  before  the  jumping  foot  springs 
off  the  ground.  Swing  out  at  arm's  length  until 
nearing  the  ground  and  then  pull  your  head  up 
as  far  as  you  can  along  the  pole,  at  the  same 
time  clamping  this  to  the  stomach  and  the  knees 
to  the  chest.  Strike  the  dirt  in  this  position, 
where  you  will  hit  first  on  your  feet,  but  over- 
balanced forward.  Later  with  a  higher  hold  and 
an  acute  pull  after  the  pole  has  swung  past  ver- 
tical you  may  land  out  beyond  the  pit,  dragging 
the  pole  with  you  and  sprawling  forward  on 
hands  and  knees.  This  exercise  may  be  used 
with  the  bar  at  low  heights,  but  no  more  than 
seven  feet.  It  should  teach  a  long  free  swing 
and  help  eliminate  the  body  twist  with  which 
so  many  sloppy  vaulters  imitate  the  turn.  The 
impetus  of  a  pull-up  that  is  delayed  until  the 
pole  has  swung  through  to  an  inclination  of 
seventy-five  degrees  angle  to  the  ground,  or 
more,  will  turn  the  body  instantly  through  a 
half  revolution,  so  that  the  breast  faces  the  bar 
and  one  lands  facing  it.  The  twin  of  this  may 
be  practised  without  pit  or  run,  when  holding 
about  seven  feet  up  the  pole.  Plant  the  pole 
ahead  of  you,  take  a  step,  and  pull  up  on  it 
until  head,  knees,  and  hands  are  together  and 
the  pole  is  passing  by  the  hips,  and  stay  there 


THE  RUNNING  JUMPS  229 

until  it  has  swung  on  and  dropped  you,  still 
hunched  up,  on  your  feet.  The  same  thing  can 
be  done  on  a  climbing  pole  in  a  gymnasium, 
where  the  German  horse  and  tumbling  are  also 
recommended  for  vaulters.  For  a  good  illus- 
tration of  the  movements  which  follow  the 
pull-up  and  give  the  turn,  proceed  as  follows : 
Grasp  the  pole  with  the  hands  together  and  the 
lower  end  in  the  hole  or  against  a  wall;  then 
squat  with  back  to  said  hole  or  wall,  and  the 
pole  at  a  ten  degree  angle  with  the  ground. 
With  head,  knees  and  hands  in  the  same  line 
pull  the  pole  through,  past  the  hips.  Pull  hard 
enough  to  bring  yourself  to  a  position  facing 
the  hole  or  wall,  and  in  a  direction  so  that  the 
pole  has  passed  close  by  your  right  ear  all  the 
while.  Exactly  this  should  happen  when  you 
vault  with  the  difference  of  ninety  degrees  in 
the  plane  of  the  experiment. 

After  a  long  swing,  a  delayed  pull-up  and  a 
handstand  on  the  pole  with  jack-knife  have 
been  learned,  there  remains  only  the  detail  of 
handling  the  pole  and  getting  off  the  ground 
smoothly.  Indeed  in  a  couple  of  good  years  of 
experience  most  men  master  these  matters, 
naturally,  and  the  so-called  detail  gets  to  be 
the  whole  art  of  exceeding  the  present  height 
limit  of  thirteen  feet  two  and  one-quarter 
inches.  When  holding  high  on  the  pole  one 
enters  the  vault  with  the  pole  only  a  few  de- 
grees  away  from   horizontal   or   dead-center. 


230       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Against  the  speed  of  a  spirited  run  it  requires 
quickness  and  precision  to  swing  the  pole  up 
and  out  of  dead  center,  before  the  weight  of  the 
vaulter  crashes  head-on  against  the  upward 
rise  of  the  pole.  A  strong  spring,  i.  e.  the  recoil 
of  the  body  into  the  air  from  a  braced  leg,  will 
assist  the  pole  into  its  swing.  If  in  addition  to 
this  one  is  dangling  at  full  arm's  length,  the 
jar  of  the  change  of  direction  is  felt  less.  A 
perfect  tangent  curve  from  the  ground  gives 
the  least  possible  jar,  and  such  a  fast  swing  as 
will  aid  the  pull-up. 

The  marks  for  the  run  are  the  same  as  for 
the  broad-jump,  and  measured  from  the  hole 
where  the  pole  lodges.  The  jumping  foot 
should  take-off  from  a  spot  exactly  under  the 
hands  when  they  are  held  at  the  proper  point 
on  the  pole  for  the  following  vault,  the  pole 
being  in  the  hole  and  the  arms  extended  above 
the  head.  On  every  vault  watch  the  mark  your 
foot  makes  in  the  dust  and  test  it  to  see  if  it 
is  just  under  your  hands  as  they  hold  the  pole 
up  high.  The  manner  of  holding  the  bamboo 
for  the  run  is  rather  important.  The  hands 
grasp  it  loosely,  about  three  feet  apart,  so  that 
the  forward  end  is  pointing  up  at  an  angle  of 
thirty  degrees.  The  body  must  face  squarely 
down  the  path ;  the  shoulders  alone  are  twisted 
toward  the  line  of  the  pole.  The  right  arm  is 
twisted  so  that  the  elbow  is  directly  above  the 
pole.    This  rests  against  the  heel  of  the  palm, 


THE  RUNNING  JUMPS  231 

fingers  loose.  The  left  shoulder  reaches  as  far 
forward  and  to  the  left  as  it  can  go,  in  order 
that  this  elbow  may  be  directly  under  the  pole, 
which  rests  between  the  bent-back  first  finger 
and  thumb  on  the  palm  of  the  hand.  In  this 
fashion  one  runs  i^ractically  free  of  the  pole, 
which  balances  itself  between  the  palms  of  the 
hands.  Only  the  shoulders  are  askew  and  the 
body  faces  directly  forward  with  no  sidewise 
strain.  About  three  strides  from  the  take-off 
the  pole  must  be  cast  ahead  spear-fashion,  with 
one  hand,  and  wait  in  the  hole,  where  it  is  al- 
ready swinging  up  as  you  take  the  last  stride. 
As  you  spring  the  pole  should  already  be  at 
arm's  length,  overhead.  Failing  in  this  perfec- 
tion of  detail,  be  sure  to  shove  it  up  above  you 
as  far  and  as  quickly  as  possible.  Don't  forget 
that  the  whole  weight  of  your  body  must  come 
against  and  be  sustained  by  the  jumping  leg  as 
much  as  in  the  broad-jump,  or  your  dead  weight 
against  the  pole  will  slow  its  swing  quite  hope- 
lessly. To  this  end  the  run  is  down  in  a  crouch, 
in  the  last  few  strides,  and  one  has  turned  off 
some  of  the  speed  and  is  coasting  while  gather- 
ing strength  for  the  extra  effort  of  the  spring. 
A  beginner  need  not  worry  much  with  the 
complicated  descriptions  here,  but  with  the  aid 
of  the  exercises  go  ahead  and  vault.  Improve- 
ment inevitably  comes  very  slowly  and  it  is  a 
four  or  five  years'  course  for  a  degree  of  ex- 
pert.   Ten  feet  or  so  is  all  that  it  is  worth  while 


232        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

doing  in  high  school,  as  without  good  coaching 
the  higher  a  fellow  goes  the  worse  the  faults  he 
develops.  The  college  stars  are  largely  men 
who  have  not  done  eleven  feet  before  they  went 
to  college  and  have  started  to  vault  only  in  the 
last  years  or  year  of  preparatory-school. 

Training  for  Jumps 

For  high  school  boys,  training  is  a  different 
matter  than  for  college  fellows,  especially  in 
the  common  lack  of  a  really  reliable  coach.  At 
this  age  exercise  and  not  training  is  to  be 
sought.  Three  days  a  week  is  the  maximum 
limit  for  practice,  of  which  only  one  may  be 
used  for  competition  of  any  kind.  For  college 
men,  four  days  is  the  most  to  be  desired.  No 
broad-jumper  should  jump  more  than  twice  a 
week,  although  at  this  event  as  at  the  others 
there  should  be  a  liberal  mixture  of  various 
exercise  for  its  own  sake.  Sprinting,  hurdling, 
and  long  jogs  after  practice  should  be  a  regular 
part  of  the  early  season  work,  but  as  the  meets 
come  along,  absolutely  all  exercise  beyond  the 
limited  practice  of  one's  special  event  should 
gradually  be  abandoned  for  absolute  rest.  Be- 
fore and  after  a  meet  as  well  there  ought  to  be 
a  rest  of  two  days  at  least.  This  is  because  the 
field  events  exhaust  little  muscular  energy  but 
a  great  deal  of  nervous  force,  which  can  be  re- 
placed and  accumulated  only  by  inaction.    For 


THE  RUNNING  JUMPS  233 

the  same  reason  strict  training  beyond  enough 
sleep  and  decent  care  of  the  diet  is  inadvisable. 
One  has  to  take  particular  pains  with  the  way- 
he  performs  in  a  meet.  Many  capable  men  fail 
to  show  when  they  get  where  there  is  a  little 
excitement.  It  is  best  to  look  forward  to  meets 
as  little  as  possible,  and,  even  when  on  the  point 
of  jumping,  to  think  as  little  as  may  be  of  the 
crowd  of  spectators  and  how  badly  you  want 
to  beat  your  opponent.  This  is  the  crucial  time 
for  concentration  of  every  faculty  on  the  jump 
itself.  As  you  stand  ready  to  leave  the  mark, 
take  a  full  minute  to  visualize  your  whole  ac- 
tion. Imagine  it  all  so  keenly  that  you  can  feel 
in  your  muscles  what  each  one  is  doing  as  you 
seem  to  feel  yourself  clearing  the  bar.  Don't 
start  until  every  muscle  has  repeated  satisfac- 
torily the  message  you  sent  it.  Entertain  no 
doubts  or  fears  at  this  time,  but  only  the  sensa- 
tions of  jumping  or  vaulting.  In  this  way  one 
leaves  the  mark  with,  the  whole  body  intent  on 
its  duty,  and  the  mind  a  blank  except  for  a  feel- 
ing of  tension.  Watch  against  checking  or 
forcing  the  run  because  of  excitement.  This 
system  may  make  your  head  tired  but  it  avoids 
perplexity  of  head  or  muscles.  One  must  elimi- 
nate all  personal  emotion  to  concentrate  on  his 
performance  as  on  a  mathematical  problem. 
Worrying  as  to  how  high  the  opponent  will  go, 
wishing  him  a  failure  on  his  attempt,  thinking 
of  the  reward  of  victory  or  defeat:    all  these 


234        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

lessen  one's  own  efficiency.  To  be  cheerful  and 
care-free  between  jumps,  to  be  indifferent  to  the 
triumphs  and  the  failures,  is  to  really  enjoy  the 
sport  as  such.  It  leaves  pleasanter  memories 
and,  win,  lose,  or  draw,  makes  the  sport  worth 
the  candle. 


THE  HIGH  JUMP 

BY  LEROY  T.  BROWN 

At  least  six  men  in  this  country  to-day  are 
jumping  as  high  as  six  feet,  four  inches.  This 
is  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  track  athletics 
that  so  many  men  at  one  time  have  been 
jumping  so  well. 

No  two  of  these  use  exactly  the  same  style. 
Each  seems  to  have  found  the  one  best  suited 
to  him  and  developed  it.  However,  there  are 
some  things  which  I  shall  speak  of  that  they 
all  have  in  common. 

No  man  who  has  not  some  natural  ability 
can  be  a  successful  jumper.  It  is  true  that 
the  various  points  can  be  learned,  but  after 
the  bar  gets  above  six  feet,  the  real  test  comes. 
At  this  height  more  than  simply  a  knowledge 
of  ''how  it  is  done"  is  necessary. 

The  majority  of  the  jumpers  —  especially 
those  in  the  East  —  use  what  is  known  as  the 
double-kick,  or  ''hitch-kick".  In  the  following 
directions,  a  left-footed  jumper  only  will  be 
considered  because  of  the  briefness  of  this 
article,  and  right-footed  jumpers  must  reverse 
all  the  directions  from  right  to  left. 

235 


236     THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

The  best  way  to  learn  the  hitch-kick  is  to 
run  a  few  steps  and  jump  from  the  left  foot, 
kicking  the  right  as  high  as  possible.  The 
tendency  will  be  to  land  on  the  right  foot, 
but  instead,  just  before  it  reaches  the  ground, 
kick  it  up  once  more  and  come  do^vn  on  the 
left,  the  foot  you  jumped  with.  This  will 
come  hard  at  first,  as  you  get  the  impression 
that  you  will  fall,  but  after  a  little  practice  it  is 
easily  mastered. 

Now  try  the  jumping,  over  a  low  bar —  say  a 
at  three  feet — until  you  are  used  to  the  feeling 
of  kicking  twice  while  clearing  the  bar.  The 
proper  time  to  kick  the  right  foot  the  second 
time  is  when  the  left  is  just  going  over  the  bar. 
After  this  has  been  learned  so  that  it  is  done 
more  or  less  mechanicalty,  it  is  time  to  learn 
the  turn.  This,  no  doubt,  you  will  find  more 
difficult  to  apply  after  having  learned  it,  but 
is  one  of  the  most  essential  points,  as  in  turning 
you  raise  your  tail  up  over  the  bar,  adding 
two  or  three  inches  to  the  height  of  the  jump. 
Once  more,  as  in  learning  the  kick,  try  it  first 
without  the  bar.  This  time,  at  the  second 
kick  of  the  right  leg,  swing  the  right  arm  up 
also  and  turn  towards  the  left  which  would  be 
towards  the  bar.  A^Tien  you  can  do  this,  try 
it  at  a  low  height.  You  will  probably  not  be 
very  successful  until  after  considerable  prac- 
tice, but  after  mastering  these  two  or  three 
movements   you   have    the   most   important 


THE  HIGH  JUMP  237 

things  in  this  style  of  jumping  and  can  now 
go  on  into  the  minor  details. 

We'll  now  consider  the  approach  to  the  bar. 
It  is  just  as  important  that  a  jumper  know  the 
proper  way  to  run  as  it  is  for  a  sprinter,  so  do 
not  run  at  the  bar  slovenly,  but  use  a  good 
springy  step,  one  that  will  not  tighten  up 
your  muscles  but  will  leave  you  ready  to  gather 
yourself  together  for  the  spring  when  you 
reach  the  take-off.  It  is  better  to  keep  your 
eyes  fixed  on  the  point  where  you  are  planning 
to  jump  from  than  to  watch  the  bar.  Person- 
ally, I  favor  a  straight  run  without  any  hops 
or  skips,  as  nothing  is  gained  by  either  of  these 
methods,  and  considerable  speed  is  lost.  Each 
time  the  bar  is  raised,  more  speed  is  required 
to  lift  one  over,  and  when  jumping  around  six 
feet  it  is  necessary  to  sprint.  The  length  of 
the  run  will  vary  with  the  individual,  as  some 
men  like  a  long  run,  while  others  prefer  a 
short  one. 

The  distance  from  the  starting-place  to  the 
bar  should  be  measured,  and  the  start  always 
made  from  the  same  place,  so  the  jumper  will 
not  have  to  think  about  it,  once  he  has  started 
his  run.  The  take-off  should  be  as  close  to 
the  bar  as  one  can  possibly  make  it  —  the 
closer  the  better —  for  when  you  take  off  near 
the  bar  you  can  direct  all  your  energy  into 
going  straight  up  into  the  air.  Remember 
that  you  are  high-jumping, notbroad-jumping. 


238      THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Either  run  directly  at  the  bar  and  swerve  a 
Httle  on  the  last  stride,  or  start  a  short  distance 
to  the  right  of  the  center  of  the  bar,  so  that 
the  line  of  approach  makes  an  angle  of  about 
sixty  degrees  with  it.  This  allows  you  to 
get  up  close  to  the  bar  and  still  get  in  the  turn. 

You  should  be  able  to  kick  at  least  as  high 
as  your  head,  as  it  is  the  first  kick  that  helps 
to  get  you  up  in  the  air.  Much  benefit  can  be 
derived  from  practising  kicking  at  objects 
over  your  head.  Bending  over  so  you  can 
touch  the  floor  with  your  hands  while  keeping 
the  legs  stiff  is  a  good  way  to  loosen  the  legs 
for  high-kicking. 

Every  good  high-jumper  has  a  lay-out.  By 
that  I  mean,  his  body  is  parallel  to  the  bar  as 
he  goes  over  it.  It  is  impossible  to  get  this 
before  you  have  learned  the  turn  and  hitch- 
kick,  but  when  you  know  these  so  you  can 
jump  five  feet,  six,  try  yourself  out  flat  as  you 
clear  the  bar.  The  best  way  to  get  this  is  to 
throw  the  head  back  and  arch  the  back  up. 
It  is  impossible  to  obtain  any  height  sitting  up 
or  doubled  forward,  so  learn  this  at  the  cost 
of  a  hundred  falls,  if  necessary.  If  you  do 
land  flat  on  your  back,  you'll  have  the  satis- 
faction of  knowing  that  that  is  the  way  you 
went  over  the  bar. 

It  will  take  considerable  practice  to  master 
these  things.  One  can  not  learn  to  be  a 
jumper  in  a  day  nor  a  week,  but  you'll  find 


THE  HIGH  JUMP  239 

yourself  improving  steadily  if  you  devote 
yourself  faithfully  to  mastering  these  funda- 
mentals. You  will  probably  notice  things  I 
haven't  mentioned,  such  as  where  to  hold 
your  arms  while  in  the  air,  or  the  proper  way 
to  land,  but,  as  I  said,  no  two  men  use  exactly 
the  same  form  and  these  minor  points  are 
what  make  them  differ  from  each  other. 
For  that  reason  I  think  it  is  a  mistake  for  a 
man  to  copy  another  jumper's  style  exactly. 


r 


THE  OLYMPIC  GAME  OF   1920 


THE  OLYMPIC  OF  1920 

BY    EARL  J.    THOMSON 

I  suppose  that  in  other  countries  as  well  as 
in  this  one,  many  hearts  were  made  glad  and 
many  were  made  sorrowful  by  the  ''try-outs" 
which  were  held  in  every  country  that  sent  a 
team  to  the  Olympic  Games  in  Antwerp  in 
1920,  but  those  who  remained  behind  furnished 
spiritual  and  financial  aid  and  were  ''pulhng" 
for  their  athletic  representatives  from  the 
time  they  left  home  until  they  were  safely  back 
again. 

As  is  usual,  during  the  trip  to  the  scene  of 
the  games,  everything  was  made  as  comfort- 
able as  possible  for  the  athletes.  Those  who 
had  to  make  long  voyages  by  boat  had  all 
manner  of  contrivances  fixed  for  them  to  work 
out  on.  The  swimmers  had  their  improvised 
tank,  pole-vaulters  had  a  rope  to  swing  on, 
marksmen  had  their  targets  to  shoot  at,  and 
so  it  went.  Systematic  training  was  indulged 
in  by  every  one  in  order  to  keep  in  as  good 
condition  as  possible  under  the  circumstances. 

Antwerp  was  reached  in  safety  by  every- 
body, and  then  began  a  period  of  intensive 
training  for  the  Games,  which  were  only  a 
week  away.     British,   Swedes,   French,   Bel- 

243 


244     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

gians,  and  all  the  rest  turned  lap  after  lap 
together  and  took  practice,  start  after  start, 
together.  All  this  tended  to  promote  good- 
fellowship  and  sportsmanship  among  the  com- 
peting nations,  many  of  which  a  few  months 
before  were  almost  bitter  enemies.  This 
general  rubbing  of  elbows  at  the  Stadium 
and  in  town  at  the  various  ''open  houses", 
held  by  the  different  countries  at  their  head- 
quarters, probably  did  more  for  the  furthering 
of  better  relations  among  the  younger  gener- 
ation of  the  competing  countries  than  all 
the  Four  Power  Treaties  and  International 
Peace  Conferences  put  together. 

A  word  or  two  might  be  said  in  passing 
about  the  hospitality  of  the  Belgians  during 
our  stay  in  their  country.  All  visiting  teams 
were  met  at  the  dock  or  station  and  guided 
to  their  respective  quarters.  The  larger  teams 
were  put  up  in  the  large  Belgian  schools  and 
the  smaller  teams  stayed  in  hotels,  as  did  also 
the  officials  of  the  countries.  The  schools 
were  not  quite  as  sanitary  as  they  might 
have  been,  but  on  the  whole  they  furnished 
plenty  of  room  for  the  comfort  of  all  the  men. 
All  except  the  track  men  had  plenty  of  room 
to  practise  their  respective  sports.  Most 
countries  had  their  own  cooks,  and  all  meals 
were  served  at  the  schools.  Strict  training 
rules  were  observed,  and  ''lights  out"  came  at 
ten-thirty    every    night.     Each    school    was 


THE   OLYMPIC  OF   1920  245 

decorated  with  the  flags  and  colors  of  the 
country  inhabiting  it  and  visits  between  the 
different  schools  were  an  e very-day  occurrence. 
On  ''open  house"  nights  amusement  was 
furnished  by  the  country  entertaining.  Danc- 
ing, speeches,  and  singing  would  be  in  order 
the  entire  evening. 

The  opening  day  of  the  games  was  something 
that  will  live  in  the  minds  of  the  participants 
in  those  games  for  many  years  to  come.  The 
day  dawned  clear  and  warm,  and  shortly  after 
lunch  every  competitor  went  out  to  the 
Stadium.  They  were  lined  up  four-abreast 
in  the  alphabetical  order  of  the  countries 
and  marched  past  the  reviewing  stand  in 
which  sat  Their  Majesties  the  King  and 
Queen  of  Belgium.  As  each  country  marched 
past  the  royal  box,  the  command  was  given 
and  the  group  saluted  with  ''eyes  left"  on  the 
way  in  and  "eyes  right"  on  the  way  out.  The 
athletes  were  then  grouped  according  to 
country,  and  then  followed  the  address  to  the 
King,  the  Sovereign's  reply,  pronouncing  the 
Games  officially  to  be  opened,  which  was 
received  with  the  sounding  of  trumpets, 
salutes  of  cannon,  and  the  flying  away  of 
pigeons  which  bore  about  their  necks  the 
colors  of  the  nations  represented.  At  this 
set  of  Games  there  were  two  innovations; 
first,  the  pledges  taken  by  the  athletes,  spoken 
aloud  by  one  of  them  (a  Belgian  holding  the 


246     THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

flag  of  his  country)  in  the  name  of  all,  as 
follows:  ^^We  swear  that  we  are  taking  part 
in  the  Olympic  Games  as  loyal  competitors, 
observing  the  rules  governing  the  Games, 
and  anxious  to  show  a  spirit  of  chivalry,  for 
the  honor  of  our  countries  and  for  the  glory 
of  the  sport".  The  second  innovation  was 
the  appearance  of  the  Olympic  flag,  wuth  its 
five  entwined  circles,  multicolors  on  a  white 
background,  evoking  the  five  parts  of  the 
world  united  by  Olympism,  and  at  the 
same  time  reproducing  the  colors  of  every 
nation. 

On  the  following  day  the  track  athletics 
began  in  earnest  with  the  heats  of  the  400- 
metre  hurdles,  running  high  jump,  and  the 
javelin.  Intense  competition  was  had  in 
every  heat,  semi-final,  and  final,  and  best  of 
friendly  feelings  were  at  all  times  shown  among 
the  competitors  from  the  opening  race  to 
the  last.  There  were  many  examples  of  en- 
durance and  prowess  such  as  the  ancient 
Greek  himself  might  have  been  proud  of,  and 
much  enthusiasm  was  shown  in  the  final  of 
of  every  race,  the  victor  always  being  given  a 
big  hand  by  the  crowd  of  spectators. 

One  handicap  for  the  English-speaking 
people  at  the  games  was  the  fact  that  all  the 
announcements  were  made  in  French,  the 
distances  being  in  metres.  However,  on  the 
second  day  a  gentleman  from  America  came 


THE  OLYMPIC  OF   1920         247 

to  the  rescue  and  translated  the  results  and 
announced  them  to  the  crowd  in  English. 

I  have  not  time  to  go  into  details  here  about 
the  different  races  of  the  Games,  but  I  do 
want  to  mention  some  of  the  outstanding 
features  of  the  meet.  The  greatest  feat 
performed  at  the  1920  Games  was  the  winning 
of  the  classic  Olympic  marathon  in  the  time  of  2 
hours  32  minutes,  S5H  seconds  (this  time  was 
fast,  considering  the  course  and  the  weather) 
by  Hannes  Kolehmainen,  the  sturdy  Finnish- 
American  runner,  who  came  in  seventy  yards 
ahead  of  the  second  runner  and  was  cheered 
long  and  loud  by  the  crowd  when  he  circled 
the  track  wearing  the  victor's  crown  and 
wreath.  His  running  was  all  the  more  spec- 
tacular as  Kolehmainen  won  both  the  five  and 
ten  thousand  metre  races  at  the  1912  Olympic 
Games  in  Stockholm. 

Other  great  feats  performed  at  the  Games 
were  the  winning  of  the  800-metres  and  the 
1500-metres  by  A.  G.  Hill  of  England,  the 
3,000  and  10,000-metres  walk  by  U.  Fregerio 
of  Italy,  the  breaking  of  the  400-metres  hurdle 
by  Frank  Loomis  of  the  United  States,  and 
the  high-jump  record  by  Dick  Landon  of  the 
United  States.  Despite  the  conditions  of  the 
track,  due  to  the  newness  of  it  and  the  frequent 
rains,  an  astonishing  number  of  records  were 
broken  and  equaled.  World  and  Olympic 
records  alike  fell  by  the  wayside. 


248     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

Aside  from  the  track  and  field  Games  in 
connection  with  the  Olympic  Games  there 
were  a  number  of  other  attractions  going  on 
in  Antwerp  at  the  same  time.  The  swim- 
ming meet,  the  tennis  championships,  the 
boxing  tournament,  and  bicycle  races  drew 
their  quota  of  followers,  to  say  nothing  of  the 
various  cafes  and  other  offerings  of  Antwerp. 

After  the  Games  in  Antwerp,  there  was 
held  in  Paris  a  triangle  meet  betw^een  France, 
Sweden,  and  the  United  States.  A  picked 
team  from  the  three  countries  competed  and 
many  closely  contested  races  were  staged. 
The  funny  part  of  the  closely  contested  races 
was  the  fact  that  they  w^ere  all  between 
Frenchmen  and  Americans.  In  no  less  than 
four  races  that  afternoon  a  French  runner 
would  lead  up  to  within  a  few  feet  ofthe  tape, 
only  to  be  nosed  out  by  an  American.  Some 
of  the  Frenchmen  became  a  trifle  riled  at 
the  last  one  or  two  of  these  finishes,  but  on 
the  whole,  the  spirit  shown  w^as  of  the  highest 
order  of  sportmanship.  The  boys  were  aU 
treated  w^onderfuUy  in  Paris  and  a  big  ban- 
quet was  held  in  their  honor  just  before  they 
left.  The  time  was  short  in  Paris,  in  fact  too 
short,  as  there  was  a  big  track  meet  scheduled 
in  London  between  the  British  Empire  and 
the  United  States. 

This  meet  was  held  at  the  famous  Queens 
Club  track  and  was  really  a  big  society  event. 


THE  OLYMPIC  OF  1920  249 

As  is  customary  in  the  English  meets,  only 
the  firsts  counted,  and  those  for  only  one 
point.  There  were  ten  events  on  the  pro- 
gram and  each  country  won  five,  so  there 
were  no  hard  feelings  at  the  end  of  the  day's 
sport.  A  great  crowd  attended  and,  as  is 
characteristic  of  the  English  people,  every 
winner  received  a  great  ovation.  It  certainly 
made  one  feel  good  just  to  be  at  that  meet, 
whether  he  won  or  not. 

After  this  meet  various  groups  were  formed 
and  some  went  to  Sweden,  some  to  Scotland 
to  participate  in  track  meets,  while  others 
went  to  visit  relatives  or  sight-seeing  or  to  be 
entertained  by  their  English  friends  as  only 
the  British  people  know  how  to  entertain. 
For  those  who  stayed  in  London,  there  were 
various  dinners,  theatre  parties,  and  the  like, 
which  were  furnished  by  the  Englishmen  in 
charge  of  athletics  in  London  and  thereabouts. 

After  about  three  weeks  of  London  and 
travelling  around,  the  last  of  the  visiting 
athletes  had  returned  to  these  shores  and  were 
back  in  college,  or  at  their  jobs. 

So  the  Olympic  Games  ended,  and  it  was 
an  experience  which  many  of  us  shall  never 
forget.  We  shall  always  be  able  to  look  back 
on  the  friends  we  made  from  all  over  the 
country,  who  were  our  comrades  on  the  team, 
and  the  friends  we  made  who  did  not  have  the 
good  fortune  to  have  been  born  in  this  count^3^ 


BASEBALL 


SCIENCE    VS.    SKILL   IN   BASEBALL 
by  irving  e.  sanboen 
Tricks  That  Are  Fair  and  Unfair 

Ever  since  baseball  began  to  be  governed  by 
rules  there  has  been  constant  warfare  among 
the  players,  or  active  participants  in  the  sport, 
and  its  rule-makers,  or  passive  guardians.  The 
playing  rules  of  to-day  are  studded  with  regu- 
lations and  clauses  designed  to  correct  abuses 
or  to  prohibit  tricks  which  were  unfair. 

No  sooner  is  a  new  rule  added  to  the  list  than 
the  players  begin  to  sit  up  nights  trying  to  de- 
vise ways  and  means  to  beat  it.  All  summer 
long  shrewd  brains  of  managers  and  their  as- 
sistants are  figuring  methods  to  gain  advan- 
tages over  an  opponent  without  transgressing 
the  letter  of  the  law.  All  winter  long  the  club 
owners  scheme  to  frame  new  rules  or  new 
wordings  of  old  ones  to  frustrate  attempts  at 
unfairness.  Therein  lies  one  element  of  the 
game's  continued  success.  The  brainy  players 
keep  baseball  progressing  toward  greater  per- 
fection, while  the  governing  board  of  rule- 
makers  prevents  fastening  on  the  sport  any 

253 


254        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

shrewd  trick  which  would  mar  it  in  the  eyes  of 
the  public,  all  the  while  permitting  the  science 
of  the  inside  game  to  develop  along  legitimate 
lines. 

Not  to  go  too  far  back  into  history,  the  rules 
used  to  forbid  a  substitute  taking  the  place  of 
a  man  in  the  game  except  in  case  of  accident. 
That  may  sound  odd  to  the  younger  generation, 
accustomed  to  see  managers  change  pitchers  at 
will  and  send  in  relays  of  substitute  batsmen. 
In  those  days  if  a  pitcher  was  batted  hard  his 
team  had  to  take  its  medicine,  but  as  few  teams 
were  well  supplied  with  pitchers  it  did  not 
matter  much.  Before  long,  as  pitchers  became 
more  plentiful,  the  plan  was  devised  of  having 
a  pitcher  feign  injury  when  a  change  was  de- 
sired, and  many  a  twirler  used  to  wrench  his 
ankle  so  severely  sliding  into  a  base  that  he  had 
to  be  carried  off  the  field.  But  once  out  of 
sight  of  the  umpire  the  cripple  (?)  would  start 
on  the  run  for  the  clubhouse.  After  a  few  of 
these  injured  pitchers  showed  up  in  the  box 
again  for  the  following  game  the  patrons  mis- 
trusted the  ruse  and  resented  it.  That  was  the 
cause  of  the  rule  permitting  a  manager  to  sub- 
stitute a  player  at  any  time.  No  sooner  was 
that  rule  made  than  bright  minds  tried  to  beat 
it,  and  thereby  hangs  a  story  which,  although 
often  told,  no  amount  of  repetition  can  spoil. 

''  Mike  "  Kelly,  one  of  the  famous  "  $10,000 
beauties  "  sold  by  Chicago  to  Boston,  was  the 


SCIENCE   vs.   SKILL   IN   BASEBALL    255 

hero  of  the  tale.  He  accepted  the  new  rule  about 
substitutes  literally.  One  day  when  Flint  was 
behind  the  bat  an  opposing  batsman  hit  a  foul 
fly  which  was  coming  down  near  the  Chicago 
bench.  Flint  could  not  get  near  it.  Kelly,  who 
was  captain  of  the  team,  was  sitting  on  the 
bench,  so  he  yelled  to  Flint:  ''  You  are  out  of 
the  game,  and  I  am  in  it,"  then  jumped  up  and 
caught  the  foul.  The  umpire  would  not  allow 
the  play,  the  game  was  protested  and  the  um- 
pire's decision  was  upheld. 

The  balk  rules  are  another  and  more  prolific 
cause  of  trouble  and  trickery.  Down  at  the 
rock-bottom  of  things  a  balk  is  any  act  of  the 
pitcher  which  deceives  the  baserunner  into 
thinking  the  ball  is  going  to  be  delivered  to  the 
plate  when  it  is  not.  In  actual  practice,  how- 
ever, it  has  been  found  that,  if  a  pitcher  is  not 
permitted  to  deceive  the  runner  to  some  ex- 
tent, it  is  almost  impossible  to  keep  a  fast  man 
from  stealing  bases.  If  the  rules  were  rigidly 
enforced  a  man  who  reached  first  base  would 
immediately  proceed  to  third  too  frequently  for 
good  sport. 

It  is  a  popular  misapprehension  that  all 
bases  are  stolen  off  the  catchers,  but  they  are 
powerless  to  prevent  a  fast  runner  stealing 
second  base  unless  the  pitchers  help  by  "  hold- 
ing up  "  the  runners.  The  difference  between 
a  successful  steal  and  being  thrown  out  at 
second  is  all  in  getting  the  lead.    Of  course,  the 


256        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

catcher  sometimes  makes  bad  throws  or  drops 
the  ball,  but  in  general  the  average  catcher  has 
better  than  an  even  chance  to  "ihrow  out  the 
average  runner  unless  the  pitcher  allows  him 
too  long  a  lead  off  first  base.  When  a  runner 
steals  third  it  almost  always  is  the  fault  of  the 
pitcher. 

It  is  to  prevent  stealing  that  the  pitcher 
throws  to  bases  to  drive  the  runner  back,  not 
so  much  with  the  idea  of  catching  a  runner 
napping  (as  occasionally  happens)  as  of  ma- 
king him  more  cautious.  For  the  same  purpose 
the  pitcher  practises  and  tries  to  perfect  a 
*'  motion,"  as  it  is  called.  By  this  is  really 
meant  a  balk,  because  its  purpose  is  to  deceive 
the  runner  and  keep  him  in  doubt  as  long  as 
possible  as  to  whether  the  ball  is  going  to  be 
delivered  to  the  plate  or  thrown  to  the  base. 
And  it  is  necessary  that  this  ''  motion  "  pass 
muster  with  the  umpires  by  observing  the  letter 
of  the  rules. 

Left-handed  pitchers  have  the  advantage  in 
this  respect,  because  they  can  watch  the  run- 
ner more  closely  while  facing  first  base,  and 
because  of  their  peculiar  delivery  compared  to 
that  of  the  right-hander.  But  an  old-time  right- 
hander, named  Vickery,  had  perfected  the  trick 
of  stepping  toward  the  plate  or  toward  first 
base  at  will  when  he  started  his  ''  motion,"  and 
by  this  means  he  had  the  runners  seriously 
worried.      After    several    years    of    constant 


SCIENCE   vs.   SKILL   IN   BASEBALL    257 

watching  one  of  his  opponents  discovered  that 
when  Vickery  intended  to  throw  to  first  base 
he  kept  his  heels  close  together  on  the  slab,  but 
when  he  intended  to  pitch  he  stood  with  his 
heels  apart.  After  the  knowledge  of  this  habit 
became  general  in  the  league  he  seldom  caught 
a  runner,  and  they  stole  many  bases  on  him. 

When  Frank  Smith  came  to  the  White  Sox 
from  Birmingham  he  had  everything  to  make 
a  winner  except  that  he  could  not  keep  tlie  run- 
ners from  taking  long  leads.  Base-stealing 
was  easy  for  his  opponents,  and  one  day,  after 
holding  a  team  to  a  few  hits  and  being  defeated 
by  baserunning,  he  blamed  his  catcher  for  los- 
ing the  game.  Owner  Comiskey  heard  of  this, 
summoned  the  pitcher  to  his  private  office  and 
asked  him  if  it  was  true.  Smith  admitted  it, 
whereupon  the  magnate  said: 

*'  I  have  already  given  your  catcher  a  call- 
down,  but  not  for  losing  the  game.  He  dis- 
obeyed my  orders.  I  told  him  the  next  time  he 
caught  when  you  were  pitching,  if  a  runner  on 
first  started  to  steal  second  he  must  throw  to 
third  to  head  him  off.  But  he  disobeyed  me 
and  kept  throwing  to  second  without  a  chance 
to  get  any  one  there." 

The  pitcher  sulked  for  a  while  but  spent  all 
the  next  winter  and  spring  learning  to  pitch 
without  tipping  the  runner  off  where  the  ball 
was  going,  and  when  the  next  championship 
season  began  he  caught  a  dozen  runners  nap- 


258        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

ping  before  they  would  believe  he  had  acquired 
a  ''  motion." 

Some  tricks  have  been  attempted  which  were 
so  manifestly  unfair  that  they  have  been  sup- 
pressed on  the  spot  without  resorting  to  special 
rules  to  forbid  them.  Not  all  of  these  were  as 
barefaced,  however,  as  a  scheme  which  the 
Bloomington  team  worked  some  years  ago  on 
its  old  grounds.  Left  field  was  short  and  sloped 
off  sharply  to  a  lower  level  in  which  was  located 
a  pond  which  was  out  of  sight  of  the  rest  of 
the  playing  field.  It  was  not  unusual  for  a  ball 
w^hich  was  hit  over  or  past  the  left  fielder  to  go 
into  the  water,  in  which  case  the  batter  made 
a  home  run.  Edward  Goeckel,  later  an  umpire 
in  the  Chicago  league,  was  arbitrating  a  series 
in  Bloomington  in  those  days,  and  noticed 
that  the  visiting  team  never  seemed  to  hit  any- 
thing into  that  pond,  but  every  time  the  ball 
went  over  the  slope  it  would  be  rescued  in  time 
to  hold  the  batter  on  second  or  third,  while  the 
home  team  hit  the  pond  several  times.  But  he 
attributed  that  to  the  luck  of  baseball.  In  the 
final  game  of  the  series,  near  its  end,  the  score 
was  tied  when  one  of  the  visiting  players  hit 
a  long,  high  fly  over  left  field.  The  fielder  ran 
down  out  of  sight  after  it,  and  as  the  ball  came 
down  it  landed  on  the  fly  in  the  pond  with  such 
force  that  the  splash  of  the  water  could  be  seen 
plainly  from  the  home  plate.  Before  the  run- 
ner reached  third  base,  however,  the  ball  came 


SCIENCE   vs.   SKILL   IN   BASEBALL     259 

back  up  over  the  hill,  and  the  shortstop  relayed 
it  to  the  plate  in  time  to  cut  off  the  run.  In 
surprise  Goeckel  took  the  ball  from  the  catcher 
and  found  it  was  absolutely  dry.  The  home 
team  had  a  cache  of  balls  hidden  down  there 
in  the  grass  where  the  fielder  could  find  them 
and  throw  in  a  substitute  every  time  a  visitor 
made  a  hit  into  the  water. 

Returning-  to  the  more  legitimate  schemes  of 
players  to  outwit  the  rule-makers  the  history  of 
the  ''  trapped  ball  "  or  "  infield  fly  "  rule  is 
interesting.  A  long  time  ago  it  was  discovered 
that,  if  there  were  runners  on  first  and  second 
bases  with  no  one  out,  or  only  one  out,  and  the 
batsman  hit  a  pop  fly  to  an  infielder,  that  in- 
fielder  had  the  baserunners  at  his  mercy.  He 
could  muff  the  fly,  forcing  both  runners  off 
their  bases,  and  make  a  double  play  on  them 
by  quick  work.  Or,  if  the  runners  expected  the 
trick  and  started  to  run,  the  infielder  could 
catch  the  fly,  thereby  retiring  the  batsman,  and 
then  double  up  one  of  the  runners  before  he 
could  get  back  to  his  base.  So  many  infielders 
became  proficient  in  this  trick  that  a  double 
play  was  practically  certain  every  time  an  in- 
field fly  was  hit  under  those  circumstances. 

To  prevent  this  the  club  owners  framed  a 
rule  that  the  batsman  was  out  on  an  infield  fly 
whenever  first  base  was  occupied  with  less 
than  two  out,  but  after  a  brief  trial  it  was 
found  that  no  double  play  could  be  made  on 


260        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

such  a  fly  if  there  was  a  runner  on  first  base 
only,  provided  the  batsman  ran  to  first  as  he 
should.  Consequently  the  rule  was  modified, 
making  it  necessary,  as  is  the  case  now,  to  have 
runners  on  both  first  and  second  bases  before 
the  batsman  was  automatically  out  on  an  infield 

fly. 

When  first  framed  this  rule  did  not  define  an 
infield  fly,  and  that  famous  pair  of  "  heavenly 
twins,"  as  they  were  called,  —  Hugh  Duffy, 
later  manager  of  the  White  Sox,  and  "  Tom  " 
McCarthy,  now  in  business  in  Boston, — evolved 
a  plan  to  beat  the  new  rule.  They  were  playing 
together  in  the  outfield  of  the  Boston  team 
which  won  so  many  National  league  champion- 
ships. Any  time  an  opposing  batsman  hit  an 
infield  fly  mth  less  than  two  out  and  runners  on 
first  and  second,  if  either  Duffy  or  McCarthy 
could  run  in  far  enough  to  get  under  the  fly  they 
would  do  so,  even  if  the  ball  came  down  near  the 
diamond.  Then  they  would  muff  it  and  double 
up  both  of  the  baserunners  on  the  claim  that  it 
was  not  an  infield  fly,  because  handled  by  an 
outfielder.  But  before  another  season  came 
around  the  rule-makers  got  busy  and  changed 
the  rule  so  as  to  define  an  infield  fly  as  one  that 
'*  can  be  handled  by  an  infielder,"  and  made 
the  umpire  the  judge.  This  prevented  Duffy 
and  McCarthy  from  coming  in  to  "  trap  "  flies 
near  the  diamond,  but  that  Boston  pair  used  to 
work  the  trick  occasionally  on  short  outfield 


SCIENCE  vs.  SKILL  IN  BASEBALL    261 

flies  which  could  not  "  be  handled  by  an  in- 
fielder,"  and  by  fast  work  they  could  pull  off 
double  plays  on  unwary  baserunners.  That 
play  can  be  made  to-day,  just  as  they  did  it, 
but  is  seldom  attempted. 

There  is  a  pretty  general  misapprehension 
among  patrons  concerning  some  of  the  rules, 
and  frequently  umpires  are  ' '  roasted  ' '  for  not 
allowing  tricks  which  are  forbidden  by  the 
rules,  while  other  plays  are  branded  as  tricks, 
although  they  are  perfectly  legitimate  accord- 
ing to  the  spirit  as  well  as  the  letter  of  the  law. 
Probably  a  great  majority  of  baseball  readers 
believe  the  famous  Merkle  play,  by  which  the 
Cubs  escaped  defeat  in  New  York,  getting  a 
drawn  game  instead,  and  then  won  the  pennant 
by  winning  the  play  off  of  that  draw,  was  a 
trick  play  worked  on  Merkle  by  John  Evers. 
It  was  nothing  more  or  less  than  the  applica- 
tion of  a  rule  which  is  seen  in  operation  in 
every  game,  sometimes  a  dozen  times  a  day. 
It  is  section  11  of  rule  56,  and  I  will  quote  the 
part  of  it  which  applies: 

"  If,  when  the  batsman  becomes  a  base- 
runner,  the  first  base,  or  the  first  and  second 
bases,  or  the  first,  second  and  third  bases  be 
occupied,  any  baserunner  so  occupying  a  base 
shall  cease  to  be  entitled  to  hold  it,  and  may  be 
put  out  at  the  next  base  in  the  same  manner  as 
in  running  to  first  base,  or  by  being  touched 
with  the  ball  in  the  hands  of  a  fielder  at  any 


262        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

time  before  any  baserunner  following  Mm  in 
the  batting  order  be  put  out." 

Probably  every  one  remembers  the  play 
which  decided  a  pennant.  In  the  last  half  of 
the  ninth  inning,  with  two  men  out,  McCormick 
was  on  third,  Merkle  on  first,  and  the  score  tied. 
Bridwell  made  a  safe  hit  over  second  base. 
McCormick  ran  home  with  the  winning  run  and 
Bridwell  touched  first  base,  but  Merkle  started 
for  the  clubhouse  back  of  right  field  as  soon  as 
he  saw  the  hit  go  safe,  forgetting  that  he  could 
be  forced  at  second  base  ^'  at  any  time  "  before 
Bridwell  was  put  out,  according  to  that  sec- 
tion 11. 

Evers  realized  Merkle 's  blunder  instantly 
and  called  for  the  ball.  Several  Giants  saw  the 
danger  and  tried  to  keep  Evers  from  getting 
the  ball  and  touching  second,  but  he  finally  suc- 
ceeded. That  made  the  third  out  a  force-out 
and  wiped  out  McCormick 's  run,  since  none  can 
score  on  a  play  in  which  the  third  out  in  an 
inning  is  forced.  That  left  the  game  tied  and 
it  was  so  declared  by  Umpire  O'Day  and  later 
by  the  league's  directors,  with  the  result  well 
remembered. 

If  any  one  still  fails  to  grasp  the  idea,  sup- 
pose that,  with  McCormick  on  third,  Merkle  on 
first,  and  two  out,  Evers  had  been  able  to  cut 
off  Bridwell's  hit  over  second  and  to  toss  the 
ball  to  Tinker  in  time  to  force  Merkle  out.  No 
one  familiar  with  baseball  would  expect  Mc- 


SCIENCE   vs.   SKILL   IN   BASEBALL    263 

Cormick's  run  to  count  on  that  play.  Suppose, 
again,  that  with  the  same  men  on  the  same 
bases  Bridwell  had  hit  an  easy  fly  to  center- 
field  but  that  the  fly  had  been  muffed.  That 
slip  would  have  let  McCormick  score  from 
third,  but  if  the  centerfielder  could  recover  the 
muffed  ball  and  throw  to  second  before  Merkle 
could  get  there  the  side  would  be  retired  on  a 
force-out  and  the  run  could  not  count. 

The  rule  which  applies  in  these  two  hypo- 
thetical cases  was  the  one  by  which  Evers 
saved  a  pennant  for  Chicago.  Three  inconspic- 
uous words  in  that  rule  decided  a  champion- 
ship. Evers  knew  the  rule  by  heart,  but  Mer- 
kle's  failure  to  grasp  the  significance  of  those 
three  words  —  "at  any  time  ' '  —  cost  the  New 
York  club,  his  fellow-players,  and  Merkle  him- 
self thousands  of  dollars. 


THE    IMPORTANCE    OF    BATTING 

The  future  of  baseball,  the  one  professional 
sport  in  which  all  Americans  can  take  pride, 
depends  in  great  measure  upon  the  boys  of  to- 
day. It  will  be  only  a  few  years  before  some 
of  them  will  be  the  star  players  of  the  major 
leagues.  The  world's  champions  of  a  no  distant 
future  are  now  being  hatched  in  baseball's  in- 
cubators, the  school  playgrounds,  the  village 
commons,  the  open  lots ;  in  fact  wherever  young 
America  gathers  to  lay  the  foundations  of  ster- 
ling manhood  in  clean,  healthful,  outdoor  sport. 

Present  indications  are  that  the  baseball  of 
the  next  generation  will  become  a  somewhat 
different  game  unless  the  attitude  of  the  boy  of 
to-day  and  the  trend  of  his  aspirations,  if  they 
lead  to  the  diamond,  are  changed.  It  seems  to 
be  the  desire  of  the  boy  and  the  young  man  to 
earn  laurels  and  nation-wide  fame  as  a  great 
pitcher  if  he  yearns  to  become  a  player  at  all. 
That  is  not  peculiar  to  the  boy  of  to-day,  how- 
ever. It  always  has  been  true  of  boys,  although 
not  to  as  great  an  extent  as  now. 

To  that  fact,  more  than  to  the  increased  cun- 
ning of  pitchers,  is  the  steady  decrease  in  bat- 
ting attributed  by  the  thinking  men  of  the  base- 

264 


THE   IMPORTANCE   OF   BATTING    265 

ball  world.  Nine  out  of  every  ten  youngsters, 
who  start  playing  ball  with  each  other,  want 
to  shine  as  pitchers.  The  day  on  which  he 
thinks  he  has  mastered  the  art  of  curving  a 
ball  is  one  of  the  happiest  in  the  average  ath- 
letic boy's  life;  the  day  when  he  can  prove  it 
to  his  playmates  or  elders  is  one  of  the  proud- 
est. Nine  out  of  every  ten  want  to  become 
Christy  Mathewsons  or  Ed  Walshs.  The  tenth 
boy  aspires  to  be  a  Ty  Cobb  or  a  Lajoie. 

The  result  has  been  a  steadily  increasing 
crop  of  '*  near  "  Mathewsons  and  "  near  " 
Walshs,  and  a  decreased  supply  of  batsmen 
any^^here  nearly  in  the  same  class  with  Lajoie 
or  Wagner.  This  is  not  altogether  the  fault  of 
the  boys  of  to-day.  Almost  as  soon  as  they 
begin  to  read  baseball  they  read  praises  of  this 
or  that  great  pitcher  in  nearly  every  paper. 
Before  they  can  read  they  hear  about  pitchers 
and  unusual  pitching  feats.  The  newspapers 
exalt  the  pitching  end  of  the  game.  The  pitcher 
is  hailed  as  victor  and  often  is  blamed  for  de- 
feat. In  the  official  records  of  baseball  he  is 
given  credit  for  so  many  games  ^'  won  "  dur- 
ing a  season  and  is  charged  with  so  many  games 
**  lost."  Start  an  argument  over  the  best 
pitcher  in  the  world  and  it  will  wind  up  with 
the  statement  that ''  so  and  so  must  be  because 
he  Avon  the  most  games,"  or  the  highest  per- 
centage of  games  in  a  season. 

No  more  false  standard  of  comparison  could 


266        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

be  devised.  Mathewson  might  have  pitched  for 
years  with  the  present  Boston  National  League 
team  without  achieving  one-third  the  reputation 
he  now  enjoys.  He  would  have  been  just  as 
good  a  pitcher,  although  he  would  have  won 
less  than  half  as  many  games  in  a  year  and 
never  would  have  been  the  hero  of  a  world's 
series.  The  same  is  true  of  Walsh.  Only  in 
comparatively  limited  fields  would  either  have 
achieved  greatness  without  teams  and  mana- 
gers to  win  games  for  them.  A  pitcher  might 
shut  out  an  opposing  team  for  forty-six  innings 
yet  be  denied  victory  unless  his  own  team 
scored  a  run.  And  to  make  runs,  by  which  vic- 
tories are  won,  requires  batsmen.  There  are 
no  records  kept  of  the  number  of  games  won  in 
a  season  by  Lajoie's  bat  or  by  Ty  Cobb's. 
These  stars,  and  men  like  them,  have  won  many 
a  game  for  which  the  pitcher  has  been  given 
credit  by  the  spectators  and  in  the  permanent 
records.  At  the  end  of  the  season  all  the  bats- 
man has  to  show  for  the  games  he  has  won  is 
his  batting  average.  If  that  is  not  the  best  or 
one  of  the  best  in  the  league  it  creates  no  loud 
talk  outside  of  a  limited  field. 

The  boy  is  not  to  blame,  therefore,  if  when 
he  gets  his  first  chance  at  a  baseball  he  tries 
to  learn  to  pitch  first  of  all.  But  it  is  all  wrong 
in  its  results.  A  young  player  can  be  taught 
almost  any  part  of  baseball  except  batting.  He 
who  specializes  on  pitching  at  the  expense  of 


THE   IMPORTANCE   OF   BATTING    267 

batting  must  become  a  good  pitcher  if  he  plays 
in  the  big  leagues.  Pitchers  who  have  failed 
as  such  have  made  names  in  the  game  because 
they  could  bat.  Mature  players  have  been 
taught  and  developed  in  other  positions  than 
those  to  which  they  first  devoted  their  atten- 
tion. The  great  Walsh  was  a  ''  made  "  pitcher 
to  the  extent  that  he  had  to  be  made  over  again, 
after  winning  success  in  a  minor  league,  before 
he  could  become  a  major  luminary.  Scores  of 
pitchers  have  been  turned  into  stars  of  the  in- 
field or  outfield. 

It  would  seem  from  this  that  it  ought  to  be 
possible  to  teach  a  ball  player  how  to  bat  after 
he  has  reached  the  majors,  but  no  one  has  been 
able  to  do  that.  Batting  is  something  that  must 
be  born  in  a  player,  it  is  claimed.  That  is  not 
altogether  true,  but  it  is  an  instinct  that  can- 
not be  taught  by  any  tutor  or  learned  from  any 
books.  It  can  be  acquired  by  a  great  many 
more  young  players  than  now  have  it  if  they 
will  begin  early  enough.  The  boy  who  will  buy 
himself  a  bat  and  proceed  to  hunt  up  all  the 
other  boys  of  his  acquaintance,  who  want  to  be 
pitchers,  and  let  them  pitch  to  him  to  their 
hearts'  content  will  instill  into  himself  a  lot  of 
batting  instinct,  even  if  none  of  it  is  bom  in 
him.  By  that  early  and  steady  practice  he  will 
train  his  young  eyes  and  brain  to  the  marks- 
manship which  is  absolutely  necessary  to  the 
good  batsman.    While  instincts  still  are  being 


268        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

formed  he  will  learn  in  this  way  to  judge  the 
speed  of  every  ball  pitched  to  him  by  his  yomig 
friends  and  to  guess  from  their  actions  or  the 
appearance  of  the  ball  itself  what  sort  of  things 
the  ball  is  going  to  do  before  or  when  it  gets 
to  him.  And  he  will  form  the  habit  of  hitting 
naturally  but  in  different  ways  at  different 
speeds  and  different  curves.  This  is  the  great 
factor  in  batting.  When  a  player  reaches  the 
major  leagues  his  habits  have  become  too  firmly 
fixed  to  be  changed  without  making  him  start 
all  over  again  and  spend  years  practising  what 
he  might  have  learned  as  a  boy.  Besides,  he 
has  not  the  time  to  spare  because  the  active 
life  of  a  ball  player  is  limited. 

The  development  of  the  game  on  the  town 
lots  is  all  against  the  batsman.  When  two 
proud  possessors  of  a  pair  of  gloves  and  a  base- 
ball between  them  meet  in  the  backyard  or  on 
an  open  lot,  they  immediately  begin  practising 
pitching  to  each  other.  When  half  a  dozen  or 
more  get  together  they  start  a  "  game,"  one 
or  two  of  them  being  batters  while  the  rest 
spread  over  the  lot  trjdng  to  get  them  out. 
When  there  are  enough  boys  on  hand  they 
"  choose  up  sides  "  and  start  a  real  game.  In 
these  ways  they  do  not  get  much  practice  in 
batting.  The  greater  part  of  the  time  is  spent 
in  waiting  in  the  field  or  ''  on  the  bench  "  for 
their  turns  to  go  to  bat.  When  they  do  come 
they  usually  try  to  hit  the  ball  as  far  as  possi- 


THE   IMPORTANCE   OF   BATTING    269 

ble,  out  of  every  one's  reach,  so  as  to  stay 
"  in  "  as  long  as  possible.  That  in  itself  is  one 
of  the  worst  habits  a  boy  who  wants  to  be  a 
good  ball  player  can  form.  If  he  goes  into  a 
strong  league  with  that  habit  of  hitting  as  hard 
as  he  can  at  the  ball,  and  unable  to  hit  any 
other  way,  he  will  be  the  easiest  kind  of  a  mark 
for  a  good  pitcher  with  a  head.  He  may  be  a 
wonder  as  a  boy  or  in  the  smaller  leagues, 
where  experienced  pitchers  are  not  encoun- 
tered every  day.  But  when  he  comes  to  face 
them  in  every  game  his  average  will  shrink 
astonishingly.  Unless  he  gives  remarkable 
promise  in  other  ways  the  manager  will  not 
even  try  to  teach  him  a  different  ''  form  "  in 
batting  because  of  the  time  required  and  the 
doubtfulness  of  the  result. 

The  lad  who  wants  to  make  his  name  in  base- 
ball stands  the  best  chance  of  success  if  he  will 
begin  at  once  to  practise  batting.  Instead  of 
dividing  their  time  between  pitching  and  catch- 
ing, when  two  boys  get  together,  they  can  make 
more  of  themselves  by  dividing  it  between  bat- 
ting and  pitching  to  each  other.  And  if  one  of 
them  is  ambitious  to  pitch  all  the  time,  while 
the  other  boy  bats,  watch  the  boy  who  keeps  the 
bat  all  the  time.  He  will  go  farther  and  higher 
and  stay  longer  than  the  one  who  insists  on 
pitching.  This  presupposes,  of  course,  that 
they  are  fairly  matched  in  athletic  ability. 

Instead  of  trying  to  hit  the  ball  hard,  which 


270        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

is  likely  to  make  trouble  for  the  boys  if  there 
are  people  or  windows  near  by,  besides  wasting 
a  lot  of  time  chasing  the  ball,  let  the  embryonic 
batsman  practise  merely  meeting  the  ball  with 
his  bat  so  as  to  send  it  back  to  the  pitcher.  Let 
him  try  to  hit  every  ball  pitched  to  him  in  that 
way.  He  won't  be  able  to  hit  all  of  them  at 
first  and  they  won't  all  go  back  to  the  pitcher, 
but  by  standing  up  near  the  wall  of  a  building 
or  against  a  fence  it  won't  delay  matters  much 
if  he  does  not  hit  all  of  them.  The  "  back- 
stop "  will  act  as  catcher.  Before  long  it  will 
surprise  him,  if  he  is  an  observing  lad,  how 
many  more  pitched  balls  he  can  hit  right  back 
to  the  pitcher  than  when  he  started  practising. 
In  that  way  the  boy  wall  learn  a  lot  about 
placing  hits,  since  his  object  will  be  to  hit  them 
to  the  other  boy,  no  matter  how  they  come  to 
him.  Later  on  he  will  be  better  able  to  hit 
them  "  where  they  ain't,"  as  the  players  say. 
He  will  learn  to  hit  at  the  ball  and  meet  it  in 
the  same  way  at  almost  any  angle  and  from  any 
position.  He  will  become  versatile  and  that 
will  give  him  greater  resource  and  confidence 
at  bat  if  he  ever  becomes  a  professional  or  col- 
lege player.  The  easiest  thing  in  the  world  is 
to  hit  a  ball  hard,  provided  one  can  meet  it 
squarely  with  the  bat.  No  great  strength  is 
required.  To  meet  it  squarely  is  the  real  secret 
of  batting  and  the  boy  who  learns  only  to  take 
a  full,  hard  swing  at  the  ball  will  not  hit  it 


THE   IMPORTANCE   OF   BATTING    271 

squarely  very  often  when  lie  faces  a  versatile 
pitcher. 

As  for  the  glory  and  the  fame  the  advantages 
are  with  the  star  batsman  in  the  long  run.  The 
player  who  bats  above  ''  three  hundred  "  can 
shine  on  a  tail-end  team  almost  as  well  as  if  sur- 
rounded by  champions.  There  may  be  less  am- 
bition and  incentive,  but  it  -all  depends  upon 
himself.  He  can  command  nearly  as  large  a 
salary  on  a  second-division  team  as  on  a  win- 
ner. But  the  pitcher,  if  it  is  his  misfortune  to 
become  part  of  a  tail-end  team,  will  have  his 
real  worth  recognized  only  by  those  who  make 
a  study  of  baseball  and  often  his  salary  will  be 
much  less  than  that  of  a  pitcher  who  has  less 
ability  but  better  luck  in  having  his  lot  cast 
with  a  strong  team. 

The  rise  of  the  good  batsman  will  be  much 
faster  than  that  of  the  good  pitcher,  because 
there  are  now  so  few  who  bat  well  and  so  many 
who  look  like  promising  pitchers.  Once  at  the 
top  the  player  who  can  bat  steadily  at  a  three 
hundred,  or  even  a  two  hundred  and  seventy- 
five  gait,  will  not  only  earn  more  money  than 
the  pitcher  of  average  ability,  but  will  earn  it 
longer.  A  player  can  retain  his  batting  * '  eye  ' ' 
much  longer  as  a  rule  than  he  can  keep  his 
pitching  "  arm  "  in  winning  shape.  And  if 
lasting  fame  is  the  end  sought,  is  it  not  true 
that  the  great  batsmen  of  the  past  generation 
are  more  widely  known  to-day  than  are  the 


272        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

great  masters  of  the  pitching  art  of  the  same 
period?  Anson  and  Goldsmith  and  McCormick 
were  contemporaries,  but  you  hear  Anson's 
name  mentioned  a  dozen  times  for  every  time 
you  hear  either  of  those  pitchers  mentioned. 
None  of  Detroit's  "  Big  Four  "  —  Brouthers, 
Rowe,  Richardson,  and  White  —  was  a  pitcher. 
They  won  their  title  with  their  bats.  The  ex- 
amples could  be  multiplied  indefinitely.  From 
past  experience  it  is  probable,  therefore,  that 
Lajoie  and  "Wagner  will  be  known  to  the  next 
generation  of  fans  much  more  widely  than  will 
Mathewson  or  any  other  pitcher  of  to-day,  ex- 
cept possibly  the  inimitable  '*  Cy  "  Young,  who 
broke  all  records  by  his  splendid  and  extended 
pitching  career. 

''  Hans  "  Wagner  owes  his  fame  to  the  fact 
that  he  was  a  batsman  and  could  not  help  it.  All 
his  boyhood  ambitions  were  to  become  a  pitcher. 
He  began  trying  to  pitch  for  independent  teams 
in  Pennsylvania.  His  brother,  Al  Wagner,  ad- 
vanced faster  and  made  an  earlier  name  in  the 
game.  One  year  the  Steubenville  team  was 
sadly  in  need  of  players  and  its  manager  asked 
AI  Wagner  if  he  knew  of  any  young  players 
who  were  not  signed.  ''  Why  don't  jon  send 
for  my  brother  Hans?  He  thinks  he  can 
pitch,"  was  the  answer. 

Hans  was  sent  for  and,  so  the  story  goes, 
rode  all  the  way  on  a  freight  train  to  join  the 
team.     On  his  arrival  there  were  no  baseball 


THE   IMPORTANCE  OF  BATTING    273 

shoes  in  the  town  large  enough  for  Hans.  That 
did  not  deter  him  and  he  tried  pitching  in  his 
ordinary  shoes.  They  were  too  slippery,  so  he 
finished  the  game  in  his  stocking  feet.  Hans 
was  not  a  success  as  a  pitcher,  and  his  awk- 
wardness was  held  against  him,  but  he  could 
hit  the  ball  **  on  the  nose."  That  fact  kept  him 
in  the  game  and  he  has  since  become  famous 
both  in  the  outfield  and  on  the  infield  because 
he  kept  right  on  hitting.  It  was  soon  discov- 
ered that  the  awkwardness,  which  still  is  a 
feature  of  his  playing,  did  not  interfere  in  the 
least  with  its  brilliance.  But  without  that  in- 
stinct which  enabled  him  to  bat,  the  baseball 
world  probably  never  would  have  known  Hans 
Wagner.  It  was  not  long  before  he  made  his 
way  into  the  National  League  with  the  Louis- 
ville team  and  remained  there  from  1897  until 
that  team  was  consolidated  with  Pittsburgh  in 
1900. 

Napoleon  Lajoie  was  one  of  the  few  young- 
sters whose  first  ambition  was  to  become  a 
batsman.  He  started  in  professional  baseball 
as  a  first  baseman  and  never  hoped  to  star  as 
a  pitcher.  He  was  playing  first  base  with  a 
New  England  league  team  when  the  Philadel- 
phia National  league  club  found  him  in  1896. 
Lajoie  always  has  been  a  great  fielder  and 
wonderfully  graceful  in  his  work,  but  it  is  his 
batting  record  that  has  made  a  hero  of  him, 
not  his  fine  fielding. 


274        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Beginning  their  major  league  careers  only  a 
year  apart,  these  two  men  have  made  great 
records  and  earned  permanent  names  for  them- 
selves. Wagner's  batting  average  has  not  yet 
fallen  below  three  hundred,  according  to  the 
official  record.  Lajoie  has  failed  to  bat  over 
three  hundred  in  only  two  years.  In  both  of 
them  he  was  manager  of  the  Cleveland  team 
and  the  fact  that  he  came  back  to  his  old  form 
on  surrendering  the  leadership  proves  that  the 
worries  of  management  caused  his  drop  in  bat- 
ting. 

Edward  Walsh,  the  great  pitcher  of  Chi- 
cago's White  Sox,  owed  his  success  to  the  spit- 
ball  which  he  acquired  after  joining  that  team. 
When  Owner  Comiskey  obtained  Walsh  from 
the  Newark  club  of  the  Eastern  league  he  pos- 
sessed terrific  speed  and  had  made  his  reputa- 
tion with  that.  He  was  taken  to  Marlin,  Tex., 
in  the  spring  of  1904,  and  at  first,  when  he 
warmed  up,  it  was  necessary  to  reinforce  the 
backstop.  The  first  game  in  which  he  pitched 
was  for  the  substitutes  against  the  regular 
team  and  for  five  or  six  innings  the  veteran 
Sox  could  not  hit  him  at  all.  About  the  seventh 
inning  they  began  to  gauge  that  speed  accu- 
rately and  in  a  few  minutes  the  fences  behind 
the  outfield  needed  reinforcement.  Those  vet- 
erans hit  so  hard  it  seemed  as  if  they  never 
would  stop.  The  same  thing  happened  nearly 
every  time  Walsh  pitched. 


THE   IMPORTANCE  OF  BATTING    275 

Manager  Callahan  and  the  other  pitchers 
tried  to  teach  Walsh  to  throw  a  slow  ball  with 
the  same  motions  as  he  used  in  pitching  a  fast 
one,  but  he  did  not  progress  well.  That  was  the 
year  in  which  Elmer  Stricklett  came  to  the 
White  Sox  from  California  and  brought  along 
with  him  the  spitball.  Walsh  watched  Strick- 
lett and,  after  being  shown  how  to  throw  the 
ball,  said  he  believed  he  could  do  it.  The  man- 
ager set  him  at  work  learning  it,  feeling  cer- 
tain that,  with  his  great  speed,  Walsh  would  be 
almost  unbeatable  if  he  acquired  the  spitball. 
Fielder  Jones,  who  succeeded  Callahan  as  man- 
ager early  in  that  season,  was  of  the  same  opin- 
ion and,  although  it  required  two  years  for 
Walsh  to  master  that  delivery,  Jones  had  faith 
in  him  and  advised  0\vner  Comiskey  to  keep 
him.  At  the  end  of  those  two  years  came  the 
season  of  1906  and  within  a  month  Walsh  was 
famous.  When  the  season  ended  he  had  been 
the  big  factor  in  winning  an  American  league 
pennant  and  a  world's  championship.  But  he 
had  to  be  made  over  as  a  pitcher  and,  without 
the  insight  and  patience  of  his  employers  and 
his  own  great  perseverance,  few  ever  would 
have  heard  of  Ed  Walsh. 

Would-be  pitchers  who  have  shown  in  other 
departments  of  the  game  can  be  named  by  the 
dozen,  if  necessary.  *'  Bobby  *'  Wallace  of  the 
St.  Louis  Browns  aspired  to  pitch  and  for  a 
time  was  successful,  but  he  has  been  kept  in  the 


276        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

game  by  his  batting  combined  with  his  ability 
as  an  infielder.  If  he  had  brought  only  his 
pitching  arm  into  the  major  leagues  he  would 
not  have  been  promoted  to  the  position  of 
leader  which  was  given  him  later.  Frank 
Isbell,  a  former  world's  champion,  tried  to 
pitch  for  Chicago  in  the  National  League  under 
*'  Cap  "  Anson.  Twice  Isbell  was  saved  from 
oblivion  by  his  batting.  When  Anson  found  he 
was  not  a  big  league  pitcher  he  tried  to  make 
an  infielder  out  of  the  Minnesotan.  In  the  first 
game  Isbell  played  at  short  this  situation  came 
up:  There  was  a  runner  on  third,  no  one  out 
and  the  score  tied.  The  ball  was  hit  sharply  to 
Isbell,  who  threw  it  with  all  his  might  to  the 
grandstand  half  way  between  first  base  and 
home.  When  the  inning  ended  Anson  de- 
manded to  know  why  in  the  name  of  everything 
Isbell  had  not  thrown  the  ball  home  instead  of 
playing  for  the  man  going  to  first. 

*'  I  tried  to  and  never  took  my  eyes  off  the 
catcher  in  throwing  the  ball,"  replied  Isbell. 

**  If  I  had  known  you  were  cross-eyed  you 
never  would  have  had  the  chance  to  toss  off  this 
game,"  growled  Anson,  and  sent  Isbell  back  to 
the  minors.  He  went  to  St.  Paul,  where  Com- 
iskey  kept  him  playing  until  he  learned  how  to 
throw  more  nearly  where  he  aimed.  But  with- 
out his  ability  to  hit  the  ball,  Isbell  would  not 
to-day  be  owner  of  a  good  baseball  team  of  his 
own. 


THE   IMPORTANCE   OF   BATTING     277 

Charles  A.  Comiskey  himself,  one  of  the  most 
prominent  figures  in  baseball  to-day,  would 
not  have  attained  the  success  which  has 
crowned  his  career  if  he  had  stuck  to  pitching. 
In  his  case  it  was  brains  rather  than  batting 
that  kept  him  in  the  game,  but  if  he  had  been 
able  to  bat  no  better  than  the  average  pitcher 
his  brains  would  have  had  to  find  some  other 
employment.  He  turned  his  attention  to  first 
base  and  it  is  a  question  whether  he  made  the 
greater  reputation  as  a  first  baseman  or  as  a 
manager  of  the  only  team  that  has  succeeded 
in  winning  four  consecutive  championships. 

The  career  of  the  great  pitcher  looks  the 
more  tempting,  but  that  of  the  mighty  batsman 
is  the  more  substantial  and  permanent  in  its 
rewards. 


AlVIATEUR    VERSUS   PROFESSIONAL 

Perhaps  you  have  seen  some  standard  drama 
produced  on  the  stage  by  a  well  balanced  com- 
pany of  actors  and  afterward,  a  month,  a  year, 
or  a  decade  later,  have  watched  a  cast  com- 
posed of  amateurs  perform  the  same  parts, 
mayhap  on  the  very  same  stage.  If  so,  have 
you  ever  tried  to  define  or  convert  into  specific 
terms  your  ideas  of  the  difference  between  the 
two  performances,  and  the  reasons  therefor? 
Such  an  effort  would  be  much  like  the  writer's 
experience  on  the  many  occasions  when  he  has 
been  asked  to  point  out  wherein  lies  the  secret 
of  the  wide  difference  between  professional  and 
amateur  baseball  games. 

That  there  is  a  difference  and  a  vast  one 
between  the  two  kinds  of  theatrical  perform- 
ance is  admitted.  It  can  be  seen  and  appreci- 
ated by  any  one  at  all  conversant  ^\"ith  dramatic 
work.  The  same  is  true  in  baseball  in  the  case 
of  the  average  patron  of  the  national  pastime. 
The  difficulty  is  to  reduce  it  to  concrete  form, 
and  that  doubtless  is  because  the  difference  is 
abstract. 

There  is  a  sureness  of  touch  and  certainty  of 
effect  in  the  work  of  the  professional  actor  that 

278 


AMATEUR   vs.   PROFESSIONAL      279 

is  lacking  in  the  efforts  of  the  amateur.  The 
former  probably  has  played  many  similar  parts 
and  faced  similar  situations  before.  He  may 
have  played  the  same  role  many  times.  The 
amateur  is  perhaps  making  his  first  appearance 
of  importance.  He  is  uncertain  of  himself  and 
of  the  effect  he  is  trying  to  produce.  There  is  a 
parallel  in  the  spectacle  of  a  veteran  outfielder 
chasing  back  to  capture  a  long,  difficult  fly  com- 
pared to  the  way  a  schoolboy  or  college  player 
performs  the  same  feat.  The  veteran  senses 
instinctively  from  the  sound  of  bat  against  ball 
the  general  direction  of  the  fly.  Often  the 
knowledge  whether  or  not  the  pitcher  was  de- 
livering a  curve  or  a  straight  ball  helps  him. 
He  runs  back  confidently,  sometimes  without 
even  taking  a  second  look  over  his  shoulder, 
until  he  wheels  and  stops  within  a  step  or  two 
of  where  the  ball  comes  down.  The  amateur 
on  the  same  play  loses  a  fraction  of  a  second 
before  he  gauges  the  length  or  direction  of  the 
fly.  He  tries  to  keep  his  eyes  on  the  ball  as  he 
runs  back.  He  is  plainly  a  bit  at  sea;  slows 
up,  then  puts  on  a  new  burst  of  speed  and  prob- 
ably barely  reaches  the  ball  in  time  to  make  a 
spectacular  catch  for  which  he  is  duly  ap- 
plauded. This  is  intended  only  as  a  type  of 
course.  There  are  amateurs  whose  work  is 
more  finished  than  that  of  many  professionals. 
We  are  dealing  with  generalities. 

Coming  nearer  to  the  grandstand  for  illus- 


280        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

tration,  a  play  arises  with  one  or  more  runners 
on  bases.  The  ball  is  hit  to  an  infielder  and 
there  is  a  choice  of  plays  to  be  made  by  him  if 
there  are  less  than  two  men  out.  The  profes- 
sional, and  by  that  term  is  meant  the  profes- 
sional of  class,  wastes  no  valuable  time  in  ma- 
king the  choice.  It  is  done  as  if  by  instinct. 
The  amateur  often  hesitates  and  loses  an  op- 
portunity simply  by  looking  around  him  after 
getting  the  ball.  The  difference  lies  in  the  fact 
that  the  veteran  thinks  out  in  advance  just 
what  he  will  do  if  the  ball  is  hit  to  him  in  a 
given  situation.  Before  it  comes  to  him  he  has 
decided  that  he  can  make  one  play  if  the  ball 
is  hit  fast  enough,  but  must  make  another  play 
if  it  is  hit  slowly.  The  speed  of  the  different 
baserunners,  a  known  quantity  to  him,  enters 
into  the  problem.  The  youngster  perhaps  is 
too  nervous  to  do  all  this  planning  in  advance, 
so  he  must  think  what  to  do  after  he  has  the 
ball,  making  up  his  mind  by  the  way  things  look 
then,  instead  of  before  the  ball  was  hit. 

As  in  the  case  of  the  play  actor,  experience 
and  practice  explain  much  of  the  difference,  but 
there  is  a  pronounced  gap  which  is  indefinable. 

Perhaps  the  secret  is  to  be  found  in  the  realm 
of  psychology.  Perhaps  that  is  too  dignified  a 
way  to  look  at  it.  But  it  is  certain  that  the 
mental  attitude  of  the  player  has  much  to  do 
with  it.  Reverting  to  the  stage,  the  profes- 
sional actor,  equipped  with  a  wide  experience. 


AMATEUR  vs.  PROFESSIONAL      281 

is  thrown  a  great  deal  upon  his  own  resources. 
Often  lie  has  to  create  a  part  with  nothing  but 
the  manuscript  and  the  stage  directions  to 
guide  him.  The  amateur,  on  the  other  hand, 
usually  imitates  either  the  work  of  some  skilled 
actor  whom  he  has  seen  in  the  part,  or  follows 
blindly  the  directions  of  the  elocutionist  or 
dramatic  coach  employed  to  drill  the  amateur 
players  in  that  particular  bit  of  work. 

So  the  ball  player  who  reaches  the  higher 
leagues  is  expected  to  do  much  of  his  own 
thinking.  He  is  expected  to  solve  new  prob- 
lems and  meet  new  emergencies  as  they  arise. 
He  is  taught  to  be  self-reliant.  The  school  or 
college  player,  possessing  in  many  cases  as 
much  natural  skill  and  talent  as  the  profes- 
sional, is  more  inclined  to  imitate  some  great 
player  whom  he  has  watched.  If  not  that  he 
feels  bound  to  follow  the  instructions  of  some 
professional  coach  paid  to  teach  him  and  his 
teammates  how  to  play  baseball.  The  profes- 
sional ball  player  of  brains  usually  knows  what 
to  do  without  being  told.  The  amateur  has  to 
remember  what  he  is  told  to  do.  His  is  the 
more  trying  and  difficult  task  oftentimes. 

In  baseball  there  are  so  many  variations  of 
the  same  play  and  one  small  variation  may 
make  so  great  a  difference  that  it  is  next  to 
impossible  for  a  'varsity  captain  or  coach  to 
give  instructions  that  will  fit  all  situations 
alike,  or  to  lay  out  a  plan  of  attack  or  defense 


282        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

that  can  be  followed  blindly.  Individuality  of 
players  cuts  almost  as  much  figure  as  shifting 
situations.  What  one  player  can  do  success- 
fully another  may  fail  dismally  to  perform 
under  exactly  the  same  conditions.  What  one 
player  can  accomplish  in  a  given  situation  in 
one  inning  may  be  impossible  or  inadvisable  for 
him  to  do  in  the  same  situation  involving  dif- 
ferent players  or  different  conditions. 

**  Hal  "  Chase,  ex-manager  of  the  New  York 
American  league  team,  has  been  the  cause  of  a 
lot  of  misdirected  etfort  among  first  basemen. 
This  acknowledged  star  brought  a  style  dis- 
tinctly his  own  from  the  Pacific  Coast.  Because 
of  the  brilliant  reputation  he  earned  he  has  had 
many  imitators  both  professional  and  amateur. 
He  has  been  the  ideal  toward  which  ambitious 
young  first  basemen  aspired.  But  there  are 
not  many  men  who  can  play  first  base  the  way 
Chase  plays  it.  They  may  be  equally  good  first 
basemen  and  just  as  strong  factors  in  the  de- 
fensive tactics  of  their  teams,  if  they  play  the 
base  according  to  their  o^\ti  lights.  They  may 
weaken  the  defense  if  they  try  to  follow  Chase. 

One  play  will  illustrate  the  point.  With  an 
opposing  runner  on  first  and  nobody  out,  or 
^\^.th  runners  on  first  and  second  and  none  out, 
if  the  game  is  close,  the  natural  play  expected 
from  the  batsman  is  a  sacrifice  hit.  Chase 
meets  this  situation  by  leaving  his  base  before 
the  pitcher  starts  to  deliver  the  ball,  and  run- 


AMATEUR   vs.   PROFESSIONAL      283 

ning  in  to  intercept  any  bunt  toward  first  base. 
By  doing  that  he  cuts  down  the  chances  of  a 
successful  sacrifice  because  he  gains  enough  of 
a  start  to  enable  him  to  field  the  bunt  to  second 
or  third,  as  the  case  may  be,  in  time  to  force  out 
any  except  the  fleetest  runner.  That  is  an  ex- 
tremely desirable  thing  to  do  and  Chase  makes 
the  play  equally  well  to  second  or  third  base. 

I  have  seen  other  professional  and  amateur 
first  basemen  try  that  play  repeatedly  and  fail. 
For  a  time  it  was  a  set-piece  in  the  college 
game,  to  be  attempted  every  time  the  situation 
arose.  The  first  baseman  was  expected  to  do 
what  Chase  did.  No  allowance  was  made  for 
physical  differences.  Chase  being  a  left- 
handed  thrower  gets  a  ground  ball  in  position 
to  fire  it  either  to  second  or  third  base  a  frac- 
tion of  a  second  quicker  than  a  right-handed 
thrower  can  make  the  same  play.  He  can  make 
the  throw  to  second  base  two  fractions  of  a 
second  quicker  than  a  right-handed  man  can. 
That  slight  interval  of  time  is  all  the  difference 
between  success  and  failure  in  making  the  play. 
With  a  runner  on  first  base  only  and  nobody 
out  the  first  baseman,  if  he  runs  in  before  the 
pitch,  gives  the  baserunner  that  much  more 
start  toward  second,  because  the  runner  can 
always  play  a  little  farther  away  from  the  bag 
than  the  baseman  and  get  back  safely.  If  the 
baseman  gets  twelve  feet  nearer  the  plate  be- 
fore the  batsman  bunts,  the  wary  baserunner 


284        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

will  be  twelve  feet  nearer  second  base  than  he 
would  be  if  the  first  baseman  remained  on  or 
close  to  the  bag  until  the  ball  was  hit.  Because 
Chase  is  left-handed  and  does  not  have  to  turn 
to  make  a  throw  to  second,  he  can  give  the  aver- 
age runner  that  additional  twelve  or  fifteen  feet 
start  and  throw  him  out  at  second. 

Every  first  baseman  produced  on  the  Pacific 
Coast  in  recent  years  has  imitated  Chase  to 
some  extent.  Two  illustrations  of  failures  are 
Arnold  Gandil,  who  was  given  a  tryout  by  the 
Chicago  White  Sox,  and  Joseph  Nealon,who  was 
with  the  Pittsburgh  Pirates.  Comiskey  tried 
to  preach  reason  to  Gandil  and  break  him  of  the 
habit  of  tearing  in  after  bunts  and  giving  the 
baserunner  a  long  lead,  but  after  a  few  months 
gave  it  up  and  released  the  Californian  to  Mon- 
treal in  the  Eastern  league.  It  is  only  fair 
to  add  that  he  ''  came  back  "  and  filled  the 
position  satisfactorily  for  the  Washington 
Nationals. 

When  a  hit  is  made  to  the  outfield,  if  there 
are  men  on  bases,  there  is  another  marked  dif- 
ference between  the  college  and  the  profes- 
sional way  of  playing.  The  collegian  seems  to 
be  possessed  of  an  irresistible  temptation  to 
throw  out  every  runner  who  tries  to  score  from 
second  base  on  a  single,  no  matter  what  the 
circumstances,  the  size  of  the  score,  or  the 
chances  of  his  success  may  be. 

The  professional  outfielder  will  seldom  waste 


AMATEUR   vs.   PROFESSIONAL      285 

a  throw  to  the  plate  to  stop  a  run,  either  on  a 
hit  or  a  sacrifice  fly,  unless  there  is  an  even 
chance  to  beat  the  runner  home,  and  sometimes 
not  then.  If  his  team  has  a  safe  lead  and  the 
game  is  past  the  middle,  it  is  the  policy  of  the 
professional  to  play  safe  by  "  playing  for  the 
batter. ' '  This  is  on  the  principle  that  a  victory 
by  one  run  counts  as  much  as  a  game  won  by  a 
dozen  runs.  A  throw  to  the  plate  after  a  base 
hit  almost  always  means  that  the  man  who 
made  the  hit  will  advance  another  base  on  the 
throw.  It  is  not  good  policy  unless  the  condi- 
tions demand  it.  The  run  which  is  going  to  the 
plate  will  do  the  opposing  side  no  good  unless 
the  score  is  close.  If  the  runner  is  not  cut  off 
at  the  plate  the  throw  has  been  wasted  and  the 
man  who  hit  the  ball  is  within  scoring  distance 
of  the  plate  if  another  hit  follows.  If  he  had 
been  held  on  first  by  throwing  to  second  instead 
of  home,  it  would  take  two  more  hits  to  score 
him. 

Wlien  one  run  will  tie  the  game,  however,  the 
outfielder  is  bound  to  take  a  greater  risk  to 
prevent  it  than  when  that  run  does  not  matter 
much.  When  it  is  a  case  of  stopping  a  winning 
run,  if  possible,  the  fielder  will  take  even  longer 
chances.  If  a  team  is  behind  it  is  necessary  for 
an  outfielder  to  cut  off  any  run  that  he  can,  or 
to  stop  the  leading  runner  at  any  base  he  can, 
no  matter  if  it  does  give  the  succeeding  runners 
an  extra  base.    But  he  must  use  judgment  and 


286        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

discretion.  He  generally  knows  the  speed  of 
each  one  of  his  opponents  on  bases.  He  knows 
pretty  accurately  how  far  or  fast  his  own  arm 
can  make  a  ball  travel. 

The  amateur  outfielder  seldom  has  all  this 
knowledge  at  his  command.  He  does  not  know 
to  a  certainty  what  he  can  do  himself  and  w^hat 
he  can't  do,  because  he  has  not  acquired  the 
ability  to  throw  consistently.  Sometimes  he 
can  put  more  speed  and  carrying  power  into  a 
ball  with  the  snap  of  his  arm,  than  at  other 
times.  Consequently  he  is  more  prone  to  make 
futile  efforts  to  catch  impossible  runners, 
thereby  wasting  his  own  energy,  besides  letting 
more  runs  get  within  striking  distance  of  the 
place  of  registration. 

When  all  is  said,  however,  the  amateur  or 
college  ball  player  has  far  greater  attraction 
for  the  general  public  than  the  amateur  play 
actor  can  have.  Many  people  would  rather  see 
an  amateur  ball  game  than  one  between  profes- 
sionals. Those  who  prefer  an  amateur  stage 
performance  to  the  real  thing  are  few.  College 
ball  players  give  a  zest  and  earnestness  to  their 
games  and  their  individual  efforts  that  is  lack- 
ing as  a  rule  in  the  work  of  professionals.  The 
veteran  leaguer  may  be  just  as  earnest  and 
take  just  as  much  interest  in  his  work  as  the 
collegian  but  without  giving  that  impression  to 
the  average  spectator.  The  very  ease  and  fin- 
ish with  which  he  accomplishes  the  tasks  which 


AMATEUR   vs.   PROFESSIONAL      287 

fall  to  his  lot  sometimes  detract  from  their 
spectacular  value.  He  makes  chances  which 
really  are  difficult  appear  easy  oftentimes. 

Frank  Schulte,  the  Cub  outfielder,  is  a  per- 
sonification of  this  idea.  When  he  began  play- 
ing in  Chicago  many  spectators  gained  the  im- 
pression that  he  was  indifferent  and  not  try- 
ing his  hardest  all  the  time.  The  reason  was 
that  he  attained  his  greatest  speed  in  motion 
without  apparent  effort,  therefore  did  not  seem 
to  be  running  hard  when  he  was  at  top  speed, 
and  Schulte  is  very  fast.  Being  of  modest,  re- 
tiring disposition  Schulte  always  avoided  over- 
doing anything.  He  never  was  guilty  of  making 
a  chance  look  difficult  for  the  mere  sake  of  win- 
ning applause,  as  some  fielders  I  could  name 
have  a  habit  of  doing.  It  was  more  than  two 
years  before  Schulte  entirely  lived  down  the 
reputation  of  being  a  phlegmatic,  indifferent 
player.  But  the  public  finally  learned  that  this 
product  of  New  York  state  loved  to  win  better 
than  to  eat  and  always  was  working  his  hard- 
est in  a  game.  To-day  there  is  no  player  on 
the  team  better  liked  than  Schulte. 

There  is  no  department  of  baseball  in  which 
the  difference  between  the  amateur  and  pro- 
fessional is  more  marked  than  that  included  in 
the  vague  world  of  superstition.  Mighty  few 
professional  players  will  admit  they  are  the 
least  bit  superstitious  about  anything.  The 
exceptions  prove  the  rule.     The  school  boy  or 


288        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

collegian  usually  is  free  from  this  eccentricity, 
although  often  he  will  affect  superstition  as  a 
pose.  Perhaps  it  is  because  baseball  with  him 
is  not  a  means  of  livelihood  and  the  glory  and 
honor  he  wins  belongs  largely  to  his  alma  mater 
instead  of  being  of  appreciable  cash  value  to 
himself,  as  is  the  case  with  the  professional. 

There  are  only  a  few  league  players  who  will 
ride  in  ^'  lower  13  "  in  a  sleeping-car  without 
protest  and  a  sleepless  night.  Lee  Tannehill, 
formerly  of  the  White  Sox,  claimed  that  he  had 
been  injured  in  the  next  game  he  played  after 
every  trip  he  ever  made  in  a  berth  numbered 
13.  On  the  other  hand  Manager  Chance  of  the 
Highlanders  alwaj^s  demands  ''  lower  13  "  on 
a  trip,  and  if  assigned  to  a  sleeper  in  which 
there  were  only  twelve  sections  he  has  been 
known  to  purchase  the  stateroom  and  paste  the 
number  ''  13  "  on  its  door. 

Club  o^mers  laugh  at  superstition  among 
their  players  and  deny  that  they  possess  any 
such  "  ridiculous  "  ideas  themselves.  But  look 
back  through  the  pages  of  baseball  history  and 
see  how  many  championship  schedules  ever 
started  on  the  13th  of  the  month.  That  date 
always  is  avoided  for  an  inaugural  although  it 
sometimes  has  entailed  considerable  inconve- 
nience to  do  so. 

Fielder  Jones,  former  manager  of  the  White 
Sox,  held  it  to  be  almost  criminal  folly  for  a 
team  to  pack  up  its  bats  before  the  last  man 


AMATEUR  vs.   PROFESSIONAL      289 

was  put  out  in  a  game.  One  time  in  his  career, 
when  his  team  had  a  long  lead,  that  was  done 
in  the  ninth  inning  and  brought  unexpected  de- 
feat. He  never  forgot  it.  One  day  on  the  old 
White  Sox  park  the  White  Sox  were  half  a 
dozen  runs  ahead  and  two  opponents  had  been 
retired  in  the  last  half -inning  to  be  played.  The 
bat  boys  started  packing  the  White  Sox  sticks 
in  the  bag,  so  as  to  get  home  to  dinner  earlier. 
Jones  saw  them  and  yelled  from  center-field  to 
stop  them  but  nobody  heard.  Then  he  delib- 
erately stopped  the  game  until  he  could  run  in 
to  the  bench  and  order  every  bat  taken  out  of 
the  bag  and  replaced  on  the  ground  in  its 
proper  position. 

President  Comiskey  of  the  White  Sox  once 
came  near  discharging  a  ground-keeper  of 
whom  he  was  very  fond.  One  afternoon  it  was 
threatening  to  rain  before  the  game  could  be 
finished.  The  teams  were  hurrying  through  the 
ninth,  as  the  White  Sox  had  the  victory  cinched. 
Before  the  side  was  retired  it  was  noticed  that 
the  big  American  flag  was  being  lowered  from 
the  tall  mast  back  of  the  center-field  bleachers. 
The  Sox  did  not  lose  that  game,  but  Comiskey 
sent  for  his  ground-keeper  peremptorily.  Then 
it  developed  that  an  assistant  had  been  sent  to 
take  in  the  flag  when  the  game  ended  but  had 
been  cautioned  not  to  lower  it  before  it  was 
over.    Comiskey  fired  the  assistant. 

The  old  Boston  National  league  team  under 


290        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

the  late  Frank  Selee  was  very  superstitious 
about  the  location  of  the  broom  with  which  the 
plate  was  swept  when  said  broom  was  not  in 
use.  Visiting  players  found  that  out  and  used 
to  move  the  broom  to  the  other  side  of  the  plate 
to  tease  the  Bostonians.  One  of  Selee 's  men 
always  would  run  out  from  the  bench  and  re- 
place the  broom  in  its  original  position.  Now 
National  league  umpires  carry  small  whisk 
brooms  in  their  pockets  for  the  purpose  of 
cleaning  off  the  plate  and  the  old  broom  fetish 
did  not  spread. 

**  Joe  "  Tinker  always  remembers  how  he 
walks  to  the  plate  the  first  time  up  in  a  game; 
that  is,  whether  he  steps  in  front  of  the  umpire 
and  catcher  or  goes  around  behind  them.  If  he 
makes  a  safe  hit  that  time  he  will  be  careful  to 
walk  to  the  plate  in  exactly  the  same  way  next 
time  even  if  he  has  to  wait  until  the  umpire  and 
catcher  are  in  position  to  let  him  repeat  his 
pre\4ous  act. 

Sheckard  once  borrowed  a  stick  of  gum  from 
Overall  while  on  the  bench  during  a  game,  when 
both  were  with  the  Cubs.  He  made  three  hits. 
Every  day  thereafter  Sheckard  would  borrow 
gum  from  Overall  and  refuse  to  accept  it  from 
any  one  else,  hoping  to  get  at  least  one  hit  each 
day.  He  did,  too,  until  Overall  finally  asked 
the  left-fielder  if  he  was  afraid  of  clerks  who 
sold  chewing  gum.  Sheckard  had  to  explain 
and  that  put  the  "  jinx  "  on  the  gum. 


AMATEUR   vs.   PROFESSIONAL      291 

When  the  White  Sox  celebrated  the  winning 
of  the  1906  world's  championship  in  the  spring 
of  1907,  the  halyard  clogged  in  a  pulley  as  they 
were  hoisting  their  world's  pennant  and  broke 
the  flagstaff  off  in  the  middle.  With  one  ac- 
cord the  players  whispered  to  each  other 
*'  Seven  years  of  hard  luck."  The  White  Sox 
never  have  won  a  pennant  since,  but  the  period 
of  seven  years  has  now  expired. 

In  a  game  where  luck  is  such  an  ever-present 
factor,  is  it  any  wonder  that  superstition  grows 
on  the  players  year  by  year? 


THE    INSIDE    GAME    AS    PLAYED    BY 
CATCHER   AND    PITCHER 

Nowhere  in  tlie  realm  of  baseball  do  brains 
count  more  than  in  the  so-called  battery  posi- 
tions. Nowhere  in  the  game  do  science  and 
experience  possess  greater  advantage  over 
mere  mechanical  skill  and  physical  prowess 
than  on  the  pitcher's  slab  and  behind  the 
catcher's  mask.  Nowhere  else  has  inside  base- 
ball been  brought  to  a  higher  state  of  perfec- 
tion, partly  because  a  more  perfect  understand- 
ing can  be  established  between  two  persons 
than  when  an^^where  from  three  to  nine  play- 
ers are  involved  in  the  more  complex  forms  of 
team  work. 

Every  ball  thrown  or  delivered  by  the  pitcher 
to  any  part  of  the  infield  is  a  form  of  inside 
baseball. 

The  great  majority  of  baseball  followers  rate 
the  pitcher  as  the  most  important  part  of  a 
baseball  machine.  They  believe  the  only  thing 
necessary  to  win  a  pennant  is  for  a  club  owner 
to  secure  a  string  of  pitchers  whom  the  players 
on  the  other  teams  cannot  hit.  They  forget  the 
need  of  getting  players  who  can  hit  the  other 
pitchers.    They  overlook  the  fact  that  much  of 

292 


THE   INSIDE   GAME  293 

a  pitcher's  success  in  winning  games  depends 
on  the  support  given  him  in  the  field  and  the 
number  of  runs  made  by  his  own  team.  They 
ignore  the  fact  that  a  great  pitcher  may  be  a 
loser  because  of  inferior  partners  behind  the 
bat,  while  a  mediocre  pitcher  may  become 
world-famous  with  the  help  of  a  brainy  catcher 
and  fast  support. 

President  Dreyfuss  of  the  Pittsburghs  main- 
tains that  the  manager  who  has  a  great  catcher, 
a  shortstop  who  can  go  to  his  right  or  his  left 
equally  well  after  ground  balls,  and  a  center- 
fielder  who  can  do  likewise  after  flies,  can  build 
a  championship  team  around  those  three  men 
much  more  easily  than  if  he  has  great  players 
in  all  other  positions  but  is  weak  in  those  three. 

There  always  has  been  a  tendency  to  over- 
look the  catcher,  possibly  because  so  much  of 
him  is  covered  up  during  the  game,  but  more 
because  the  greatest  part  of  his  work  is  inside 
baseball  and  of  the  kind  which  the  general  pub- 
lic can  neither  see  nor  appreciate.  If  any  one 
doubts  the  importance  of  the  catcher  to  a  base- 
ball machine,  let  him  recall  the  clubs  which 
have  won  world's  pennants  under  modern  con- 
ditions. Going  back  to  1903  the  Boston  Amer- 
ican's, with  Criger  behind  the  bat,  beat  Pitts- 
burgh, which  had  no  Criger.  In  the  next  year 
there  was  no  world's  series,  but  in  1905  the 
New  York  Giants  beat  the  Philadelphia  Ath- 
letics decisively,  not  so  much  because  of  Christy 


294        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Matliewson  as  because  they  had  a  Roger  Bres- 
nahan  and  the  Athletics  did  not. 

In  1906  the  White  Sox  defeated  the  Cubs  in 
the  famous  Chicago  world's  series  because  they 
had  in  ' '  Billy  ' '  Sullivan  a  greater  catcher  than 
even  the  great  John  Kling,  who  himself  was 
responsible  for  much  of  the  ease  with  which  the 
Cubs  triumphed  over  the  almost  catcherless 
Detroit  Tigers  in  1907  and  1908.  And  Pitts- 
burgh's victory  in  the  closest  of  world's  series 
was  accomplished,  so  every  expert  believes, 
because  Gibson  turned  the  scale  in  favor  of 
the  Pirates. 

In  six  world's  series,  therefore,  the  premier 
honors  have  gone  to  the  teams  which  had  in 
their  ranks  Criger,  Bresnahan,  Sullivan,  Kling, 
and  Gibson.  Of  these  five  the  greatest  gener- 
ally are  conceded  to  have  been  Sullivan,  Kling 
and  Gibson,  in  the  order  of  their  development. 

However  strong  a  team  may  be,  its  ultimate 
success,  when  put  to  the  supreme  test,  will  de- 
pend upon  its  catchers.  This  is  the  opinion  of 
the  managers  who  have  achieved  the  most  suc- 
cess and  is  the  reason  why  veteran  catchers  are 
retained  so  long.  The  supply  is  so  far  below 
the  demand  and  young  catchers  have  so  much 
to  learn  that  the  man  of  brains  and  experience 
whose  arm  is  weakening  will  hold  his  place 
against  a  younger  catcher  who  can  throw  the 
ball  twice  as  hard  and  far. 

"When  the  White  Sox  were  winning  the  fifth 


THE   INSIDE   GAME  295 

game  of  their  series  with  the  Cubs,  putting 
them  within  one  game  of  the  world's  pennant, 
John  KHng  asked  Manager  Jones  of  the  Sox, 
as  the  latter  came  to  bat  near  the  end  of  the 
game,  why  the  Sox  were  beating  the  Cubs,  who 
were  acknowledged  to  be  made  up  of  better 
individual  players.  To  this  Jones  replied  very 
promptly : 

*'  I'll  tell  you  why.  We've  got  the  best 
catcher  that  ever  stood  in  shoe-leather." 

That  may  not  have  been  a  very  polite  thing 
to  say  right  to  Kling's  face,  but  it  was  the 
answer  Jones  always  made  to  the  same  ques- 
tion and  the  incident  illustrates  one  of  the  ways 
in  which  the  catcher  plays  inside  baseball. 

The  secret  of  successful  pitching  does  not  lie 
in  the  possession  of  great  speed  or  baffling 
curves,  or  both,  so  much  as  in  outguessing  the 
batsman.  If  the  batsman  knew  what  a  Brown 
or  a  Mathewson  was  going  to  deliver  every 
time,  neither  would  win  many  games.  What 
makes  a  pitcher  most  effective  is  his  ability  to 
make  a  batter  think  a  curve  is  going  to  be  a 
straight  ball,  that  a  straight  ball  is  going  to 
curve,  that  a  slow  pitched  ball  is  a  fast  one,  that 
a  ball  is  coming  over  the  plate  when  it  is  not, 
or  that  it  will  not  come  over  the  plate  when  it 
does.  And  since  the  catcher  must  signal  for 
each  ball  pitched  he  always  helps  the  pitcher 
decide  what  to  pitch  and  often  makes  the  choice 
himself.     Even  the  best  of  pitchers  depend  a 


296        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

great  deal  on  the  judgment  of  an  experienced 
catcher. 

One  of  the  many  ways  in  which  the  catcher 
helps  the  pitcher  outguess  the  batsman  is  by 
talking  to  the  man  at  the  plate,  the  object  being 
to  take  his  mind  off  the  game,  to  give  him  less 
time  to  think  what  is  likely  to  be  pitched  to  him, 
and  to  divert  his  attention  as  much  as  possible 
from  studying  the  pitcher's  actions.  It  re- 
quires a  veteran  to  do  this,  for  the  catcher  him- 
self must  be  doing  a  lot  of  hard  thinking  at  the 
same  time,  and  his  conversation  has  to  be 
largely  a  matter  of  habit.  It  is  necessary  to 
use  some  shrewdness  to  draw  an  experienced 
batsman  into  an  argument  for  he  knows  its  pur- 
pose too  well.  Few  backstops  could  tempt 
Jones,  for  instance,  into  paying  any  attention 
to  a  remark,  as  Kling  did  in  the  incident  men- 
tioned. Xew  players  and  nervous  ones  are 
more  readily  engaged  in  this  by-play.  One 
catcher  always  starts  it  by  asking  a  new  man 
where  he  played  last  season,  what  luck  he  had, 
etc.  Even  religion  has  been  resorted  to  some- 
times as  a  subject  to  trap  the  unwary.  The 
spectator  seldom  is  aware  of  this  running  fire 
of  talk  between  the  batsman  and  the  men  who 
are  trying  to  fool  him,  but  would  be  highly  en- 
tertained at  times  if  he  could  hear  it.  Most  of 
these  verbal  exchanges  are  friendly  and  in  the 
nature  of  "  jollies  "  although  sometimes  they 
are  bitter  and  objectionable. 


THE   INSIDE   GAME  297 

When  Clark  Griffith  was  managing  the  New 
York  Americans  he  went  in  one  day  to  pitch 
out  a  game  in  which  Detroit  was  batting  the 
previous  pitcher  and  threatening  to  wipe  out 
a  small  lead  which  New  York  had  gained.  It 
was  after  Griffith's  pitching  days  were  over 
and  when  he  had  little  except  his  brains  left  to 
work  with.  In  the  last  inning  the  Tigers  cut 
the  lead  down  to  one  run  and  had  men  on  sec- 
ond and  third  with  two  out.  Another  hit  meant 
a  probable  Detroit  victory  and  Schaefer  was  at 
bat.  Griffith  worked  him  into  fouling  off  two 
strikes  without  pitching  him  a  good  ball,  but  in 
so  doing  had  three  balls  called.  "What  to  pitch 
next  bothered  the  veteran.  He  had  about  de- 
cided to  give  Schaefer  his  base  on  balls  and 
try  for  the  next  man,  but  while  he  was  studying 
on  it,  he  called  out  to  Schaefer:  '^  I'll  bet  you 
five  dollars  I  strike  you  out." 

*'  Germany  "  jumped  to  the  plate  and  said 
to  the  umpire,  ''  Stop  this  game  while  I  make 
a  book!  "  Then  he  yelled  to  Griffith,  ''  What 
was  that  crack  you  made?  " 

Griffith  repeated  his  offer  and  Schaefer 
called  back:  "  I'll  take  that  and  bet  you  an- 
other five  dollars  I  make  a  base  hit. ' '  To  which 
the  pitcher  replied,  '*  You're  on," 

Then  Griffith  pitched  a  perfectly  straight  ball 
over  the  plate  at  moderate  speed.  If  Schaefer 
had  known  that  in  time,  he  could  have  hit  it 
safely  almost  to  a  certainty,  but  quite  naturally 


298        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

he  thought  that  would  be  the  last  thing  in  the 
world  with  wliich  any  pitcher  would  try  to 
strike  out  a  man.  Remembering  the  bets, 
Schaefer  supposed  Griffith  was  attempting  to 
fool  him  into  swinging  at  a  curve  which  was 
aimed  to  break  outside  of  the  plate  and  out  of 
his  reach. 

"  Nay,  nay,"  thought  Schaefer,  and  not  un- 
til the  ball  was  right  on  top  of  him  did  he  real- 
ize that  Griffith,  anticipating  the  German's 
thoughts,  had  pitched  the  ball  straight  over  the 
plate.  Then  he  swung  wildly  at  it,  but  too  late, 
striking  out  and  losing  both  bets  simply  by 
being  outguessed. 

The  size,  length,  and  weight  of  the  bat  used 
by  a  player  mean  much  to  both  pitcher  and 
catcher.  It  is  comparatively  easy  of  course  to 
judge  the  diameter  and  length,  but  the  weight 
differs  greatly  in  bats  of  the  same  size.  The 
catcher  resorts  to  many  tricks  to  find  out  if  a 
batsman  is  using  a  heavy  or  light  stick.  Some- 
times you  have  seen  him  ask  the  man  at  bat  to 
lend  him  the  bat  while  he  knocked  the  dirt  out 
of  the  spikes  in  his  shoes.  Oftener  still  you 
have  seen  the  catcher  pick  up  the  bat  thrown 
down  by  a  man  who  had  made  a  foul  and 
started  for  first  base,  holding  it  out  to  the  bats- 
man as  he  returned  to  the  plate.  Probably  you 
thought  that  a  pretty  bit  of  courtesy  on  the 
catcher's  part.  Sometimes  it  was,  but  more 
often  the  catcher  was  testing  the  weight  of  that 


THE   INSIDE   GAME  299 

bat  and  transmitting  liis  deductions  to  the 
pitcher. 

What  is  the  use  of  this  information?  The 
batsman  who  uses  a  long  or  heavy  bat  gener- 
ally must  take  a  good  swing  at  the  ball  and 
cannot  chop  at  it  as  quickly  as  can  a  man  with 
a  short  or  light  bat.  The  man  with  a  long  or 
heavy  stick  will  punish  balls  pitched  over  the 
side  of  the  plate  farthest  from  him  but  will  not 
as  a  rule  hit  hard  if  the  ball  is  pitched  inside 
or  on  his  side  of  the  plate.  The  man  who  uses 
a  short  bat  and  pulls  away  from  the  plate  a 
little  is  helpless  usually  if  the  ball  is  kept  over 
the  farther  side  of  the  plate,  but  is  liable  to 
smash  the  ball  if  pitched  inside  the  plate.  This 
knowledge  of  what  kind  of  bat  the  batsman  uses 
is  of  particular  advantage  to  both  pitcher  and 
catcher  when  they  know  a  batter  is  going  to  try 
to  hit  and  run  with  a  man  on  first  base.  By 
pitching  the  ball  on  the  inside  or  outside  of  the 
plate  it  can  be  made  difficult  for  the  batsman 
to  hit  the  ball  toward  the  infielder  who,  the 
catcher  knows,  is  going  to  cover  second  base, 
and  the  chances  can  be  greatly  increased  that 
he  will  hit  toward  the  fielder  who  is  going  to 
remain  in  his  position. 

In  most  cases  it  is  of  greater  importance 
where  the  ball  comes  over  the  plate  than  what 
there  is  ' '  on  it, ' '  as  can  be  seen  from  the  above. 
That  makes  a  pitcher's  control  more  valuable 
to  him  than  almost  anything  else  at  his  com- 


300        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

mand,  and  by  control  is  meant  the  ability  to 
pitch  high  or  low,  wide  or  close  in  at  will,  more 
than  to  be  able  to  pitch  the  ball  somewhere  over 
the  plate  when  desired.  When  it  is  the  bats- 
man's palpable  intention  to  bunt  for  a  sacrifice 
hit  with  a  runner  on  first,  the  pitcher's  best 
method  is  to  keep  the  ball  high  as  that  is  the 
most  difficult  kind  to  bunt  well.  The  pitcher 
can  help  himself  a  lot  in  the  matter  of  fielding 
bunts  in  such  cases.  A  right-handed  batsman 
naturally  will  bunt  a  ball  pitched  close  to  him 
toward  third  base  and  a  ball  which  is  kept  away 
from  him  toward  first  base.  By  starting  the 
right  way  as  soon  as  the  ball  leaves  his  hand 
the  pitcher  can  cover  much  more  ground  on 
bunts  than  if  he  waits  to  see  where  the  ball  is 
going,  and  if  his  control  is  good  it  will  be  im- 
possible for  any  except  the  most  expert  and 
triclvj^  hunters  to  "  cross  "  him  by  bunting  to 
the  other  side  of  the  diamond. 

Often  the  battery  tries  to  catch  the  runner 
off  first  base  when  a  sacrifice  is  the  expected 
play.  It  is  done  by  pitching  the  ball  just  far 
enough  away  so  that  the  batter  cannot  hit  it  but 
near  enough  so  that  he  will  try  to.  As  he 
makes  the  attempt,  the  runner  instinctively 
starts  away  from  first  but  the  baseman,  who 
has  seen  the  sigTial,  stays  there.  Then  a  snap 
throw  from  the  catcher  finds  the  baseman  ready 
for  it  but  the  runner  often  is  unable  to  get  back 
ahead  of  the  ball.     This  play  can  be  worked 


THE   INSIDE   GAME  301 

best  when  there  are  runners  on  first  and  second 
bases  and  the  man  on  first  is  not  expecting  any 
play  on  him. 

Every  batsman  is  being  studied  and  watched 
closely  by  both  pitcher  and  catcher  at  all  times, 
but  never  more  closely  than  when  there  are 
runners  on  bases.  Then  the  man  at  bat  and  the 
runner  or  runners  are  w^orking  together  as  a 
rule.  In  the  major  leagues  the  signals  may  be 
given  by  the  batsman,  by  the  runner,  or  by  the 
coacher.  The  most  frequent  way  is  for  the 
batsman  to  select  the  time  to  make  a  hit  and 
run  play,  for  instance,  and  his  every  motion 
will  be  noted  by  his  opponents.  What  partic- 
ular movement  of  hand,  body,  or  foot  is  a  signal 
to  a  runner  is  difficult  to  detect,  but  a  brainy 
catcher  will  discover  many  signals  in  a  season. 

It  is  comparatively  easy  to  find  out  who  is 
giving  the  signals.  If  it  is  the  batsman,  the 
runner  will  watch  him  more  closely  than  other- 
wise would  be  natural.  Sometimes  the  bats- 
man will  give  the  play  away  by  looking  in  the 
direction  of  the  runner,  as  he  gives  a  signal, 
to  see  if  the  latter  is  watching  for  it.  If  the 
runner  gives  the  signals,  the  batter  will  glance 
in  his  direction  pretty  often  between  pitched 
balls.  That  is  the  time  when  most  of  the  signs 
are  worked.  If  the  coacher  gives  the  signals, 
both  the  batsman  and  runner  will  have  to  watch 
him.  To  avoid  this,  most  coachers,  if  they  give 
the   signs,   do   so  by   spoken  word,  which  of 


302        THE   BOOK  OF   ATHLETICS 

course  is  not  possible  for  either  batsman  or 
baserunner  to  do.  There  was  one  team  which 
used  the  word  "  it  "  for  the  hit  and  run  play. 
'  *  Hit  it  a  mile ;  make  him  put  it  over  ' '  or  any 
other  familiar  sentence,  in  which  ''  it  "  was 
used,  constituted  the  signal.  Another  team 
used  the  word  '^  little  "  for  almost  an  entire 
season  without  being  discovered.  Still  another 
team  used  the  inconspicuous  word  "  and  "  for 
one  signal.  Only  common  words  in  frequent 
use  can  be  employed,  for  an  unusual  word 
would  be  spotted  in  a  few  plays  by  a  shrewd 
battery  with  disastrous  results. 

These  are  only  a  few  of  the  tricks  of  the 
trade  but  they  are  enough  to  show  that  the  art 
of  pitching  is  not  all  in  curves  and  speed ;  that 
the  greatness  of  a  catcher  is  not  measured  by 
his  ability  to  stop  ^\'ild  pitches  and  throw  hard 
and  fast  to  the  bases. 


HOW  INSIDE  BASEBALL  HAS  DE- 
CREASED THE  BATTING,  BY  PER- 
FECTING  DEFENSIVE   FIELDING 

Nothing  makes  a  really  good  baseball  player 
more  angry  than  to  be  called  a  stationary 
infielder,  or  outfielder.  If  you  are  a  friend  of 
his  you  may  call  him  names  that  sound  worse, 
but  if  you  value  his  friendship  do  not  intimate, 
even  jokingly,  that  he  is  anchored  to  any  par- 
ticular spot  while  his  team  is  on  the  defensive. 
That  is  one  failing  a  man  may  not  have  and 
become  famous  in  baseball. 

The  science  of  the  defense  in  the  modern 
game  is  founded  on  a  constant  shifting  of  the 
barriers  against  base  hits  in  perfect,  machine- 
like harmony  with  one  another  and  with  the 
pitcher.  The  outfielder  who  insists  on  wear- 
ing the  grass  off  one  certain  spot  and  the  in- 
fielder who  plays  for  all  batsmen  alike  are  cogs 
sure  to  tangle  up  the  whole  works.  The  major 
league  scout  on  the  hunt  for  promising  talent 
labels  such  a  youngster  as  nearly  hopeless. 

The  steady  decrease  in  batting  in  the  last 
twenty  years  generally  has  been  charged  to  a 
growing  supremacy  of  the  pitcher.  All  efforts 
to  increase  the  batting  have  aimed  to  handicap 

303 


304        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  pitchers,  which  shows  how  little  the  club 
owners,  to  whom  is  intrusted  the  making  of  the 
rules  that  govern  baseball,  know  about  the  in- 
side game.  Greater  pitching  skill  has  had 
something  to  do  with  it,  but  the  decrease  in 
batting  is  due  more  to  the  development  of  scien- 
tific defense  than  to  better  pitchers  or  poorer 
eyesight  in  the  new  generation  of  batsmen.  If 
Anson,  or  Brouthers,  or  Ed.  Delehanty  had 
been  compelled  to  pit  their  unquestionably 
magnificent  prowess  with  the  stick  against  the 
system  which  present  day  batsmen  face  in  the 
major  leagues,  their  batting  averages  would 
have  shrunk  some,  through  no  fault  of  theirs, 
no  decrease  in  their  own  strength,  no  astigma- 
tism in  their  world-famous  batting  eyes. 

Years  of  close  watching  and  constant  study 
disclosed  the  fact  that  certain  batters  usually 
hit  certain  kinds  of  balls  in  certain  directions. 
Shining  exceptions  to  the  rule  only  proved  its 
existence.  Anson,  Brouthers,  and  Delehanty 
probably  would  have  continued  to  be  great 
batsmen  even  if  some  Ponce  de  Leon  foun- 
tain had  been  discovered  to  enable  them  to 
remain  young  and  play  ball  forever.  Just 
like  Lajoie,  Cobb,  and  Wagner,  they  were 
able  not  only  to  hit  almost  any  kind  of 
pitched  ball  but  to  hit  it  somewhere  nearly 
where  they  wanted  to.  The  average  player's 
ability  is  much  more  limited.  There  are  only 
a  few  right-handed  batsmen,  for  instance,  who 


INSIDE   BASEBALL  305 

can  hit  a  fast-pitched  ball  clown  the  third-base 
line  and  there  are  equally  few  left-handed  bats- 
men who  can  hit  speed  to  right  field.  The  tend- 
ency of  the  former  is  to  hit  a  slow  or  curve  ball 
into  left  field  and  of  the  latter  to  "  pull  "  the 
slow  ball  into  right  field.  In  addition  the  gen- 
eral direction  in  which  the  average  batter  will 
hit  can  be  governed  by  pitching  the  ball  away 
from  or  close  to  him. 

Out  of  this  knowledge,  of  which  only  the  out- 
line has  been  indicated  here,  has  been  built  up 
the  inside  system  of  defense  which  has  robbed 
many  batsmen  of  many  base  hits.  Probably  no 
team  has  yet  brought  this  style  of  defense  to  a 
higher  degree  of  perfection  than  Chicago's 
Cubs  under  Chance,  although  every  successful 
team  has  used  more  or  less  of  it  in  one  w^ay  or 
another.  Consequently  no  better  illustration 
of  how  scientific  defense  is  worked  out  can  be 
given  than  the  one  with  which  I  am  naturally 
most  familiar.  To  be  sure  the  Cubs'  system 
already  has  been  described  in  great  detail  by 
more  famous  writers  and  in  more  ambitious 
form,  but  it  has  been  represented  to  be  much 
more  mystifying  than  it  really  was.  Of  the  out- 
line given  here  the  reader  may  feel  perfectly 
sure,  for  it  was  obtained  first  hand. 

The  groundwork  is  simply  this :  When  the 
Cubs  were  in  the  field  Tinker  at  short  watched 
for  the  catcher's  signal  to  the  pitcher  then  re- 
peated that  signal  in  such  a  way  that  the  out- 


306        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

fielders  and  other  infielders  could  understand  it 
but  the  opposing  batsman  could  not.  In  that 
way  every  defending  player  knew  what  was  go- 
ing to  be  pitched  every  time  and  could  '*  lay 
for  "  the  batsman  with  greater  certainty  be- 
cause of  that  knowledge.  Of  course,  there  are 
different  forms  of  defense  for  different  situa- 
tions and  the  system  of  signals  has  been  added 
to  by  years  of  experience,  but  its  foundation  is 
as  simple  as  indicated. 

Here  are  some  of  the  results:  If  the  bases 
are  empty  and  an  average  right-handed  bats- 
man up,  the  infield  and  outfield  will  be  looking 
for  him  to  hit  to  the  right  of  center  if  a  fast 
ball  or  one  on  the  outside  of  the  plate  is  pitched 
to  him.  They  will  expect  him  to  hit  to  the  left 
of  center  if  a  curve  or  a  ball  inside  the  plate 
is  delivered.  If  an  average  left-handed  batter 
is  up,  the  probabilities  are  exactly  reversed. 
Consequently  the  entire  team,  being  aware 
through  Tinker's  signal  what  the  pitcher  was 
going  to  deliver,  could  be  on  its  toes  to  start  in 
the  direction  in  which  the  ball  would  be  hit  three 
out  of  five  times.  There  are  many  batters  who 
almost  invariably  will  hit  either  to  the  right 
or  left  of  center  field  no  matter  what  is  pitched. 
For  such  batsmen  you  will  notice  both  infield 
and  outfield  play  far  out  of  their  natural  posi- 
tions. But  even  these  peculiar  batters  will  hit 
a  fast  ball  to  a  different  spot  than  they  will  hit 
a  slow  one.    It  can  be  seen  already  how  much 


INSIDE   BASEBALL  307 

this  wireless  communication  between  the 
pitcher  and  the  men  behind  him  will  help  to 
guard  fair  ground  against  base  hits. 

When  there  is  a  runner  on  base  the  system 
becomes  of  still  greater  value  and  a  little  more 
complex.  With  a  runner  on  first  and  nobody 
out  in  a  close  game,  the  natural  expectation  is 
a  sacrifice  hit  and  for  this  the  commonest  de- 
fense is  for  the  second-baseman  to  edge  over 
so  as  to  be  ready  to  cover  first  if  necessary, 
while  the  shortstop  covers  second,  leaving  the 
first  and  third-basemen  free  to  help  the  pitcher 
field  any  bunt  as  fast  as  possible  with  the  ob- 
ject of  forcing  the  runner  out  at  second  if  it 
can  be  done.  But  an  up-to-date  batsman  is 
likely  to  break  up  this  system  by  switching  to 
a  hit-and-run  play  and  the  infielders  must  be 
on  their  guard  against  this.  The  hit-and-run 
is  frequently  tried  with  no  one  out,  always  with 
one  man  out,  unless  the  pitcher  gets  the  bats- 
man ''  in  the  hole  "  before  it  can  be  tried,  and 
usually  with  two  out. 

See  how  the  Cub  system  of  defense  works  out 
here.  Suppose  a  right-handed  batter  was  up 
and  the  catcher's  signal  called  for  a  fast  ball  or 
one  on  the  outside  of  the  plate.  When  Evers 
saw  Tinker  repeat  it  he  understood  that  Tinker 
would  cover  second  if  the  runner  on  first  started 
to  advance  and  that  he  (Evers)  could  remain  in 
his  position.  Then  if  the  batter  hit  the  ball  it 
was  likely  to  come  to  the  right  of  second  base 


308        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

because  only  a  very  versatile  batter  would  be 
able  to  pull  a  hit  through  the  spot  left  vacant 
by  Tinker.  If  nothing  happened  on  that  pitch, 
the  catcher  might  call  for  a  curve  or  slow  ball. 
Tinker  flashed  that  to  the  others,  including 
Evers,  w^ho  knew  that  he  must  cover  second 
this  time  and  allow  Tinker  to  remain  in  posi- 
tion because  the  ball  was  likely  to  be  hit  toward 
left  field.  If  the  batsman  hit  left-handed  all 
this  had  to  be  reversed.  On  a  fast  ball  or  one 
on  the  outside,  Evers  would  cover  second  and 
on  a  curve  or  a  ball  pitched  close  in.  Tinker 
would  be  ready  to  take  the  throw. 

Knowing  who  will  cover  the  base  is  of  great 
aid  to  the  catcher  in  making  his  throw  to  sec- 
ond and  the  constant  shifting  of  plans  makes 
it  difficult  for  the  batsman  to  guess  which 
fielder  will  leave  his  position  on  a  hit-and-run 
play.  He  can  foretell  which  hole  will  be  left 
open  on  the  infield  only  by  guessing  what  the 
pitcher  is  going  to  deliver  and  that  is  a  hard 
task.  But  think  of  the  strain  this  system  puts 
on  the  player.  He  must  be  eagle-eyed,  for  he 
never  knows  when  a  signal  is  to  be  flashed  to 
him  and  to  miss  it  may  defeat  his  team.  No 
manager  will  accept  any  excuse  for  missing  a 
signal.  Then  the  same  sign  has  two  entirely 
different  meanings  according  to  the  style  of 
the  batsman,  and  if  this  fact  is  forgotten  for 
a  moment  it  may  prove  fatal  in  a  crucial 
situation. 


INSIDE   BASEBALL  309 

Perhaps  it  can  be  better  understood  from  the 
foregoing  what  it  means  to  a  team  using  inside 
baseball  to  have  one  of  its  regulars  laid  up  by 
accident.  The  substitute  may  be  almost  as 
good  a  player  in  every  way,  but  he  will  weaken 
a  team  very  much  if  he  is  not  thoroughly  famil- 
iar with  every  signal  and  every  move  which 
each  signal  calls  for.  Often  the  presence  of  a 
new  man  upsets  a  team  through  mere  lack  of 
confidence  in  his  having  interpreted  a  signal 
aright  in  a  critical  spot.  That  is  one  reason 
why  the  wise  manager  never  "  breaks  up  a  win- 
ning combination  "  if  he  can  help  it.  Many  a 
regular  has  sat  on  the  bench  after  having  re- 
covered from  an  injury  because  his  team  was 
winning  without  him  and  a  substitute  of  lesser 
ability  has  kept  his  place  for  fear  of  destroy- 
ing the  perfection  with  which  the  machine  was 
working. 

No  attempt  can  be  made  even  to  outline  all 
the  varied  workings  of  this  system  of  defense, 
but  enough  has  been  told,  perhaps,  to  convey 
an  idea  of  its  value.  Whatever  the  system 
used,  if  successful  it  is  based  on  the  first  prin- 
ciple of  constant  shifting  in  accord  with  the 
pitcher  and  batsman.  Some  teams  carry  the 
system  into  greater  detail  than  others  and 
there  are  many  different  ways  of  transmitting 
the  signals.  Sometimes  they  are  given  by  the 
catcher,  or  by  the  pitcher  himself,  in  such  a 
way  that  the  whole  team  can  get  them  first 


310        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

hand.  This  is  a  more  hazardous  way,  however, 
and  cannot  be  used  long  at  a  time  without  great 
danger  of  detection  by  the  opponents. 

Turning  to  the  individual,  there  are  many 
tricks  as  old  as  the  game  itself,  which  have  been 
discarded  as  the  development  of  inside  base- 
ball called  for  more  and  more  team-play, 
thereby  subordinating  the  individual.  You  will 
occasionally  see  an  attem^Dt  by  an  infielder  to 
hide  the  ball  under  his  arm  until  a  baserunner, 
thinking  the  pitcher  has  the  ball,  strays  off  his 
base  to  meet  sudden  disgrace.  But  it  is  seldom 
tried  except  in  moments  of  great  excitement, 
when  the  opponents  are  likely  to  lose  their 
heads  and  relax  their  vigilance. 

One  old  method  of  deceiving  baserunners  still 
is  common  and  probably  always  will  be.  When 
a  runner  starts  from  first  and  the  batter  hits 
a  fly  ball  you  will  often  see  second-baseman  or 
shortstop  run  after  an  imaginary  grounder  and 
make  a  pretense  of  fielding  it  to  some  base. 
The  purpose  is  to  make  the  runner  believe  the 
ball  was  hit  on  the  ground  and  to  fool  him  into 
running  so  far  from  his  base  that  he  can  be 
doubled  up  after  the  fly  is  caught.  Clever  base- 
runners  are  fooled  in  this  way,  for  they  are  so 
intent  on  getting  their  own  start  that  they  can- 
not guess  where  the  ball  goes  except  by  the 
crack  of  the  bat.  I  once  saw  Lajoie  go  through 
this  pantomime  of  fielding  a  grounder  so  natu- 
rally that,  when  he  tossed  a  handful  of  dirt 


INSIDE   BASEBALL  311 

along  with  an  imaginary  ball  to  the  shortstop 
at  second  base,  the  runner  going  down  from 
first  kept  right  on  toward  the  bench  under  the 
impression  he  was  forced  out.  He  was  out  all 
right,  but  not  at  second,  for  the  batter  hit  a  fly 
to  right  and  Lajoie's  trick  gave  the  right-fielder 
plenty  of  time  to  double  the  runner  off  first 
base.  Zeider,  once  second-baseman  of  the 
White  Sox,  actually  worked  this  trick  on  a  base- 
runner,  when  the  batsman  hit  a  pop  fly  to  short 
right-field,  then  went  back  and  caught  the  fly 
himself.  It  requires  a  strong-lunged  coacher 
to  prevent  these  tricks,  for  the  crowd  usually 
yells  whenever  the  ball  is  hit,  drowning  all 
shouts  of  warning. 

Another  old-time  trick  still  is  used  with  suc- 
cess when  the  ball  is  thrown  to  intercept  a 
runner  advancing  on  a  hit.  In  the  case  of  a 
man  going  from  first  to  third  on  a  single  you 
may  have  seen  the  third-baseman  standing 
carelessly  near  his  base  as  if  watching  a  play 
being  made  elsewhere  and  giving  not  the  slight- 
est indication  that  the  ball  was  coming  to  him. 
Often  the  runner  is  fooled  into  slowing  up  or 
coming  to  third  base  standing  up  instead  of 
sliding.  Suddenly  the  baseman  will  come  to 
life,  grab  the  throw  and  touch  the  unsuspect- 
ing runner  out. 

With  a  runner  trying  to  score  from  second 
on  a  hit  I  have  seen  a  catcher  pick  up  the  bat 
to  toss  it  back  toward  the  bench  or  slip  off  his 


312        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

mitt  as  if  the  play  was  over  so  far  as  he  was 
concerned,  and  all  the  time  the  ball  would  be 
coming  in  as  fast  as  an  outfielder  could  throw 
it.  In  plenty  of  time  the  trickster  would  be 
ready  to  take  the  throw,  and  the  runner,  who 
allowed  himself  to  be  deceived  into  taking  his 
time,  would  find  himself  very  unexpectedly 
nailed  at  the  plate. 

The  first  time  I  ever  saw  the  "  sacrifice- 
killer  "  worked  by  an  infield  was  against  the 
White  Sox  in  Detroit.  That  is  the  name  ap- 
plied to  the  trick  of  forcing  a  runner  at  third 
on  a  bunt  when  there  are  runners  on  first  and 
second  with  nobody  out.  Hahn  was  on  second 
and  Manager  Jones  on  first.  Just  as  the  ball 
was  pitched,  O'Leary,  then  shortstop,  started 
to  cover  second.  Isbell  laid  down  a  nice  bunt 
which  ought  to  have  advanced  both  men  easily. 
But,  deceived  by  O'Leary 's  move,  Hahn  was 
breaking  his  neck  to  get  back  to  second,  and 
before  he  could  recover  he  was  forced  out  at 
third.  On  the  very  next  day  the  Sox  broke  up 
that  trick.  The  same  situation  came  up  with  a 
Sox  pitcher  on  second,  Hahn  on  first  and  Jones 
at  bat.  It  is  not  easy  to  advance  the  average 
pitcher  on  a  bunt,  anyway.  O'Leary  made  it 
doubly  difficult  by  running  this  pitcher  back 
toward  second  just  before  the  ball  was  deliv- 
ered. But  Jones  did  not  bunt.  He  hit  a 
bounder  over  the  spot  0  'Leary  had  left  vacant 
and  this  shift  so  surprised  even  the  outfield 


INSIDE  BASEBALL  313 

that  the  pitcher,  who  was  on  second,  not  only 
reached  third  but  kept  on  to  the  plate. 

There  is  no  trick  that  will  work  always  and 
few  that  can  be  worked  successfully  against  the 
same  opponent  at  short  intervals  unless  that 
opponent  is  stupid.  Some  tricks  are  dangerous 
for  the  team  that  tries  them,  as  in  the  case  of 
the  **  sacrifice-killer." 

The  secret  of  success  in  baseball  is  not  to 
excel  all  opponents  in  skill,  but  to  outwit  them 
at  every  possible  point.  That  is  why  the  bril- 
liant mechanical  player  never  becomes  of  as 
great  value  to  his  team  as  the  lesser  light  who 
has  mastered  inside  baseball,  sometimes  jo- 
cosely called  "  the  apotheosis  of  the  double 
cross." 


SCORING    THE    GAME 

Down  in  ''  little  old  New  York,"  as  its  deni- 
zens love  to  call  it,  there  is  a  vender  of  baseball 
score-cards  who  probably  will  be  remembered 
by  every  one  that  has  attended  games  at  either 
major  league  park  there  in  recent  years.  So 
far  as  kno^Ti  his  claims  to  distinction  are  two 
in  number.  One  of  these  is  a  deep,  melodious 
bass  voice,  which  would  earn  recognition  in 
any  choir  or  chorus.  The  other  is  a  spark  of 
originality  which  may  be  his  and  may  not.  I 
never  asked. 

Every  baseball  "  fan  "  has  heard  the  stereo- 
typed, raucous  barking:  '^  Get  your  cards  here 
—  you  can't  tell  a  player  without  a  score-card." 
Half-way  up  the  long  incline  which  leads  to  the 
New  York  grandstand  you  begin  to  hear  a  deep 
bass  voice  chanting  with  great  distinctness :  — 
* '  Know  the  game  —  know  the  runs  —  know  the 
hits  —  know  the  errors."  As  you  near  his 
stand  at  the  top  of  the  incline  you  see  in  large 
print  on  his  cap:  *'  Score-cards."  That  is  the 
only  explanation  of  his  monologue,  which  con- 
tinues slowly:  ''  Know  the  inning  —  know  the 
out  —  know  the  pitcher  —  know  the  batter  — 
know  the  game,"  and  so  on, 

314 


SCORING  THE   GAME  315 

Splendid  advice,  but  how  many  patrons  who 
pause  to  drop  a  coin  in  this  vender's  palm 
and  receive  a  score-card,  without  interrupting 
the  seemingly  automatic  monologue,  really 
' '  know  ' '  how  to  get  the  best  value  out  of  that 
score-card  ? 

Frequently  ''  you  can't  tell  a  player  '*  with 
a  score-card,  unless  you  know  him,  because  of 
carelessness  in  printing  or  changes  in  the 
teams.  But  the  electric  score-boards  are  rem- 
edying that  defect  in  great  measure,  wherever 
they  are  in  use.  It  is  possible  with  this  me- 
chanical assistance  for  almost  any  one  to 
''  know  "  the  batter,  the  pitcher,  the  inning, 
the  out,  and  the  runs  made.  A  great  many 
patrons  are  quite  content  with  that  knowledge 
and  think  they  "  know  the  game  "  thoroughly. 
If  one  does  not  care  to  know  how  to  make  a 
score-card  teach  one  more  baseball  than  that, 
it  will  be  useless  for  one  to  read  farther. 

A  majority  of  the  spectators  ''  score  "  a  game 
in  some  fashion,  if  only  by  the  simplest  possi- 
ble system  —  an  "  0  "  for  an  out  and  a  straight 
mark  for  a  run.  That  enables  one  to  keep  fair 
tab  on  the  progress  of  the  game  and  is  not  to 
be  scoffed  at.  A  smaller  class  record  the  hits 
and  errors  after  a  fashion.  But  only  occasion- 
ally, outside  of  the  press  boxes  of  the  ball 
parks,  will  you  find  a  spectator  who  actually 
scores  a  game  in  detail.  One  says  it  is  too  much 
bother  or  takes  too  much  attention  away  from 


316         THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

tlie  game.  Another  gets  rattled  and  skips  a 
play  or  two,  then  fails  to  see  a  grand  catch  or 
a  splendid  hit  while  trying  to  straighten  out  his 
score  card.  He  throws  it  away  in  disgust,  for 
spectators  go  to  ball  games  to  see  them,  not  to 
record  and  write  about  them. 

The  great  army  of  baseball  devotees  over- 
estimate the  difficulty  and  perplexity  of  scor- 
ing, and  underestimate  the  zest  it  adds  to  the 
game.  It  will  surprise  any  one,  who  tries  it, 
to  find  how  quickly  a  system  can  be  learned 
which  will  take  little  more  time  than  is  re- 
quired to  mark  down  just  the  outs  and  the  runs. 
It  is  all  a  matter  of  habit  and  of  learning  a 
simple  system  of  *'  baseball  shorthand."  Num- 
ber the  fielding  positions  of  the  players  from 
1  to  9,  then  choose  a  dozen  or  so  symbols,  which 
will  be  easy  to  remember,  to  indicate  as  many 
different  kinds  of  plays.  Practise  using  these 
until  familiar  with  them  and  it  will  astonish 
you  to  see  how  quickly  you  can  record  each 
play. 

There  are  almost  as  many  different  systems 
of  scoring  as  there  are  baseball  scorers.  The 
systems  used  by  experienced  scorers  usually 
are  based  on  a  few  common  principles  but  differ 
in  variety  of  detail  and  in  the  s\Tiibols  used. 
All  scorers  number  the  fielding  positions  but 
not  all  in  the  same  way.  Not  because  it  is  in 
any  way  better  than  dozens  of  other  systems, 
but  because  I  am  more  familiar  with  it,  I  will 


SCORING  THE  GAME  317 

confine  the  article  to  describing  one  system.  In 
passing  it  may  be  added  that  my  shorthand 
record  of  a  game,  if  sent  to  another  city  and  to 
a  person  using  an  entirely  different  system, 
could  be  translated  into  a  correct  account  of 
that  game  by  that  person  after  a  few  minutes' 
study. 

Starting  with  the  pitcher's  position  as  No.  1, 
the  catcher  is  No.  2 ;  first  base,  3 ;  second  base, 
4;  third  base,  5;  shortstop,  6;  left  field,  7; 
center,  8;  and  right  field,  9.  Always  it  should 
be  kept  in  mind  that  these  numbers  mean  posi- 
tions, not  individual  players,  because  the  posi- 
tions are  the  same  in  every  game,  everywhere. 
The  players  are  not. 

Merely  to  emphasize  this  point,  there  is  a 
baseball  classic  which  has  been  told  so  often 
people  are  beginning  to  believe  it.  Wlien  base- 
ball was  very  new  in  the  new  northwest,  John 
McCloskey  was  trying  out  a  lot  of  green  mate- 
rial one  spring  for  one  of  the  many  minor 
league  teams  he  installed  in  his  earlier  days. 
One  day  a  young  man  from  a  neighboring  town 
applied  for  a  job.  The  manager  told  the 
youngster  to  go  out  in  right  field  and  see  what 
he  could  do.  The  youth  turned,  hesitated  and 
came  back:  "  Say,  boss,  which  is  right  field?  I 
never  was  here  before."  McCloskey  didn't 
keep  the  young  man  long  enough  to  ask  his 
name.  Now  when  a  player  wants  to  indicate 
an  absolute  lack  of  *  *  baseball  sense, ' '  he  says : 


318        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

'*  You  make  me  think  of  McCloskey's  out- 
fielder. ' ' 

With  the  figures  1  to  9  and  the  letter  E  it  is 
possible  to  score  every  defensive  play  made  in 
a  game.  That  is  not  complex,  is  it?  Here  are  a 
few  samples:  The  batsman  hits  to  the  short- 
stop and  is  thrown  out  at  first  base.  It  is  just 
as  easy  to  write  6-3  as  it  is  to  put  down  "  0." 
The  next  man  hits  a  fly  to  center  field  and  it 
can  be  recorded  by  the  figure  8.  The  next  bats- 
man hits  to  the  third-baseman,  who  fumbles  and 
loses  the  out.  Two  characters,  E5,  indicate  the 
error  and  who  made  it.  This  lucky  batsman 
tries  to  steal  second  and  is  thrown  out,  catcher 
to  second  baseman.  That  is  scored  2-4.  With 
a  runner  on  first  the  ball  is  hit  to  the  second- 
baseman,  who  starts  a  double  play,  by  way  of 
the  shortstop  to  first  base.  Put  down  4-6  oppo- 
site the  name  of  the  man  retired  at  second  and 
6-3  opposite  the  batsman.  Then  join  the  two 
plays  with  a  line  and  you  have  that  double  play 
recorded  so  that  any  scorer  from  Maine  to  Cal- 
ifornia can  understand  it. 

Suppose  a  runner  on  third  tries  to  score  on 
a  grounder  to  the  second-baseman  but  the  ball 
is  thrown  home  in  time  to  turn  back  the  runner. 
The  catcher  chases  him  and  tosses  the  ball  to 
the  third-baseman.  The  runner  starts  home 
again  with  the  third-baseman  in  pursuit,  but 
the  ball  has  to  be  tossed  to  the  pitcher  who  now 
covers  the  plate.    Once  more  the  runner  ^rns 


SCORING   THE   GAME  319 

back,  chased  by  the  pitcher  this  time,  until  he 
runs  into  the  ball  in  the  hands  of  the  shortstop, 
who  has  covered  third  and  taken  a  short  throw 
from  the  pitcher.  It  would  take  a  long  time  to 
write  all  that  in  a  score-book,  but  the  story  is 
told  just  as  plainly  by  the  figures  4-2-5-1-6. 
The  first  figure  should  show  the  fielder  who 
started  the  play;  the  last  figure  the  one  who 
completed  it. 

For  the  offense  (the  plays  made  by  a  team 
while  at  bat)  few  symbols  are  required  in  a 
simple  system.  There  are  six  ways  for  a  bats- 
man to  reach  first  base.  If  he  gets  there  on  an 
opponent's  error,  the  way  to  score  it  already 
has  been  indicated  (E  and  the  number  of  the 
position  erring.)  If  he  makes  a  base  hit  indi- 
cate it  by  the  plus  sign  (-|-) .  For  an  extra  base 
hit  repeat  the  sign  (-] — |-,  for  a  two-base  hit; 
-j — I — I — |-,  for  a  home  run).  A  base  on  balls  is 
shown  by  four  dots  ( :  :  ) .  The  sign  for  a  bats- 
man hit  by  pitched  ball  is  HPB.  Once  in  a 
great  while  a  batter  is  given  first  base  for  in- 
terference. This  can  be  indicated  by  a  mar- 
ginal note.  The  only  other  way  to  reach  first 
base  is  on  a  play  made  to  retire  a  teammate 
at  some  other  base  —  a  ''  fielder's  choice,"  as 
it  is  called.  Use  the  multiplication  sign  (X) 
to  show  that  fact.  A^Hien  the  batter  makes  a 
sacrifice  hit  put  an  asterisk  (*)  in  front  of  the 
figure,  or  figures,  used  to  score  the  play. 

After  reaching  first  base  the   runner  may 


320        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

advance  by  stealing.  Indicate  it  by  the  letter 
S.  If  he  advances  on  a  balk,  use  BK;  if  on  a 
wild  pitch,  WP;  if  on  a  passed  ball,  P.  If  he 
is  left  on  a  base  when  the  side  is  retired  show 
that  by  the  letter  L,  but  if  he  completes  the  cir- 
cuit indicate  the  run  by  a  magnified  period  ( • ). 

There  are  many  different  kinds  of  blank 
forms  in  score-cards  and  score-books,  but  that 
need  not  bother  any  one.  The  principle  is  the 
same  in  all.  "Whenever  obtainable  I  use  the 
form  known  as  the  "  Harry  Wright  system  " 
and  distinguished  by  the  fact  each  blank  is 
made  up  of  rows  of  squares,  each  square  con- 
taining a  diamond  and  divided  into  four  sec- 
tions. The  lower  right-hand  corner  of  each 
square  is  the  place  to  set  down  how  a  batsman 
reaches  or  does  not  reach  first  base.  In  the 
upper  right-hand  corner  put  do^vn  how  a  player 
goes  from  first  to  second  or  is  put  out  there. 
The  upper  left-hand  corner  is  for  telling  what 
happened  between  second  and  third,  and  the 
lower  left-hand  corner  is  for  the  journey  from 
third  home.  If  the  runner  scores,  place  a  dot 
in  the  diamond  inclosed  by  that  square  to  indi- 
cate the  run.  In  any  other  form  of  score  blank 
the  same  method  can  be  followed,  using  one 
corner  of  each  square  for  a  base  in  the  order 
in  which  the  runner  goes  around. 

The  professional  scorer  uses  more  symbols 
than  these,  as  will  be  explained,  but  with  the 
foregoing  characters  at  one's  finger-tips  any 


SCORING   THE   GAME  321 

one  can  score  every  play  made  in  a  game. 
What  is  more  useful,  such  a  score  card,  if  pre- 
served, can  be  consulted  ten  days  or  ten  years 
afterward  and  the  game  can  be  played  over  in 
memory  simply  by  reading  the  plays.  And  if 
any  one  tries  to  tell  you  that  game  was  not  won 
or  lost  '*  that  way  "  you  can  win  your  argu- 
ment with  that  score  card. 

Many  baseball  reporters  and  official  scorers 
use  systems  containing  no  more  detail  than 
already  described.  No  more  is  needed  to  re- 
cord everything  that  goes  to  make  up  a  player's 
batting  or  fielding  average.  Those  reporters 
who  need  more  detail  for  their  descriptions  of 
games  can  trust  to  memory  for  a  few  hours 
regarding  the  direction  of  important  hits  or 
the  nature  of  the  errors  made.  This  isn't  a 
safe  way,  however,  particularly  when  writing 
up  important  battles,  like  those  of  a  world's 
series,  when  a  paper  and  its  readers  often  de- 
mand accurate  description  of  practically  every 
play.  For  that  purpose  it  is  necessary  only  to 
amplify  the  system  already  outlined  and  it  can 
be  done  gradually. 

Often  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  order  in 
which  players  were  put  out.  When  men  on 
bases  are  retired  this  will  not  always  be  clear 
unless  the  outs  are  numbered  in  their  turn. 
For  that  purpose  write  the  number  of  the  out 
(1,  2  or  3)  beneath  the  characters  telling  how 
the  out  was  made,  giving  it  the  form  of  a  frac- 


322        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

tion.  Then  in  the  matter  of  fly  balls,  not  all 
of  them  are  alike  and  you  cannot  always  re- 
member whether  Jones  hit  an  easy  curving  fly 
or  a  line  drive  to  Smith  in  right  field.  To  dis- 
tinguish them  I  use  the  letter  F  for  an  ordinary 
fly,  D  for  a  line  drive  and  P  for  a  pop-up  or 
"  Texas  league  "  fly  that  is  caught.  Some- 
times a  foul  fly  is  captured,  and  that  is  shown 
by  using  FF. 

Not  all  errors  are  of  the  same  kind.  For 
instance,  E5  indicates  the  batsman  reached  first 
on  the  third  baseman's  error.  But  it  does  not 
tell  wiiether  it  was  a  fumbled  grounder,  a  wild 
throw  or  a  muffed  fly.  If,  instead  of  the  vague 
E,  you  had  used  M  to  indicate  a  fumbled 
grounder,  or  W  to  indicate  a  wild  throw,  or  0 
to  indicate  a  muffed  fly,  you  would  not  have 
to  trust  to  memory  to  know  what  misdeed  5 
committed.  There  is  another  complication. 
The  third  baseman  may  do  his  part  by  making 
a  perfect  throw,  but  the  first  baseman  muffs 
the  ball  and  the  runner  is  safe.  That  is  shown 
by  5 — 03,  meaning  that  Mr.  3  muffed  Mr.  5's 
throw.  In  recording  strikeouts  the  figure  2  is 
not  sufficiently  specific,  so  the  letter  K  is  used 
with  it. 

The  direction  of  a  safe  hit  is  told  by  a  small 
figure  under  the  base  hit  sign,  showing  the 
number  of  the  fielder  to  whom  or  near  whom 
the  hit  went.  The  figure  8  under  a  base  hit 
means  a  hit  to  center.     If  it  is  desired  to  be 


SCORING   THE   GAME  323 

more  exact,  a  hit  to  right  center  can  be  indi- 
cated by  putting  the  8  at  the  right  of  the  plus 
sign.  A  system  of  scoring  which  insures  a 
permanent  record  of  all  the  plays  in  a  game 
will  show  how  every  baserunner  reached  each 
base  made  by  him.  If  he  completes  the  circuit 
the  four  squares  will  contain  the  record  of  how 
he  reached  each  base.  Except  when  a  base  is 
stolen  or  gained  on  a  battery  error,  the  scoring 
of  which  already  has  been  explained,  the  run- 
ner generally  is  advanced  by  a  succeeding  bats- 
man or  while  a  successful  or  unsuccessful  at- 
tempt is  being  made  to  put  out  a  succeeding 
batsman.  To  indicate  the  advancing  of  a  run- 
ner in  these  cases  use  the  letters  A,  B,  C,  D. 
When  a  runner  advances  on  something  done  by 
or  to  the  batsman  immediately  following  him, 
use  A  to  show  it.  Use  B  to  indicate  an  advance 
on  something  that  happened  to  the  second  suc- 
ceeding batsman,  and  so  on. 

By  this  time  perhaps  the  reader  is  of  the 
opinion  that  baseball  scoring  is  pretty  complex, 
after  all,  but  a  great  deal  of  the  system  here  set 
forth  may  be  omitted.  Beginning  with  the  sim- 
ple system  outlined  at  the  start  one  may  am- 
plify it,  by  adopting  more  detail,  as  far  as  de- 
sired. The  advantage  of  the  complete,  de- 
tailed system  lies  in  its  permanence. 

For  illustration  I  have  taken  the  score  of  the 
final  game  of  the  world's  series  between  Ath- 
lectics   and   Cubs  in  1910.     It  is   reproduced 


324         THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

in  two  sections,  diagram  1  representing  the 
plays  while  the  Athletics  were  at  bat  and  dia- 
gram 2  those  while  the  Cubs  were  at  bat.  With- 
out consulting  newspaper  files  or  any  source  of 
information,  except  this  shorthand  score  of 
that  game,  any  desired  amount  of  details  can 
be  written,  not  only  now,  months  after  the 
game,  but  twenty  years  from  now,  when  even 
the  names  of  the  players  may  be  forgotten. 
Following  is  a  partial  translation  of  the  dia- 
grams : 

First  inning  —  Athletics :  Hartsel  hit  a  sin- 
gle past  the  shortstop,  stole  second  and  went 
the  rest  of  the  way  home  on  what  happened  in 
the  square  opposite  Collins'  name.  Lord  struck 
out.  Collins  hit  safely  to  center  field,  and  that, 
of  course,  w^as  what  let  Hartsel  score  from 
second  base.  Collins  stole  second  and  was  left 
there.  Baker  fouled  to  the  catcher.  Davis 
struck  out.  For  the  Cubs  we  find  on  the  other 
diagram  that  Sheckard  hit  a  grounder  to  the 
first-baseman  and  the  pitcher  covered  first, 
making  the  putout.  Schulte  and  Hofman  both 
hit  grounders  to  the  second-baseman  and  were 
thrown  out  at  first. 

Second  inning  —  Athletics:  Murphy  was 
thrown  out  from  third  base  to  first.  Barry 
popped  a  fly  to  the  shortstop.  Lapp  struck  out. 
For  the  Cubs:  Chance  made  a  two-base  hit  to 
left  and  went  to  third  when  Zimmerman  sacri- 
ficed, the  pitcher  fielding  the  bunt  and  throwing 


SCORING  THE  GAME  325 

to  the  second-baseman  who  covered  first.  Stein- 
feldt  singled  and  Chance  scored.  Steinfeldt 
was  left  on  first  as  Tinker  fouled  out  to  the 
first-baseman  and  Archer  flied  to  center. 

Third  inning  —  Athletics:  Coombs  struck 
out.  Hartsel  was  thrown  out  from  second  to 
first  and  Lord  from  the  pitcher  to  first  base. 
For  the  Cubs :  Brown  was  out  from  pitcher  to 
first  base,  Sheckard  out,  second  to  first. 
Schulte  made  a  hit  to  center,  tried  to  steal  and 
was  thrown  out,  catcher  to  second-baseman. 

Fourth  inning  —  Athletics:  Collins  hit  a 
grounder  to  the  first-baseman,  who  touched  the 
bag  himself.  Baker  struck  out.  Davis  went 
out,  second  to  first.  For  the  Cubs:  Hofman 
drew  a  base  on  balls  and  was  forced  out  at  sec- 
ond base,  pitcher  to  shortstop,  when  Chance 
tried  to  advance  him.  Chance  reached  first  on 
this  fielder's  choice  play  and  went  to  second 
when  Zimmerman  made  a  single  to  left.  Stein- 
feldt hit  a  grounder  to  the  third-baseman,  who 
fumbled  it.  Chance  reached  third,  Zimmerman 
second  and  Steinfeldt  first  on  the  error.  In 
that  hole,  with  the  bases  full,  one  out  and  the 
score  tied,  Tinker  and  Archer  struck  out. 

Fifth  inning  —  Athletics :  Murphy  hit  safely 
past  third,  went  to  second  on  Barry's  sacrifice, 
pitcher  to  first,  and  scored  when  Lapp  singled 
to  center.  Coombs  was  out,  pitcher  to  first,  and 
Hartsel  struck  out.  For  the  Cubs :  Brown  was 
out,  second  to  first.    Sheckard  singled  but  was 


,        1 

4J       O 

0 

o 

-» 

o 

0       o  I 

O 

o 

"• 

o    ; 

■s     O 

o 

:f- 

o 

» 

o 

^ 

f^ 

to 

:!■ 

<s-    1 

£    rt 

W) 

:*• 

o 

o- 

o 

r« 

:!- 

■>. 

J? 

ir>     : 

»     ^ 

^ 

CO 

o 

o 

fr> 

0 

- 

«- 

O 

C*    ' 

ae    c» 

-, 

o 

,, 

-» 

Ct 

o 

o 

o 

r* 

5    VO 

:*• 

w 

u> 

en 

:t 

f« 

i- 

i- 

\ 

I 

i 

J 

A 

i 

A 

T 

so 

^j     ' 

^  -/>- 

V  \_ 

y\. 

V  V 

y\. 

V  V 

-/   V 

' 

^    ^^ 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

V 

1 

Y 

>\ 

V 

%    ( 

dA 

y\_ 

/y 

A 

yY 

A 

\ 

O    ^ 

r—     Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

\ 

ky 

</l;: 

+A-P 

jcl 

1 

/i^ 

"V 

S,^ 

3>K> 

<p 

jY 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

o\ 

«Vv>< 

+X? 

■f-A^ 

'V\< 

«cA:: 

yAji 

-ij^t 

/y 

iJ/V 

\-t 

D\*y 

\*  X 

-/  \- 

\*/ 

"K*/" 

tC^j- 

\  / 

\  / 

«c/< 

<Y< 

V>  ]^ 

mYm 

^Yl 

xYj: 

Y 

Y 

*^\ 

k 

Jl 

/^ 

At" 

+/s^ 

w. 

i 

\~^ 

(^  Y 

V" 

Y 

1 

<Y-i 

Y 

Y 

o\ 

A 

i 

Af 

J^ 

1 

/ly 

k 

\o 

;^ 

coy 

1 

T 

Y 

Y 

L 

o\ 

J 

jU 

1 

/[^ 

i 

</^ 

M 

"V\f 

/V 

V 

^ 

\o-0- 

Y 

Y 

Y 

aY 

Y 

^^' 

k 

/^ 

A? 

Jsy 

^ 

k 

\o 

-^ 

"*  V 

Y" 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

<vv 

^^ 

/fcy 

Xi" 

1 

^ 

1 

\ 

a)c 

\o 

2 

co-O- 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

o\ 

^; 

^  V 

<> 

<> 

<> 

Y 

<> 

"V" 

^ 

"v^ 

A 

'Jt 

/y 

^ 

V 

*J 

amri 

Y 

-jY 

Y 

Y 

Y 

Y 

^\ 

If     r- 

OO 

:t- 

u> 

cr> 

o- 

-a 

c? 

— 

S 

"1 

5. 

j 

V 

•  -> 
> 

8 

3- 

•3- 

5 

'-a 

:  i 

o 
o 

:! 

i    -J 

i    O 

PD 

Q 

^ 

R 

-^ 

CJ 

w 

U      O 

0 

0 

o 

- 

o 

o 

0 

3     O 

-* 

K       O 

o 

o 

o 

ix> 

•-. 

^ 

0    . 

0     O 

m 

c 
c 

3     ^ 

o 

-. 

^» 

o 

-. 

o    < 

3    0 

^ 

c 

2      ^ 

-. 

0 

ri 

rt 

-. 

o 

■^ 

0     0 

cr~ 

a 

C       -«. 

o 

o 

-^ 

o 

o 

o 

o 

0    o 

r* 

a 

S  :h 

^ 

CO 

:i- 

<o 

i^ 

:t- 

:i-  ' 

■<^  -^ 

CO 

4.-, 

-y\ 

"A 

A 

A 

"f 

■  «S   '' 

'  1^ 

Y 

V 

Y 

=»\ 

^1  c 

>/v 

Yy 

A 

\ 

"  Y 

Y 

\/ 

\ 

^< 

1 

M 

-•/^T" 

V>. 

!  0 

"9    - 

» \/ 

1 

Y 

°\ 

-<? 

JU 

vV 

Yv 

Yv 

y 

0. 

«cp 

Y 

Y 

»»\ 

t 

A 

M' 

h 

1 

\o 

1  h 

"  i 

Y 

Y 

o\ 

-.  A 

)^^ 

^X^ 

^ 

yl 

\^ 

c 

"V 

Ny/ 

jY 

Y 

Y 

o\ 

^Wo. 

W\i^ 

jiy 

i 

\^ 

5^  ^ 

t)\> 

Y 

Y 

c\ 

JL 

n-i:: 

<Vn>< 

w 

■^A^ 

W 

1 

S^^ 

^   ^ 

*  Y 

(ffVU 

-lY 

1 

Y 

cX 

"♦-   " 

0<^ 

-(\ 

<> 

■/t 

<> 

^ 

i 

Ar 

-ys# 

o^' 

i 

y 

^   < 

"^  V 

\/M 

1 

Y 

-^ 

Jby 

r^ 

J5^ 

A, 

)^ 

i 

\o 

-J   ' 

^  \/ 

Y 

r 

Y 

o\ 

\v_ ' 

«    ^ 

cr- 

OO 

CO 

rt 

'/> 

^ 

c< 

-.   0 

<r. 

;0 

CO 

-T^ 

f, 

•a> 

ri 

-cJ 

k2 

1 

d 

c 

c3 

0 

c 

O 

c 

6 

CO 

V 

o 
< 

J 

_ 

328        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

forced  out,  shortstop  to  second-baseman,  when 
Schulte  hit  a  grounder  to  short.  Schulte  beat 
the  double  play  to  first  but  tried  to  steal  and 
was  thrown  out  by  the  catcher. 

Try  your  hand  at  the  sixth  and  seventh  in- 
nings.   All  plays  on  both  sides  were  simple. 

Eighth  inning  —  Athletics:  Coombs  singled 
but  was  forced  out  at  second  when  Hartsel  hit 
to  the  shortstop.  Hartsel  reached  first  on  the 
play  and  stole  second.  Lord  doubled,  scoring 
Hartsel.  Collins  hit  a  two-bagger  past  first 
base,  scoring  Lord.  Collins  stole  third  but  was 
put  out,  second-baseman  to  catcher,  when  he 
tried  to  score  on  Baker's  grounder.  Davis 
drew  a  base  on  balls,  which  sent  Baker  to  sec- 
ond. Murphy  hit  one  too  hot  for  the  second- 
baseman  to  handle.  Baker  scored  on  it.  Davis 
went  all  the  way  from  first  base  home  on  the 
same  play  but  ought  to  have  been  out  at  the 
plate  if  the  second-baseman  had  not  made  a 
Avild  throw  after  getting  the  ball  again. 

Murphy,  who  made  the  hit,  ran  to  second  on 
the  play  made  to  stop  Davis  at  the  plate,  and 
kept  right  on  to  third  before  the  wild  throw 
was  recovered.  He  scored  from  third  on  a  wild 
pitch.  Barry  was  given  a  base  on  balls.  Lapp 
was  out,  pitcher  to  first  base.  For  the  Cubs : 
Sheckard  made  a  two-base  hit  and  advanced 
to  third  while  Schulte  was  being  put  out,  short 
to  first.  Hofman  struck  out.  Chance  singled  to 
right,  scoring  Sheckard.    Zimmerman  filed  out. 


I 


SCORING  THE  GAME  329 

Ninth  inning  —  Athletics:  Coombs  and 
Hartsel  went  out,  pitcher  to  first.  Lord  took 
a  base  on  balls  and  went  to  third  on  Collins' 
two  base  hit.  Both  runners  were  left  when  the 
first-baseman  caught  Baker's  foul.  For  the 
Cubs:  Steinfeldt  popped  a  fly  to  center. 
Tinker  hit  a  longer  fly  to  the  same  fielder. 
Archer  singled  to  right.  Kling  batted  for 
Brown  and  hit  to  the  shortstop,  who  stepped 
on  second  base,  forcing  Archer  out  and  ending 
the  world's  series. 

If  one  wants  to  know  who  *'  second-base- 
man," ''  shortstop,"  ''  pitcher,"  and  so  forth, 
are  in  the  above  translation  it  is  necessary  only 
to  look  at  the  opposite  team  to  find  out,  if  by 
any  possibility  one  has  forgotten  who  played 
in  that  game. 

In  the  totals  beneath  the  innings  the  top  row 
of  figures  shows  the  runs  made  in  each  inning ; 
the  lower  row  shows  the  hits  in  each  inning. 
The  columns  of  figures  at  the  right  of  each  dia- 
gram are  the  so-called  ''  box-scores  "  which 
appear  in  the  newspapers.  Therein  are  shown 
the  times  at  bat,  runs,  safe  hits,  putouts,  assists 
and  errors  made  by  each  player  in  the  game. 
The  fielding  record  of  each  player,  it  must  be 
remembered,  is  made  up  from  the  opposite  side 
of  the  book  or  card.  For  example,  the  '^  Mr. 
8  "  who  put  out  Archer  in  the  second  inning 
was  Lord,  not  Hofman. 


ROWING 


EOWINa 

Of  all  sports  common  among  school  and  col- 
lege students,  none  is  greater  as  a  muscle  and 
strength  builder  than  rowing.  But  the  very 
factors  which  make  it  an  excellent  developer 
of  brawn  also  make  it  a  dangerous  sport  unless 
carefully  supervised.  Rowing  demands  great 
muscular  exertion  and  the  heart  and  lungs  are 
put  under  heavy  strain.  For  this  reason  it 
should  not  be  indulged  in,  in  its  more  strenuous 
forms,  except  by  boys  and  men  who  are  phys- 
ically fitted  for  its  requirements,  and  it  is  there- 
fore not  an  ideal  sport  for  interscholastic  com- 
petition except  when  under  the  direction  of 
competent  persons.  These  remarks,  however, 
are  directed  towards  organized  rowing  with 
active  competition.  In  its  less  strenuous  forms, 
rowing  can  be  tried  by  almost  any  soundly  built 
boy  with  both  pleasurable  and  healthful  re- 
sults. 

Crew  rowing,  because  of  its  team-work,  of- 
fers the  most  enjo^nnent  and  the  best  training. 
At  the  same  time,  whenever  competition  en- 
ters, this  form  becomes  the  most  strenuous, 
and  the  younger  boys  who  wish  to  become 
oarsmen  should  confine  their  efforts  to  becom- 

333 


334        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

ing  familiar  with  boats  and  oars,  learning  to 
scull,  to  row  in  the  pair-oar  or  in  the  barge, 
but  leave  the  contesting  of  races  to  their  older 
and  more  developed  comrades.  At  most, 
younger  boys  ought  not  to  put  themselves  to 
greater  strains  than  races  of  a  quarter  or  half 
a  mile.  This  does  not  preclude  the  boy  who  is 
fond  of  the  water  from  having  the  very  best 
fun  in  rowing  or  gaining  the  very  best  kind  of 
healthful  exercise.  This  is  the  same  precau- 
tion which  the  boy  who  runs  should  take  in  not 
attempting  much  competition  on  the  track  or 
in  the  field. 

Although  the  majority  of  the  men  who  are 
members  of  crews  which  win  distinction  are  of 
good  weight  and  stature,  no  boy  who  has  a 
sound  body  and  a  fair  amount  of  strength  need 
feel  that  he  cannot  enjoy  rowing  and  even  be- 
come proficient  in  some  of  its  many  forms.  I 
have  known  many  instances  of  men  who 
weighed  not  more  than  one  hundred  and  thirty- 
five  pounds  becoming  skilled  and  fast  scullers. 
As  in  nearly  all  other  branches  of  sport,  skill 
will  often  more  than  make  up  for  size  when 
a  fair  amount  of  strength  is  at  hand.  In  the 
large  English  schools  at  least  half  of  the  boys 
learn  to  handle  the  sweep  as  well  as  the  sculls 
and  big  and  little  enjoy  many  afternoons  on 
the  rivers. 

A  boy  who  is  learning  to  row  should  be  able 
to  swim.    The  light  craft  in  which  most  rowing 


ROWING  335 

is  done  are  very  ticklish  machines  when  in  the 
hands  of  the  unskilled,  and  a  spill  into  the  water 
is  not  an  uncommon  event  with  the  novice.  One 
should  never  begin  his  rowing  in  the  lighter 
and  more  speedy  shell,  for  not  only  is  there 
danger  of  breaking  one  of  these  fragile  boats, 
but  the  beginner  is  more  likely  to  form  bad 
habits  when  his  attention  is  engrossed  in  keep- 
ing his  boat  right  side  up  rather  than  with  his 
rowing.  He  should  start  in  a  sliding-seat 
barge  or  on  a  rowing-machine.  There  are  many 
types  of  barges,  varying  from  the  pair-oared 
to  the  eight-oared  barge  and  there  are  an  equal 
number  of  satisfactory  rowing-machines.  At 
many  of  the  larger  universities,  the  men  are 
taught  to  row  in  tanks  where  a  stationary  boat 
is  rigged  with  all  the  equipment  necessary  for 
rowing  and  with  oars  which  have  blades  with 
large  holes.  These  holes  and  the  fact  that  the 
water  is  pumped  through  the  tank  at  a  rapid 
rate  gives  the  oarsman  very  much  the  same 
conditions  that  he  would  meet  in  a  moving  boat, 
while  at  the  same  time  he  has  artificial  steadi- 
ness which  allows  him  to  put  all  his  attention 
on  his  rowing.  Another  excellent  way  to  learn 
to  row  is  to  enter  a  boat  with  an  experienced 
partner,  who  will  steady  and  teach  at  the  same 
time. 

In  sweep-oar  rowing,  that  is,  rowing  where 
each  member  of  the  crew  pulls  but  one  oar, 
there  are  many  different  styles  and  many  dif- 


336        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

ferent  strokes,  but  all  the  best  aim  at  certain 
fundamentals  which  are  necessary  to  get  the 
greatest  amount  of  speed  out  of  the  energy 
applied.  I  shall  briefly  run  over  some  of  these 
points. 

The  thing  which  bothers  the  novice  most  of 
all  and  which  he  is  longest  in  mastering  is  the 
sliding  seat.  It  runs  very  easily  and  to  the 
beginner  it  is  often  more  of  a  handicap  than  an 
advantage.  Therefore  it  is  well  to  start  at 
once  to  learn  its  control.  To  this  end,  one  rule 
can  be  laid  down,  the  slide  should  always  fol- 
low and  never  precede  the  shoulders  and  back 
in  the  backward  and  forward  swing.  At  the 
beginning  of  the  stroke  the  seat  should  be  al- 
most if  not  quite  at  the  end  of  the  slide  nearest 
the  stern  of  the  boat.  The  body  is  bent  for- 
ward along  the  keel,  and  the  arms  swing  out 
with  the  oar.  The  body  should  not  follow  the 
arms  and  the  oar.  It  is  very  important  that 
this  full  reach,  which  is  the  term  applied  to  this 
part  of  the  stroke,  should  not  be  carried  to  ex- 
cess. If  the  oarsman  leans  forward  as  far  as 
he  can,  he  will  assume  a  position  from  which 
it  is  almost  impossible  to  make  a  quick,  power- 
ful catch.  On  the  other  hand,  if  he  is  leaning 
comfortably  well  forward  with  his  arms  ex- 
tended but  not  over  extended,  he  will  find  him- 
self in  a  strong  position  from  which  he  can 
move  very  quickly  and  exert  his  full  strength 
on  the  oar. 


THE     CATCH.       KOTICK    THE     EASY, 

STRONG  POSITION  OF  THE  BODY 

AT  THE  FULL  BEACH.     EVEKY- 

THING    IS    WELL-POISED 

FOR  THE    CATCH. 


IN  THE  MIDDLE  OF  THE  PULL.  NOTE 

THE  STRAIGHT  ARMS,   THE  DRIVE 

OF  THE  LEGS,  AND  THE  SWING 

OF  THE  SHOULDERS. 


THE  FINISH.        THE   LEGS   ARE    DOWN 

TIGHT   ON    THE     STRETCHER.       THE 

BODY  HAS  SWUNG  SLIGHTLY  PAST 

THE  PERPENDICULAR.  THE  ARMS 

HAVE  BEEN  DRAWN  SHARPLY 

INTO    THE    BODY    FOR    A 

HARD  FINISH. 


THE    RECOVER.      THE      HANDS     HAVE 
BEEN   SENT  RAPIDLY    AWAY   FROM 
THE    BODY,  THE  BODY  IS  SWING- 
ING FORWARD.      THE  SEAT  IS 
STILL  HELD  BACK  AS  THE 
LEGS  ARE  LOCKED  DOWN 
ON   THE    STRETCHER. 


PRACTICE  ON  THE  MACHINE 


ROWING  337 

So  far  we  have  said  nothing  about  the  feet 
and  legs,  which  play  such  an  important  part  in 
rowing.  The  feet  should  rest  squarely  upon  the 
foot-rest  or  *'  stretcher,"  which  is  placed  close 
or  far  away  from  the  end  of  the  slide  accord- 
ing to  the  size  of  the  oarsman.  This  stretcher 
should  never  be  so  close  as  to  prevent  the  seat 
from  coming  to  the  end  of  the  slide  when  at 
full  reach.  At  the  same  time  it  should  be  close 
enough  to  act  as  a  brake  to  the  slide  as  the  seat 
approaches  the  end,  so  that  the  oarsman  will 
be  conscious  of  a  tightening  of  the  muscles  of 
his  legs  and  an  ability  to  push  on  the  stretcher 
with  all  his  strength. 

The  instant  the  body  comes  to  the  full  reach, 
the  oar  should  enter  the  water  and  full  power 
be  applied  so  that  the  stroke  of  the  oar  will  be 
begun  immediately.  To  do  this  the  hands  must 
be  raised  sharply,  while  at  the  same  moment 
the  shoulders  swing  their  weight  on  to  the  oar 
and  the  legs  are  driven  down  hard.  By  the 
time  the  body  assumes  the  perpendicular  and 
while  the  arms  are  still  straight,  the  legs  are 
down  being  completely  straightened  in  one 
motion.  This  shove  will  send  the  seat  spinning 
back  along  the  runners.  If  the  leg  drive  is 
made  before  the  shoulders  are  started  the  slide 
will  run  away  ahead  of  the  shoulders  and  in  all 
probability  the  powerful  drive  of  the  legs  will 
be  wasted.  The  body  will  have  assumed  a  weak 
position  similar  to  that  seen  when  an  oarsman 


338        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

overreaches,  in  which  event  the  whole  burden  of 
the  stroke  falls  on  the  shoulders  and  back  and 
the  greater  j^art  of  the  power  is  lost.  By  start- 
ing the  shoulders,  back,  and  legs  together  and 
from  a  position  which  is  easy  and  comfortable, 
it  will  be  seen  that  the  leg  drive  comes  at  a 
time  when  it  can  add  most  to  the  speed  and 
power  of  the  stroke.  Furthermore,  as  the 
shoulders  and  back  are  moving  at  full  speed 
when  the  slide  starts,  they  will  have  passed  the 
perpendicular  when  the  end  of  the  slide  is 
reached  and  thus  shoulders  and  slide  will  finish 
their  excursion  together.  Still  further  to  add 
to  the  unity  of  the  stroke,  the  arms  should  be 
sharply  brought  into  the  body  at  approximately 
the  same  time  that  the  slide  is  finished. 

If  these  points  are  all  observed,  the  stroke 
will  come  to  a  sharp,  clean  end  with  the  handle 
of  the  oar  drawn  against  the  body  and  the  arms 
at  the  sides,  the  back  being  a  few  degrees  be- 
yond the  perpendicular  and  the  legs  locked 
tightly  down  on  the  slide  with  the  feet  braced 
against  the  stretcher.  With  the  expert,  this 
point  coincides  with  the  quick  leaving  of  the 
water  by  the  oar,  which  marks  good  rowing  by 
its  clean,  hard  finish.  For  the  beginner  an- 
other step  is  necessary  before  he  is  ready 
to  start  on  the  forward  swing  of  the  recov- 
ery. This  step  is  the  slight  dropping  of  the 
wrists  and  hands  so  that  the  oar  clears  itself 
of  the  water  as  it  turns  on  the  feather.     This 


ROWING  339 

is  one  of  the  hardest  things  which  the  novice 
has  to  struggle  with,  but  gradually,  as  he  be- 
comes more  skilled,  he  finds  that  the  ending  of 
his  stroke,  dropping  of  his  wrists,  and  feather- 
ing become  one  continuous  and  instantaneous 
motion. 

In  starting  the  recovery,  which  is  fully  as 
important  in  good  rowing  as  the  stroke  itself, 
the  hands  should  be  quickly  shot  away  from  the 
body  until  the  arms  are  extended.  This  point 
is  reached  just  about  the  time  the  hands  are 
over  the  knees  and  at  that  instant  the  shoul- 
ders follow  mechanically  after  the  arms.  When 
the  knees  have  been  cleared  by  the  hands, 
the  legs,  which  have  remained  straight  and 
tight  against  the  slide,  bend  at  the  knee  and 
release  the  seat,  which  starts  easily  but  rapidly 
to  follow  the  body  forward.  Here  again  the 
slide  must  never  be  allowed  to  get  ahead  of 
the  shoulders  and  the  beginner  will  find  it  nec- 
essary to  make  a  conscious  effort  to  slow  his 
slide.  During  the  last  six  or  eight  inches  of 
the  slide  the  seat  should  creep  towards  its  for- 
ward destination.  All  this  time  the  body  has 
been  assuming  its  position  between  the  knees 
for  the  full  reach  so  that  the  instant  the  seat 
comes  to  the  end  of  the  slide  the  next  stroke 
can  be  begun.  The  knees  can  be  made  a  point 
of  support  for  the  body  and  thus  keep  it  from 
swinging  from  one  side  to  the  other.  For  this 
purpose  they  should  not  be  held  close  together, 


340        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

but  separated  just  enough  to  come  almost  di- 
rectly under  the  armpits  when  the  full  reach  is 
gained. 

So  much  for  the  stroke  from  its  inboard 
aspect;  now  for  the  points  important  to  the 
outboard  work.  In  starting  the  stroke,  the  oar 
should  be  buried  in  the  water  so  that  the  top 
edge  of  the  blade  is  covered  by  about  two  inches 
of  water.  This  depth  should  be  maintained 
throughout  the  entire  stroke.  The  oar  should 
rest  squarely  against  the  flattened  pin  in  the 
lock.  On  the  recovery,  the  feather,  which  is  put 
on  the  instant  the  blade  leaves  the  water,  is 
held  until  just  before  the  full  reach,  when  it  is 
turned  slowdy  off.  In  rough  weather  and 
against  a  head  wind  the  feather  is  held  longer 
than  under  more  favorable  conditions.  On  the 
recovery  the  blade  should  always  clear  the 
water  and  never  be  dragged  along  the  surface, 
as  this  materially  checks  the  boat's  progress. 
In  rough  weather  one  feathers  high,  but  the 
lower  one  feathers  on  a  smooth  bit  of  water  the 
easier  it  is  to  keep  the  boat  on  an  even  keel. 

To  keep  the  boat  from  rolling  is  a  task  which 
always  seems  hard  to  the  beginner  and  he  is 
tempted  to  swing  to  one  side  or  the  other  in 
his  efforts  to  maintain  his  balance.  This  is 
wrong,  and  the  expert  never  finds  it  necessary. 
In  the  first  place,  if  one  has  his  stretcher  prop- 
erly placed  and  his  feet  well  and  tightly  fast- 
ened against  it,  one  finds  his  control  over  the 


ROWING  341 

boat  much  increased.  Then  it  will  be  found 
that  by  raising  or  lowering  the  toes  of  one  foot 
or  the  other  the  boat  can  be  thrown  to  one  side 
or  the  other.  By  this  little  trick  alone  one  can 
change  the  balance  of  an  eight-oared  shell. 
The  knees,  if  they  are  opened  somewhat,  are 
also  a  valuable  means  of  keeping  the  boat 
steady  on  the  recovery.  Still  another  means 
is  to  balance  her  with  the  oars.  Thus  if  one 
side  is  down,  the  men  on  that  side  raise  their 
hands  while  the  men  on  the  opposite  side  help 
by  lowering  theirs. 

An  important  thing  to  learn  in  all  manner  of 
rowing  is  how  tight  the  grip  upon  the  oar 
should  be.  If  one  holds  too  firmly  and  too 
tightly  the  forearms  will  soon  become  very 
tired  and  cramped  so  that  it  becomes  almost 
impossible  for  the  oarsman  to  put  any  power 
into  his  stroke.  On  the  other  hand,  too  loose 
a  grip  may  prove  disastrous  and  result  in  a 
"  crab."  The  oar  should  be  held  firmly  but 
lightly.  On  the  pull  through,  the  grasp  with 
the  fingers  will  be  strong  and  hard  but  the 
thumb  will  do  little  more  than  to  steady  the 
handle.  On  the  recovery,  the  thumb  and  palm 
of  the  hand  should  do  most  of  the  work  while 
the  fingers  rest  lightly  and  even  loosely  on  the 
oar  and  thus  rest  for  the  work  of  the  next 
stroke.  If  there  is  this  relaxation  on  each 
stroke,  one's  arms  will  never  become  "  tied 
up,"  as  the  saying  is,  no  matter  how  far  one 


342        THE   BOOK  OF   ATHLETICS 

rows.  The  more  expert  one  becomes  the  less 
one  grips  his  oar.  The  hand  which  does  the 
feathering  should  bear  the  brunt  on  the  recov- 
ery, while  the  outside  hand,  i.  e.,  that  farthest 
from  the  blade,  should  be  the  hand  which  does 
most  of  the  pulling,  as  it  is  best  situated  to 
apply  the  leverage.  Feathering  and  beveling 
(which  is  the  opposite  of  feathering)  are  done 
by  dropping  or  raising  the  wrist,  as  the  case 
may  be. 

In  sculling,  which  is  the  term  given  to  row- 
ing when  each  oarsman  uses  two  oars  or  sculls 
instead  of  a  single  sweep,  the  fundamental  prin- 
ciples are  identical  with  those  of  sweep-oar 
row^ing.  The  slide,  the  feather,  the  hard,  clean 
catch  and  finish,  offer  the  same  problems,  but 
there  comes  in  the  added  element  of  using  an 
oar  in  each  hand  rather  than  one  large  sweep, 
and  the  nicety  with  which  the  work  must  be 
done  is  even  more  essential  with  the  sculls. 
This  is  especially  true  in  single  and  double 
sculling,  when  bull  strength  counts  much  less 
than  cleverness  and  skill  in  the  use  of  the  oars. 
A  man  may  be  a  first-class  sweep  oar  and  yet 
be  unable  to  make  any  headway  as  a  sculler, 
and  while  there  are  scullers  of  note  who  for  one 
reason  or  another  would  not  rank  among  the 
best  with  the  sweeps,  it  is  rare  to  see  a  sculler 
who  cannot  perform  fairly  well  with  the  bigger 
oar. 

In  learning  to  scull,  the  beginner  has  first  to 


ROWING  343 

master  his  boat,  for  a  single  shell  is  a  ticklish 
toy  except  in  trained  hands.  The  first  rule  he 
must  learn  is  to  hold  on  to  his  sculls  no  matter 
what  happens.  If  he  does  this  he  will  be  sur- 
prised to  see  how  soon  he  masters  the  situ- 
ation, whereas  the  moment  he  lets  a  scull  slip 
from  his  hand  he  is  sure  to  get  a  ducking.  Then 
as  he  learns  to  balance  his  boat  without  thought 
and  to  take  his  strokes  with  ease  and  freedom, 
he  gradually  becomes  at  home  in  his  frail  craft. 
But  not  until  he  can  say  that  rough  and  smooth 
water  are  all  the  same  to  him,  has  he  become 
a  first-class  sculler.  In  learning  to  scull,  the 
man  who  takes  his  chances  is  the  man  who  goes 
ahead  the  fastest.  One  should  endeavor  to 
take  a  hard  catch  at  the  full  reach  and  put  the 
whole  weight  on  the  instant  the  oar  enters  the 
water.  This  sounds  very  simple,  but  when  one 
realizes  that  at  the  full  reach  the  oars  are  not 
in  a  favorable  position  to  maintain  the  boat's 
balance  and  the  body  is  less  easily  controlled 
because  of  its  forward  bending,  it  will  be  seen 
that  to  take  a  full,  hard  stroke  means  perfect 
confidence  and  freedom. 

In  sculling,  to  overreach  is  even  more  detri- 
mental to  good  results  than  in  sweep-oar  row- 
ing. At  the  same  time,  it  is  not  necessary  for 
the  sculler  to  swing  so  far  back,  as  his  hands 
can  be  carried  farther  in  to  the  sides  with  the 
sculls  than  with  a  sweep.  But  he  should  not 
overdo   this,  and  the  hands   should  never  be 


344        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

carried  past  the  body  as  often  beginners 
attempt  to  do.  Finish  with  the  hands  not 
farther  back  than  the  hips.  The  catch,  or  begin- 
ning of  the  stroke,  should  be  made  with  the 
arms  straight  so  that  the  motion  comes  straight 
from  the  shoulder.  This  is  advisable  in  sweep- 
oar  rowing  but  even  more  essential  to  good 
sculling.  The  catch  should  be  smart  and  clean. 
The  oars  should  be  brought  through  to  the  fin- 
ish with  ever-increasing  velocity  so  that  there 
will  be  no  break  in  the  stroke.  If  this  is  done 
and  the  sculler  makes  certain  that  the  blades 
leave  the  water  absolutely  together,  the  finish 
is  sure  to  be  hard  and  clean.  After  the  hands 
have  been  sent  away  quickly  on  the  recovery 
and  the  slide  started,  the  whole  body  should 
relax,  so  that  a  little  rest  between  strokes  is 
gained.  As  the  catch  is  approached,  the  whole 
body  is  free  —  there  should  be  no  constriction 
whatsoever  —  and  as  the  seat  comes  up  to  the 
end  of  the  slide  the  sculler  without  tightening 
a  muscle  sets  himself  for  the  next  stroke. 

Ehythm  is  very  necessary  to  successful  row- 
ing, and  whether  it  be  in  single  sculling  or  in 
the  eight  an  effort  should  be  made  to  maintain 
a  definite  rhythm  to  the  stroke  so  that  each 
stroke,  no  matter  what  the  rate  of  striking 
may  be,  will  have  its  proportions  always  the 
same.  Thus  if  the  stroke  is  quickened,  instead 
of  rushing  backwards  and  forwards  haphaz- 
ardly, the  stroke  will  still  preserve  its  definite 


ROWING  345 

full  rhythm,  the  only  difference  being  that  every 
motion  is  accomplished  more  rapidly.  The  in- 
tervals are  shortened  but  the  relationship  is 
kept  the  same. 

'As  a  sculler  or  a  crew  becomes  more  and 
more  proficient,  an  attempt  should  be  made  to 
master  various  rates  of  striking.  Starting  at 
a  moderately  low  stroke,  which  is  the  easiest  to 
learn,  it  should  be  gradually  raised  until  a 
rapid  rate  is  reached.  At  first  this  will  not  be 
very  high,  as  if  it  is  high  it  will  be  poorly 
executed.  If  no  attempt  is  made  to  rush  the 
process  and  the  increase  in  striking  is  advanced 
gradually,  it  will  be  surprising  how  quickly  a 
change  can  be  accomplished  and  a  high  rate 
mastered.  Then  at  the  same  time  it  is  wise  to 
learn  to  drop  the  stroke  very  low,  for  in  this 
way  as  in  no  other  are  errors  in  style  most 
easily  detected  and  corrected. 

A  good  sculler  or  a  good  stroke-oar  in  a  crew 
learns  to  vary  his  stroke  without  any  great 
effort.  One  should  never  attempt  to  change 
the  rate  in  one  or  two  strokes  but  to  increase 
or  lower  it  gradually.  This  gives  the  boat  a 
chance  to  respond.  One  should  always  study 
his  boat  or  his  crew  to  see  at  what  rate  the  best 
results  can  be  obtained,  and  that  rate  should 
be  the  one  at  which  most  of  the  rowing  is  done, 
but  no  sculler  or  crew  is  really  good  without 
being  able  to  sprint  at  a  high  rate  of  striking 
and  paddle  at  a  low  one.     Beginners  should 


346        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

bear  in  mind  that  to  row  with  a  fast  stroke 
does  not  mean  that  the  pull  must  be  harder,  but 
rather  that  all  the  movements  are  quickened. 

In  England  there  is  one  universal  style  of 
rowing  and  all  schools  teach  the  same  stroke. 
There,  the  long  body-swing  and  the  short  slide, 
are  accepted  features  in  good  rowing,  and  all 
oarsmen  are  brought  up  with  the  same  ideas  of 
rowing.  In  America  there  are  many  schools 
of  rowing  and  almost  as  many  different  styles 
of  stroking  as  there  are  teachers,  and  yet  a 
close  analysis  of  each  shows  that  certain  funda- 
mentals are  common  to  all  successful  strokes. 
The  shorter  body-swing  and  the  longer  slide 
are  characteristic  of  American  rowing,  but  like 
many  of  the  other  points  of  difference  between 
strokes  this  is  only  superficial,  as  the  length  of 
the  stroke  in  the  water  varies  little  in  the  two 
countries.  At  Cornell,  where  Coach  Courtney 
has  had  such  uniform  success,  the  individual 
is  the  all-important  factor.  Each  man  rows  in 
the  way  easiest  to  him.  His  rigging  is  fitted 
carefully  to  his  needs.  "With  long  rows  at  a 
low  stroke,  Courtney  welds  the  men  into  a  crew, 
getting  them  accustomed  to  one  another's  little 
idiosyncrasies.  At  Columbia  and  Syracuse, 
where  the  material  is  generally  less  powerful 
and  less  plentiful,  Coaches  Eice  and  Ten  Eyck 
have  fitted  their  stroke  to  the  material  at  hand 
and  an  easy,  graceful  stroke  results.  At  Har- 
vard, more  attention  is  paid  to  form  and  more 


ROWING  347 

effort  made  to  fit  the  men  to  a  standard  stroke 
which  seems  most  efficient  to  the  coach.  But 
to  all  certain  salient  points  are  common.  These 
are  in  brief:  a  hard,  clean  catch,  a  continuous 
and  increasing  pull  through,  and  a  hard,  clean 
finish  followed  by  a  quick  shooting  of  the  hands 
away  from  the  body  and  a  slow,  easy  recovery. 
Variations  are  found  and  minor  differences  are 
many,  but  on  these  points  all  are  practically 
agreed. 

In  training  for  rowing  events,  perhaps  the 
best  piece  of  advice  which  can  be  given  is  this : 
Do  your  hard  rowing  early  in  your  preparation 
so  that  the  last  week  or  so  may  be  of  a  lighter 
order.  Do  not  overdo  in  the  amount  of  rowing. 
Many  a  good  crew  has  been  found  sadly  lacking 
when  it  came  to  the  final  test  of  endurance  be- 
cause, as  one  great  coach  said,  *'  They  had  left 
all  their  rowing  on  the  water  by  too  much  prac- 
tice." *'  If  you  are  unprepared  a  week  before 
your  race,"  said  a  wise  trainer,  "  it  will  do  you 
little  good  to  try  to  make  up  for  lost  time  in 
the  days  that  remain,"  Another  good  point  to 
remember  is  that  morning  and  evening  are  the 
best  times  to  row,  for  then  the  sun  is  not  too 
hot  and  the  wind  is  apt  to  be  less. 


HOW   TO   TRAIN   A   CREW 

BY   W.    A.    BANCROFT 

Befoee  training  comes  the  selection  of  men. 
Too  great  care  cannot  be  taken  that  the  mem- 
bers of  a  crew  are,  first,  physically  sound ;  and, 
second,  /anatomically  fitted  for  rowing.  Men 
whose  organs  are  unsound,  not  only  are  likely 
to  suffer  themselves,  but,  when  they  break 
down,  new  men  are  taken  in  their  places,  and 
there  is  lost  the  unison  of  a  crew  —  the  result 
of  weeks  of  preparation.  The  work  must  be 
done  over,  if  there  is  time.  If  not,  the  crew  is 
weakened  to  that  extent.  Men  should  have  a 
suitable  stature  and  suitable  proportions.  Men 
too  tall  or  too  short,  men  with  extremely  long 
or  short  arms  or  legs,  conform  only  with  great 
difficulty,  if  at  all,  to  the  movements  of  the  rest 
of  the  crew.  Men  from  five  feet  eight  inches  to 
six  feet  in  height,  and  weighing,  without  cloth- 
ing, from  one  hundred  and  fifty  to  one  hundred 
and  eighty-five  pounds  when  in  racing  condi- 
tion, are  generally  the  best.  There  is,  of 
course,  great  choice  in  fiber.  Some  considera- 
tion also  should  be  given  to  temperament  and 

348 


HOW  TO  TRAIN   A  CREW         349 

disposition.  A  man  should  have  resolution, 
spirit,  good  judgment,  amiability,  and  equanim- 
ity. A  good  crew  must  be  essentially  harmoni- 
ous, and  this  involves  adaptability  on  the  part 
of  all  of  its  members  to  each  other.  Boat- 
racing  should  not  be  undertaken,  as  a  rule,  by 
those  under  seventeen  years  of  age;  and  it 
would  be  safer  to  begin  at  eighteen  or  even 
nineteen.  The  sport  is  a  violent  one,  and  is 
likely  to  be  too  exacting  for  persons  in  mid- 
youth.  The  organs  are  not  then  sufficiently 
powerful;  and  an  arrested  development,  even 
if  nothing  more  serious,  may  result. 

Training  involves  the  amounts  and  kinds  of 
exercise,  food  and  drink,  sleep,  and  bathing  for 
the  body,  besides  the  occupation  of  the  mind 
and  its  discipline. 

And  first  of  exercise: 

If  the  persons  selected  have  the  time  at  their 
disposal,  it  is  always  better,  before  beginning 
to  row,  to  practise  for  a  week  or  two  several 
forms  of  exercise,  for  the  purpose  of  strength- 
ening certain  muscles  of  the  back  and  legs,  as 
well  as  the  wrist  muscles,  and  to  get  the  heart 
and  lungs  accustomed  to  greater  activity.  As 
the  crew,  which  at  this  time  should  contain  at 
least  two  more  men  than  the  number  of  oars  to 
be  pulled,  must  conform  to  the  powers  of  its 
weakest  member,  and  as  it  is  not  prudent  to 
begin  by  taking  a  large  amount  of  exercise,  at 
first  not  over  twenty  minutes  ought  to  be  spent 


350        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

on  gymnasium  apparatus  and  in  calisthenic 
exercises,  and  not  over  a  mile  ought  to  be  cov- 
ered in  walking  and  running,  three-quarters  of 
which  should  be  walking.  This  exercise  ought 
to  be  gradually  increased  until  thirty-five  or 
forty  minutes  are  spent  in  the  gymnasium,  and 
a  run  of  a  mile  and  a  half  at  a  pace  of  seven 
or  eight  miles  an  hour  is  taken. 

The  gj^mnasium  exercises  should  consist  of 
work  on  vertical  bars,  on  wrist  weights,  to  some 
extent  on  arm  and  chest  weights,  and  in  doing 
the  military  "  setting  up  "  exercises,  such  as 
are  now  prescribed  for  the  army  of  the  United 
States,  especially  the  exercise  which  consists  in 
lowering  and  raising  the  body  by  bending  the 
legs  at  the  knees,  or  "  squatting."  The  gym- 
nasium exercises  ought  to  be  done  by  all  to- 
gether at  the  word  of  command,  both  for  the 
sake  of  acquiring  uniformity  of  movement,  and 
also  of  acquiring  a  habit  of  obedience.  A  crew 
is  a  machine.  Its  parts  must  fit  each  other,  and 
the  whole  must  start  and  move  and  stop  as 
directed. 

These  gymnasium  exercises  for  the  first  two 
or  three  years  of  rowing  should  be  kept  up 
daily,  until  within  about  six  weeks  of  a  race, 
usually  from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes  being  given 
to  them,  even  after  the  actual  ro^\ing  has  be- 
gun; and  the  runs  should  be  kept  up  until 
nearly  as  late  a  date.  During  the  six  weeks  or 
thereabouts  immediately  preceding  a  race,  a 


HOW  TO  TRAIN   A  CREW         351 

smart  walk  of  a  mile  or  more,  according  to  the 
time  available,  ought  to  be  substituted  for  the 
exercises  and  the  running.  For  students  and 
those  whose  vocations  are  sedentary,  it  is  a 
good  plan  to  take  the  walk  immediately  upon 
rising,  and,  while  perspiring,  follow  it  with  a 
quick  shower  or  plunge  bath,  and  a  rub-down 
before  breakfast.  If  there  is  time,  instead  of 
this,  a  longer  walk  at  a  less  rapid  pace  may  be 
taken  during  the  day.  Overdoing,  however,  is 
to  be  avoided.  What  a  given  crew  can  do  must 
be  learned  by  experience;  and  individuals 
should  be  relieved,  if  it  is  found  that  they  are 
doing  too  much.  Especially  as  the  day  of  the 
race  approaches,  care  should  be  taken  that  no 
one  is  overtrained.  If  there  is  doubt,  a  given 
exercise  had  best  be  omitted. 

The  food  should  consist  of  meat  and  fish, 
vegetables,  light  puddings,  and  fruit ;  the  drink 
of  pure  water,  and  good  milk  if  wanted.  Pa- 
stry, confections,  alcoholic  drinks,  and  tobacco 
should  be  prohibited.  The  food  should  be 
abundant  and  wholesome.  Steaks,  chops,  or 
broiled  chicken,  with  fish  for  breakfast;  soup, 
fish,  and  a  roast  for  dinner  in  the  middle  of  the 
day;  and  a  cold  roast  or  breakfast  dishes  for 
supper.  The  roasts  should  not  be  overdone, 
but  should  be  suitably  cooked  so  as  to  retain 
the  juices.  The  best  of  vegetables  should  be 
selected,  and  fruit  in  its  season.  The  bread 
should  be  neither  too  fresh  nor  too  stale.     In 


352        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

short,  all  these  articles  of  food  should  be  pre- 
pared as  they  are  at  a  first-class  hotel.  The 
best  of  good,  wholesome  food,  and  that  in  abun- 
dance, is  needed.  There  ought  to  be  no  regret 
if  weight  is  not  lost,  provided  each  man  does 
his  share  of  the  work  in  the  boat.  Good  food 
and  plenty  of  exercise  strengthen  the  muscles; 
and  if  this  process  is  going  on,  an  increase  in 
weight  is  of  little  moment. 

The  oarsman  should  have  all  the  sleep  he 
wants;  and  between  the  ages  of  eighteen  and 
twenty-five  he  will  need  about  nine  hours  in 
bed,  if  he  does  honest  work  in  the  boat.  He 
should  sleep  in  a  well-ventilated  room,  and  on 
a  hair  mattress  and  pillow,  with  no  more  cov- 
ering than  is  necessary  for  warmth,  and  this 
will  not  be  much.  His  sleep  should  be  taken 
at  regular  hours.  Besides  the  morning  bath, 
one  other  cold  bath  daily  may  be  taken  after 
the  row,  or  after  the  harder  row  if  there  are 
two ;  but  the  bath  must  be  taken  w^hile  perspi- 
ration is  going  on,  that  is,  at  once  after  the 
row  is  done.  The  bath  should  not  be  prolonged, 
and  should  be  followed  by  a  vigorous  rubbing 
down  with  a  dry  towel.  This  rubbing  may  ad- 
vantageously be  followed  by  another  rubbing 
of  the  limbs  by  the  hands  of  an  attendant, 
whose  hands  are  moistened  with  spirits  for  the 
purpose.  Care,  however,  should  be  taken  to 
do  the  rubbing  in  a  room  sufficiently  warm  and 
free  from  draughts  to  avoid  taking  cold.     If, 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  A  CREW         353 

for  any  reason,  the  oarsman  has  stopped  per- 
spiring before  taking  a  bath,  the  bath  should 
be  in  warm  water. 

The  mind  should  have  a  rational  occupation. 
Freedom  from  extraordinary  care  or  unusual 
excitement  should  be  insured.  Regularity  of 
both  bodily  and  mental  habits  should  be  ob- 
served. While  in  the  boat  the  closest  attention 
should  be  given  by  each  man  to  his  perform- 
ance, and  time  enough  should  be  taken  when 
out  of  the  boat  to  understand  and  to  master 
what  is  required  of  him.  If  there  is  time,  and 
the  sole  object  in  view  is  to  win  a  race,  much 
time  may  profitably  be  spent  by  every  member 
of  the  crew  in  perfecting,  by  discussion  or 
otherwise,  the  details  of  the  stroke,  or  of  the 
work  of  individuals,  or  of  the  crew  as  a  whole. 
At  all  events,  the  mind  should  be  kept  healthy 
by  the  contemplation  and  the  consideration  of 
none  but  wholesome  subjects. 

While  there  should  be  a  regularity  in  matters 
of  food,  sleep,  and  habits,  and,  in  general,  in 
exercise,  the  latter  should  not  be  allowed  to 
become  irksome  through  its  monotony.  It  is 
better  to  give  up  rowing  occasionally  for  a  day, 
and  substitute  some  other  exercise  of  a  recre- 
ative character,  or  rest  altogether;  and,  if  the 
preparation  for  a  race  lasts  for  six  months,  a 
vacation  of  a  week  ought  to  be  taken  when  the 
time  is  half  gone.  But  even  then  exercise  ought 
not  wholly  to  be  abandoned;    and  the  rest  of 


354        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  requirements,  those  relating  to  food,  drink, 
sleep,  etc.,  should  be  observed. 

Few  races  ought  to  be  undertaken,  and  none 
by  new  men,  without  at  least  three  months  of 
preparation.  By  this  is  not  meant  that,  after 
a  race  is  over,  a  man's  habits  may  be  radically 
changed.  The  true  oarsman  never  essentially 
changes  his  habits.  Unless  his  concerns  pre- 
vent, he  will  always  get  plenty  of  sleep  at  reg- 
ular hours,  will  eat  nothing  but  the  kinds  of 
food  described  above,  will  not  become  a  slave 
to  any  appetite,  and  will  not  give  up  athletic 
exercise.  Such  a  man  will  be,  in  a  sense,  al- 
ways in  condition;  without  inconvenience,  he 
will  readily  assume  the  more  exacting  obliga- 
tions necessary  to  prepare  for  a  race.  A  crew 
of  such  men  may,  of  course,  prepare  for  a  con- 
test in  less  than  three  months'  time;  but  even 
they  will  do  well  to  give  as  long  a  period  as 
three  months,  if  the  race  is  to  be  any  but  a 
very  short  one. 

The  stroke  to  be  rowed  will  depend  some- 
what upon  circumstances.  If  it  should  happen 
that  there  be  available  for  the  stroke  oarsman 
of  the  crew,  a  man  who  has  already  acquired 
a  smooth,  symmetrical,  regular,  and  effective 
movement,  it  may  be  expedient  to  teach  the  rest 
of  the  crew  his  stroke,  no  matter  what  the 
style.  Good  results  have  been  obtained  from 
such  a  course.  Good  crew  shell-rowing,  no  mat- 
ter what  the  style  of  stroke,  has  certain  require- 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  A  CREW         355 

ments.  The  shell  must  be  rowed  so  that  it  will 
not  roll  from  side  to  side ;  so  that  it  will  not  sink 
unnecessarily  either  at  bow  or  stern,  when  the 
weight  of  the  crew  shifts  as  it  is  moved  with 
the  seats.  The  oar-blades  must  take  the  water 
on  the  "  full  reach  "  at  the  very  farthest  point 
to  which  they  are  carried,  without  ''  clipping  " 
or  rowing  the  first  part  of  the  stroke  in  the  air. 
They  must  take  the  water  also  without  ' '  back- 
ing ' '  it,  or  throwing  it  towards  the  bow.  They 
must  leave  the  water  at  the  end  of  the  stroke 
without  '*  slivering,"  or  pulling  water  up  as 
they  are  taken  out;  that  is,  the  blades  must 
take  and  leave  the  water  so  that  the  least  pos- 
sible retardation  shall  be  given  to  the  onward 
movement  of  the  boat,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes 
said,  they  must  be  put  in  and  taken  out 
*'  clean  "  and  **  smooth." 

After  the  blades  are  taken  out  of  the  water 
at  the  end  of  the  stroke,  they  must  be  returned 
to  the  "  full  reach  "  again  without  touching 
the  water;  for  the  friction  of  dragging  them 
along  the  surface  tends  to  hold  the  boat  back. 
The  blades,  of  course,  ought  to  be  dipped  to- 
gether, taken  out  together,  feathered  together 
at  a  uniform  height,  and  turned  again  together 
for  another  stroke.  Again,  there  should  be  uni- 
formity of  movement  inside  the  boat;  indeed, 
unless  there  is  such  uniformity,  there  is  little 
likelihood  of  uniformity  of  movement  outside. 
The  backs,  therefore,  of  a  crew  that  rows  well 


356        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

will  always  be  parallel,  tlie  legs  will  move  sim- 
ultaneously, and  so  will  the  seats,  and  the 
arms  will  be  drawn  in  at  the  same  time,  the 
wrists  dropped  together  at  the  finish  of  the 
stroke,  the  arms  extended  again  at  the  same 
time,  and  the  hands  will  be  turned  simultane- 
ously on  the  full  reach  to  begin  the  stroke.  All 
these  requirements  are  common  to  good  crew 
shell-rowing,  and,  when  lacking,  are  indications 
of  a  faulty  stroke.  But  none  of  these  faults, 
however,  may  belong  to  any  one  of  several 
crews,  no  two  of  which  are  rowing  the  same 
stroke.  There  may  be  good  rowing,  therefore, 
under  various  styles  of  stroke.  Still,  some  one 
must  be  adopted. 

When  no  other  stroke  has  been  adopted,  the 
following  may  be  used:  Assuming  the  boat  to 
be  stationary  and  the  oarsman  to  be  at  a  "  full 
reach,"  arms  extended,  back  straightened  from 
its  lowest  extremity  and  inclined,  seat  as  far 
aft  as  it  is  intended  to  be  moved,  blade  in  the 
water  turned  for  the  stroke  and  just  covered, 
the  shoulders  squared  and  held  down  and  back, 
the  neck  and  head  in  prolongation  of  the  back, 
the  wrist  of  the  hand  next  to  the  rowlock 
slightly  convexed,  and  that  hand  resting  diag- 
onally upon  the  oar  handle,  the  legs  opened 
slightly,  but  s^mimetrically,  enough  to  receive 
between  the  thighs  the  lower  front  part  of  the 
trunk,  and  the  boat  resting  evenly  upon  the 
water,   the   stroke   is  begun   by   swaying  the 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  A  CREW         357 

trunk  back  as  though  pivoted  at  the  seat  until 
it  has  reached  the  vertical  position,  then  the 
legs  are  straightened  out  with  vigor,  the  seat 
moving  back  with  the  shoulders,  the  hands  be- 
ing kept  at  such  a  height  that  the  blade  will 
remain  just  covered,  until  the  seat  has  been 
moved  toward  the  bow  to  its  limit,  and  the 
trunk  has  swung  just  a  trifle  beyond  the  verti- 
cal. The  stroke  is  finished  by  drawing  in  the 
arms  until  the  hands  touch  the  body,  when,  by 
dropping  them  a  bit,  and,  at  the  same  time 
slightly  turning  the  wrist,  the  blade  is  taken 
out  of  the  water.  Care  should  be  taken  to  keep 
the  blade  just  covered  in  making  this  finish. 
To  return  to  the  "  full  reach  "  again  the  hands 
continue  moving,  and  are  shot  out  parallel  with 
the  surface  of  the  water  until  the  arms  are 
straightened,  the  trunk  is  swung  forward,  and 
almost  at  the  same  time  the  seat  is  started  aft, 
while  the  trunk  continues  to  swing  until  every- 
thing gets  to  the  "  full  reach  "  simultaneously 
and  is  ready  to  begin  another  stroke.  Nothing 
but  practice,  of  course,  and  the  assistance  of 
an  experienced  ''  coach,"  will  enable  a  crew  to 
row  smoothly,  gracefully,  and  effectively  the 
stroke  here  attempted  to  be  described.  The 
separate  parts  of  the  stroke  are  given  as  though 
they  were  independent  movements,  instead  of 
forming,  as  they  do,  one  continuous  but  com- 
plicated movement.  At  the  beginning  of  the 
stroke,  or  at  the  ''  catch  "  as  it  is  called,  the 


358        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

shoulders  should  be  driven  back  vigorously  and 
rapidly,  care  being  taken  not  to  make  the  mo- 
tion a  jerky  one  by  burj^ing  the  oar-blade  too 
deeply,  and  thus  stopping  the  movement  of  the 
shoulders.  At  the  finish  the  most  difficult  part 
of  the  movement  to  be  acquired  is  a  rapid 
'^  shoot  "  of  the  arms  away  from  the  body, 
without  a  jarring  motion  by  which  the  hands 
are  either  sent  down  into  the  lap  with  a  violent 
thump,  or  else  the  shoulders  are  brought  for- 
ward ^ith  a  jerk.  The  "  catch  "  and  the 
*  *  shoot  ' '  give  no  little  trouble  to  beginners ; 
but,  when  once  mastered  by  a  crew,  it  is  be- 
lieved that,  other  things  being  equal,  no  stroke 
without  them  is  so  effective.  Every  motion 
must  be  such  as  to  waste  no  energy.  After  the 
arms  are  shot  out,  the  trunk,  which  scarcely 
stops  in  changing  direction,  should  not  be 
rushed  towards  the  *'  full  reach,"  but  should 
follow  at  a  relatively  moderate  pace  the 
"  shoot  "  of  the  arms.  Especially,  care  should 
be  taken  not  to  let  the  trunk  drop  down  on  the 
"  full  reach  "  with  a  jar  or  thump,  and  pains 
should  be  taken  to  have  the  hands  high  enough 
as  they  approach  the  "  full  reach  "  to  bring 
the  blade  as  close  to  the  water  as  it  can  be 
brought,  without  ''  backing  water,"  to  begin 
the  stroke. 

The  tricks  of  watermanship,  or  of  rowing  the 
boat  **  on  an  even  keel  "  as  it  is  called,  that  is, 
without  its  inclining  either  to   port  or   star- 


HOW  TO  TRAIN  A  CREW         359 

board,  can  most  of  them  be  learned  only  by 
experience.  It  is  a  general  rule,  when  the  boat 
inclines  to  port  during  the  feather,  for  the  star- 
board men  to  lower  their  hands  and  for  the 
port  men  to  raise  theirs,  and  vice  versa.  If  the 
boat  rolls  to  port  during  the  stroke,  the  port 
men  must  pry  her  over,  done  by  lifting,  as  it 
were,  their  oar-handles,  and  vice  versa.  Every 
muscle  should,  of  course,  be  trained  to  be  under 
absolute  control,  so  as  to  adjust  itself  to  the 
various  conditions  of  wind,  wave,  and  current 
as  they  appear,  to  anticipate,  and,  by  the  neces- 
sary motions,  to  counteract  their  effect  upon 
the  ''  trim  "  of  the  boat.  Power  must  be  ap- 
plied vigorously  at  one  instant ;  at  the  next,  it 
must  be  taken  off  so  as  to  maintain  the  ' '  beat  ' ' 
or  rhythm  of  the  stroke. 

It  is  best  to  teach  a  novice  the  motions  of  the 
trunk,  legs,  and  arms  upon  a  rowing-machine. 
The  muscles  are  then  accustomed  to  many  of 
the  requirements  of  the  stroke,  so  that  when, 
later,  the  beginner  is  seated  in  a  boat,  there  is 
not  so  much  to  be  learned  at  once.  Before  he 
is  allowed  to  row  with  a  crew,  he  should  be 
taught  first,  in  a  pair-oared  boat  of  sufficient 
steadiness  not  to  roll,  the  proper  method  of 
handling  an  oar.  From  the  pair-oar,  the  mem- 
bers of  the  crew  should  next  be  seated  in  a 
steady  barge,  and  there  be  taught  to  row  "  to- 
gether.'* Lastly,  the  shell  should  be  entered. 
In  the  meantime,  the  way  to  lift  boats,  to  carry 


360        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

them,  to  put  them  into  the  water  and  to  take 
them  out  should  be  taught ;  also  the  way  to  get 
in  and  to  get  out  of  a  boat ;  the  way  to  turn  a 
boat  without  straining  it,  as  well  as  how  to 
"  hold  "  it  and  to  "  back  "it.  A  shell  must 
be  used  with  the  greatest  of  care,  in  order  that 
its  lines  may  be  kept. 

In  placing  the  crew  in  a  boat,  care  should  be 
taken  to  select  for  the  stroke  oarsman  a  man 
of  quick  motions,  clear  head,  and  self-posses- 
sion, plucky,  and  of  endurance.  He  should  be 
able  to  set  a  long  stroke,  the  pace  of  which  he 
can  regulate  without  throwing  the  crew  out  of 
time,  and  he  should  have  power  enough  to 
"  drive  "  the  rest  of  the  crew  in  a  spurt.  The 
next  man  behind  the  stroke  oarsman  should  be 
a  stronger  man  than  he,  and  one  who  rows  a 
stroke  quite  as  long,  and  who  can  keep  in  per- 
fect time  mth  him.  The  weight  of  the  crew 
should  be  so  arranged  that  the  boat  will  never 
*'  trim  down  by  the  head,"  that  is,  sink  lower 
in  the  bow  than  in  the  stern;  and,  as  nearly  as 
possible,  the  strength  of  the  men  on  one  side 
should  equal  the  strength  of  those  on  the  other. 

There  are  two  objects  in  training  a  crew  — 
one  to  enable  it  to  acquire  an  effective  stroke, 
the  other  to  enable  its  members  to  be  in  the 
very  best  physical  condition  at  the  hour  of  the 
race.  The  first  consideration  should  always 
yield  to  the  second. 


HOCKEY 


HOCKEY 

BY   FRED    D.    HUNTINGTON" 

For  many  years  the  game  of  hockey,  like 
baseball  in  the  United  States,  has  been  the 
characteristic  game  of  Canada,  foremost  in 
popularity  in  leagues  and  colleges.  Probably 
because  of  the  fact  that  prior  to  the  widespread 
erection  of  artificial  ice  rinks,  the  locations  in 
the  United  States  naturally  adapted  to  hockey 
were  limited  and  confined  to  the  northern  por- 
tions alone,  the  introduction  of  the  game  dates 
from  a  comparatively  recent  period.  In  1897, 
Dr.  Frederick  Goodridge  of  Cambridge,  at  that 
time  a  student  at  Harvard,  was  impressed  with 
the  merits  of  Canadian  hockey,  and  in  spite  of 
the  less  favorable  conditions  was  ardent  in  es- 
tablishing the  game  as  a  college  sport.  The 
experiment  was  successful.  Wherever  hockey 
was  introduced  enthusiastic  supporters  were 
found.  Other  colleges  and  schools  followed 
suit,  and  since  that  first  year  hockey  has  been 
recognized  as  one  of  our  finest  winter  sports. 
The  popularity  of  hockey  has  steadily  increased 
until  last  year  it  received  final  and  absolute 

363 


364      TPIE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

recognition  at  one  of  our  leading  and  most  con- 
servative colleges.  The  Harvard  Athletic 
Committee  endorsed  a  vote  of  the  Student 
Council  making  hockey  a  fifth  major  sport  and 
awarding  its  players  the  straight  letter  insignia. 

The  object  of  this  article  is  to  give  those  in- 
terested in  this  game,  which  possesses  such  at- 
tractions for  lovers  of  winter  sport  som.e  idea 
of  its  fundamentals.  It  is  hoped  that  the  be- 
ginner may  here  find  instruction  that  will  make 
his  progress  more  rapid  and  development  more 
certain,  and  that  even  to  those  already  ac- 
quainted with  the  game  some  suggestions  will 
prove  of  value. 

Although  there  are  no  standard  dimensions 
for  a  hockey  rink,  ninety  feet  by  two  hundred 
feet  is  generally  considered  the  most  satisfac- 
tory size.  For  convenience  and  fast  play,  some 
sort  of  side-boards  are  essential.  The  goals, 
six  feet  wide  by  four  feet  high,  are  placed  at 
least  ten  feet  from  the  ends. 

The  speed  of  the  game  requires  careful  selec- 
tion of  equipment ;  heavy  or  clumsy  shoes  and 
guards  are  enough  to  ruin  any  player.  Jersey, 
tights,  and  running  trunks  make  an  ideal  play- 
ing costume  even  for  cold  weather.  Strips  of 
felt  about  one  inch  thick,  that  may  be  conve- 
niently slipped  inside  the  tights  make  excellent 
guards  for  shin  and  knee.  Shoes  should  be 
tight-fitting  and  light,  with  thin  soles;  skates, 
also   light,   of  thin  steel,  with  well-rockered 


HOCKEY  365 

blade,  should  be  riveted  on  to  the  shoe.  This 
equipment  applies  for  defense  men  as  well  as 
forwards,  though  the  former  may  require 
slightly  thicker  guards.  The  goal-keeper  needs 
all  the  protection  consistent  with  the  agility 
required  of  him. 

There  are  many  models  of  sticks  adapted  to 
individual  taste.  Certain  general  requirements 
are  common  to  all,  however.  A  good  stick  must 
be  light,  with  a  firm,  stiff  shaft.  When  held  out 
on  the  ice  at  arm's  length  the  heel  of  the  blade 
should  rest  flat,  with  the  toe  raised  but  slightly. 

The  prime  requisite  of  a  hockey  player  is 
ability  to  skate.  Perfect  familiarity  with 
straight  skating,  starting,  stopping,  and  turn- 
ing, etc.  are  invaluable  and  can  be  secured 
only  by  practice.  A  distance  or  fancy  skater 
is  not  necessarily  a  good  hockey  skater,  for 
hockey  requires  expertness  along  certain  lines ; 
starting,  stopping,  and  balance  for  dodging  are 
the  qualities  to  be  developed. 

A  game  of  hockey  is  a  series  of  starts  and 
stops  and  one  who  excels  in  this  will  pass  as 
a  fast  hockey  player.  To  start  and  stop  you 
must  have  sharp  skates,  ground  on  a  small- 
radius  stone,  which  gives  sharp  edges  to  grip 
the  ice  and  a  slightly  concave  center.  To 
make  a  quick  stop  the  skater  turns  his  body 
sideways,  throws  his  weight  back,  while  his 
skates,  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  his 
progress,  bring  him  to  a  stop.     If  one  faces  to 


3G6     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

the  left  in  stopping,  the  right  leg  is  straight  oui-; 
rigid  at  the  knee;  it  is  the  inside  edge  of  this 
skate  that  does  the  actual  stopping.  The 
left  knee  is  slightly  bent.  This  leg  serves  to 
balance  and  guide.  In  this  manner,  not  only 
does  the  skater  come  most  rapidly  to  a  stop, 
but  he  is  also  in  the  best  possible  position  for  a 
quick  start.  In  the  position  I  have  described, 
facing  left,  body  inclined,  right  leg  rigid,  left 
knee  bent,  the  first  drive  is  with  the  left  foot, 
the  right  is  brought  forward  slightly  in  front  of 
the  left  for  the  second  drive,  the  skates  still 
nearly  at  right  angles  with  the  forward  mo- 
tion. After  three  or  four  short  powerful 
thrusts  from  the  front  side  of  the  skate,  the 
skater  faces  fonvard  and  strikes  out  in  the 
ordinary  skating  stride,  taking  short  steps  and 
short  glides,  until  well  under  way,  getting  the 
full  thrust  from  the  front  inner  edge  of  each 
skate.  Each  skate  as  it  comes  off  the  ice 
should  be  at  an  angle  of  at  least  forty-five 
degrees  with  the  line  of  forward  progress. 
Avoid  pounding,  that  is,  bringing  the  skate 
flat  down  on  the  ice.  With  each  stroke  the 
toe  of  the  skate  touches  the  ice  first,  with  the 
knee  bent  to  give  spring  and  suppleness.  At 
the  half-stroke  the  heel  touches,  as  the  leg 
drives  out,  the  fuU  finish  is  off  the  very  toe 
edge  again. 

The  art  of  raising  or  shooting  the  puck  is 
very  difficult  to  explain,  and  proficiency  in  this 


HOCKEY  367 

department  requires  more  conscientious  effort 
than  almost  any  other.  Let  me  remind  you 
that  ice  is  not  necessary  to  practise  shooting; 
concrete  or  wood  surfaces  do  very  well.  Take 
the  stick  naturally  with  either  right  or  left  hand 
slightly  less  than  one-half  the  way  down  the 
shaft.  With  the  right  hand  down,  the  heel  of 
the  left  face  of  the  blade  would  be  placed 
against  the  puck,  and  as  the  puck  is  shoved  for- 
ward the  blade  is  drawn  in.  This  combination 
of  motions  makes  the  puck  rotate  in  a  horizon- 
tal plane  as  it  shoots  through  the  air.  The 
most  effective  shots  are  knee-high,  driven  with 
all  the  power  possible. 

From  these  general  considerations  we  turn 
to  the  details  of  the  game.  One  great  beauty 
of  hockey  is  the  lack  of  complicated  rules,  as 
there  are  really  but  two.  The  first  is  against 
offside  play.  Every  player  must  endeavor 
to  keep  onside,  that  is,  between  the  puck 
and  his  own  goal,  and  no  man  shall  be  eligible 
to  receive  a  pass  unless  he  is  even  with, 
or  behind  the  man  carrying  the  puck  at 
the  time  of  the  pass.  The  second  rule  is 
against  rough  play.  In  the  rule-books  at- 
tempts are  made  to  classify  and  describe  such 
offenses,  but  it  all  comes  down  to  this:  there 
shall  be  no  unnecessary  roughness,  i.e.,  trip- 
ping, cross-checking,  pushing  from  behind, 
slugging  and  slashing  with  the  stick.  A  multi- 
tude of  other  so-called  tricks  are  not  hockey; 


368      THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

they  should  be  strictly  penalized  in  games  and 
discountenanced  in  practice .  There  is  only  one 
thing  that  can  prevent  hockey  from  being 
widely  recognized  as  one  of  our  very  finest 
sports,  and  that  is  rough,  unsportsmanlike 
play.  There  is  great  temptation,  but  wher- 
ever rough  play  has  been  tolerated  hockey  has 
lost  prestige  and  popularity. 

As  to  the  detail  of  position  play,  I  can  men- 
tion only  a  few  general  principles.  The  sLx 
men  that  compose  a  hockey  team  may  be  clas- 
sified in  two  groups,  three  foi-w^ard  and  three 
defense  men. 

The  forwards  form  a  line  across  the  rink. 
Each  man  has  his  territory  and  the  success  of 
the  United  States  style  of  hockey  depends  on 
his  confining  his  efforts  to  that  territory.  The 
right  and  left  wings  are  responsible  along  the 
sides,  near  the  boards ;  the  rover  or  center  takes 
his  position  in  the  territory  between.  These 
three  forwards  theoretically  should  follow  the 
puck  up  and  down  the  rink,  keeping  always 
just  on-side,  each  man  constantly  ready  to 
receive  a  pass.  The  forw-ards  are  primarily 
offensive,  but  they  play  a  very  vital  part  on 
the  defense,  in  breaking  up  the  opponents' 
attack,  intercepting  passes,  checking  attempts 
to  dodge  or  jump  through,  and,  most  impor- 
tant of  all,  covering  up  their  respective  op- 
ponents in  a  scrinmiage  around  the  goal. 

There  are  three  methods  available  to  get  by 


HOCKEY  369 

an  opponent.  The  first  is  to  dodge.  This 
tends  to  the  individual  style  of  play  that  so 
often  destroys  team-work;  but  within  limits, 
dodging,  coupled  with  clever  stickwork,  is  ex- 
tremely effective.  The  second,  is  to  jump  the 
puck  through.  That  is,  if  you  see  an  opening, 
a  quick  flip  of  the  puck  will  often  enable  you 
to  slip  past  the  opponents'  forwards,  and  be- 
fore they  can  turn  you  are  clear.  The  third 
method  is  the  surest  and  when  perfectly  exe- 
cuted is  unbeatable.  This  is  to  pass  by  your 
opponent.  The  player  with  the  puck  ad- 
vances, and  pretends  to  dodge  in  the  opposite 
direction  from  that  in  which  he  intends  to  pass. 
By  that  feint  the  opponent  is  drawn  off  his 
balance,  the  pass  is  made,  and  the  player  re- 
ceiving the  pass  skates  by  unhindered. 

The  play  of  the  wings  is  hard  work  and  re- 
quires good  condition,  for,  aside  from  the 
bumps  and  bruises  against  the  boards,  the 
wing  has  more  actual  skating  than  any  other 
player.  He  must  be  back  in  the  very  corners 
when  the  puck  is  behind  his  own  goal,  to  assist 
his  defense  men  in  starting  an  attack.  He 
.must  follow  the  puck  well  behind  the  op- 
ponents' goal,  and  yet  be  always  ready  to 
chase  back  if  the  opponents  get  away  and 
start  do\^al  the  ice.  If  a  team  has  wings  that 
will  keep  out  on  the  boards  and  up  in  line,  it 
should  have  no  difficulty  in  starting  an  attack, 
for  without  even  looking  one  can  slam  the 


370     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

puck  over  to  the  boards  knowing  that  the  wing 
that  is  on  the  job  can  pick  it  up  with  a  flying 
start.  A  wing  carrying  the  puck  down  the 
boards  can  often  pass  an  opponent  by  carom- 
ing the  puck  off  the  boards  and  jumping 
around.  A  good  wing,  even  if  a  football 
player,  will  never  attempt  to  jump  between 
an  opponent  and  the  boards,  for  he  is  sure  to 
be  boxed.  The  wing  should  be  a  good  shot 
and  should  be  placed  right  or  left  according  to 
whether  he  shoots  with  his  right  or  his  left 
hand  down.  Wing  shots  are  dangerous,  but  a 
pass  in  to  an  uncovered  center  is  a  more  effec- 
tive means  of  scoring  than  taking  a  wild  chance 
unassisted.  Vvlngs  should  converge  on  the 
goal  with  an  attack,  and  if  the  puck  goes  be- 
hind the  opponents'  goal  it  is  their  duty  to 
check  and  turn  in  attempts  to  carry  it  out.  If 
they  get  the  puck  they  should  at  once  snap  it 
back  to  the  center  for  a  shot. 

The  play  of  the  rover  requires  more  skiU 
and  stick-work. 

Until  recently  the  American  colleges  played 
what  is  kno\\Ti  as  seven-man  hocke}'.  Now 
the  six-man  game  has  completely  replaced  the 
older  game. 

Under  the  old  game  there  were  two  center 
forwards,  left  center  and  right  center.  Today 
there  is  only  one  center  forward  who  is  kno^^^l 
as  the  ''rover."  Needless  to  say  the  play  of 
the  rover  requires  the  utmost  skating  skill  and 


HOCKEY  371 

stick  work  and  the  rover  must  be  fast  and 
untiring.  On  the  offensive  he  is  the  chief 
sharpshooter.  He  must  be  able  to  engage  in 
scrimmages,  dodge,  jump  through  defensive 
men  and  pass  as  well  as  to  shoot  hard  and 
accurately.  Generally  the  fastest  skater  on 
the  team  is  placed  at  the  rover  position  pro- 
vided he  has  endurance  or  can  be  relieved  by  a 
capable  substitute  at  suitable  times.  A  good 
rover  is  continually  on  the  move  because  he 
must  follow  back  the  opponent's  rushes  in 
order  to  pick  up  a  loose  puck  and  dash  back 
in  a  new  attack  upon  the  opponents'  goal. 
Many  teams  make  it  a  practice  to  develop 
two  rovers  who  are  interchanged  throughout 
the  game  in  order  to  keep  the  attack  going  at 
full  speed  One  man,  no  matter  how  good  is 
bound  to  tire  and  become  less  effective  before 
the  end  of  the  three  periods  of  play. 

To  meet  the  dangers  of  a  passing  game  the 
defense,  point,  and  cover-point  play  what  is 
known  as  a  parallel  defense,  as  in  this  way  the 
man  with  the  puck  and  the  man  who  is  to  re- 
ceive the  pass  are  both  covered  at  the  same 
time.  In  an  ordinary  attack  by  two  or  tliree 
men,  the  cover-point  takes  his  side  in  front  of 
the  man  with  the  puck.  If  he  happens  to  be 
playing  far  up  the  ice,  he  retreats,  keeping  free 
from  the  attack  until  he  is  in  line  with  his 
point,  that  is,  parallel  with  him.  He  then 
stops  and  takes  the  man  with  the  puck.     The 


372      THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

point  has  singled  out  the  man  who  is  to  receive 
the  pass.  As  the  player  with  the  puck  ap- 
proaches the  cover-point,  he  passes;  it  is  then 
an  easy  matter  for  the  point  either  to  intercept 
the  pass  or  check  the  opponent  as  he  reaches 
for  it.  The  parallel  defense  should  meet  the 
attack  about  forty  feet  in  front  of  the  goal. 
At  this  distance  a  shot  from  in  front  of  the 
defense  is  not  dangerous  and  a  player  attempt- 
ing to  circle  will  find  himself  out  of  angle  for  a 
shot.  Although  primarily  designed  to  meet 
a  passing  game,  this  defense  works  equally  well 
against  a  dodging  attack.  If  the  opponent 
with  the  puck  attempts  to  dodge,  it  should  be 
easy  either  to  force  him  so  far  outside  that  his 
shot  would  not  be  dangerous,  or  if  he  attempts 
to  slip  between,  a  well  timed  convergence  on 
the  part  of  the  defense  men  wiU  stop  his 
chances.  If  well  executed,  this  defense  is 
almost  impregnable.  The  opponents  are  forced 
either  to  shoot  before  reaching  the  defense  or 
circle  and  flip  the  puck  out  from  behind.  Point 
and  cover-point  readily  alternate  positions. 
In  case  of  a  scrimmage  it  is  the  point's  primary 
duty  to  protect  the  territory  immediately  in 
front  of  the  goal,  as  it  is  the  duty  of  the  cover- 
point  to  follow  into  the  corners  and,  with  the 
help  of  the  wings,  get  the  puck  out  of  the 
danger  zone  awa}^  down  the  ice.  If  it  is  more 
convenient  at  any  time,  the  point  may  follow 
the  puck,  and  that  should  be  a  signal  for  the 


HOCKEY  373 

cover-point  to  protect  in  front  of  the  goal. 
At  no  time  should  both  defense  men  be  on  the 
same  side  of  the  goal.  Their  play  is  con- 
stantly parallel,  for  the  possibility  of  a  pass 
makes  each  side  equally  dangerous. 

A  goal-tender  is  depended  on  to  stop  all  rea- 
sonably long  shots  and  should  be  chose  i  for 
that  ability.  To  stop  short  shots  from  a  scrim- 
mage in  front  of  the  goal,  or  from  an  opponent 
skating  in  free,  requires  too  much  luck  to  be  a 
fair  test,  and  such  occasions  arise  only  from  an 
error  on  the  part  of  the  forwards  or  defense. 
A  goal-tender  is  in  a  position  to  see  and  appre- 
ciate the  danger  from  uncovered  opponents 
and  should  insist  that  his  team-mates  do  their 
duty  in  covering  up  and  at  the  same  time  that 
they  stand  out  of  line  of  his  view  of  the  puck. 
To  judge  a  shot  he  must  see  the  puck  as  it 
leaves  the  ice ;  so  it  should  never  be  out  of  his 
sight  for  an  instant.  Shots  below  the  knee 
must  be  blocked  off  by  the  legs.  The  goal 
tender  should  get  squarely  in  front  of  the  shot 
and  not  lose  a  second  in  clearing  the  rebound 
to  one  side.  Higher  shots  are  best  stopped 
with  the  hand. 

In  this  brief  description  of  position  and  as- 
signment, I  have  followed  out  the  style  of  play 
that  has  proved  most  practical  for  the  players 
in  the  States.  In  Canada,  where  hockey  and 
skating  are  second  nature  to  the  average  boy, 
individual  stars  are  developed  whose  remark- 


374     THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

able  stick-work  and  skating  appear  to  warrant 
a  sacrifice  of  team-play.  Under  these  circum- 
stances, the  player  with  the  puck  is  allowed  to 
roam  all  over  the  ice  attempting  to  weave  and 
dodge  into  position  for  a  shot,  only  passing  as 
a  last  resort.  This  style  is  very  spectacular 
and  gives  those  not  engaged  in  the  attack  op- 
portunity to  rest ;  but  it  has  been  proved  again 
and  again  that  our  teams,  composed  of  com- 
paratively inferior  players,  by  keeping  their 
positions  and  sacrificing  individuality  to  team- 
play,  are  a  match  for  the  best  amateur  teams 
across  the  border. 

The  rapid  development  and  present  stand- 
ing of  hockey  warrant  the  highest  expectations 
for  its  future.  Few  games  combine  so  many 
of  the  requirements  of  a  perfect  sport;  few 
games  combine  mental  and  ph^-sical  alertness 
in  more  nearly  perfect  proportions.  To  the 
spectator,  hockey  is  full  of  fascination ;  but  to 
the  player,  the  pure  joy  of  the  game  exceeds 
that  of  any  other  sport. 


HOCKEY 

BY    GEORGE    OWEN,    JR. 

The  introduction  of  hockey  into  the  United 
States  dates  from  a  comparatively  recent  time. 
In  1879,  Dr.  Frederick  Goodridge,  at  that 
time  a  student  at  Harvard,  was  greatly  im- 
pressed with  the  merits  of  Canadian  hockey 
and,  despite  unfavorable  conditions,  played 
an  important  role  in  establishing  the  game  as 
a  college  sport.  Since  its  introduction,  the 
popularity  of  hockey  has  increased  by  leaps 
and  bounds,  and  wherever  introduced,  it  has 
met  with  great  success.  It  is  now  the  lead- 
ing winter  sport  in  localities  where  weather 
conditions  are  favorable,  with  colleges,  schools, 
and  clubs  showing  ever-increasing  interest. 

The  Rink 

There  are  no  standard  dimensions  for  a 
hockey  rink,  the  size  depending  on  the  loca- 
tion and  the  amount  of  money  to  be  expended. 
If  possible,  the  most  satisfactory  rink  is  about 
ninety  feet  by  two  hundred  feet.  There  are 
three  kinds  of  rinks:  the  plain  outdoor  rink; 

375 


376     THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  indoor  rink  with  natural  ice  (used  in  cold 
Canadian  localities) ;  and  the  indoor  rink  with 
artificial  ice.  The  side-boards  of  a  rink  should 
be  about  five  feet  high  and  of  some  hard  wood. 

Implements  of  the  Game 

The  puck  used  in  hockey  is  a  rubber  disc, 
three  inches  in  diameter  and  one  inch  thick, 
and  should  be  fairly  hard.  The  goals  or 
cages  are  six  feet  wide  by  four  feet  high,  and 
should  be  placed  at  least  fifteen  feet  from  the 
ends.  The  sticks  are  made  in  many  styles  to 
suit  the  individual  player,  but  a  good  stick 
must  be  light  and  stiff.  Many  beginners 
make  the  mistake  of  getting  a  heavy  stick, 
with  the  result  that  they  can  not  handle  it 
quickly  or  skiKully.  The  length  of  the  stick 
should  be  about  the  height  of  a  man's  chest, 
when  standing  erect,  although  many  forwards 
prefer  a  shorter  stick  and  many  defense  men, 
a  longer  one.  The  goal-tender's  stick  is 
shorter,  and  of  extra  width  around  the  blade 
and  part  way  up  the  shaft,  to  help  him  guard 
the  goal. 

Player^s  Equipment 

The  equipment  most  in  use  in  the  United 
States  consists  of  jersey,  tights,  running  pants, 
skates  and  shoes.     In  Canada  they  use  long 


HOCKEY  377 

stockings  rather  than  the  tights.  For  the 
sake  of  speed  and  agiUty,  light  skates  and 
shoes  are  essential.  The  shoes  should  be 
tight-fitting,  light,  with  stiff  soles.  The  skates 
should  be  as  light  as  possible.  For  a  man 
with  a  wide  foot,  a  high  skate  is  best,  whereas 
a  man  with  a  narrow  foot  can  use  lower  skates. 
There  is  a  certain  amount  of  equipment  neces- 
sary for  protection.  This  includes  gloves, 
shin-guards  (preferably  of  papier  mache)  with 
knee-pads,  and  an  aluminum  ''jock  strap." 
Other  protection,  though  not  strictly  neces- 
sary in  a  game  where  there  is  good  officiating, 
includes  hip-pads,  shoulder-pads  of  felt,  and 
thigh-pads.  The  goal-keeper's  equipment  con- 
sists of  the  above,  only  with  shin-guards  of 
extra  size. 

Requisites  of  a  First-Class  Player 

There  are  two  important  requisites  which  a 
man  must  have  in  order  to  be  a  first  class 
hockey  player,  and  these  are:  ability  to  skate, 
and  ability  to  handle  a  stick  well.  Ability 
to  skate  includes  perfect  familiarity  with 
straightaway  skating,  turning,  starting  and 
stopping,  speed,  pick-up,  jump,  and  keeping 
one's  balance  in  order  to  dodge.  These 
qualities  are  gained  only  through  long  hours 
of  practice,  and  should  be  cultivated  when  a 
boy.     Of  these  various  items,  speed,  pick-up, 


378     THE  BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

and  jump  are  perhaps  the  niost  important. 
A  man  must  be  fast  to  keep  ahead  of  the  rest ; 
he  must  have  a  good  pick-up,  that  is,  be  able 
to  get  his  speed  in  a  short  space ;  and  he  must 
have  a  jump  that  will  give  him  a  little  extra 
burst  of  speed  to  carry  him  by  or  away  from 
an  opponent.  Balance  is  also  important,  as 
it  will  often  save  nasty  tumbles,  and  is  neces- 
sary, too,  in  the  use  of  the  body  when  dodging. 
The  faking  to  go  in  one  direction  by  the  move- 
ment of  the  head  and  shoulders  and  then 
going  the  other  way  is  very  effective  in  getting 
by  an  opponent. 

Under  the  head  of  stick-handling,  I  include 
ability  to  shoot,  and  the  use  of  the  stick  while 
carrying  the  puck  and  when  on  the  defense. 
The  art  of  shooting  is  very  difficult  and  re- 
quires a  great  amount  of  practice.  Indeed, 
players  in  the  United  States  are  inclined  to 
neglect  shooting  in  order  to  spend  more  time 
perfecting  something  else,  and  so  we  find  many 
men  who  are  excellent  skaters  and  skilful  at 
carrying  the  puck,  yet  woefully  weak  in  their 
shooting.  And  we  know  that  the  man  or  boy 
who  can  put  the  puck  in  the  cage  is  the  one 
who  scores  the  goals.  The  most  effective 
shots  are  those  driven  knee-high.  Ability  to 
handle  a  stick  skiKuU}"  while  on  the  offense  or 
defense  is  very  important.  Wlien  carrying 
the  puck,  the  player  should  have  his  hands 
very  close  together  in  order  to  be  able  to 


HOCKEY  379 

manipulate  the  stick  more  rapidly,  and  should 
always  hold  them  this  way,  except  just  before 
he  shoots,  when  he  should  slip  the  lower  hand 
down  the  handle  so  as  to  get  more  force  and 
drive  in  his  shot.  On  the  defense,  the  stick 
must  be  held  firmly,  and  wherever  possible 
both  hands  should  be  kept  on  it.  Of  course, 
when  a  long  stretch  is  required  only  one  hand 
is  used. 

From  these  general  considerations  we  turn 
to  the  game  itself.  A  hockey  team  is  com- 
posed of  six  men:  three  forwards,  two  de- 
fense men,  and  a  goal-tender. 


Left  Wing 

Left  Defense 

X 

Goal                • 

X 

x] 

9                                  Center  «    X 

• 

X 

Right  Defense 

X 

Right  Wing 

At  the  present  day  there  are  two  quite 
distinct  styles  of  playing  hockey:  the  so-called 
American  or  "Winsor"  style,  and  the  Canadian 
or  so-called  "Roving"  game.  Of  these  two 
the  "Winsor"  style,  which  takes  its  name 
from  Mr.  Ralph  Winsor,  of  Boston,  who  was 
responsible  for  its  development,  bases  its 
principles  largely  upon  team-play;  whereas 
in  the  Canadian  "Roving"  game,  team-play 


380      THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

is  in  a  great  measure  subordinated  to  the 
skill  of  individual  players. 

As  usually  played  in  the  United  States,  the 
three  forwards  are  picked  primarily  for  their 
ability  to  skate  and  handle  their  sticks.  The 
defense  men  should  possess  sufficient  weight 
to  enable  them  to  use  their  bodies  in  check- 
ing the  attacks  of  opponents,  and  should  also 
combine,  so  far  as  possible,  the  skating  and 
stick-handling  qualities  of  the  forwards,  as 
they  are  often  called  upon  to  advance  the 
puck.  The  goal-tender  should  be  a  man  of 
very  alert  senses,  as  he  must  move  with  cat- 
like quickness  despite  the  handicap  of  his 
heavily  padded  protection. 

On  a  well-balanced  team  about  seventy 
p^r  cent,  of  the  scoring  is  done  by  the  forwards. 
This  is  because  they  constitute  the  main 
attacking  force  and  find  themselves  more 
often  in  scoring  positions.  There  are  three 
methods  for  getting  past  an  opponent.  The 
first  is  to  dodge;  this  tends  to  the  individual 
style  of  play  that  so  often  destroys  team- 
work, and  which  is  essentially  the  Canadian 
'^Roving"  game,  but  within  limits,  dodging, 
coupled  with  clever  stick  work,  is  extremely 
effective.  The  second  is  to  jump  the  puck 
through;  that  is,  if  you  see  an  opening,  a 
quick  flip  of  the  puck  will  often  enable  you  to 
slip  past  your  opponent  and  before  he  can 
turn   you   are   clear.     This   method   is   very 


HOCKEY  381 

effective  in  enabling  defense  men  to  jump 
through  the  opposing  forwards.  The  third 
method  consists  in  passing  to  a  team-mate. 
This,  when  perfectly  executed,  is  unbeatable; 
the  player  with  the  puck  advances  and  pre- 
tends to  dodge  in  the  opposite  direction  from 
that  in  which  he  intends  to  pass.  By  this 
feint,  the  opponent  is  drawn  off  his  balance, 
the  pass  is  made,  and  the  player  receiving  the 
pass  skates  by  unhindered.  In  general,  the 
forwards  try  to  maintain  an  approximately 
even  line  across  the  rink,  both  when  carrying 
the  puck  and  when  checking  back.  Offen- 
sively, this  is  to  facilitate  their  passing  game; 
and  defensively,  it  is  to  make  the  most 
effective  means  for  preventing  opponents 
from  passing  through.  On  the  offense,  how- 
ever, it  is  rare  that  all  three  forwards  are  in 
line.  The  great  majority  of  times  only  two 
can  get  together.  In  this  case  the  third  for- 
ward should  not  attempt  to  get  up  in  line, 
but  should  trail  behind  the  other  two,  ready 
to  pick  up  the  puck  if  it  is  dropped,  or  ready 
to  check  back  if  the  opponents  succeed  in 
taking  the  puck  away.  When  approaching 
the  defense,  the  man  in  the  center  of  the  ice 
should  have  the  puck.  The  most  effective 
way  for  tw^o  or  three  forwards  to  get  past  a 
parallel  defense  is  of  course  to  pass.  The 
receiver  then  has  four  alternatives,  depending 
on  where  he  is  when  getting  the  puck  or  what 


382     THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  defense  men  have  done.  If  the  defense 
men  have  been  fooled  by  the  feint,  the  carrier 
should  skate  right  up  to  the  cage  and  either 
shoot  or  pass  to  his  center  man  after  drawing 
the  goal-tender  out.  If  the  receiver  is  out 
too  far  to  be  able  to  skate  in  after  getting  the 
pass,  he  has  his  choice  of  shooting  as  soon  as 
he  gets  the  puck,  with  the  passer  jumping  in 
for  a  rebound,  or  he  can  take  two  or  three 
strides  and  pass  back  to  the  center  man,  or  he 
can  carry  the  puck  around  behind  the  cage 
and  pass  out  in  front  of  the  cage.  When  the 
puck  is  around  the  opponents  goal  with  one 
of  the  forwards  scrapping  for  it,  the  other  two 
should  range  in  front  of  the  cage,  ready  to 
bang  the  puck  into  the  goal  if  it  comes  to  them, 
or  ready  to  start  checking  back  if  an  opponent 
gets  the  puck.  In  their  own  haK  of  the  rink, 
the  forwards  must  of  course  jump  at  an 
opponent  who  has  the  puck,  but  when  in  the 
other  half  of  the  rink,  they  should  immediately 
form  their  line  and  start  checking  back,  and 
only  close  in  with  their  opponent  when  he 
gets  just  beyond  mid-ice.  Then,  having 
picked  the  puck  away,  the  forwards  jump  the 
other  way  and  have  clear  ice  ahead  of  them. 
A  forward  should  never  go  behind  his  oppo- 
nents' cage  to  check  a  man,  because  if  he 
misses  him,  then  he  is  completely  out  of  the 
play  and  of  no  use  on  the  defense.  Around 
his  own  goal,  a  forward  must  cover  his  man. 


HOCKEY  383 

The  forward  should  know  the  man  playing 
opposite  him  and  should  cover  him  carefully, 
watching  the  man  and  not  the  puck.  So 
much  for  a  general  summary  of  the  duties  of 
a  forward. 

There  are  two  styles  of  play  for  defense  men. 
One  is  where  the  two  men  start  about  the 
middle  of  the  rink  and,  as  the  opponents 
approach,  skate  backwards,  so  that  they 
check  the  attack  about  forty  feet  in  front  of 
the  goal.  The  reason  for  skating  backwards 
is  so  that  the  defense  men  will  be  moving  in 
the  same  direction  and  nearer  the  speed  of 
the  oncoming  forwards.  The  other  style  of 
defense  is  for  the  two  defense  men  to  stand 
about  forty  feet  in  front  of  the  cage,  and  try 
to  anticipate  what  the  attack  is  going  to  do 
and  jump  for  it.  This  style  is  not  so  tiring 
as  the  first,  but  is  not  nearly  so  effective,  for 
in  the  latter  style,  if  the  defense  man  guesses 
wrong  he  is  out  of  the  play,  whereas  in  the 
former,  the  defense  men  are  constantly  in  the 
play.  In  either  style  it  is  fairly  easy  for  two 
defense  men  to  check  a  single  attacker. 
With  two  forwards  approaching,  the  defense 
men  arrange  themselves  so  that  one  defense 
man  is  almost  opposite  the  man  w^ith  the 
puck,  watching  against  a  dodge  and  attempt- 
ing to  make  him  pass,  and  the  other  defense 
man  is  nearer  the  man  skating  with  the  car- 
rier, on  the  lookout  for  a  pass.     With  three 


384     THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

fonv^ards  coming  down,  the  defense  men  have 
the  center  man  between  them  and  are  on  the 
lookout  for  a  pass  to  either  wing  or  an  attempt 
to  carry  the  puck  through.  The  defense  men 
should  be  about  ten  feet  apart  when  meeting 
attacks.  The  right  defense  man  is  respon- 
sible for  the  right  side,  and  should  go  in  be- 
hind his  goal  with  the  puck  on  that  side,  and 
the  left  defense  man  is  responsible  for  his  side. 

The  goal-tender  is  expected  to  stop  all 
reasonably  long  shots  and  must  be  able  to  stop 
a  large  percentage  of  close-ups.  There  is  a 
large  element  of  luck  in  these  close-ups,  but  a 
good  goal-tender  by  his  quickness,  agility, 
and  ability  to  outguess  the  shooter,  can 
manage  to  stop  most  of  them.  The  goal- 
tender  must  keep  his  eye  on  the  puck  at  all 
times,  for  unless  he  sees  it  leave  the  ice,  it  is 
lost  and  he  cannot  follow  it.  He  should  get 
squarely  in  front  of  every  shot  if  possible, 
and  not  lose  a  second  in  clearing  the  rebound. 
Shots  below  the  knee  should  be  blocked  by 
the  legs,  whereas  higher  shots  are  best  stopped 
with  the  hand.  The  goal  tender  is  in  a  posi- 
tion to  see  and  appreciate  the  danger  from 
uncovered  opponents  and  should  call  atten- 
tion to  his  team-mates. 

In  the  foregoing  the  writer  has  attempted 
to  call  attention  to  the  essential  features  of 
the  game  of  ice  hockey,  a  sport  which  has 
already  become  one  of  the  leading  athletic 


HOCKEY  385 

events  of  the  northern  United  States.  Under 
proper  supervision  and  management  of  hockey 
clubs  and  associations,  the  future  success  of 
this  game  is  assured. 


LAWN  TENNIS 


I 


A   SERMON    ON   LAWN   TENNIS 

BY   JAMES    DWIGHT 

Lawn  tennis  is  a  curious  game.  It  simply 
consists  in  hitting  a  ball  over  a  net  and  back 
again.  Nothing  else,  except  that  you  try  to  hit 
it  as  hard  as  you  safely  can,  and  to  put  it  out 
of  your  opponent's  reach.  It  sounds  easy 
enough,  and  yet  think  how  few  can  play  well. 
You  see  people  play  for  years,  and  play  very 
little  better  at  the  end.  This  would  be  right 
and  natural  enough  if  they  took  no  real  interest 
in  the  game,  but  many  of  them  do  take  real 
interest  in  it. 

In  other  games  and  sports  it  is  not  so.  There 
seems  to  be  no  game  that  so  many  play  and  so 
few  play  well.  Any  ordinary  man  can  learn  to 
row,  respectably  at  least,  if  he  gives  several 
years  to  it.  Almost  any  boy  can  learn  to  play 
baseball.  Most  men  with  practice  can  learn  to 
shoot  pretty  straight. 

And  so  on ;  but  with  lawn  tennis  it  is  differ- 
ent. There  the  multitude  are  "  duffers;  "  and 
*'  duffers  "  they  remain  all  their  lives.  It  is  a 
few  only  who  come  forward  out  of  the  ranks. 

Why  should  this  be  so  ?  For  many  reasons ; 
3P9 


390        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

the  game  is  not  as  easy  as  it  looks.  It  is  easy 
enough  to  hit  the  ball  gently  out  of  your  hand 
over  the  net  into  some  part  of  the  opposite 
court,  but  it  is  not  so  easy  to  hit  it  hard  and 
keep  it  in  court.  It  has  to  go  very  close  to  the 
net  to  do  that.  Then  again,  it  is  not  enough  to 
hit  it  into  any  part  of  the  court;  it  must  be 
placed  in  some  particular  spot  to  gain  any  ad- 
vantage. It  may  be  necessary  to  place  it  within 
a  few  inches  of  the  side  line.  On  top  of  all  this, 
you  may  have  to  run  at  the  top  of  your  speed 
to  reach  the  ball  at  all. 

All  this  does  not  sound  so  easy.  Yet  there  is 
something  more,  the  faculty  of  playing  the  right 
stroke  every  time.  It  comes  to  a  very  few  men 
as  an  instinct.  It  comes  to  a  larger  number  as 
the  result  of  years  of  thought  and  practice.  To 
the  immense  majority  it  never  comes  at  all ;  in 
fact,  they  do  not  know  that  such  a  faculty  ex- 
ists. Even  now  we  have  not  got  through  with 
the  difficulties  of  the  game.  Running  about  the 
court  is  not  easy  work.  The  distance  of  each 
man  is  not  great,  nor  need  the  speed  always  be 
high ;  but  you  must  start  very  quickly,  almost, 
in  fact,  before  you  are  sure  where  the  ball  is 
coming.  It  is  really  a  succession  of  jumps, 
rather  than  a  steady  run.  For  this  you  need 
great  quickness  and  agility,  and,  beyond  all, 
great  endurance.  In  other  words,  the  game 
needs  young  men  in  good  condition  to  play  it 
well.    On  the  other  hand,  it  requires  judgment 


A  SERMON  ON   LAWN  TENNIS    391 

and  experience  that  usually  come  only  later  in 
life. 

Such  are  some  of  the  difficulties  of  the  game ; 
and  one  does  not  wonder,  as  he  thinks  of  them, 
that  the  game  is  not  better  played.  Why,  then, 
some  one  will  ask,  is  the  game  so  popular? 
Why  do  so  many  play  it,  if  they  know  that  they 
can  never  play  it  well?  Because  the  **  duf- 
fers "  have  just  as  good  a  time  as  the 
''  cracks."  Sometimes  I  think  that  they  have 
a  better  time,  even,  for  with  them  it  is  all  play; 
with  the  better  players  it  is  serious  work. 

I  remember  well  the  first  time  I  ever  played 
the  game.  It  was  at  Nahant,  in  the  summer  of 
74.  A  set  of  lawn  tennis  had  been  brought 
over  from  England  early  in  the  summer;  but 
we  had  taken  no  interest  in  it  —  too  little,  in- 
deed, to  try  it.  At  length  one  day  we  put  up 
the  net,  marked  out  a  rude  court,  and  started, 
more  in  jest  than  earnest.  In  a  few  moments 
we  were  playing  in  earnest  indeed.  There  was 
all  the  feeling  of  personal  antagonism  which  is 
to  me  one  of  the  great  attractions  of  the  game. 
My  first  opponent  was  Mr.  F.  E.  Sears,  an  elder 
brother  of  the  ex-champion.  I  remember  that 
each  won  a  game,  and  that  in  the  afternoon  we 
played  in  the  rain  in  rubber  coats  and  boots. 
How  odd  it  would  look  now ! 

Of  course  we  could  not  play  much,  but  the  in- 
terest was  just  as  great.  I  fancy  that  one 
reason  for  the  great  popularity  of  the  game  lies 


392        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

in  the  fact  that  you  do  not  need  to  play  well  to 
have  a  good  time.  Yon  need  only  an  opponent 
of  about  your  own  strength,  so  that  there  may 
be  a  continual  struggle  for  the  mastery.  For 
this  very  reason,  two  players  are  apt  to  get  into 
the  habit  of  always  playing  together,  and  they 
naturally  improve  very  slowly.  Often  they  see 
no  good  play,  they  have  the  same  ideas  about 
the  game  as  when  they  started,  they  have  the 
same  faults,  because  they  know  no  better. 

I  look  to  see  much  better  lawn  tennis  in  the 
future  than  exists  at  present.  The  game  has 
been  generally  known  in  this  country  for  about 
thirty  years;  and  it  was  first  taken  up  largely 
by  grown  men,  who  had  played  rackets,  or  base- 
ball, or  cricket.  They  learned  all  they  could 
with  no  one  to  teach  them,  comparatively  soon, 
and  before  this  time  have  dropped  out  of  active 
play  because  the  exertion  is  beyond  them.  I 
am  an  example  of  the  class  myself;  though  I 
lasted  longer  than  most,  as  I  cared  more  for 
the  game. 

Of  course,  all  this  time  boys  were  learning  to 
play,  but  very  few  of  them  turned  out  well. 
They  learned  as  they  chose;  few  of  them 
wished  for  any  teaching;  fewer  got  it.  So  for 
a  long  time  the  older  men  were  in  front. 

There  has  now  come  another  change,  and  in 
the  right  direction.  The  interest  in  games  of 
all  kinds  has  increased  so  much,  and  so  much 
attention  is  devoted  to  training  boys  in  the  pre- 


A  SERMON   ON  LAWN  TENNIS    393 

paratory  schools  and  afterward  in  college,  that 
we  have  not  only  a  very  large  class  of  trained 
athletes,  but  boys  have  learned  how  important 
good  '*  coaching  "  is.  They  go  into  the  game 
more  earnestly  than  they  used.  Owing  to  the 
large  number  of  tournaments,  they  see  the  best 
players,  and  they  copy  their  styles.  Each  has 
some  one  whom  he  looks  up  to  as  a  model  of 
what  good  play  should  be. 

Now,  too,  they  play  in  tournaments  them- 
selves; and  playing  in  public,  they  are  more 
careful  as  to  their  faults  and  peculiarities  than 
they  used  to  be  in  private,  for  fear  of  seeming 
ridiculous.  In  this  way  they  learn  to  play  well 
at  an  earlier  age  than  any  class  before  them. 
Thus  they  have  their  agility  and  their  knowl- 
edge of  the  game  at  the  same  time.  Heretofore 
I  used  to  say  that  the  trouble  with  the  game 
was,  that  few  had  brains  enough  to  play  it 
properly  until  they  got  too  old  to  play  it  at  all. 

This,  I  think,  is  no  longer  true;  and  the 
change  is  due  to  the  improvement  of  the  boys. 
For  instance,  I  do  not  see  any  great  improve- 
ment in  the  best  players  in  the  past  few  years, 
but  among  the  middle-class  players  the  im- 
provement is  enormous.  They  are  largely 
young  players,  and  are  still  improving.  The 
number,  too,  of  good  players  has  increased 
very  much;  and  in  the  first  class  itself  there 
are  twice  as  many  players  as  there  were  a  few 
years  ago. 


394        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

The  practical  part  of  all  this  discussion  is, 
"  Can  we  do  anything  to  help  the  advancement 
of  young  players!  "  Something  we  can  do: 
we  can  encourage  tournaments  between  the  dif- 
ferent schools,  etc.  The  interscholastic  tourna- 
ments held  at  Harvard,  Yale,  and  Princeton  are 
good  examples.  If  any  one  doubts  the  value  of 
this  system,  let  him  look  at  the  success  of  the 
football  competition  between  the  different  pre- 
paratory schools  in  training  players  for  the 
colleges. 

By  giving  tournaments,  we  help  the  boys  in 
several  ways.  They  get  used  to  matches,  a  very 
necessary  thing.  They  get  interested  in  the 
game,  and  their  ambition  is  aroused.  They  see 
good  play  and  good  players;  and  they  meet 
every  variety  of  style,  instead  of  having  their 
practice  confined  to  playing  against  one  or  two 
players  only. 

This  is  surely  good.  Can  we  now  add  any 
preaching  that  can  be  of  use  f  I  hardly  know ; 
I  look  on  preaching  with  great  disrespect.  Few 
listen,  few  believe  you,  and  fewer  still  take  the 
trouble  to  try  to  put  the  teaching  into  practice. 
There  are,  however,  some  general  instructions 
so  simple  that  it  would  seem  folly  to  write 
them,  if  it  were  not  that  they  are  constantly 
lost  sight  of. 

Take  a  boy  at  the  beginning.  Probably  he 
cannot  get  one  of  the  most  expensive  rackets. 
It  really  does  not  matter.    Some  of  the  cheaper 


A  SERMON   ON   LAWN  TENNIS    395 

ones  are  practically  as  good,  but  it  matters  a 
great  deal  what  sort  of  a  cheap  one  he  gets. 
Let  him  get  one  of  fourteen  or  fourteen  and  a 
quarter  ounces,  a  little  lighter  in  the  head  than 
most  rackets  are  made.  Have  nothing  fancy 
about  it,  no  gold  braid,  no  curious  stringing,  no 
fluted  handle.  It  needs  to  be  well  balanced  and 
well  strung,  and  that  is  enough.  As  to  flannels 
and  shoes,  there  is  nothing  to  be  said,  except 
that  the  shoe  should  be  comfortable  and  solid 
enough  to  hold  the  foot  together,  else  there  is 
a  good  deal  of  danger  of  straining  the  foot. 

As  to  balls,  I  do  not  know  what  to  say.  Balls 
are  very  expensive,  and  last  a  very  short  time. 
A  boy  cannot  expect  to  have  new  balls  every 
day ;  and  if  he  is  in  earnest,  and  does  not  mind 
taking  trouble  i^i  order  to  learn,  the  best  thing 
that  he  can  do  is  to  practise  with  two  or  three 
balls  only.  They  will  need  a  good  deal  of 
chasing,  but  he  will  always  have  them  in  good 
condition.  If  he  brings  out  a  boxful,  they  will 
all  suffer  more  or  less  the  first  day,  and  he  will 
have  to  use  poor  balls  till  he  can  get  another 
box.  It  is  a  great  mistake  to  use  uncovered 
balls  or  last  year's  balls.  Neither  are  of  the 
slightest  Tiise. 

No  advice  can  be  given  about  courts.  One 
must  play  on  the  best  available. 

To  begin  with,  the  player  may  make  up  his 
mind  that  it  will  take  a  long  time  to  play  even 
tolerably  well.    The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  learn 


396        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

to  hit  the  ball  straight  —  that  is,  with  no  side 
twist.  The  ball  should  go  directly  down  the 
court.  If  the  player  stands  on  the  central  line, 
the  ball  should  drop  on  the  central  line  on  the 
other  side  of  the  net.  This  is  the  very  essence 
of  a  good  stroke.  If  you  can  play  straight,  you 
can  tell  where  the  ball  is  going.  If  you  have  a 
curve  on  it,  j^ou  will  be  constantly  hitting  out 
of  court  on  the  side,  or  else  bringing  the  ball 
into  the  middle  of  the  court  when  you  intended 
it  to  go  down  the  side  line. 

Next  in  importance  is  the  length  of  the  court. 
You  must  learn  to  hit  from  one  base  line  to  the 
other;  that  is,  to  hit  from  the  back  of  your 
own  court  and  make  the  ball  drop  about  a  yard 
from  the  other  base  line.  A  moment's  thought 
will  show  that  if  the  ball  goes  only  as  far  as  the 
service  line,  your  opponent  can  easily  come  for- 
ward to  volley. 

These  two  points  are  the  foundation  of  the 
game. 

As  to  the  service,  don't  bother  about  it.  A 
very  fast  service  is  terrible  to  bad  players ;  but 
good  ones  return  it  easily.  Wait  till  you  play 
fairly  well  before  you  try  for  a  very  fast  serv- 
ice. Next  comes  the  volley.  Wait  till  you  have 
brought  the  ground  strokes  under  control  be- 
fore you  begin  to  practise  much  volleying. 
When  you  do  begin,  keep  one  point  clearly  in 
mind :  you  must  always  hit  the  ball.  You  must 
not  let  it  hit  your  racket.    The  only  exception 


A  SERMON  ON  LAWN  TENNIS    397 

is  when  you  are  close  to  the  net ;  then  you  may 
block  the  ball,  if  your  opponent  is  far  back. 
Don't  try  any  wild  "  smashing."  Hit  quietly, 
but  always  hard.  As  a  principle,  never  hit  a 
ball  easy;  always  make  a  real  stroke.  One 
word  more.  Don't  play  very  long  at  a  time. 
Three  or  four  sets  are  enough.  Always  play 
with  a  better  player  if  you  can,  and  take  odds 
enough  to  make  him  work  as  hard  as  he  can. 
Win  quietly;   lose  quietly;   don't  get  angry. 


LAWN   TENNIS 

BY    KICHARD    NOERIS    WILLIAMS,    2D 

But  a  very  few  years  ago  tennis  was  practi- 
cally unkno^vn;  the  game  naturally  existed 
but  interest  in  it  was  at  its  lowest  ebb.  Why 
and  for  what  reason  it  has  grown  so  rapidly 
since  is  impossible  to  say,  but  one  of  the  great 
factors  was  the  Davis  Cup,  presented  to  the 
U.  S.  N.  L.  T.  A.  by  D.  F.  Davis  for  interna- 
tional competition.  No  history  or  article  of 
any  length  can  be  written  without  mentioning 
this  famous  trophy;  it  is  now  the  nucleus 
around  which  everything  centers. 

The  trophy  was  given  in  1900  but  at  the  time 
few  paid  much  attention  to  it  and  certainly  no 
one  could  predict  the  future  which  it  has  now 
attained.  It  was  really  not  until  1902  that  the 
public  became  interested  in  it.  The  previous 
year  the  Cup  had  been  successfully  defended 
against  England,  but  in  1902  it  is  said  that  ten 
thousand  people  watched  Whitman,  Larned, 
Davis  and  Ward  defend  against  the  attack  of 
Pim,  R.  F.  and  H.  L,  Doherty.  The  Americans 
were  again  successful  that  year,  and  aided  by 
the  great  crowds  that  watched  the  matches,  the 

398 


LAWN  TENNIS  399 

game  naturally  was  looked  at  with  more  favor. 
People  started  talking  about  it,  and  with  the  in- 
ternational flavor  which  it  had  received  and  the 
talk  in  the  papers  people  began  taking  the  game 
up  with  more  earnestness. 

In  1903  the  Davis  Cup  was  lifted  by  the  Eng- 
lishmen and  was  destined  not  to  return  for  ten 
long  years.  The  matches  were  played  in  Bos- 
ton on  the  famous  grounds  of  the  Longwood 
Cricket  Club.  England  won  by  four  matches  to 
one,  and  the  only  match  that  we  won  was  by  de- 
fault, R.  F.  Doherty  having  injured  his  shoulder 
was  unable  to  play.  On  paper  it  seems  an 
overwhelming  defeat,  but  all  the  matches  were 
terribly  close  and,  as  one  writer  expresses  it, 
**  First  it  wavered  one  way,  then  another,  and 
at  times  was  exactly  even  (the  two  singles  were 
going  on  at  the  same  time),  until  not  only  the 
players  but  the  gallery  itself  was  worn  to  a 
frayed  and  jagged  edge." 

In  one  way,  however,  our  losing  the  Cup  was 
a  good  thing.  The  next  year's  matches  were 
played  in  England,  and  it  naturally  interested 
the  Continental  nations  having  the  Cup  played 
for  in  Europe.  From  that  year  the  list  of  na- 
tions challenging  increased  every  year.  In  1905 
Australia  challenged  for  the  first  time.  Her 
team  was  composed  of  Brooks,  "Wilding,  and 
Dunlop.  She  did  not  win  that  year,  being  de- 
feated by  America's  team,  composed  of  Earned, 
Wright,  and  Ward,  in  the  final.    It  is  curious 


400        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

to  note  that  the  Austrahan  team  of  1905  was 
the  very  one  that  she  sent  to  America  in  1914 
to  challenge  us  for  the  Cup. 

In  1907  Australasia  was  at  last  successful 
and  took  the  trophy  from  England.  Her 
representatives  defeated  America.  (B.  C. 
Wright  and  K.  Behr)  in  the  preliminary  tie, 
and  then  defeated  England,  whose  team  was 
composed  of  A.  W.  Gore  and  H.  Roper-Barrett. 
During  the  time  the  Cup  was  in  far-off  Aus- 
tralia international  tennis  was  very  much  handi- 
capped. It  was  too  far  away  for  -many  nations 
to  send  teams,  the  expense  and  time  were 
considerable;  only  England  and  America  re- 
mained true  to  the  cause.  They  challenged 
every  year,  played  each  other  in  the  preliminary 
tie,  and  America  (generally  winning  the  tie) 
sent  a  team  to  Australia.  Every  year  it  re- 
turned, but  without  the  Cup.  At  length  in  1912 
America  defaulted  no  players  being  able  to 
make  the  trip,  and  England,  after  having  easily 
disposed  of  France,  took  the  long  voj^age  and 
a  long  chance  at  the  Cup.  Luck  was  with  them, 
though,  and  on  the  1st  of  December,  1912,  the 
news  was  flashed  over  the  \\dres  that  England 
had  won  the  Cup.  I  do  not  mean  to  say  that 
England  won  just  because  the  luck  was  with 
them.  J.  C.  Parke,  the  great  Irishman,  was  the 
luck,  for  he  it  was  who  beat  Brooks  and  made 
the  3-2  victory  possible.  TheEnglish  may  well 
be  proud  of  their  team,  they  did  a  big  thing  and 


LAWN  TENNIS  401 

they  deserved  a  great  deal  of  credit.  Their 
team  was  made  up  of  Capt.  C.  P.  Dixon,  J.  C. 
Parke,  A.  E.  Beamish,  and  F.  G.  Lowe.  Eng- 
land was  not  to  hold  the  Cup,  however,  very 
long.  In  1913  seven  nations  challenged,  viz.. 
South  Africa,  Canada,  Belgium,  Germany, 
France,  Australasia  and  America.  Out  of  this 
long  list  of  entries  America  came  through  suc- 
cessfully and  challenged  England.  This  time 
America  regained  the  Cup.  For  ten  years  she 
had  put  teams  in  the  field  and  every  time  her 
team  had  been  defeated,  but  the  Cup  was  at 
last  to  return  to  its  native  shores.  The  Eng- 
lish team  was  composed  of  Capt.  McNair, 
C.  P.  Dixon,  J.  C.  Parke,  H.  Roper-Barrett, 
and  A.  W.  Gore;  and  the  American  team  of 
Capt.  H.  H.  Hackett,  M.  E.  McLoughlin,  R.  N. 
Williams,  2d,  and  W.  F.  Johnson. 

In  1914  the  Australian  team  composed  of 
A.  F.  Wilding  and  Norman  E.  Brooks  again 
took  the  cup  to  Australia,  defeating  the  Amer- 
ican team  at  New  York  three  matches  to  two. 
Following  this  victory  there  were  no  matches 
until  1919  due  to  the  intervention  of  the  War. 

In  1919  England  endeavored  unsuccessfully 
to  wrest  the  cup  from  Australia  after  defeating 
South  Africa  and  France  in  the  challenge 
rounds.  G.  L.  Patterson  and  J.  O.  Anderson 
successfully  defended  for  Australia  in  the 
singles;  G.  L.  Patterson  and  N.  E.  Brooks 
representing  Australia  in  the  doubles.     A.  H. 


402      THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Lowe  and  A.  R.  F.  Kingscote  were  the  entries 
for  the  British  Isles  in  the  singles  and  A.  R. 
F.  Kingscote  teamed  with  A.  E.  Beamish  in 
the  doubles. 

In  1920  the  United  States,  after  defeating 
France,  and  the  British  Isles  in  the  challenge 
round,  journeyed  to  Aukland,  New  Zealand 
where  they  were  successful  in  again  bringing 
the  Cup  to  the  United  States,  winning  all  five 
matches.  W.  T.  Tilden  2nd,  and  William  M. 
Johnston  competed  for  the  first  time  for  the 
United  States,  playing  in  both  the  singles  and 
the  doubles.  N.  E.  Brooks  and  G.  L.  Patter- 
son represented  Australia.  Incidentally  W.  T. 
Tilden  2nd,  while  in  Europe  for  the  challenge 
rounds,  won  the  singles  championship  at 
Wimbledon  and  his  team-mates  Charles  Gar- 
land and  R.  N.  Williams  2nd,  won  the 
doubles  in  the  same  tournament. 

In  1921  twelve  nations,  more  than  ever 
before  in  the  history  of  the  event,  challenged 
for  the  Davis  Cup.  The  challenge  round 
finally  simmered  down  to  Australia  and  Japan. 
Japan  having  defeated  India  at  Chicago  and 
Australia  having  defeated  Denmark  at  Cleve- 
land. Japan  won  the  play-off  at  Newport, 
wirming  the  four  singles  matches  although 
losing  the  doubles. 

The  match  between  Japan  and  the  United 
States  was  held  at  Forest  Hills,  New  York. 
W.  T.  Tilden  2nd,  and  William  M.  Johnston 


LAWN  TENNIS  403 

again  represented  the  United  States  in  the 
singles  matches  and  Watson  Washburn  and 
R.  N.  Williams,  2nd,  defended  in  the  doubles. 
All  of  the  five  events  were  won  by  the  Ameri- 
can teams  so  that  the  Cup  continues  to  stay  in 
the  United  States. 

This  short  story  of  the  Davis  Cup  is  a  good 
illustration  of  the  growth  of  the  game.  At  first 
it  was  but  a  match  between  England  and 
America,  but  gradually  it  developed  into  a 
championship  of  the  world,  with  practically  all 
the  nations  entering  at  one  time  or  another. 

Among  other  circumstances  which  have  con- 
tributed so  much  to  the  development  of  the 
game  is  the  great  interest  shown  by  the 
younger  men  and  the  boys.  There  was  a  feel- 
ing prevalent,  and  unfortunately  it  still  pre- 
vails in  some  quarters,  that  tennis  was  but  a 
''girl's  game."  In  one  way  this  is  very  nat- 
ural; to  the  onlooker  who  has  never  endeav- 
ored to  play  the  game  it  seems  a  perfectly 
easy  thing  to  just  bat  a  baU  over  and  over 
again.  Until  that  feeling  had  vanished  tennis 
stood  at  a  standstill;  but  fortunately  it  was 
soon  found  out  that  athletic  qualities  were 
needed  to  be  a  tennis  player.  Men  were  then 
no  longer  ''ashamed"  to  play  tennis  and  its 
success  was  assured. 

I  have  heard  many  discussions  as  to  whether 
tennis  is  "born  in  a  man"  or  not.  I  am  sure 
I  do  not  know,  but  whether  is  is  born  in  a  man 


404     THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

or  not,  it  must  be  developed  and  made  to 
grow.  I  take  it  for  granted  that  the  reader  has 
played  the  game  for  some  time  and  knows  the 
fundamental  points,  for  my  object  here  is  not 
to  teach  the  beginner  but  to  try  to  help  the 
man  or  woman  who  has  taken  interest  in  the 
game  and  is  anxious  to  go  ahead. 

A  thing  that  I  have  found  of  great  help  is  to 
watch  good  players ;  but  try  and  watch  a  little 
with  your  head,  too ;  I  mean  by  this,  don't  just 
watch  the  stroke  and  the  ball,  but  try^  and  see 
if  you  can  fathom  what  the  player  is  trying  to 
do,  that  is,  what  his  tactics  are.  See  for  your- 
self whether  they  are  successful  or  not  and  why 
they  are  or  are  not!  There  is  one  great  dan- 
ger, though,  in  watching,  and  that  is  that  you 
will  try  to  copy  —  never  do  that  —  copy  the 
idea  if  you  think  it  is  a  good  one,  but  don't 
copy  the  execution  of  the  stroke.  A  man  who 
copies  a  style  will  never  get  very  high.  Tennis 
is  an  individual  ^  ^something" —  that  is  the  only 
way  I  can  explain  it.  You  must  play  your  way 
and  not  the  way  some  other  person  does  it.  I 
have  seen  many  players  who  had  the  natural 
ability  to  play  but  who  copied  some  favorite's 
style  and  remained  in  a  rut. 

If  he  really  has  the  desire  to  become  a  first- 
class  player  and  has  the  backbone  to  do  so,  I 
realh^  think  that  anj^  person  with  a  reasonable 
amount  of  abilit}^  can  succeed.  Even  if  he  can- 
not make  the  ''first  ten"  he  can  come  very 


LAWN  TENNIS  405 

close  to  it.  The  only  way  to  do  this,  however, 
is  to  map  out  a  course  for  yourself  and  stick 
to  it.  It  will  be  very  long,  but  you  must  ex- 
pect that.  You  cannot  possibly  learn  how  to 
play  well  in  a  few  weeks.  The  first  thing  you 
must  do  is  to  give  up  all  idea  of  mnning,  or 
even  trjang  to  win;  for  about  two  long  ycsLTS 
you  must  give  up  entirely  to  practice  —  prac- 
tising shots  and  that  is  all.  I  am,  of  course, 
still  talking  to  the  man  v,  ho  has  had  some 
experience  and  who  can  play  fairly  well  but 
wishes  to  get  much  farther. 

Wlien  you  are  practising,  however,  don't  lose 
your  head,  but  always  thi?iJc.  Don't  practise 
your  favorite  shot  —  that  won't  help  you  much 
—  but  practise  those  shots  which  you  try  to 
''cover  up"  when  j^ou're  playing  a  match  — 
the  shots  you  feel  you  are  weakest  in.  Of 
course  you  can't  always  practise  —  sometimes 
you  must  have  a  good  time  —  do  that  occasion- 
ally ;  it  will  relieve  your  mind.  Now  when  you 
are  working  at  these  shots  don't  try  to  play 
them  hard,  but  place  the  ball.  Do  it  quietly, 
and  by  and  by  when  you  are  sure  you  can  put 
the  ball  any  place  you  wish,  you  can  gradually 
augment  the  speed.  But  don't  worry  about 
speed;  that  will  come  of  its  own  accord  when 
you  are  able  to  put  the  ball  with  accuracy 
wherever  you  wish  it.  Be  sure  that  your 
game  does  not  get  one-sided,  that  is,  alway 
playing  from  the  back  of  the  court  or  always  at 


406     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

the  net.  You  must  learn  to  play  both  about 
the  same.  You  will  of  course  have  a  natural 
inclination  to  play  one  better  than  the  other  — 
that  will  be  your  strong  point  —  but  don't 
neglect  the  other  part.  You  must  be  able  to 
fall  back  on  that  in  case  something  goes  TVTong 
with  your  favorite  game. 

There  are  many  small  points  on  which  it  is 
impossible  for  me  to  give  you  any  advice. 
These  are,  for  example,  how  to  hold  j^our 
racket,  how  far  from  the  face,  how  heavy  it 
should  be,  how  high  you  should  throw  the  ball 
to  serve;  all  these  details  you  must  find  out 
for  yourself;  there  is  no  rule,  the  individual 
must  suit  himself.  If  you  are  in  trouble,  how- 
ever, ask  a  friend  who  knows  something  about 
the  game  to  watch  3'OU,  and  he  will  perhaps  be 
able  to  detect  some  errors.  There  is  one  thing, 
though,  I  might  say,  and  that  is,  do  not  get  too 
heavy  a  racket;  there  is  a  tendency  to  get  a 
fourteen  and  one-half  ounce  racket  just  because 
fourteen  and  one-half  ounce  racket  just  be- 
cause so-and-so  uses  one.  Don't  be  misled  by 
that ;  a  heavy  racket  x'aakes  your  motions  slow 
and  you  hit  the  ball  too  late. 

I  should  like  now  to  say  a  few  words  con- 
cerning the  service.  Some  years  ago  (about 
1901)  everybody  was  literally  taken  off  his 
feet  by  the  new  service  just  then  invented  by 
D.  F.  Davis  and  H.  Ward;  it  was  what  we  now 
call  the  American  twist  service.     I  remember 


LAWN  TENNIS  407 

when,  in  1905,  H.  Ward  played  H.  L.  Doherty 
in   the   Davis   Cup   match  (London).     Ward 
hterally  walked  through  Doherty  for  the  first 
two  sets.     The  score  was  perhaps  close,  but 
Ward  always  held  the  upper  hand.     As  A. 
Wallis  Myers,  the  well  known  English  player 
and  writer,  puts  it,  'Tt  was  like  nothing  ever 
seen  in  the  center  court  before  or  since!"     I 
happened  to  have  a  seat  near  the  umpire's 
chair,  and  as  ^'H.  L."  changed  sides  I  heard 
him  say,  '^I  can't  play  against  this  man!"  and 
then   Ward   went   absolutely   to   pieces   and 
''H.  L."  ran  out  6-1,  6-2,  6-0  —  a  cruel  ending 
to  such  a  match.     What  was  the  cause .^    The 
service  is  too  nerve-racking  and  exhausting. 
Ward  could  not  keep  it  up  and  he  lost  out  in 
the  long  run.     I  do  not  mean  to  advise  against 
a  twist  serve,  for  now  it  is  slightly  moderated 
and  not  so  exhausting,  but  it  is  much  more  so 
than  the  ordinary  fast,  well-placed  serve,  and 
then  it  is  a  very  hard  serve  to  play  well.     That 
is  one  of  its  great  disadvantages,  and  if  not  well 
played  it  is  a  very  easy  service  to  return.    To 
sum  up,  I  might  say  that  the  twist  serve  is  a  very 
fine  implement  of  war,  but  a  very  hard  one  to 
acquire,  and  very  disastrous  for  the  owner  if  it 
is  not  well  used.     A  very  extraordinary  service 
is  really  not  an  essential;  by  this  I  mean,  you 
don't  need  a  very  fast  or  a  very  twisted  serv- 
ice.    The  object  of  a  serve  is  not  so  much  to 
win  a  clean  ace,  as  so  many  people  think,  but 


408     THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

to  place  your  opponent  in  an  unfavorable  posi- 
tion so  that  you  can  win  on  his  return.  You 
must  not  look  at  the  service  as  one  terrific  first 
serve  in  the  hopes  of  making  an  ace,  and  then 
a  second  serve,  '^just  get  it  over  any  old 
way!"  Your  object  in  serving  is  to  get  into 
position,  in  a  position  to  command  the  rest  of 
the  play,  and  a  slow  but  well-placed  serve  can 
do  this  for  you.  If  you  have  speed,  all  the 
better,  but  often  even  the  best  players  get  so 
engrossed  in  speed  that  they  forget  about  plac- 
ing the  ball,  and  speed  without  placing  is  prac- 
tically useless  against  a  first-class  player. 

We  may  now  take  up  for  a  few  moments  the 
''base  line"  and  'Volleying"  game.  Years 
ago,  when  the  game  first  started,  everybody 
without  exception  played  from  the  back  of  the 
court,  but  gradually  men  began  going  to  the 
net,  and  when  Davis  and  Ward  invented  the 
twist  service,  there  was  a  great  tendency  to 
"rush"  the  net  aU  the  time.  The  tendency 
now  is  to  combine  both  and  this  is  what  we 
might  call  the  modem  game.  The  question 
will  probably  be  asked :  When  should  you  go  to 
the  net  and  when  stay  back.^^  Of  course  the 
old  school  of  base-liners  like  S.  H.  Smith  and 
A.  W.  Gore  would  say  go  to  the  net  only  when 
forced,  and  the  great  net-players,  like  B.  C. 
Wright,  and  N.  E.  Brooks,  would  say,  "Stay 
back  only  when  forced."  It  is  reaUy  i  pos- 
sible to  answer  that  question  on  paper  — con- 


LAWN   TENNIS  409 

ditions  must  dictate  the  process.  The  ideal 
would  be  to  manoeuver  from  the  base-line,  pre- 
pare your  shot,  then  go  up  to  the  net  and  finish 
the  point.  The  practical  process,  however,  is 
first  think  and  find  out  what  kind  of  a  player 
your  opponent  is.  If  he  is  a  great  volleyer, 
take  the  net  away  from  him;  if  a  great  base- 
line player,  try  to  beat  him  from  the  base-line 
and  the  net.  In  the  latter  case  it  is  much 
harder  than  in  the  former,  for  in  the  first  place 
when  you  take  the  net  and  stay  there,  your 
opponent  is  unable  to  go  to  the  net  and  he  will 
find  himself  in  deep  water.  In  the  second 
place,  however,  you  cannot  take  possession  of 
the  back  court  of  your  opponent.  This  is  the 
time  to  show  head-work.  You  must  change 
your  game  all  the  time  —  keep  your  man  guess- 
ing —  first  play  short  shots  —  then  long  ones 
—  stay  in  the  back  court,  then  storm  the  net. 
This  back  court  game  has  played  havoc  with 
many  an  American  player  —  just  look  back 
on  S.  H.  Smith's  record  in  the  Davis  Cup 
matches  against  our  men,  it  is  far  better  than 
either  of  the  Dohertys.  I  don't  think  that  his 
game  would  be  so  disastrous  to-day,  for  we 
have  learned  the  lesson,  but  in  those  days  we 
never  thought  of  playing  the  base-line,  and  the 
net  was  the  only  game  we  knew,  and  when  that 
went  back  on  us  we  had  no  drives  to  fall  back 
on.  I  believe  the  way  to  beat  this  base-line 
game  is  to  put  as  much  variation  in  your  game 


410     THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

as  possible,  being  at  the  net  about  three-fourths 
of  the  time.  In  this  way  your  opponent  won't 
get  time  to  get  into  his  machine-like  passing 
shots.  The  object  is  of  course  to  '^cup  up"  his 
game,  for  a  driving  game  is  a  clock-like  game, 
which  if  broken  up  will  go  all  to  pieces.  Be 
careful,  however,  not  to  be  beaten  just  by  a 
reputation.  To  illustrate,  let  us  suppose  your 
opponent  is  known  for  his  net  game.  Just 
don't  start  rushing  the  net  without  finding  out 
if  he  is  not  perhaps  playing  that  very  day  a 
better  base-line  game  than  a  volleying  game. 
This  often  happens;  a  man  can  very  well  lose 
his  regular  style  for  a  day  and  play  an  entirely 
different  game. 

There  is  still  one  other  thing  I  should  like  to 
mention,  and  that  is  effective  volleying.  I 
have  seen  many  good  players  go  to  the  net 
and  have  opportunity  after  opportunity  to 
finish  the  point  and  yet  not  be  able  to  do  it.  In 
a  single,  when  at  the  net  you  should  hardly 
ever  volley  more  than  twice.  I  mean  that  you 
must  finish  the  point  at  least  on  the  second  re- 
turn made  by  your  opponent.  When  at  the 
net,  3^ou  should  command  the  situation.  Your 
volleys  must  be  either  very  short  or  very  long. 
Never  volley  into  the  middle  of  the  court,  your 
opponent  can  get  it  too  easily!  Do  not  let 
your  opponent  outpla}^  you  when  you  com- 
mand the  situation,  it  is  demoralizing.     When 


LAWN   TENNIS  411 

you  have  the  chance  take  the  risk,  but  finish 
the  point  whatever  you  do! 

Before  I  close,  there  are  a  few  facts  that  I 
should  like  to  mention  concerning  tennis  in 
general.  WTien  smashing,  try  jumping  off  the 
ground  a  little.  M.  E.  McLoughlin,  the  best 
smasher  in  the  country  and  probably  in  the 
world,  always  leaves  the  ground  some  four  or 
five  inches,  and  sometimes  more.  If  you  have 
acquired  a  good  smash,  of  course,  stick  to  it, 
but  if  you  are  not  satisfied,  try  this  ''stunt", 
it  might  help  you ;  I  personally  believe  it  to  be 
a  very  good  idea. 

In  general  when  you  take  shots  off  the 
ground,  try  standing  in  close  —  that  is,  take 
the  ball  when  it  is  still  rising  or  anyw^ay  at 
the  top  of  its  bounce.  It  is  a  very  hard  thing 
to  ''get  on  to"  but  if  once  acquired  will  help 
you  more  than  anything.  If  you  wait  too  long 
and  take  the  ball  when  it  is  dropping  you  give 
your  opponent  enough  time  to  take  command 
of  the  situation,  and  you  will  be  standing  far 
back  of  the  base-line,  which  leaves  all  the  serv- 
ice court  open  and  gives  your  opponent  the  op- 
portunity to  play  a  short  shot  and  "get"  you. 
You  will  probably  find  that  you  will  have  a 
tendency  not  to  stand  in  close  enough  —  but 
remember  that  you  must  stand  in  near  or  not 
at  all,  there  is  no  half  way  m  this  sort  of  play. 
If  you  observe,  you  will  gradually  find  that  the 
best  players  are  gradually  adopting  this  style ; 


412     THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

but  it  is  new  and  many  people  will  probably  i 
advise  you  not  to  do  it.  Stick  to  it,  however, 
you  will  win  out  at  the  end  and  you  will  prob- 
ably find  that  it  is  much  easier  to  take  a  swift 
or  a  twist  service  from  this  position  than  from 
the  old  one  when  you  are  forced  way  out  of  the 
court. 

I  also  advise  practising  against  a  wall;  it  is 
good  training  for  the  eye  and  makes  you  quick 
on  your  feet,  which  is  of  course  a  great  advan- 
tage. I  am  also  very  much  in  favor  of  training 
—  train  hard  when  you  are  in  matches ;  that  is, 
keep  regular  hours  for  meals  and  go  to  bed 
regularly.  Sleep  at  least  ten  hours.  But  get 
to  bed  early,  say  at  ten-thirty,  and  get  up  at 
eight-thirty.  You  must  do  it  to  play  your  best. 
Just  think ;  to  play  well,  your  eye  must  be  true, 
your  arms  sure,  you  must  be  quick  on  your  feet 
practically  every  muscle  of  your  body  is  in  use 
and  all  this  must  work  together  to  play  well; 
if  one  is  out  of  order  everything  goes  wrong. 


SWIMMING 


SWIMMING 

The  introduction  of  the  crawl  stroke  has 
revolutionized  swimming  as  a  competitive 
sport.  The  principle  of  this  stroke  is  so  simple 
in  its  application  and  lends  itself  so  readily  to 
adoption  by  boys  of  almost  any  physique  that 
there  are  to-day  hundreds  of  boys  swimming 
the  crawl  with  speed  who  would  have  found  the 
old  trudgeon  and  side-arm  strokes  hard  to 
master.  A  thorough  understanding  of  the  the- 
ory of  this  stroke  is  such  material  aid  in  learn- 
ing it  that  I  am  going  briefly  to  run  over  the 
history  of  the  crawl,  and  show  why  it  is  better 
as  a  racing  stroke  than  any  other. 

There  is  a  story  of  its  origin  which,  whether 
true  or  not,  illustrates  so  well  the  principle  on 
which  the  stroke  is  based  that  it  will  bear  re* 
peating  here.  One  of  the  Cavill  brothers,  all  of 
whom  were  great  swimmers,  agreed  to  win  an 
important  race  with  his  feet  tied  tightly  at  the 
ankles.  To  his  great  surprise  and  to  that  of 
the  spectators,  he  not  only  won  the  event  but 
made  faster  time  than  he  had  ever  accomplished 
before.  With  his  feet  tied  as  they  were,  he 
naturally  could  not  make  the  scissors  kick  of  the 
trudgeon,  and  so  he  had  allowed  them  to  drag 

415 


416         THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

aimlessly  behind.  The  result  of  this  race  set 
Oavill  thinking.  He  gave  up  the  trudgeon 
stroke  for  short  distances  and  swam  without 
using  his  feet  at  all.  Now  he  noticed  that  his 
feet  had  a  tendency  to  sink  a  little  below  the 
surface  of  the  water  and  retard  him,  but  that 
by  rapidly  paddling  his  feet  up  and  down  with 
the  motion  confined  to  the  leg  below  the  knees, 
his  feet  floated  near  the  surface  and  his  whole 
body  sank  less  in  the  water  and  at  the  same 
time  the  paddling  gave  him  a  steady  forward 
drive.  This  was  a  brilliant  athletic  discovery, 
and  the  crawl  stroke  soon  began  to  work  its 
way  into  important  swimming  contests.  At 
first  it  was  supposed  to  be  very  tiring  and  so 
only  adapted  to  short  races,  but  as  swimmers 
learned  its  possibilities,  they  modified  its  ac- 
tion to  suit  any  distance,  until  to-day  no  one 
speaks  of  the  crawl  as  exhausting. 

The  theory  on  which  the  success  of  the  crawl 
stroke  depends  lies  in  the  lessened  resistance 
which  the  water  offers  to  the  body  when  the 
body  is  extended  at  full  length  on  the  surface. 
The  propelling  power  comes  chiefly  from  the 
hands  and  arms,  which  are  used  exactly  as 
in  the  double  overhand  or  trudgeon  stroke. 
Some  speed  is  gained  by  the  rapid  paddle  of 
the  feet,  but  the  purpose  of  this  paddling  is 
primarily  to  keep  the  legs  and  feet  near  the 
surface  and  out  of  the  water  as  much  as  possi- 
ble.   As  the  whole  success  of  this  stroke  de- 


SWIMMING  417 

pends  upon  the  lessened  resistance,  it  is  evident 
that  anything  which  presents  more  than  the 
minimum  surface  to  the  water  decreases  the 
effectiveness  of  the  stroke.  So  in  swimming 
the  crawl,  we  guard  against  drawing  the  legs 
up  at  the  hip  or  lifting  the  head  out  of  the 
water  in  a  way  which  will  increase  the  surface 
resistance. 

If  the  boy  in  learning  the  crawl  will  bear  this 
principle  in  mind,  he  will  find  it  an  easy  stroke 
to  master.  It  lends  itself  readily  to  individual 
modifications.  In  fact  there  are  as  many  ways 
of  ''  crawling  "  as  there  are  swimmers  using 
it,  just  as  there  are  strides  and  styles  of  run- 
ning, and  coaches  have  learned  that  it  is  not 
necessary  or  wise  to  make  their  pupils  conform 
to  a  set  style.  A  few  points  only  must  not  be 
forgotten.  The  body  should  lie  easily  and 
loosely  in  the  water;  the  paddle  of  the  feet, 
while  it  may  be  adjusted  to  individual  condi- 
tions, should  not  become  so  wide  as  to  form  an 
angle  of  resistance;  and  most  important,  the 
pull  with  the  arms  should  be  straight  from  the 
shoulder,  a  free,  clean  drive,  not  a  wavering 
zig-zagging  stroke.  The  manner  of  breathing 
is  important.  In  the  early  days  it  was  usual 
to  swim  with  the  head  under  water  and  hold 
the  breath  as  long  as  possible.  It  is  now  cus- 
tomary to  breathe  as  frequently  as  the  swimmer 
desires.  He  does  this  by  merely  turning  the 
head  to  one  side  and  breathing  out  under  the 


418        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

arm  which  has  just  finished  its  stroke.  This 
trick,  although  it  is  hard  to  learn  at  first,  is 
desirable  because  it  does  not  stop  the  progress 
of  the  body  as  does  taking  the  head  entirely 
out  of  the  water. 

The  boy  who  wishes  to  be  good  in  racing 
should  learn  to  start  fast  and  to  take  the  turns 
well.  Both  can  be  learned  only  by  practice. 
The  start  should  be  a  hard  spring  and  a  long 
shallow  dive.  Many  beginners  make  the  mis- 
take of  diving  too  deep  and  then,  in  their  rush, 
starting  their  stroke  before  the  surface  of  the 
water  is  reached.  Both  are  equally  disastrous 
to  a  good  start.  The  swimmer  should  plan  to 
get  as  far  as  he  can  on  his  spring,  just  to 
cleave  the  water's  surface  and  start  swimming 
the  instant  the  hands  reach  the  surface  and  not 
an  instant  sooner. 

In  racing  in  a  tank,  the  turn  is  very  impor- 
tant. It  takes  hours  and  hours  of  practice  to 
learn  to  turn  well.  The  principal  things  to  bear 
in  mind  are  to  judge  the  distance  of  the  turn 
correctly,  and  not  turn  before  the  end  can  be 
touched;  to  place  the  hand  squarely  against 
the  end  of  the  tank;  to  draw  the  feet  as  high 
up  as  possible  so  that  the  turn  is  made  as 
nearly  as  can  be  in  the  plane  of  the  surface; 
and  to  make  a  hard  shove  by  placing  both  feet 
squarely  against  the  end.  In  turning,  as  in  the 
starting  dive,  swimming  should  not  be  com- 
menced until  the  hands  are  at  the  surface. 


SWIMMING  419 

Learning  to  swim  should  be  a  part  of  every 
boy's  education.  It  adds  so  much  to  his  health, 
happiness,  and  safety  that  it  cannot  well  be  neg- 
lected. With  the  building  of  large  numbers  of 
municipal,  Y.  M.  C.  A.,  school,  club,  and  college 
swimming  pools,  it  is  a  rare  boy  who  has  not 
the  opportunity  to  learn  to  swim.  During  the 
past  year  or  two  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.'s  through 
many  new  swimming  pools  have  been  teaching 
thousands  of  boys  to  swim.  In  Boston,  seven 
thousand  boys  were  taught  the  crawl  in  only  a 
few  weeks'  time.  By  the  use  of  '*  water- 
wings  "  boys  who  had  never  swum  a  stroke 
learned  the  crawl  in  three  or  four  lessons.  This 
stroke  is  so  similar  to  the  "  dog  paddle  "  in 
the  ease  with  which  it  can  be  mastered,  and  so 
striking  in  its  results  that  boys  pick  it  up  in  an 
amazingly  short  time.  With  swimming  so 
easily  learned  and  opening  such  vistas  of  sport 
and  recreation,  to  say  nothing  of  the  protec- 
tion of  life,  can  any  boy  afford  not  to  know 
how  to  swim? 


THE   ART   OF    SWIMMING 

BY    HAREY   EOSE 

Swimming  is  an  art  so  manly,  so  graceful, 
and  so  useful,  that  no  one  ever  regrets  the 
trouble  of  learning.  And  every  one  can  learn, 
unless  he  be  physically  infirm  or  naturally  a 
coward. 

Dr.  Franklin  truthfully  said:  ''  The  only  ob- 
stacle to  the  acquirement  and  improvement  in 
this  necessary  and  life-preserving  art  is  fear." 
The  coward  had  better  stay  out  of  the  water. 
He  is  safer  on  land.  But  he  is  not  necessarily 
a  coward  who  is  afraid  to  plunge  boldly  into 
unknown  water.  Such  a  reluctance  is  natural; 
the  best  swimmer,  unless  he  be  foolhardy, 
would  not  do  that.  Some  of  the  best  swimmers 
have  learned  in  shallow  creeks,  have  practised 
alone  until  skilled,  and  then  polished  their  self- 
education  in  deep  water. 

The  first  lesson  should  be  taken  in  a  tideless 
river  or  quiet  stream,  the  depth  of  which  you 
have  previously  studied.  On  entering  the 
water,  wet  your  head  and  neck  thoroughly,  and 
before  submerging  the  body  stand  for  a  few 
minutes  knee-deep. 

Having  fixed  your  eye  on  a  favorable  spot, 
420 


THE   ART   OF   SWIMMING  421 

advance  into  the  stream  until  breast-high.  Now 
face  the  shore,  and  prepare  for  striking  out. 
Lie  gently  on  your  breast,  keeping  head  and 
neck  upright,  breast  distended,  and  back  bent 
inward.  Withdraw  the  legs  from  the  bottom, 
and  immediately  strike  them  out,  not  down- 
ward, but  horizontally ;  strike  forward  with  the 
arms  simultaneously  with  the  feet,  holding  the 
hands  like  the  blade  of  an  oar  when  in  action, 
fingers  closed,  the  thumb  placed  by  the  side  of 
the  first  finger,  a  little  below  the  surface ;  draw 
them  back  again  while  gathering  up  the  legs 
for  a  second  attempt;  and  thus  push  forward, 
making  use  of  the  hands  and  feet  alternately. 
The  farther  forward  you  reach,  the  faster  you 
will  swim.  The  secret  of  a  good  stroke  is  to 
kick  out  with  the  legs  wide  apart.  The  propell- 
ing power  is  secured  by  the  legs  being  brought 
from  a  position  in  which  they  are  placed  wide 
apart  to  one  in  which  they  are  close  together, 
like  the  blades  of  a  pair  of  scissors.  In  this 
position  the  heels  should  touch  each  other ;  and 
in  drawing  up  the  legs,  the  toes  should  be 
pointed  backward  to  avoid  the  resistance  of 
the  water  against  the  insteps. 

It  may  happen  that  you  will  swallow  water 
in  your  first  efforts;  but  this  should  not  dis- 
courage you,  neither  should  the  fancy  that  be- 
cause you  make  but  little  advance  you  are  not 
capable  of  learning  to  swim.  Every  beginner 
has  his  mishaps,  no  matter  what  the  art. 


422        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Some  lads  will  learn  to  swim  "  dog-fashion  " 
quicker  than  any  other  style;  and  while  it  is 
not  at  all  graceful,  it  gradually  leads  into  the 
smooth,  even,  scientific  breast-stroke,  and 
therefore  should  hardly  be  discouraged.  Every 
boy,  of  course,  knows  that  "  dog-fashion  '*  is 
that  frantic  motion  of  the  hands  and  legs  like 
a  large  j)addle-wheel,  in  which  more  bluster  and 
foam  than  headway  are  made;  and  every  boy 
likes  to  swim  ''  dog-fashion  "  occasionally, 
often  just  to  "  show  off,"  or  to  imitate  some 
friend  not  so  far  advanced  as  himself.  But, 
"  dog- fashion  "  swimmer,  don't  let  such  mim- 
ics dishearten  you ;  keep  right  on,  and  soon  you 
will  master  the  breast-stroke  as  we  have  de- 
scribed it,  and  by  studying  some  of  the  tricks 
in  this  article,  you  may  soon  have  the  laugh  on 
your  mockers. 

Having  mastered  the  breast-stroke,  which  is 
adapted  to  long-distance  leisurely  swimming, 
the  next  movement  is  the  side-stroke;  it  may 
be  the  left  or  right.  You  can  accomplish  it  by 
shooting  the  right  arm  forward,  while  the  left, 
like  an  oar,  is  forcing  the  water  back,  and  the 
legs  are  propelling  the  body  onward.  This 
stroke,  which  is  a  powerful  one,  will  move  you 
on  like  clock-work,  and  for  long-distance,  mod- 
erately fast  swimming  is  excellent. 

Then  follows  the  alternate  right-hand,  left- 
hand  movement,  or  the  overhand-stroke.  This 
is  perhaps  the  most  graceful  and  convenient  of 


THE  ART  OF  SWIMMING         423 

all.  In  reaching  forward,  the  arms  are  alter- 
nately brought  out  of  the  water,  and  then 
curved  so  that  the  tips  of  the  fingers  enter 
again  directly  in  front  of  the  head.  This  move- 
ment can  be  made  very  graceful  by  daintily 
skimming  the  palm  along  the  surface,  and 
merely  dipping  the  water  before  it  disappears. 
Advancing  the  right  and  left  sides  of  the  body 
alternately,  secures  greater  continuity  of  mo- 
tion and  materially  reduces  tlie  friction;  in 
conjunction  with  the  powerful  propulsion  of 
the  legs,  it  sends  you  along  with  the  speed  of 
a  fish.  As  it  is  very  swift,  so  it  is  very  exhaust- 
ing; it  is,  therefore,  best  adapted  to  racing, 
say  fifty  or  one  hundred  yards. 

I  once  saw  Dennis  F.  Butler,  the  ex-cham- 
pion of  America,  finish  a  seven-mile  race 
against  the  tide  with  this  overhand-stroke ;  and 
he  did  it  in  a  peculiar  manner.  With  every  dip 
of  the  arm  his  head  would  go  under  water; 
and  thus  he  lolled,  yet  fairly  plunged  for  the 
goal,  taking  breath  every  time  he  turned  on  his 
sides. 

The  boy  aspirants  to  racing  honors  will  do 
well  to  practise  this  movement  diligently. 

Back  performances  are  more  easily  learned 
than  those  on  the  breast,  and  floating  is  quite 
simple. 

Turn  yourself  over  on  your  back,  as  gently 
as  possible,  elevate  your  breast  above  the  sur- 
face, put  your  head  back,  so  that  your  eyes, 


424       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

nose,  and  chin  only  are  above  water.  Keep  in 
this  position  with  the  arms  and  legs  extended, 
the  latter  perfectly  rigid.  Now,  move  the  hands 
from  right  to  left  horizontally,  fast  or  slow  as 
you  choose,  and  you  will  find  yourself  buoyed 
up  and  gradually  moving  along.  If  you  wish 
to  make  greater  speed  or  swim  on  your  back, 
begin  to  work  your  legs,  precisely  as  in  breast 
swimming,  taking  care  not  to  lift  the  knees  too 
high  nor  to  sink  your  hips  and  sides  too  low. 
Keep  yourself  as  straight  as  possible.  You  are 
now  progressing  finely  —  getting  along  easily 
and  speedily.  If  your  arms  grow  tired,  lay 
them  on  your  breast,  but  keep  the  legs  going; 
thus  you  can  rest  your  arms ;  if  your  legs  tire, 
let  them  remain  quiet,  and  renew  work  with 
your  hands.  Thus  alternating,  you  will  find 
yourself  able  to  cover  a  long  distance  without 
fatigue. 

Just  at  this  stage  of  progress  you  will  be  anx- 
ious to  dive.  There  is  great  sport  in  this ;  but 
it  requires  practice  to  dive  *'  cleanly." 

Diving  may  be  performed  from  the  surface 
of  the  water,  when  swimming,  by  merely  turn- 
ing the  head  downward,  and  striking  upward 
with  the  legs.  It  is,  however,  much  better  to 
leap  in,  with  the  hands  closed  above  the  head, 
and  the  head  foremost,  from  a  pier,  boat,  or 
raised  bank.  The  proper  attitude  for  a 
'*  clean  "  dive  —  which  means  without  splash- 
ing more  than  the  sharp  cut  of  the  hands  —  is 


THE  ART   OF   SWIMMING         425 

to  place  the  hands  over  the  Head,  close  together, 
give  a  sudden  spring,  and  descend  through  the 
air,  heels  together  and  body  perfectly  stiff. 
Your  hands  will  cleave  the  way  for  your  body, 
protecting  your  head,  and  you  will  pass  be- 
neath the  surface  just  like  the  inimitable  bull- 
frog, the  master-diver. 

By  striking  with  the  feet,  the  same  as  in 
swimming,  and  keeping  the  head  toward  the 
bottom,  you  can  drive  yourself  to  a  consider- 
able depth. 

If  you  wish  to  reach  the  surface,  turn  your 
head  upward  and  work  your  hands,  up  and 
down;   you  will  ascend  like  a  flash. 

To  turn  under  water,  merely  swim  in  which- 
ever direction  you  wish. 

Some  swimmers  prefer  to  keep  their  eyes 
open  while  beneath  the  surface;  I  do  not  con- 
sider it  wise,  as  the  strain  is  great,  and  often 
foreign  substances  in  the  water  are  liable  to 
injure  the  eyeball.  Of  course,  if  you  dive  for 
an  object  at  the  bottom,  you  will  need  to  open 
your  eyes  to  find  it ;  at  other  times  I  advise  you 
to  keep  them  closed. 

Swimming  under  water  is  accomplished  by 
the  ordinary  stroke,  but  take  care  to  keep  your 
head  a  little  downward  and  strike  a  little 
higher  with  your  feet  than  when  swimming  on 
the  surface. 

Perhaps  as  easy  a  way  as  any  of  learning  to 
smm  under  water  is  by  beginning,  in  shallow 


426        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

water,  simply  to  sink  below  the  surface  of  the 
water.  This  can  be  done  by  letting  the  air  es- 
cape from  the  lungs,  so  that  they  lose  their 
power  of  buoyancy.  The  beginner,  having  no 
fear  of  being  unable  to  reach  terra  firma,  will 
learn  far  quicker  in  this  way  to  be  at  home 
beneath  the  surface  than  if  he  attempts  to  swim 
at  the  outset.  When  once  confidence  is  gained, 
all  that  remains  is  to  learn  the  trick  of  staying 
below  the  surface  when  the  lungs  are  inflated. 

If  you  have  successfully  practised  these  les- 
sons, you  are  familiar  with  the  three  essential 
elements  of  swimming,  and  in  prime  condition 
to  study  a  few  tricks. 

^'  Treading  water  "  is  a  fine  feat.  To  tread 
without  the  use  of  the  hands,  work  your  feet 
up  and  down,  precisely  as  though  ascending  a 
flight  of  stairs,  only  with  more  speed  and  stead- 
iness. You  will  find  this  very  simple,  and  often- 
times you  can  stand  where  the  water  is  a 
fathom  deep  and  by  treading  hold  the  hands 
high  over  the  head,  and  make  the  uninitiated 
suppose  you  to  be  on  the  bottom.  In  this  posi- 
tion, also,  you  can  walk  a  considerable  distance, 
when  you  are  expert.  If  you  want  to  ease  your 
legs,  put  your  arms  under,  and  work  them  hori- 
zontally right  and  left,  as  in  floating. 

The  feat  of  breast-swimming  ^^^thout  the  use 
of  hands  requires  strength  in  the  legs  and  back. 
At  best,  but  a  short  distance  can  be  made  in 
this  way.    The  same  may  be  said  of  swimming 


THE  ART  OF  SWIMMING         427 

without  the  use  of  the  legs.  But  it  is  well  to 
practise  both  of  these  movements  —  they  may 
save  your  life  in  the  event  of  cramp  or  accident. 

To  show  the  feet  while  floating,  bend  the 
small  of  the  back  downward,  support  yourself 
by  moving  your  hands  to  and  fro  just  above 
your  breast,  and  stretch  your  feet  above  the 
water.  Now,  if  you  wish  to  swim  on  your  back, 
feet-foremost,  make  precisely  the  same  stroke 
as  in  breast-swimming. 

To  swim  with  one  hand  out  of  the  water,  say 
the  right,  turn  on  the  left  side,  and  vigorously 
use  that  arm,  and  the  legs. 

If  you  wish  to  turn  while  on  your  back,  keep 
one  leg  still,  and  embrace  the  water  beside  you 
with  the  other;  you  will  thus  find  yourself 
turning  to  that  side  on  which  your  leg  by  its 
motion  embraces  the  water,  and  you  will  turn 
to  the  right  or  left  according  to  which  leg  you 
use  in  this  manner. 

There  are  a  variety  of  feats  performed  by 
expert  swimmers ;  such  as  floating  on  the  back 
with  the  arms  above  the  surface;  taking  the 
left  leg  in  the  right  hand  out  of  the  water  when 
swimming  on  the  back;  pulling  the  right  heel 
by  the  right  hand  toward  the  back,  when  swim- 
ming in  the  common  way;  throwing  somer- 
saults in  the  water,  backward  and  forward,  etc., 
for  which  no  particular  directions  are  neces- 
sary, as  you  will  be  able  to  do  them  and  any 
tricks  which  your  fancy  may  suggest. 


428        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

A  few  hygienic  hints  for  swimmers  will 
surely  not  be  out  of  place  here. 

Do  not  bathe  too  soon  after  eating;  an  inter- 
val of  an  hour  and  a  half  at  least,  should  be 
allowed.  Do  not  bathe  when  tired  out,  either 
mentally  or  physically  —  always  wait  till  you 
feel  rested.  The  best  time  is  in  the  forenoon, 
between  breakfast  and  luncheon. 

If  overheated  on  arriving  at  the  water,  do 
not  remove  your  clothes  until  the  excessive 
feeling  of  heat  has  passed,  and  your  breathing 
and  circulation  have  become  regular;  never 
expose  the  skin  to  the  direct  action  of  the  air 
when  overheated. 

Keep  in  motion  after  you  have  gone  into  the 
water;  do  not  stand  around  chatting  and 
lounging.  As  soon  as  you  have  swum  suffi- 
ciently, dry  yourself  thoroughly,  put  on  your 
clothes,  and  keep  the  blood  in  circulation  by 
exercise. 

Do  not  stay  in  the  water  too  long  —  half  an 
hour  is  long  enough  for  the  strongest  man. 
More  delicate  persons  will  find  that  too  much; 
for  some,  ten  minutes  should  be  the  limit.  Fif- 
teen minutes  is  a  good  average  for  all. 

If  seized  with  cramp,  endeavor  not  to  be 
alarmed,  but  strike  out  vigorously  with  the  af- 
fected limb,  or,  turning  on  the  back,  extend  it 
forcibly  into  the  air.  By  paddling  v^dth  the 
hands  you  can  easily  reach  shore,  or  keep 
afloat  until  assistance  is  rendered. 


THE  ART  OF  SWLMMING         429 

And,  never,  never  ''  duck  "  your  weaker 
brother.  The  poor  fellow  might  take  fright, 
and  never  again  essay  to  learn ;  besides,  you 
might  accidentally  drown  him. 

In  conclusion:  if  you  have  followed  these 
suggestions,  not  merely  mentally,  but  in  the 
*'  aqueous  element,"  as  the  student  would  say, 
you  will  have  become  dexterous  swimmers,  and 
soon  shall  be  able  to  join  Byron  in  this  stanza : 

"  How  many  a  time  have  T 
Cloven  with  an  arm  still  lustier,  breast  more  daring, 
The  wave  all  roughen'd;  with  a  swimmer's  stroke 
Flinging  the  billows  back  from  my  drench'd  hair, 
And,  laughing,  from  my  lip  the  audacious  brine, 
Which  kiss'd  it,  like  a  wine-cup,  rising  o'er 
The  waves  as  they  arose,  and  prouder  still 
The  loftier  they  uplifted  me." 


THE   DEVELOPMENT  OF 
INTERCOLLEGIATE   SWIMMING 

BY   C.    DUDLEY    PRATT 

The  strides  made  by  swimming  in  the 
United  States  in  recent  years  have  been  re- 
markable. The  value  of  swimming  as  an 
exercise  for  all-around  development  calling 
into  action  all  parts  of  the  muscular  system, 
is  being  realized  to  a  much  greater  degree. 
In  many  schools  and  colleges,  every  one  is 
required  to  be  able  to  swim,  and  the  great 
increase  in  the  number  of  indoor  and  outdoor 
pools  affords  excellent  facilities  for  learning 
and  mastering  the  art,  which  often  enables 
one  to  save  not  only  his  own  life  but  also  the 
lives  of  others.  Swimming  may  now  be  had 
all  the  year  long  in  most  places  and  the  de- 
velopment of  the  sport  has  been  inevitable. 

Thus  speed-swimming  has  been  greatly 
accelerated  by  the  opportunities  for  daily 
practice  throughout  the  year,  but  the  develop- 
ment of  the  stroke  has  cut  many  seconds  from 
former  records.  Competitive  swimming  has 
existed  for  centuries;  Cassius  even  challenged 
Caesar  to  swim  the  turbulent  Tiber.     But  the 

430 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SWIMMING  431 

old  side,  over-arm,  and  breast  strokes  are  no 
longer  the  methods  of  swiftest  propulsion. 
The  trudgeon,  as  originated  by  the  English- 
man, whose  name  it  bears,  in  1873,  was  very- 
different  from  the  present  trudgeon  stroke,  the 
kicking  having  been  much  on  the  style  used 
in  the  breast  stroke;  whereas  now  the  scissors 
kick  is  found  to  be  more  effective. 

At  first  the  legs  were  thought  to  be  of  little 
value,  in  fact  to  be  a  hindrance,  and  this  point 
really  led  to  the  discovery  of  the  crawl  stroke 
in  Australia.  "Tums"  Cavill  tied  his  feet 
together  and  made  good  his  boast  that  he 
would  defeat  another  swimmer  for  the  length 
of  the  pool.  His  brother  Richard  later  put 
into  effect  the  results  of  the  experiments  and 
the  straight  leg  drive  became  popular.  Since 
then  the  crawl  has  been  so  developed  that 
there  are  many  varieties.  The  regular  crawl, 
which  is  the  stroke  used  by  the  Hawaiians 
entirely,  is  the  name  for  a  leg-thrash  of  even 
scope;  the  single-trudgeon  crawl  for  a  leg- 
thrash  with  one  major  and  one  minor  kick; 
the  double-trudgeon  crawl  for  a  leg-thrash 
with  two  major  kicks  and  a  number  of  minor 
ones;  and  then  add  two,  four,  or  six  beats  to 
indicate  the  number  of  movements  per  full 
stroke. 

The  arm  movements  in  all  these  strokes  are 
the  same:  working  alternately,  one  propelling 
while  the  other  recovers.     The  elbow  should 


432      THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

be  slightly  raised,  the  hand  and  forearm 
straight,  with  fingers  and  thumb  close  to- 
gether, palm  down,  as  the  arm  enters  for  the 
pull.  Just  before  the  arm  is  straightened  out 
beyond  the  head,  the  hand  should  enter  the 
water,  followed  by  a  slight  bend  dow^nward 
for  the  catch,  and  then  a  direct  pull  with 
strong  pressure  on  the  water,  until  the  hand 
nears  the  thigh,  when  the  muscles  are  relaxed 
and  the  arm  w^ithdra^Ti,  the  elbow  being 
lifted  first.  In  order  not  to  retard  the  pro- 
gress, the  hand  is  bent  backward  slightly  at 
the  T\Tist  with  the  palm  up  and  thumb  away 
from  the  body,  and  then  as  the  hand  ap- 
proaches the  head  it  is  gradually  returned  to 
the  propelling  position. 

The  leg-drive  is  from  the  hips  chiefly,  but 
also  from  the  knees  and  ankles,  the  last  two 
being  bent  but  slightly.  In  the  regular  crawl, 
the  leg-thrash  is  even  throughout  and  with  a 
scope  of  not  over  fourteen  inches.  The  rhy- 
thm is  maintained  by  keeping  an  even  number 
of  movements  for  each  complete  stroke  of  the 
two  arms.  The  eight-beat  crawl  seems  to  be 
the  coming  stroke,  though  many  are  skeptical 
as  to  its  possibilities,  as  they  were  when  the 
six-beat  double-trudgeon  crawl,  our  present 
standard  stroke,  was  first  outlined  by  theo- 
rists. 

The  trudgeon  crawl  came  into  being  when 
it  was  found  that  the  fluttering  motion  of  the 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SWIMMING  433 

feet,  added  to  the  trudgeon  between  the 
scissor  kicks,  served  to  maintain  the  acquired 
momentum  and  prevented  the  legs  from 
dragging.  In  the  single-trudgeon  crawl  a 
pronounced  roll  is  necessary  for  the  major 
kick  made  as  the  top  arm  (the  one  on  the 
breathing  side)  is  pulling  through  must  be 
wide,  and  the  roll  prevents  the  under  leg  from 
coming  out  of  the  water  and  thus  wasting 
energy.  The  fluttering  motion  of  the  leg,  in 
about  an  eight-inch  scope  from  heel  to  heel  is 
at  right  angles  to  the  surface  of  the  water. 

In  the  double-trudgeon  crawl  the  roll  does 
not  have  to  be  so  pronounced,  the  major 
kicks  being  not  over  fifteen  inches  in  width,  as 
compared  to  nearly  twenty  inches  in  the 
single.  The  major  kicks  then  come  at  the 
end  of  each  arm  pull  and  are  followed  by  as 
many  minors  as  one  desires.  In  the  six-beat, 
then,  the  major  kicks  would  come  ^^one"  and 
^^four,"  three  counts  to  each  arm  pull.  This 
double-trudgeon  crawl  gives  a  much  better- 
balanced  power  than  the  single,  in  that  each 
leg  is  going  through  the  same  movements, 
and  the  roll,  not  being  so  pronounced,  does 
not  retard  as  much. 

The  correct  method  of  respiration  is  one  of 
the  most  essential  elements  in  speed  swim- 
ming, as  the  lungs  must  be  well  oxygenated 
in  order  that  the  swimmer  may  not  become 
exhausted.     The  air  is  inhaled  through  the 


434    THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

mouth  as  the  top  arm  is  completing  its  pull 
through,  and  then  exhaled  slowly  through  the 
rest  of  the  stroke.  The  head  is  not  raised 
for  the  intake  but  twisted  to  the  side  and  then 
swayed  back  with  the  roll  of  the  body. 

Descriptions  of  the  crawl  stroke  came  from 
Australia  in  1904,  and  soon  the  trudgeon 
crawl  was  developed  in  this  country.  By 
means  of  intelligent  coaching  in  methods  of 
speed  swimming  the  times  for  various  dis- 
tances have  been  lowered  considerably.  This 
has  been  very  true  in  the  college  and  prepara- 
tory-school swimming  circles.  When  the  first 
annual  meet  of  the  Intercollegiate  Swimming 
Association  was  held  in  1907,  the  fifty  swim 
was  won  in  27>^  seconds,  the  hundred  in  1 
minute  4%  seconds,  the  two-twenty  in 
2:5975.  During  the  next  seven  years  these 
were  cut  again  —  the  Miy  by  two  seconds, 
the  hundred  by  nearly  five  seconds,  and  the 
two-twenty  by  twenty-two  seconds.  That 
same  year  the  two-twenty  record  was  set  at 
2:31,  and  that  stood  for  another  seven  years. 
In  the  last  two  years  the  strides  have  been 
remarkable.  The  intercollegiate  records  have 
been  set  at  24  seconds  for  the  fifty,  55H  for 
hundred,  and  2:25K  for  the  two-twenty. 

Not  only  in  college  swimming  but  in  the 
interscholastic  meets,  the  records  have  been 
cut.  Bringing  the  swimmer  up  on  the  new 
strokes  is  producing  results,  and  the  schoolboy 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SWIMMING    435 

swimmers  have  made  records  equalling  or 
better  than  the  intercollegiate  marks;  with 
2-iH  for  the  fifty,  56  seconds  flat  for  the 
hundred,  and  2:24>i  in  the  two-twenty. 
There  is  no  telling  what  they  will  do  when 
they  reach  intercollegiate  circles.  The  old 
interscholastic  200-yard  relay  record  has  been 
lowered  to  1:44%  in  the  last  few  years;  the  in- 
tercollegiate and  world'srecord  being  1 :38;^  . 

In  the  Eastern  Intercollegiate  League, 
started  in  1909,  Yale  has  held  the  champion- 
ship for  the  last  ten  years,  having  lost  no 
meets  at  all  since  1916,  and  so  may  therefore 
be  taken  as  a  team  to  show  the  development 
of  intercollegiate  swimming.  The  Carnegie 
Pool,  one  of  the  best  in  the  country,  was  built 
in  the  same  year  that  the  league  started. 
The  squads  in  recent  years  have  been  large, 
and  each  man  doing  consistent  work  has  had 
a  chance  to  take  part.  This  has  resulted  in 
well-balanced  teams  with  a  wealth  of  material 
from  which  to  draw.  The  season  of  1920  was 
significant  in  that  only  three  meets  passed 
without  the  breaking  of  some  intercollegiate 
or  world's  record  and  two  of  these  meets  were 
in  strange  pools.  The  last  two  years  have 
been  followed  by  similar  performances.  The 
marks  for  the  200-yard  and  800-foot  relays 
were  lowered  in  1920  and  the  fifty-yard  inter- 
collegiate record  was  twice  broken,  finally 
being    set    at    24%    seconds.     There    were 


436   THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

nine  men  who  could  do  under  26  seconds  for 
the  fifty ;  six  who  could  do  under  a  minute  in 
the  hundred,  and  a  like  number  who  could 
make  under  2:45  in  the  two-twenty.  The 
plunge  was  no  longer  to  consist  of  merely 
flopping  into  the  water,  but  theory  was  ap- 
plied to  that,  too,  so  that  the  plunger  dove  to 
a  greater  depth  and  then  planed  gradually  to 
the  surface.  Prior  to  that  year,  it  was  rare 
that  a  plunger  made  the  end  of  a  75-foot  pool 
in  the  minute  allowed,  but  the  world's  record 
for  that  distance  was  then  set  at  forty  seconds. 
This  past  year  this  record  has  dropped  another 
six  seconds,  due  to  improved  methods  and 
proper  coaching. 

Some  of  the  most  striking  evidence  of  the 
strides  made  in  college  swimming  are  the 
numerous  world's  records  hung  up  in  the  last 
two  years.  The  Yale  relay  team  holds  the 
world's  records  for  the  200,  250,  and  300-yard 
and  mile  relays  —  the  last  showing  marked 
improvement  in  a  large  number  of  swimmers, 
in  that  18  men  performed  and  took  some 
thirty-nine  seconds  off  the  record  formerly 
held  by  the  New  York  Athletic  Club.  Dur- 
ing the  past  season  of  1922,  the  world's 
records  for  the  250,  300,  400,  500,  600-yard 
and  mile  relaj^s  have  been  broken.  The 
second  last  are  only  considered  as  noteworthy 
performances  in  that  they  are  performed  by  so 
many  men,  but  it  is  also  worthy  of  notice  that 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SWIMMING  437 

all  these  records  were  made  by  a  college 
team. 

The  progress  of  intercollegiate  swimming 
was  well  shown  when  fifteen  Yale  men  took  a 
transcontinental  swimming  tour  of  over  13,000 
miles  to  Hawaii  and  return  to  compete 
against  some  of  the  fastest  swimming  organ- 
izations in  the  world.  Out  of  a  total  of 
twelve  meets  and  four  exhibitions  there  were 
only  two  defeats ;  one  by  the  Chicago  Athletic 
Club  and  the  other  in  the  open-water  meet 
against  the  Hawaiian  clubs,  in  which  Yale 
placed  third.  Some  of  the  features  of  the 
trip  were  when  Binney  of  Yale  equaled  the 
world's  record  in  the  fifty-yard  swim,  when  the 
Chicago  Athletic  Club  broke  the  world's 
record  for  the  160-yard  relay,  when  Pua 
Kealoha  of  Hawaii  equaled  the  world's  record 
in  the  hundred,  and  when  the  Outrigger  Canoe 
Club  broke  the  world's  record  for  the  six- 
hundred-yard  relay  in  Honolulu. 

The  team  had  a  nine-day  period  of  inten- 
sive training  at  Sound  Beach,  Connecticut, 
before  starting  for  Hawaii.  A  relay  team 
sent  to  Brighton  Beach  defeated  an  all-star 
team  from  New  York  in  a  200-yard  relay,  and 
an  exhibition  meet  was  given  at  Stamford, 
Conn.,  before  the  team  left  for  the  west. 
Meets  were  then  held  in  Chicago,  Milwaukee, 
Minneapolis,  St.  Paul,  Los  Angeles,  Venice 
Beach,  Santa  Barbara,  at  the  Olympic  Club 


438     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

in  San  Francisco,  and  at  Del  Monte,  Cal. 
The  week's  journey  across  the  water  to 
Hawaii,  during  which  the  team  kept  in  shape 
by  daily  exercises,  was  followed  by  a  victory 
over  three  of  the  fastest  combinations  of 
sw^immers  in  the  world,  in  a  tank  meet  at  the 
University  of  Hawaii.  The  relay  team  w^as 
barely  touched  out  for  first  place  when  Duke 
Kahanamoku,  swimming  anchor  man  on  the 
Outrigger  Canoe  Club  team,  traveled  his 
fifty  yards  in  the  sensational  time  of  22j^ 
seconds. 

This  was  one  of  the  longest  trips  ever  taken 
by  a  college  team.  The  showing  made  in  the 
face  of  such  difficulties  as  constant  railway 
travel,  competition  against  more  mature  and 
experienced  men  of  the  athletic  clubs,  a  rapid 
succession  of  meets  and  differences  in  the  pools 
and  spring-boards,  illustrates  quite  clearly 
that  college  swimming  has  gone  through  a 
period  of  tremendous  development  in  recent 
years.  The  increase  in  swimming  facilities 
in  the  preparatory  schools  and  colleges  and 
the  application  of  new  strokes  in  systematic 
coaching  have  accelerated  the  advancement 
of  the  sport  to  a  leading  position  among  the 
minor  sports  in  intercollegiate  athletics. 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SOCCER 


INTERCOLLEGIATE    SOCCER 

BY   H.   G.   FEANCKE 

Inteecollegiate  soccer  has  recently  passed 
the  vital  stage  of  early  development  and  has 
passed  it  in  such  a  manner  as  to  clearly  demon- 
strate that  it  has  come  to  stay  and  that  it  is 
capable  of  providing  a  healthy  source  of  ath- 
letic activity  for  any  sound  man  and  inciting 
keen  competition  among  good  sportsmen.  Pre- 
viously to  the  year  1907,  there  was  no  real  or- 
ganization between  the  colleges,  but  in  that  year 
Dr.  Babbitt,  of  Haverford  College,  summoned 
representatives  from  various  colleges  that  were 
playing  the  game  to  a  certain  extent,  to  a  meet- 
ing where  was  formed  what  is  known  as  the  In- 
tercollegiate Association  Football  League.  This 
league  now  includes  Harvard,  Yale,  Pennsyl- 
vania, Haverford,  Columbia  and  Cornell.  It 
has  seen  a  very  prosperous  and  continuous  ex- 
istence, with  other  colleges  such  as  State  Col- 
lege (Penn.),  Princeton,  and  Brown  consider- 
ing the  proposition  of  joining.  In  the  South, 
soccer  has  been  recently  taken  up  by  Lehigh, 
Franklin  and  Marshall,  Stevens,  and  Delaware ; 
in  the  East,  besides  those  already  mentioned, 

441 


442        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Dartmouth,  Williams,  Amherst,  and  the  Massa- 
chusetts Institute  of  Technology  are  playing 
the  game;  while  in  the  West  it  has  reached  a 
stage  of  development  probably  superior  to  the 
East.  Thus  such  a  universal  appreciation  of 
the  game  speaks  for  itself  and  proves  the  real 
value  of  the  game. 

With  this  brief  statement  of  the  situation  in 
American  colleges  at  the  present  time,  let  us 
turn  to  the  requirements  of  the  game  and  how 
it  is  played  by  college  athletes.  Of  course  one 
must  first  recall  that  intercollegiate  soccer  does 
not  approach  the  professional  game  of  England 
and  therefore  my  remarks  will  apply  more  es- 
pecially to  the  game  as  played  in  this  country. 

As  regards  the  type  of  man  required  to  make 
a  clever  player,  an  active  man  of  any  stature 
can  be  developed  into  an  efficient  player.  It 
has  been  maintained  that  large,  powerful  play- 
ers, who  can  resist  the  hard  knocks  of  the  de- 
fense, are  preferable  for  the  forward  line,  but 
the  small  lithe  man  can  easily  elude  a  heavy 
halfback  with  what  appears  to  be  graceful 
ease.  Thus  to  my  mind  a  small  fast  forward 
line  is  the  ideal  condition,  with  possibly  a 
heavier  man  in  the  center,  because  he  is  bound 
to  be  closely  watched  when  near  the  goal  and 
he  must  be  able  to  withstand  rough  handling. 
It  is  the  duty  of  the  outside  men  especially  to 
carry  the  ball  by  dribbling  far  into  the  oppo- 
nents' territory  and  then  unselfishly  center  it 


INTERCOLLEGIATE   SOCCER       443 

to  a  position  where  the  inside  men  can  shoot 
advantageously.  With  this  formation,  there- 
fore, we  find  at  once  three  requirements.  In 
the  first  place,  the  outside  men  must  have 
thorough  mastery  of  the  ball,  being  able  to  pass 
the  halfback  line  by  dribbling  and  to  center 
the  ball  at  the  crucial  moment  when  hard 
pressed  by  the  fullback.  This  ability  of  drib- 
bling must  not  by  any  means  be  limited  to  the 
outside  men,  although  it  is  more  essential  for 
them,  but  the  greater  efficiency  the  inside  men 
have  in  this  difficult  art,  the  greater  will  be  the 
variety  and  power  of  the  offense.  Next,  the 
inside  men  must  learn  to  shoot  with  accuracy 
and  speed.  It  does  not  do  for  them  to  attempt 
to  stop  the  ball  and  manoeuver  it  into  a  more 
advantageous  position,  but  they  must  be  able 
to  judge  the  bounces  and  shoot  unexpectedly, 
before  the  fullbacks  have  the  opportunity  to 
charge  or  the  halfbacks  to  come  to  the  defense 
of  the  goal.  Finally,  every  man  must  play  an 
absolutely  unselfish  part  by  remaining  con- 
stantly in  his  position,  so  that  the  man  carrying 
the  ball  can  rely  implicitly  on  the  whereabouts 
of  his  teammates  and  instinctively  pass  to  the 
spot  where  he  knows  a  man  will  be  to  receive 
it.  In  addition  it  is  advisable  for  the  forwards 
to  be  able  to  head  the  ball  with  accuracy,  be- 
cause many  times  it  would  give  the  opposing 
defense  an  opportunity  to  clear  the  ball  if  it 
were  allowed  to  bounce,  and  on  a  corner  kick 


444        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

it  is  very  difficult  for  a  goal-tender  to  save  a 
well-headed  ball,  because  such  a  play  does  not 
reveal  itself  until  the  last  moment  when  the 
forward  leaps  into  the  air.  Thus  a  well  play- 
ing forward  line  advances  the  ball  by  dribbling 
until  attacked,  then  passes  either  for  a  short 
distance  or  across  the  field  to  draw  the  defense 
out  of  position,  and  finally  centers  to  the  inside 
when  near  the  opponents'  goal  and  shoots. 

The  halfbacks  have  a  double  duty  thrust  upon 
their  shoulders.  When  the  forwards  are  press- 
ing the  attack,  the  halfbacks  must  follow  up 
behind  them  to  render  assistance  if  they  lose 
the  ball  and  to  be  prepared  to  receive  a  back- 
ward pass  if  the  man  with  the  ball  finds  him- 
self unable  to  pass  advantageously  to  another 
forward.  When  the  opponents  gain  posses- 
sion, the  duties  of  the  halfbacks  become  defen- 
sive. They  must  charge  quickly  before  the 
forward  line  has  an  opportunity  to  get  work- 
ing smoothly  and  make  the  man  with  the  ball 
pass.  To  be  able  to  check  an  attack,  the  half- 
back line  must  be  exceptionally  fast  and  able  to 
start  and  change  direction  suddenly.  There 
can  be  no  hesitation,  because  a  fearless  charge 
will  tend  to  disconcert  the  man  with  the  ball, 
thus  enabling  the  halfback  to  gain  possession 
himself  or  cause  a  poor  pass  to  be  made.  If 
the  halfbacks  seek  to  cover  the  attack  of  each 
other,  the  defense  becomes  so  much  the  more 
effective.    By  covering  the  attack  I  mean  play- 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SOCCER       445 

ing  together  in  such  a  manner  that  when  one 
tackles  the  other  two  are  prepared  to  intercept 
the  pass.  Let  us  assume  that  the  center  for- 
ward has  the  ball.  As  the  center  half  charges 
the  others  drop  back  slightly,  at  the  same  time 
moving  towards  the  center  of  the  field.  Thus 
when  the  center  man  compels  a  pass,  the  other 
two  are  in  a  favorable  position  to  regain  pos- 
session of  the  ball,  whether  it  be  a  long  or  short 
pass.  When  the  situation  becomes  offensive, 
the  halfbacks  must  quickly  sum  up  the  condi- 
tions and  determine  what  is  the  best  course  to 
follow.  If  the  halfback  is  clear,  he  can  carry 
the  ball  himself  as  far  as  he  sees  fit,  but  he 
must  bear  in  mind  that  his  forwards  are  the 
real  scoring  implement  and  not  try  to  do  too 
much  himself.  When  attacked  he  must  pass  to 
his  forwards  and  instinctively  seek  out  that  one 
who  is  uncovered,  at  the  same  time  attempting 
to  vary  the  play  by  short  passes  or  by  swing- 
ing the  ball  across  the  field.  It  is  a  very  diffi- 
cult question  to  answer,  to  what  degree  the  half- 
backs shall  assume  offensive  duties,  but  it  is 
safe  to  say  that  the  best  defense  is  a  powerful 
attack,  leaving  much  to  the  discretion  of  the 
player.  From  this  we  see  that  the  halfback 
line  must  be  composed  of  powerful  men  with 
good  stamina  and  speed.  For  the  forward  line 
and  fullbacks  there  is  an  occasional  period  of 
rest,  but  the  halfbacks,  especially  is  this  true 
of  the  center  halfback,  who  must  bear  the  brunt 


446        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

of  the  attack,  must  be  continually  on  the  alert, 
never  trying  to  shirk  the  arduous  duties  im- 
posed upon  them.  In  addition  to  being  able  to 
kick  with  both  feet  with  equal  facility  and  ac- 
curacy, it  is  essential  that  the  halfbacks  be 
proficient  in  the  art  of  heading  the  ball.  If 
oftentimes  the  ball  is  allowed  to  touch  the 
ground,  an  opposing  forward  can  come  in  on 
the  run  and  be  down  the  field  before  the  half- 
back can  turn,  but  heading  the  ball  prevents 
this  absolutely  if  it  is  properly  done.  It  is  a 
good  plan,  when  doing  this,  to  judge  exactly 
where  the  ball  will  come  down  to  the  height 
suitable  for  heading  and  lay  off  for  a  few  sec- 
onds while  permitting  the  opponent  to  get  set 
as  he  waits  for  it  to  descend.  Then,  by  jump- 
ing into  the  air  on  the  run,  one  at  the  same 
time  regains  the  ball  away  and  gets  a  good 
start  down  the  field.  If  one  tries  to  head  the 
ball  by  waiting  so  that  one  comes  down  where 
the  ball  naturally  would  have  dropped,  it  is  an 
easy  matter  for  an  opponent  to  throw  one  aside 
by  a  very  light  charge.  This  art  is  very  useful, 
in  fact  one  might  even  say  necessary,  when  the 
opposing  goal-tender  is  kicking  out,  because  the 
ball  takes  a  long  flight  with  sufficient  height  to 
make  heading  the  natural  course  to  pursue. 

"We  now  come  to  the  fullbacks,  whose  duties 
are  purely  defensive  and  therefore  of  great 
importance,  because  when  they  fail  to  stop  the 
onrush,  it  is  practically  certain  that  a  score 


INTERCOLLEGIATE   SOCCER       447 

will  follow,  since  an  unprotected  goal-tender  is 
almost  helpless  when  one  considers  the  size  of 
the  goal  that  he  is  expected  to  cover.  Here 
again  the  tackling  must  be  hard  and  fearless, 
but  at  the  same  time  it  cannot  be  aimless  and 
still  yield  good  results.  It  is  extremely  disas- 
trous for  a  fullback  to  charge  without  consider- 
ing what  his  opponent  is  going  to  attempt,  be- 
cause then  he  is  off  his  balance  and  a  little  side- 
step will  circumvent  his  best  efforts,  thus 
leaving  a  free  course  to  the  goal.  If  the  full- 
back merely  pretends  to  hesitate,  he  can  trick 
his  opponent  into  a  movement  that  will  disclose 
his  intentions  and  give  him  the  opportunity  to 
charge  effectively.  Thus  I  have  seen  a  full- 
back make  a  motion  as  if  he  were  going  to 
charge  in  such  a  position  as  to  prevent  a  pass 
to  a  certain  wing,  whereupon  the  forward  tried 
to  go  down  the  center  or  make  a  short  pass  in 
that  direction,  and  then  the  fullback  charged 
and  spoiled  the  play.  Thus  a  fullback  must 
carefully  study  every  movement  of  an  ap- 
proaching forward  and  try  to  fathom  his  inten- 
tions. As  was  the  case  with  the  rest  of  the 
team,  the  fullbacks  must  play  in  close  touch 
with  each  other;  when  one  charges,  the  other 
drops  back  and  towards  the  center  to  intercept 
a  pass  or  delay  the  line  until  the  other  back 
can  return  to  his  position  in  case  he  is  eluded 
without  causing  a  pass  to  be  made.  Here  at 
Harvard  we  have  tried  a  scheme  which  proved 


448        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

of  great  service  to  us  in  our  spring  season  of 
1913.  Perhaps  it  succeeded  on  account  of  the 
great  speed  of  one  of  our  fullbacks  and  perhaps 
it  could  be  used  in  any  combination,  but  it 
serves  to  illustrate  how  two  fullbacks  should 
play  together  with  a  mutual  understanding. 
Instead  of  playing  them  side  by  side,  we  had 
a  line  formation  whereby  our  captain,  who  was 
extremely  fast,  charged  first.  If  he  was  suc- 
cessful in  stopping  the  attack,  well  and  good; 
if  not,  the  other  fullback  crossed  over  at  full 
speed  and  charged,  thereby  either  gaining  pos- 
session of  the  ball  or  causing  sufficient  delay 
for  the  other  to  regain  his  position.  This  sys- 
tem had  the  great  advantage  that  it  kept  the 
play  farther  down  the  field  than  when  the  full- 
backs played  side  by  side,  waiting  for  the  at- 
tack to  reach  them,  creating  more  opportunities 
for  the  successful  interception  of  the  ball. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  say  anything  of  use  or 
interest  concerning  the  goal-tender.  Of  course 
it  is  advantageous  although  not  essential  for 
a  goal-tender  to  have  good  height,  but  many 
small  men  have  made  up  for  this  deficiency  by 
their  extreme  agility  and  have  developed  into 
goal-tenders  with  what  appear  to  be  supernat- 
ural powers.  It  would  be  a  physical  impossi- 
bility to  reach  the  ball  in  many  cases  where 
stops  have  been  made,  but  a  goal-tender  seems 
to  be  able  by  intuition  to  intercept  well  placed 
shots.    There  are  a  few  rules  of  position  that 


INTERCOLLEGIATE   SOCCER       449 

can  be  laid  down,  such  as  shifting  towards  a 
wing  man  carrying  the  ball,  but  on  the  whole, 
it  is  impossible  to  say  what  the  goal-tender 
should  do.  It  must  be  left  to  his  discretion 
when  the  emergency  presents  itself. 

To  develop  a  team  capable  of  taking  part  in 
a  big  series,  one  must  first  develop  stamina  and 
good  wind  by  strict  training  and  long  runs.  It 
is  obvious  that  a  team  will  be  greatly  weakened 
by  the  failure  to  get  into  good  condition  if  one 
realizes  that  a  regular  game  consists  of  two 
forty-five  minute  halves  with  a  brief  intermis- 
sion and  that  no  substitutions  are  allowed,  al- 
though in  the  intercollegiate  league  a  provision 
has  been  made  to  permit  the  use  of  one  substi- 
tute per  game. 

After  the  preliminary  training  of  long  dis- 
tance running  the  team  should  be  made  to  de- 
velop speed  and  the  power  of  quick  starting, 
by  devoting  a  considerable  time  to  sudden, 
short  sprints.  Often  the  only  way  to  prevent 
a  score  is  by  overtaking  a  man  who  has  passed 
the  rest  of  the  team,  and  speed  is  the  only  re- 
quirement that  can  meet  fhis  contingency.  The 
forward  line  must  next  learn  ind)*vidually  to 
control  the  ball  by  running  up  and  down  the 
field  at  top  speed,  keeping  it  always  not  more 
than  a  yard  in  front.  Wlien  shooting  practice 
commences,  it  is  our  custom  to  draw  up  the  for- 
ward line  at  a  reasonable  distance  from  the 
goal,  with  the  halfback  line  supporting  them 


450        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

from  behind.  Thus  the  forwards  learn  to  re- 
ceive passes  from  each  other  and  to  shoot  with- 
out delay,  and  the  halfbacks  learn  how  to  feed 
the  ball  to  the  forwards  in  such  a  manner  that 
it  is  not  necessary  to  stop  the  ball  before  shoot- 
ing. It  is  also  desirable  for  the  halfbacks  to 
attempt  occasionally  long  shots  from  their  posi- 
tions, because  such  a  play  may  take  a  goal- 
tender  unawares  and  result  in  a  score.  Finally, 
a  course  of  development  would  consist  in  steady 
practice  in  heading  the  ball,  whereby  the  men 
would  not  only  learn  to  leave  their  feet,  but 
also  would  acquire  accuracy  in  direction. 
Merely  hitting  the  ball  is  of  no  avail,  in  fact 
it  can  be  disastrous  if  the  ball  glides  off  to  an 
opponent.  As  great  accuracy  in  hitting  as  in 
kicking  is  essential. 

In  conclusion  let  me  say  a  few  words  concern- 
ing the  great  enjoyment  of  the  game.  So  far  I 
have  had  the  pleasure  of  playing  on  the  Har- 
vard team  for  two  years,  when  we  finished  at 
the  head  of  the  intercollegiate  league  after  a 
very  difficult  series,  most  of  the  games  being 
decided  by  the  scant  margin  of  one  point.  Of 
course  the  thrill  of  victory  may  have  been  re- 
sponsible for  a  large  part  of  the  satisfaction 
obtained,  but  I  firmly  believe  that  the  game 
affords  a  wonderful  opportunity  for  healthy 
yet  vigorous  exercise,  without  the  utter  ex- 
haustion and  danger  of  injury  found  in  other 
games.     When  one  recalls  how  the  game  is 


INTERCOLLEGIATE  SOCCER       451 

growing  in  our  American  colleges  and  that  the 
preparatory  schools  are  taking  it  up,  one  can- 
not fail  to  realize  that  it  has  come  to  stay  and 
to  develop  into  a  game  of  widespread  interest. 


WRESTLING 


WRESTLING 

Wrestling  is  an  ancient  and  time-honored 
sport.  It  was  practised  by  the  Greeks  in  the 
time  of  Homer  and  its  arts  were  known  to  the 
Hebrews  in  Old  Testament  times.  To-day  in 
its  many  forms  it  is  quite  universal.  The  Jap- 
anese are  exponents  of  a  style  of  wrestling 
known  as  jiu-jitsu.  The  European  wrestlers 
meet  usually  under  the  Graeco-Roman  rules, 
while  here  in  America  we  have  our  catch-as- 
catch-can  variety. 

It  is  not  surprising  that  wrestling  should 
have  continued  as  a  popular  sport  through  all 
the  centuries  and  in  all  climes.  It  offers  better 
than  can  anything  else  that  opportunity,  which 
youth  so  constantly  seeks,  for  testing  its 
strength  in  combat  with  comrade  or  rival.  And 
while  bodily  strength  is  paramount,  roughness 
and  brutality  may  be  entirely  absent.  Further- 
more, as  a  sport  it  requires  little  or  no  para- 
phernalia or  equipment,  no  large  number  of 
players  and  no  elaborate  field  for  practice.  The 
wrestler  strips  to  the  waist  and  meets  his  op- 
ponent on  a  mat  which  need  measure  no  more 
than  twenty  feet  square.  Two  strong  bodies 
and  two  stout  hearts,  each  with  the  love  of  con- 

455 


456        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

test,  are  all  that  are  needed  to  make  the  bout 
a  success. 

I  believe  every  boy  should  know  something 
about  wrestling  just  as  he  should  of  boxing  and 
swimming.  They  all  add  to  his  manhood  and 
to  his  strength  and  to  his  ability  for  self-de- 
fense and  preservation.  He  may  learn  these 
things  from  his  brothers  at  home,  or  at  school, 
or  from  instructors,  it  matters  little  which,  but 
when  he  has  mastered  them  he  assumes  a  place 
of  no  mean  respect  among  his  comrades. 

In  this  article  it  is  impossible  to  go  into  more 
than  a  few  of  the  commoner  holds.  I  shall  at- 
tempt to  describe  how  these  are  applied  and 
how  they  are  defended  against. 

First  and  most  important  is  to  assume  a 
strong  standing  position,  thus  giving  your  op- 
ponent the  least  possible  chance  to  gain  the 
advantage  while  at  the  same  time  you  are  ready 
to  move  rapidly  and  seize  whatever  opening 
may  present.  To  this  end  stand  in  a  crouching 
position  mth  the  body  bent  slightly  forward, 
the  arms  somewhat  extended,  the  leading  hand 
being  more  so  than  its  mate.  The  feet  should 
be  rather  well  apart,  one  foot  slightly  ahead  of 
the  other.  Do  not  have  your  arms  so  far  ex- 
tended that  your  opponent  may  use  them  as  a 
lever  in  securing  a  hold,  nor  stand  with  the  legs 
much  bent  at  the  knees,  as  they  then  offer  an 
excellent  mark  for  a  diving  hold. 

If  both  contestants  assume  strong  positions 


THE  REFEREE'S   HOLD.     THIS  IS  THE    HOLD  USUALLY  ASSUMED 
AT  THE   BEGINXIXO  OF   A    BOIT. 


t1 


FlUsr  STANDING  HOLD.      THE  WKEST- 

LEK  TRYING  FOR  THE    HOLD    HAS 

THROWN  HIS  OPPONENT'S  LEFT 

ARM  UP  AND  FORWARD,  AND 

NOW  HAS  AN  OPPORTUNITY 

TO    SLIP    BEHIND    HIM. 


THE    SECOND    STANDING    HOLD.      THE 

AGRESSOK    HAS   SEfURED  A    GOOD 

HOLD  ON   HIS  OPPONENT'S  LEFT 

LEG  AND  IS  SEEN  TRIPPING 

THE    RIGHT    LEG. 


WRESTLING  I 


WRESTLING  457 

they  will  fall  naturally  into  so-called  referee's 
hold,  i.  e.,  each  will  place  his  leading  hand  on 
the  back  of  his  opponent's  neck  while  the  other 
hand  either  grasps  his  opponent's  leading  arm 
at  the  elbow  or  hangs  ready  for  action.  This 
hold  brings  the  men  together,  obviates  much 
needless  sparring  for  openings  and  is  equally 
fair  to  each,  so  that  neither  should  hesitate  to 
assume  it. 

I  shall  mention  three  ways  of  throwing  the 
opponent  to  the  mat  from  the  referee's  hold. 
The  first  depends  upon  your  ability  to  pull 
your  opponent  suddenly  forward  and  past  you. 
If  you  are  successful  this  gives  you  the  oppor- 
tunity of  clasping  his  waist  from  behind.  With 
this  advantage  it  should  be  possible  to  throw 
him  to  the  mat  either  by  throwing  your  whole 
weight  sharply  to  one  side  and  tripping  him  at 
the  same  instant,  or  by  pushing  him  quickly 
forward  with  your  whole  strength  and  as  you 
do  so  catching  up  one  of  his  legs  at  the  ankle. 
If  you  have  managed  to  get  behind  him,  one 
of  these  methods  should  bring  your  man  to  the 
mat.  The  second  hold  is  somewhat  more  dan- 
gerous as  an  offensive  move  but  more  likely  to 
end  in  a  fall  when  successful.  By  a  quick  feint 
your  opponent's  arms  are  thrown  upwards 
while  at  the  same  instant  you  dive  for  his  for- 
ward leg.  If  successful  you  lift  quickly  and 
advance,  entangling  his  other  leg  with  your 
own  as  you  carry  him  backwards  and  down. 


458        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

The  third  hold  is  by  far  the  most  difficult  but 
the  most  satisfactory  and  sure  of  a  fall  when 
well  executed.  It  is  an  arm  lock  with  a  cross- 
body  throw.  If  you  have  assumed  the  referee's 
hold  you  will  be  gripping  your  opponent 's  lead- 
ing arm  just  above  the  elbow.  The  success  of 
the  hold  which  I  am  about  to  describe  depends 
upon  the  firmness  of  that  grip  and  upon  the 
quickness  with  which  the  other  moves  are  car- 
ried out.  Draw  your  opponent's  elbow  sud- 
denly towards  you,  at  the  same  time  slipping 
your  leading  arm  around  his  neck  and  with  the 
same  motion  turning  your  body  by  stepping 
sharply  across  in  front  of  his  body  with  your 
leading  leg.  Now  with  the  leg  acting  as  a  ful- 
crum you  throw  your  man  across  your  hip  and 
on  to  the  mat.  Do  not  loosen  your  grasp  on 
his  elbow  or  neck  but  fall  with  him,  maintaining 
your  grip  until  you  have  gained  the  fall. 

If  wrestling  were  all  offense,  any  one  of  these 
three  holds  would  always  mean  a  fall  for  the 
man  who  attempted  them,  but  wrestling  also 
has  its  defensive  side.  In  the  first  hold  the  de- 
fense consists  in  anticipating  the  pull  and  bra- 
cing against  it,  or  in  warding  off  the  pulling 
hand.  In  the  second  hold,  the  best  defense  is 
to  keep  the  legs  well  back  so  that  they  cannot 
be  reached  by  a  dive.  But  if  your  leg  has  been 
caught  by  the  dive  it  is  necessary  either  to 
break  the  hold  by  quickly  straightening  the  leg 
and  throwing  your  weight  on  your  opponent  in 


WRESTLING  459 

an  endeavor  to  bear  him  to  the  mat,  or  to  turn 
and  fall  on  the  mat  in  the  defensive  position. 
The  defense  against  the  third  hold  is  very  sim- 
ple but  must  be  used  quickly  in  order  to  avail. 
By  placing  the  heel  of  your  hand  in  your  oppo- 
nent's  groin  or  against  his  side  as  he  attempts 
to  turn  his  body  to  make  the  throw,  it  is  easy 
to  ward  him  off  while  you  slip  free.  At  the 
same  time  you  should  attempt  to  slip  behind 
and  throw  him  to  the  mat. 

On  the  mat  so  much  depends  upon  the  defen- 
sive position  that  I  shall  describe  it  first. 
Whenever  you  are  thrown  to  the  mat  you 
should  try  to  assume  a  position  on  your  hands 
and  knees.  This  will  enable  you  best  to  with- 
stand your  opponent's  hold  and  to  get  away 
from  him  if  the  chance  arises.  Likewise  if  you 
are  so  fortunate  as  to  be  on  top,  do  not  forget 
that  your  opponent  is  working  always  to  get 
up  and  that  this  position  on  his  hands  offers 
him  the  best  chance. 

Of  the  holds  taken  on  the  mat,  the  Nelsons 
are  the  most  commonly  used.  They  all  are 
worked  by  using  the  arm  and  head  as  points  of 
leverage.  In  the  full  Nelson,  your  arms  are 
slipped  one  under  each  of  your  opponent's  arm- 
pits and  clasped  on  the  back  of  his  head.  By 
pressing  down  on  the  head  and  lifting  on  the 
arms  it  is  possible  to  turn  your  opponent  in 
half  a  somersault  and  press  his  shoulders  to 
the  mat.     This  particular  hold  is  barred  in 


460        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

amateur  wrestling  but  should  be  known  to  all 
wrestlers  as  it  contains  tlie  principle  on  which 
the  others  are  worked,  i.  e.,  the  leverage  on  the 
head  and  armpit.  In  the  half  Nelson  no  at- 
tempt is  made  to  slip  the  arm  under  the  more 
distant  arm  of  your  opponent.  Instead  the  free 
hand  is  used  to  hold  your  opponent  close  and  to 
assist  in  pushing  dow^n  his  head.  In  the 
"  further  half  "  the  opposite  arms  are  the 
parts  involved. 

'The  breaks  for  the  Nelsons  are  all  similar. 
They  consist  of  an  arm  lock  and  body  roll. 
Thus  if  your  opponent  has  taken  a  half  Nelson, 
you  should  lock  his  arm  tightly  between  your 
arm  and  his  side  and  roll  quickly  towards  him, 
at  the  same  time  throwing  your  free  arm  over 
his  body.  This  roll  is  often  more  effective  in 
gaining  a  fall  than  the  Nelson  itself.  The  break 
for  the  "  further  half  "  is  exactly  the  same 
except  that  the  lock  is  on  the  other  arm  and  the 
roll  away  from  him. 

The  use  of  the  leg  scissors  is  very  important. 
This  hold  alone  is  not  usually  enough  to  gain 
a  fall  but  in  conjunction  with  other  holds  is 
very  effective.  The  scissors  can  be  taken  on 
the  opponent's  body,  arms,  legs  or  head.  In 
the  body  scissors  the  legs  are  wrapped  around 
the  opponent's  waist  and  the  feet  securely 
locked  by  pressing  with  the  knees.  This  hold 
may  be  made  very  firm.  The  principle  is  ex- 
actly the  same  in  the  head  or  arm  scissors. 


WRESTLING  461 

The  defense  for  the  scissors  is  not  to  let  your 
opponent  get  it,  for  once  obtained  it  is  hard  to 
break.  So  if  your  man  tries  to  take  the  scis- 
sors, try  to  push  his  knees  away  and  keep  his 
feet  apart.  If  he  is  successful  in  his  endeavor, 
the  hold  can  be  broken  sometimes  by  reaching 
his  feet  and  pulling  them  apart,  or  by  turning 
quickly  so  as  to  face  your  opponent.  This  latter 
can  be  accomplished  only  when  his  grip  has  not 
been  tightened. 

These  are  but  a  few  of  the  more  important 
holds.  However,  it  is  no  exaggeration  to  say 
that  if  these  few  are  thoroughly  mastered,  they 
offer  an  offensive  and  defensive  equipment  suf- 
ficient for  winning  many  a  bout.  It  is  far 
better  to  know  these  few  well  and  be  able  to  use 
them  than  to  have  a  great  many  more  half 
learned.  A  sense  of  poise  and  balance  is  of 
much  greater  value  in  winning  bouts  than  any 
number  of  fancy  holds.  This  comes  naturally 
to  some  boys  and  others  get  it  only  after  years 
of  practice.  Learn  your  few  holds  and  when 
to  use  them,  watch  for  your  opponent's  mis- 
takes and  take  advantage  of  them,  be  careful 
but  aggressive  and  you  will  find  wrestling  no 
mystery.  It  is  a  sport  where  quick  wits, 
strength,  and  knowledge  all  play  important 
parts. 


BOXING 


BOXING 

BY   L.    J.    CONLEY, 

Boxing  Coach,  Harvard  University 

The  most  convincing  evidence  that  boxing 
is  a  form  of  exercise  well  suited  to  the  develop- 
ment of  mind  and  muscle  is  the  fact  that  the 
sport  has  lived  through  one  century  after 
another  from  the  days  of  the  ancient  Greeks 
to  our  own  more  enlightened  times,  and  to-day 
is  more  popular  than  ever  before.  If  parti- 
cipation in  a  form  of  athletics  such  as  boxing 
were  not  beneficial  to  the  development  of 
man's  body  and  brain,  it  would  have  perished 
long  ago. 

To  start  with,  let  me  say  that  in  classes  the 
same  methods  of  attack  and  defense  are 
taught  that  Jack  Dempsey,  Jack  Britton, 
Benny  Leonard,  Johnny  Kilbane,  and  other 
champions  had  to  learn  in  the  more  rugged 
school  of  Give  and  Take  when  they  were 
youngsters  breaking  in.  The  same  left  jab, 
the  same  right  cross,  the  same  block,  and  the 
same  parry  are  a  part  of  our  system,  but  they 

465 


466      THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETIC 

are  learned  and  practised  by  the  majority, 
not  with  the  thought  of  achieving  any  cham- 
pionship honors,  but  with  the  idea  of  attaining 
genuine  exercise.  When  one  considers  the 
footwork,  arm  action,  body  movement,  bend- 
ing and  straightening  that  one  goes  through 
during  a  few  rounds  of  boxing,  it  is  not  difficult 
to  understand  that  one  gets  the  maximum  of 
exercise  in  a  short  space  of  time. 

Boxing  properly  done  brings  into  play  every 
muscle  in  the  body.  It  develops  speed  with 
the  arms  and  legs,  teaches  perfect  balancing 
of  the  weight,  sudden  shifting  of  weight  from 
one  foot  to  the  other  and,  above  all,  calls  for 
alertness  of  the  eye  and  mind  second  to  no 
other  sport.  The  eye  becomes  trained  to 
notice  an  instant's  opening  in  the  other  man's 
defense,  the  mind  must  instantly  recognize 
the  opportunity,  direct  the  proper  currents  of 
muscular  action  to  start  the  hands  on  their 
way  to  take  advantage  of  that  opening. 
There  is  eye,  brain,  and  muscle  all  in  action 
at  the  same  moment.  Is  it  any  wonder  the 
boys  who  try  it  once  come  back  for  more.f^ 

First,  the  candidates  are  shown  the  various 
fundamental  blows,  and  with  these  in  mind 
they  are  sent  through  a  drill  lasting  about 
ten  minutes.  They  include  straight  punches, 
left  jab,  hooks,  uppercuts  and  combination 
punches,  and  the  body  action  that  goes  with 
the  various  strokes. 


•  M3  o 


^  if-.-     c 


BOXING  467 

After  the  class  drill,  the  boys  are'sent  through 
a  round  of  shadow  boxing  at  one-quarter 
speed.  They  try  out  all  their  punches,  ducks, 
and  feints  against  imaginary  opponents.  Fol- 
lowing this  is  a  round  of  shadow  boxing  in 
which  the  footwork  is  given  most  of  the 
attention.  This  is  done  at  full  speed  to 
enable  them  to  step  around  lightly  and  not 
become  flat-footed  in  their  style. 

With  instructions  to  work  only  at  half 
speed,  the  boys  are  then  paired  off  to  box 
lightly  with  one  another,  care  being  taken  to 
see  that  at  no  time  do  they  work  any  faster 
than  half  speed  until  they  have  familiarized 
themselves  with  the  sport  sufficiently  to 
preclude  the  possibility  of  accidents.  After 
two  or  three  weeks  of  this,  I  find  the  students 
at  Harvard  are  capable  of  such  good  work  that 
the  rounds  are  full  of  action,  and  the  full 
benefit  of  the  exercise  results. 

I  believe  that  boxing  is  a  natural  sport  for 
Americans.  We  borrowed  it,  of  course,  from 
the  Old  World,  but  I  think  the  youths  of  this 
country  take  to  it  so  naturally  that  they 
develop  faster  than  elsewhere.  I  have  found 
some  excellent  material  since  I  started  instruct- 
ing at  Harvard  University,  and  in  fact  many 
of  the  boys  in  the  classes  have  learned  so 
rapidly  that,  in  refereeing  professional  bouts, 
I  have  found  many  of  the  preliminary  boxers 
do  not  know  nearly  so  much  about  how  to  box 


468     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

as  the  boys  in  the  classes.  I  do  not  attribute 
this  to  anything  that  I  have  shown  them,  but 
to  the  fact  that  the  college  man  is  more 
capable  of  reasoning  out  the  science  of  the 
game. 

That  the  boys  naturally  take  to  the  sport 
is  evidenced  by  the  fact  that  last  year  three 
Freshmen,  who  had  never  had  a  glove  on 
before  they  took  it  up  at  Harvard,  won  the 
University  championships. 

A  boy  who  can  box  seldom  gets  into  trouble, 
and  w^hen  he  does  he  stands  much  less  chance 
of  being  injured  than  one  who  has  not  familiar- 
ized himself  with  the  art  of  self-defense, 
but  even  though  the  knowledge  gained  in 
boxing  may  never  come  into  use,  the  sport 
brings  its  full  reward  in  physical  condition, 
muscular  and  mental  alertness. 

I  have  employed  only  the  most  simple 
methods  of  instruction  in  my  work  at  Harvard 
University',  and  the  boys  have  grasped  the 
point  of  instruction  with  little  difficulty. 

First,  I  teach  the  boys  their  boxing  stance. 
I  teach  them  to  stand  with  left  foot  forward 
and  right  foot  back  with  a  spread  of  from 
14  to  18  inches.  After  this  attention  is 
directed  to  the  position  of  the  hands  which 
is  of  fundamental  importance.  The  most 
orthodox  and  popular  position  is  with  the 
left  hand  extended  and  the  right  hand  on  the 
chest.     After    students    assume    the    proper 


JO'S  °SCQ  '"  'A.o 

=3  0.0  -a,'^.-*^© 


■S55     -E 

So  ^ 

X 

-"  i 

c3  <l> 

O 

<T3 

m 

—  ^ 

-sl 

.-3 

03 

^ 

F^   Q 

>> 

_^-d 

m  c3 

M  °^ 

j3 

•r  fl 

"o  a 

r.^ 

>^ 

c    .  i  — ^  a) 

^ 

^ 

llli^e 

'*^ 

^  m  O  S  ^"^ 

S 

W 

5 

:n  ~  =^j  =  o 

H 

Tl 

^  c^       c;  O 

s 

'f-  o  2:-t:  — "3 

.2-=.=  ?  «  ^ 

r      -^     ■-'  0 

S  _"  y  '-f-  —  (S 

^' 

_C    r    -^^_^  a 

li  111 


BOXING  469 

stance  and  the  position  of  the  hands  foot- 
work is  taught.  Proper  footwork  constitutes 
a  large  part  of  boxing  success.  In  general, 
the  boys  are  taught  when  working  to  the 
left  of  an  opponent  to  step  with  the  left  foot 
first,  with  the  right  foot  folloving.  On  the 
other  hand,  when  working  to  the  right  of  an 
opponent  just  the  opposite  process  should  be 
followed,  with  the  right  foot  leading  and  the 
left  following.  The  greatest  care  should  be 
taken  in  avoiding  positions  where  the  legs 
are  crossed.     Such  a  position  is  fatal. 

Shadow  work,  so-called,  is  another  im- 
portant element  in  teaching  boxing.  This 
form  of  boxing  helps  the  footwork  and  tends 
to  make  the  students  more  graceful  and 
natural  in  their  actual  boxing  contests. 
Shadow  boxing  is  done  against  an  imaginary 
opponent  with  both  hands  being  called  into 
play  in  the  execution  of  the  various  blows. 
This  sort  of  boxing  is  essential  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  student,  and  should  be  practised 
each  day  from  two  to  four  rounds. 

I  shall  now  endeavor  by  illustrations  to 
teach  the  reader  the  simple  leads  and  blows 
which  any  boy  wishing  to  take  up  boxing  should 
know. 

The  first  lead  is  a  straight  left  to  the  head, 
(see  illustration  1) ;  the  second  lead  is  a 
straight  left  to  the  body,  (illustration  2). 
In    both    cases,   the    illustration    shows    the 


470     THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

position  to  be  assumed  by  the  defensive  man 
properly  to  block  these  leads. 

The  third  lead  consists  of  a  straight  right 
to  the  head,  (illustration  3)  and  the  fourth, 
a  straight  right  to  the  body,  (illustration  4). 
Again  these  illustrations  show  the  blocks  which 
should  be  employed  to  ward  off  the  blows. 

So  far,  we  have  dealt  with  only  straight 
punches  which  should  be  thoroughly  mastered 
before  taking  up  the  following  ''hooks." 
First,  there  is  the  left  hook  to  the  head 
(illustration  5),  with  its  complement,  the  left 
hook  to  the  body,  (illustration  6).  When 
these  have  been  developed,  a  right  hook  to 
the  head  (illustration  7)  and  its  complement, 
a  right  hook  to  the  body,  (illustration  8) 
should  be  mastered.  As  in  the  previous 
illustrations,  each  picture  shows  the  proper 
block  for  each  of  the  blows  described. 

When  these  elemental  leads  are  mastered, 
the  student  should  be  taught  a  left  upper  cut 
to  the  head  (illustration  9),  and  then  a  right 
upper  cut  to  the  head  (illustration  10). 
These  two  leads  should  be  followed  up  by  a 
left  cross-counter  to  the  head  (illustration  11) 
and  a  right  cross-counter  to  the  head  (illus- 
tration 12). 

All  these  blows  are  important.  It  takes 
time  and  constant  practice  to  master  them. 
When  they  are  conquered,  however,  the 
student  is  well  equipped  in  the  fundamentals 


2o- 


W 

0 

5-^ 

11 

'.J 
O 

ill 

ii 

^      t^ 

d  C 

K 

^'2°- 

(UTS 

^ 

C   J, 

P 

—  ,  ^ 

^.2  2; 

(OJ" 

H 

2_ai; 

■s< 

5 

13    M-B 

m  O 

-H.  c  a 

.S  +^ 

5 

p|^ 

o  o 
o  o 

<ii.2 


S5^       -3^5 

o       fl       O  c 

^-   0  c3       ^^  !3 

. 

wel 
bod 

hOQ 

left 

2^ 

S 

Qj-rs  a      t-  «  o 

s|i  |j: 

O 

a 

S   C3<J 

■i 

-^  c  ^*^ 

K 

^1« 

0 

-ifl 

b* 

K 

i:"o-3 

? 

Z 

111   . 

3 

o 

p.s'g 

'C 

■J^    t-    05    I- 

T. 

<u-=-a 

0 

b< 

S 

o 

s 

^::2-E 

S"o*^  2 

«■ 

-^s-« 

s 

m:=_.-2 

°  *  »,  2 

5j||      . 

§.r§       g 

3  =  8     5 

X 

^^''S     o 

8S.2  3i     « 

3-3.2=3 

••2     ffl 

1~   c   ^ 

a" 

< 

o 

0.»..-CT! 

H 

■^s^        t4 

_j_i  OJ  ai  a3 

a 

E- 

Z 

-w  C  ^  m 

D 
0 

u 

•Safe  a. 

X 

-•^■"■S  >> 

v: 

(B  t,  S'z    ■ 

0 

^  c  V  ■-  1- 

f^ 

S  o  d  — .1 

^ 

-3^-S< 

a 

_j 

-■0£cQ-2 

SBi;^^ 

S  i:       c3j= 

d  ^  M 

X 

a^^r= 

bC-M—  -*■> 

■■■r-T^-C^ 

S  ■-  S_  t) 

^•2«^-5 

m-  is  ^iz 

•nil 

BOXING  471 

of  boxing,  and  his  development  thereafter  is 
largely  a  matter  of  teaching  him  to  employ  a 
combination  of  the  various  punches  and 
blows  already  shown. 

At  first  the  boys  should  practise  these 
blows  at  half  speed,  both  in  shadow  work  and 
with  an  opponent.  From  time  to  time  the 
speed  can  be  increased  until  even  the  student 
himself  will  regard  his  development  as 
wonderful.  At  least,  this  method  has  proved 
most  successful  in  my  work  at  Harvard. 


LACROSSE 


LACEOSSE 

BY  PAUL   GUSTAFSON 

Lackosse  is  a  game  for  which  we  are  indebted 
to  the  Indians,  primarily,  and  to  the  Canadians, 
who  have  revised  the  play  and  formed  a  code 
of  playing  rules.  The  Indians  used  to  play  on 
fields  of  various  sizes,  and  with  a  great  num- 
ber of  players  on  each  side.  The  fundamental 
principle  of  the  game  was,  as  it  still  is,  to  have 
the  sides  even;  often  as  many  as  a  hundred 
played  on  each  team,  and  the  goal-posts  were 
placed  a  mile  apart.  Sometimes  the  play  lasted 
all  day  without  deciding  a  winner. 

As  the  aborigines  played  lacrosse,  it  was  a 
game  for  everybody.  Each  player  made  his 
own  stick,  or  ''  crosse,"  from  a  bent  branch 
and  thongs,  to  make  a  "  pocket  "  in  which  to 
catch  the  ball,  which  was  made  of  leather.  The 
man  with  the  greatest  endurance,  speed,  and 
cleverness  in  handling  his  stick,  regardless  of 
his  size,  became  the  most  successful  player. 

About  1850,  George  Beers,  of  Canada,  recog- 
nized the  value  of  lacrosse  as  a  game  for  others 
than  the  Indians,  and  introduced  the  game 
among  civilized  Canadians,  at  the  same  time 

475 


476        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

making  definite  rules.  For  this  reason,  lie  is 
rightly  called  the  "  father  "  of  lacrosse,  which 
has  become  the  national  game  of  Canada.  In 
certain  parts  of  Canada  it  is  as  popular  as  base- 
ball is  in  the  United  States,  and  the  boys  begin 
playing  as  soon  as  they  are  able  to  lift  their 
little  sticks.  Amateur  and  professional  leagues 
have  been  formed,  and  all  the  schools  and  col- 
leges have  representative  teams. 

Lacrosse  was  first  begun  in  the  United 
States  by  Canadian  players,  who  settled  in  New 
York  about  1870.  Since  that  time  the  game  has 
gained  in  popularity,  so  that  it  is  now  played 
at  many  of  the  leading  colleges  and  universi- 
ties, preparatory  schools,  and  clubs  in  several 
cities.  The  first  intercollegiate  lacrosse  asso- 
ciation was  formed  in  1882,  the  members  of 
which  were  Yale,  Princeton,  Harvard,  Colum- 
bia, and  New  York  University.  The  Intercol- 
legiate Lacrosse  League  now  comprises  Johns 
Hopkins,  Swarthmore,  Lehigh,  Harvard,  Cor- 
nell, Stevens,  and  Hobart.  Many  other  colleges 
and  training  schools,  including  the  United 
States  Naval  Academy  at  Annapolis,  are  rep- 
resented by  lacrosse  teams,  while  at  the  Car- 
lisle Indian  School,  lacrosse  is  played  to  the 
exclusion  of  baseball,  in  the  spring.  Among 
the  clubs,  the  Crescent  Athletic  Club  has  done 
much  to  foster  the  game  in  New  York,  playing 
several  Canadian  teams  each  season;  while 
Baltimore,  Boston,  and  several  Western  cities 


LACROSSE  477 

are  represented  by  strong  amateur  teams,  the 
players  being  chiefly  men  who  used  to  play  on 
school  and  college  twelves.  Among  the  younger 
players,  lacrosse  is  most  popular  in  the  prepar- 
atory schools  of  Baltimore  and  New  York,  while 
Phillips  Andover  Academy  has  had  a  team  for 
some  years. 

Just  as  the  lacrosse  the  Indians  played  was 
a  game  for  everybody,  so  to-day  it  is  a  game 
that  anybody  can  take  up  with  advantage,  and 
*'  make  good  "  at  it.  This  may  be  easily  under- 
stood, when  a  man  weighing  one  hundred  and 
fifteen  pounds  is  seen  playing  against  another 
who  weighs  two  hundred;  speed  and  stick- 
work  make  up  for  the  difference  in  weight,  and 
by  constant  practice  a  small  man  may  become 
a  better  player  than  one  much  heavier. 

I  shall  now  try  to  outline  the  qualifications 
for  a  successful  player  and  for  a  well-balanced 
team,  for  twelve  good  players  do  not  necessa- 
rily make  a  good  strong  team  unless  their  ef- 
forts are  united  to  score  more  goals  than  the 
other  side,  and  at  the  same  time,  if  possible, 
prevent  the  opponents  from  lodging  the  ball 
safely  in  the  objective  goal-net. 

The  most  important  feature  of  individual 
playing  is  ability  to  handle  one's  stick.  A  man 
who  can  catch  any  ball  which  is  within  his 
reach,  and  throw  it  wherever  he  desires  to, 
every  single  time,  is  exceptional.  First  of  all, 
a  good  stick  must  be  used.    One  made  of  raw- 


478        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

liide  and  clock-cord  wliich  is  fairly  soft  is  best. 
It  makes  little  difference,  as  in  hockey,  whether 
the  player  is  right-handed  or  left-handed ;  it  is 
best  to  stick  to  one  system  or  the  other  until 
perfectly  familiar  with  it,  before  attempting 
to  be  ambidextrous,  though  it  is  often  of  advan- 
tage to  be  able  to  handle  the  crosse  equally  well 
either  way.  I  have  found  it  useful  to  keep  the 
hands  well  apart  in  passing,  thus  getting 
greater  accuracy. 

Good  stick-work  is  obtained  only  by  long  and 
faithful  practice,  but  unless  the  men  on  a  team 
are  sure  of  their  own  and  their  team-mates' 
passing,  fast  playing  cannot  result,  and  the 
ball  is  on  the  ground  most  of  the  time,  instead 
of  being  in  the  air.  The  best  way  to  become 
proficient  is  for  a  few  men,  and  only  a  few,  to 
pass  the  ball  around  from  one  to  another,  with 
every  one  in  motion,  for  lacrosse  is  a  moving 
game.  As  for  playing  with  only  one  hand  upon 
the  stick,  this  should  be  attempted  only  in 
emergencies,  as  when  warding  off  an  opponent 
or  holding  the  stick  out  of  his  way. 

How  shall  the  ball  be  held  in  one's  stick? 
What  is  the  best  way  to  shoot,  to  get  the  most 
power  behind  the  ball?  These  are  questions 
which  experience  answers  best.  As  soon  as  the 
ball  is  caught,  it  should  assume  a  position  next 
to  the  wood,  and  be  kept  there,  until  it  is  passed 
or  "  shot  "  at  the  opponents'  goal.  The  only 
way  to  get  at  the  proper  direction  is  to  let  the 


LACROSSE  479 

ball  leave  the  stick  at  the  bend  in  the  wood.  On 
a  long,  hard  throw  it  may  be  started  nearer  the 
handle  than  in  case  of  a  short  pass,  but  never 
should  the  ball  be  allowed  to  become  caught  in 
the  leading-string,  for  then  it  invariably  goes 
wrong.  This,  however,  can  be  learned  best  by 
constant  practice.  The  pass  should  always  be 
where  your  colleague  can  most  easily  catch  it 
and  be  in  a  position  to  throw  again.  I  have 
found  that  a  ball  face-high  is  usually  very  eas- 
ily caught,  and  the  receiver  is  thus  in  a  position 
to  pass  immediately.  If  he  has  to  catch  the 
pass  at  his  ankles,  it  is  necessary  to  lift  the 
stick  up  before  throwing,  thus  wasting  time 
and  losing  opportunities. 

The  line-up  of  the  teams  is  as  follows: 

Goal 

Inside  Home  Point 

Outside  Home  Coverpoint 

First  Attack  First  Defense 

Second  Attack  Second  Defense 

Third  Attack  Third  Defense 

Center  Center 

Third  Defense  Third  Attack 

Second  Defense  Second  Attack 

First  Defense  First  Attack 

Coverpoint  Outside  Home 

Point  Inside  Home 
Goal 


480        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Of  the  twelve  men  on  the  team,  each  player, 
with  the  exception  of  the  goal-tender,  has  one 
direct  opponent  to  play  against.  There  are 
five  attack  men  against  five  corresponding  de- 
fense men,  besides  the  center,  who  "  faces 
off  "  at  the  beginning  and  after  each  goal. 

As  the  field  of  play  is  one  hundred  and  ten  to 
one  hundred  and  twenty-five  yards  long,  there 
is  ample  room  for  the  twenty-four  players  on 
the  field  at  one  time.  There  is  no  fixed  way  to 
line  up,  except  that  the  centers  face  off  with 
left  side  toward  the  goal  they  are  attacking; 
that  is,  the  referee  places  the  ball  upon  the 
ground  between  their  sticks,  and  when  the 
referee  calls  ''  play  *'  they  draw  their  sticks 
toward  them ;  while  this  is  being  done  the  other 
players  must  be  at  least  ten  feet  away. 

The  third  attack  usually  stations  himself  at 
the  edge  of  the  ten-foot  circle,  in  order  to  be 
as  near  the  ball  as  possible  when  it  is  put  into 
play.  The  other  attack  men  usually  find  it  of 
advantage  to  keep  spread  out,  so  that  the  initial 
line-up  usually  is  like  that  represented  in  Fig- 
ure 1.  The  defense  men  are  seen  between  their 
attack  men  and  the  goal,  to  prevent  the  attack 
from  getting  shots  at  goal  unmolested. 

It  is  true  that  the  attack  men  score  most  of 
the  goals ;  but  in  order  that  the  attack  may  get 
into  a  position  to  score,  it  is  necessary  for  the 
twelve  men  to  work  together  as  a  team  and  that 
each  individual  keep  his  eye  on  the  ball  all  the 


!+  G.  J 


+  C.P 
oJv 


+3D       ._ 


+  2  A 
ad 


+  1A 
id' 


+0.  H. 
<=P  +I.H. 


9- 


-T       P 


FIGURE    1 


482        THE   BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

time.  When  a  man  from  each  team  has  started 
for  the  ball,  a  third  man  should  immediately  go 
to  the  assistance  of  his  team-mate,  and  keep 
his  opponent  away  from  the  ball  long  enough  to 
allow  his  team-mate  to  get  it.  Body-checking 
is  allowable  when  within  six  feet  of  the  ball, 
though  to  check  a  man  with  the  stick,  a  play 
called  the  **  crosse-check,"  is  a  foul.  The  team 
which  has  the  ball  most  of  the  time  is  usually 
the  winner. 

In  no  game  is  team-work  more  important 
than  in  lacrosse,  and  this  applies  particularly 
to  the  attack.  Good  defense  alone  cannot  win 
games.  The  attack  must  break  through  or  out- 
wit the  opposing  defense  and  shoot  the  ball  into 
the  opponents'  goal-net.  There  are  certain 
rules  which  the  attack  men  should  always  fol- 
low; the  first  is  to  keep  moving  all  the  time. 
If  an  attack  man  stands  still,  except  when  he  is 
directly  involved  in  the  play,  he  is  what  the  de- 
fense man  calls  ' '  easy  to  cover, ' '  and  his  oppo- 
nent does  not  have  to  watch  him  all  the  time. 
Another  rule  which  seldom,  if  ever,  calls  for 
exception,  is  that  the  man  move  toward  the  hall. 
If  you  stand  still  or  move  away  from  it,  ther 
your  opponent  has  a  chance  to  intercept  the 
pass;  also,  it  is  to  be  remembered  that  a 
straight  hard  pass  is  the  only  one  to  use. 

If  one  team  played  with  only  eleven  men,  it 
is  easily  seen  that  the  other  team,  with  twelve, 
would  have  a  decided  advantage.    If  the  team 


LACROSSE  483 

with  the  greater  number  of  players  got  the  ball, 
they  would  have  an  odd  man,  and  theoretically 
they  should  not  lose  it  until  a  goal  had  been 
scored.  Thus,  it  is  the  effort  of  a  team  to  get 
an  extra  man  upon  the  attack,  in  that  part  of 
the  field  nearest  the  opponents'  goal,  when  in 
possession  of  the  ball.  With  sure  passing  and 
an  accurate  shot,  a  goal  should  result.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  opposing  defense  tries  to  block 
all  attempts  to  ''  get  the  extra  man."  It  be- 
comes a  question  not  only  of  speed,  but  also  of 
wits.  An  attack  man  may  be  able  to  run  faster 
than  the  defense  man  against  him,  but  cannot 
carry  the  ball  past  him. 

There  are  several  simple  plays  which,  if 
properly  executed,  and  if  the  proper  moment  is 
chosen,  often  result  in  securing  the  extra  man. 
Let  us  suppose  that  the  attack  has  the  ball,  but 
that  each  attack  man  is  covered.  The  play  is 
then  for  the  third  defense  or  the  center  to  sprint 
suddenly  away  from  his  direct  opponent,  in 
toward  goal.  The  attack  man  with  the  ball 
passes  to  the  uncovered  third  defense,  who 
keeps  on  until  checked,  or  goes  into  goal  and 
takes  a  shot.     (Figure  2.) 

In  this  case  (Figure  2),  the  first  attack  has 
the  ball,  and  all  his  fellow  attack  men  are 
*'  covered  close  "  by  the  defense.  Now,  when 
this  extra  man  gets  the  ball,  he  continues  until 
a  defense  man  comes  to  check  him,  or  until  he 
gets  to  the  *'  crease,"  six  feet  in  front  of  the 


484       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 


LH 


.^—<X 


P.H: 


td 
lA. 


2A 


sd 

3A 


^3D 

4< 


c 
C 


3D 

FIGURE   2 

goal,  within  which  he  may  not  step,  when  he 
shoots.  In  case  a  defense  man  checks  him  (Fig- 
ure 3),  he  passes  to  the  man  who  is  left  un- 
covered, and  is  in  a  favorable  position.  Now 
let  us  suppose  that  the  goal-tender  has  come 
out  to  check  the  inhome,  as  in  this  case ;  a  shot 
at  goal  is  taken,  regardless  of  the  distance.  If 
no  goal-tender  is  there,  the  ball  passes  directly 
into  the  net. 

Frequently  it  is  possible  to  get  the  extra  man 


LACROSSE 


485 


-i-r-/- 

,// 

/ 

n 


I.M. 


GOAL> 


3D 

FIGUBE   3 


FIGURE 


by  what  I  choose  to  call  the  ''  pivot  play." 
This  term  is  self-explanatory  to  the  veteran 
player.  In  this  play  the  man  with  the  ball 
passes  to  his  colleague,  and  immediately  rushes 
past  his  unsuspecting  adversary  and  receives 
the  quick  return  pass,  thus  gaining  the  advan- 
tage afforded  by  having  the  odd  man.  In  Fig- 
ure 4,  A  and  B  are  attack  men,  playing  against 
C  and  D  respectively.  A  has  the  ball  at  Al, 
checked  by  O,  while  D  is  covering  B  closely  at 
Bl.  B  takes  a  step  to  B2,  while  A  passes  to 
him  and  dashes  to  A2,  where  he  receives  the 
pass  and  is  free  to  take  a  shot  at  the  goal. 


486        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Oftentimes  a  player  finds  himself  deserted, 
so  to  speak,  in  possession  of  the  ball,  with  only 
one  defense  man  between  himself  and  the  goal, 
and  too  far  out  to  have  a  chance  of  shooting 
past  the  goal-tender.  Now  is  the  time  for  in- 
dividual play.  He  has  nobody  to  pass  to,  only 
one  man  to  get  by,  and  if  successful  in  the  at- 
tempt to  dodge,  he  is  almost  sure  of  a  goal. 
There  are  various  ways  to  dodge,  but  it  is  dif- 
ficult to  pass  the  experienced  point  or  first  de- 
fense; you  must  make  up  your  own  mind  in 
a  hurrj^,  and  have  confidence  that  you  can  out- 
guess your  opponent.  One  way  is  to  throw  the 
ball  over  his  head,  then  run  past  him  and  catch 
it ;  another  way  is  to  run  around  him,  if  you  are 
faster  on  your  feet ;  the  third,  and  perhaps  the 
most  successful  method,  consists  of  making  a 
feint  at  throwing  or  shooting,  and  while  he  is 
attempting  to  block  the  shot,  instead  of  body- 
checking,  he  finds  himself  swinging  at  the  air 
as  the  attack  man  wheels  around,  and  passes 
him  with  the  ball  in  his  stick  and  a  free  shot  at 
goal  awaiting  him.  This  method,  however,  re- 
quires a  great  deal  of  practice,  but  it  is  a  good 
play  to  be  able  to  execute,  as  such  emergencies 
often  arise. 

The  attack  men  shoot  at  the  goal,  but  often 
the  goal-tender  stops  the  greater  number  of  the 
shots,  especially  from  far  out,  and  often  the 
ball  goes  past  the  goal.  In  the  latter  case,  of 
course,  the  inhome  and  outhome  should  dash 


LACROSSE  487 

behind  the  goal  to  get  the  ball,  but  if  the  goal- 
tender  or  a  defense  man  gets  the  ball,  the  attack 
is  immediately  put  on  the  defensive.  The  de- 
fense intends  to  pass  the  ball  up  the  field 
toward  the  opponents'  goal,  and  the  opposing 
attack  must  not  expect  the  defense  to  do  all  the 
defensive  work.  When  the  other  side  gets  the 
ball,  the  attack  men  should  "  cover  back;  " 
that  is,  they  should  prevent  the  defense  men 
from  passing  the  ball  up  the  field,  and  be  care- 
ful not  to  let  the  other  side  have  the  extra  man 
at  any  point,  for  the  ball  travels  much  faster 
than  a  player  can  run. 

Often  a  goal-tender  stops  a  great  many  shots 
in  a  game;  thirty  or  forty  attempts  are  inter- 
cepted by  his  body  or  stick,  and  he  may  let  only 
one  or  two  pass.  Wliere  one  analyzes  this 
wonderful  defensive  record,  it  is  sometimes 
found  that  the  attack  men  are  not  "  placing  " 
their  shots,  but  letting  them  go  to  waste  by  hit- 
ting the  goal-tender,  or  shooting  too  low  when 
near  the  goal.  After  the  work  of  bringing  the 
ball  into  a  position  to  score,  the  man  making 
the  shot  should  place  the  ball  so  that  the  goal- 
tender  shall  have  hard  work  to  stop  it,  for  it  is 
true  that  a  goal-tender  often  feels  the  ball  be- 
fore he  sees  it,  on  close  shots.  When  far  away, 
it  is  well  to  make  the  ball  bound  at  least  waist- 
high;  when  close  to  the  goal,  aim  for  the  top 
corners  of  the  net. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  the  defense  to  prevent  the 


488        THE   BOOK   OF  ATHLETICS 

opposing  attack  from  scoring,  and  tliere  are  a 
few  general  rules  which  may  be  laid  down  for 
defense  team-play.  The  attack  has  an  advan- 
tage, of  course,  in  that  the  defense  must  adjust 
itself  to  the  style  of  offense,  but  the  slightest 
slip-up  is  likely  to  give  the  defense  the  ball. 

As  long  as  every  attack  man  is  covered,  he 
cannot  get  a  free  shot  at  the  goal ;  therefore  it 
is  the  first  principle  to  "  cover  your  man."  In 
this  case,  the  attack  must  shoot  hurriedly  and 
from  a  distance,  and  there  is  little  danger  of  a 
score,  with  a  reliable  goal-tender.  The  real 
work  comes  when  the  attack,  by  clever  manoeu- 
vering,  gets  the  extra  man,  and  begins  to  make 
a  rush  toward  goal.  Wliat  can  the  defense  do? 
How  can  three  defense  men  cover  four  attack 
men?  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  attack  men 
immediately  spread  out,  so  as  to  have  one  man 
free  —  uncovered.  This  man  would  be  able  to 
score,  provided  the  defense  took  a  man  each. 
The  thing  to  do  is  to  draw  in  toward  goal,  re- 
treat, as  it  were,  and  '*  bunch  the  attack,"  so 
that  the  defense  man  has  a  chance  to  intercept 
a  pass  or  spoil  a  shot;  in  the  meantime,  if  the 
attack  men  hesitate,  another  defense  man  is  on 
the  way  to  cover  the  extra  man. 

When  an  attack  man  has  succeeded  in  pass- 
ing his  direct  opponent,  the  defense  man  next 
nearer  the  goal  must  leave  his  man  to  check 
him.  The  defense  man  must  be  warned  not  to 
rush  at  him,  but  wait,  and,  if  possible,  delay 


LACROSSE  489 

him  while  the  other  defense  man  is  regaining 
his  position.  An  axiom  for  a  defense  man  is  to 
run  straight  toward  goal  if  another  defense 
man  is  needed,  for  there  he  will  find  the  last 
uncovered  attack  man  ready  to  take  a  shot. 
The  defense  man  must  choose  the  correct  mo- 
ment to  leave  his  own  man  to  take  another;  if 
too  early,  this  man  never  receives  the  pass ;  if 
too  late,  he  has  passed  it  along  or  shot  a  goal. 

The  ideal  defense  is  the  one  that  does  not 
permit  the  opponents  to  get  the  extra  man,  but 
in  case  the  attack  outwits  the  defense  and  gets 
the  extra  man,  the  defense  men  must  work  to- 
gether and  prevent  the  opponents  from  getting 
a  close  shot. 

The  center  is  a  combination  of  defense  and 
attack;  one  moment,  he  is  defending  his  own 
goal,  the  next,  he  is  shooting  at  the  other.  This 
position  requires  a  great  amount  of  skill  and 
endurance.  The  goal-tender,  on  the  other  hand, 
does  very  little  running  except  behind  the  goal, 
when  a  shot  goes  by,  but  he  must  stand  un- 
flinching and  stop  w^ith  stick  or  body  the  hard 
and  the  easy  shots  of  the  opposing  team.  The 
requisites  of  the  attack  and  defense  men  have 
been  mentioned  in  detail.  A  good  attack  is 
made  up  of  five  men  who  have  fine  stick-work, 
plenty  of  initiative,  and  confidence  in  each 
other,  while  the  successful  defense  is  found  to 
be  the  one,  every  man  of  which  is  determined 
to  stop  his  opponent,  and  which  works  together 


490       THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

as  a  unit  in  stopping  the  adversary.  In  every 
position  a  man  must  think  quickly  and  act 
quickly;  lacrosse  is  a  game  which  requires 
and  develops  alertness,  speed,  and  stamina  in 
every  one  who  plays  it. 


BASKETBALL 


HOW   TO    PLAY   BASKETBALL 

The  Defense 
by  fred  a.  kohler 

Basketball,  unlike  football,  baseball,  hockey, 
and  similar  games,  has  no  fixed  system  either 
of  defense  or  offense.  There  are  no  mass  plays 
or  defensive  formations  as  in  football,  no  in- 
field and  outfield  as  in  baseball,  and  no  goal- 
tender  or  point  as  in  hockey.  Every  player  on 
a  basketball  team  is  as  much  a  defensive  player 
as  he  is  offensive  and  vice  versa. 

In  former  years,  when  basketball  was  not  as 
perfected  as  it  now  is,  it  was  thought  that  the 
forwards  were  to  do  the  scoring,  the  guards  the 
defensive  work,  while  the  center  did  a  little  bit 
of  both.  This  idea  has  been  entirely  discarded. 
In  fact,  to-day  there  is  little  or  no  difference 
between  the  duties  of  a  forward  and  a  guard. 
Both  must  be  equally  able  to  score  and  to  pre- 
vent their  opponents  from  doing  so.  In  a  re- 
cent game  between  Yale  University  and  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  the  forwards  of 
both  teams  failed  to  score.  In  the  majority  of 
games,  however,  the  number  of  points  scored  is 

4d3 


494        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

justly,  evenly  distributed  among  the  whole  five 
players.  This  shows  plainly  the  tendency 
toward  a  team  that  scores  and  guards  as  a  team. 
In  other  words,  every  man  a  forward,  a  guard, 
a  center  at  the  proper  time;  a  *'  five  man 
team. ' ' 

When  boys  begin  to  organize  teams  they 
nearly  always  pay  too  much  attention  to  indi- 
vidual shooting  or  guarding  and  overlook  the 
vital  element  in  the  game,  namely,  team-play. 
The  best  team  is  not  necessarily  the  team  that 
can  shoot  most  accurately,  nor  the  team  that 
guards  most  effectively.  It  is  the  team  that 
plays  entirely  together,  that  guards  together, 
passes  together,  shoots  together. 

Perhaps  the  best  way  for  a  team  to  develop 
team-play  is  the  method  now  employed  by 
nearly  every  well-coached  team.  At  every 
practice  there  is  a  short  scrimmage  lasting 
from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes,  in  which  no  shots 
at  the  goal  are  attempted,  merely  getting  pos- 
session of  the  ball  and  keeping  it  away  from  the 
opposing  side.  A  team  that  can  pass  the  ball 
around  long  enough  will  ultimately  exhaust  or 
demoralize  their  opponents. 

This  sort  of  passing,  however,  does  not  mean 
simply  tossing  the  ball  from  player  to  player 
while  standing  still.  Every  player  is  expected 
to  be  moving  and  moving  fast  the  entire  game. 
No  matter  how  well  a  man  can  shoot  or  guard, 
if  he  loafs,  he  had  better  be  out  of  the  game, 


HOW  TO  PLAY   BASKETBALL     495 

for  it  is  practically  the  same  as  having  six  men 
on  the  other  side ;  the  * '  loafer  ' '  not  only  slows 
up  his  team-mates'  play  but  he  allows  his  man 
to  run  free.  Every  man  must  be  always  on  the 
jump,  always  ready  to  receive  a  pass  from  one 
of  his  side  or  to  intercept  one  of  his  opponents' 
throws.  Besides  this,  he  must  be  alert  enough 
to  pass  the  ball  quickly  and  accurately  to  the 
proper  man,  to  get  free  himself  and  to  repeat 
the  operation  until  a  fairly  easy  chance  for  a 
basket  is  offered.  The  best  way  to  express  it 
is,  "  never  stand  still  a  second."  Play  as 
hard  as  you  can  and  then  ask  for  a  chance  to 
rest.  Under  the  new  regulations  which  require 
that  time  shall  be  taken  out  at  least  once  every 
ten  minutes  there  is  no  reason  why  a  player 
should  save  his  strength. 

Handling  the  Ball 

Another  thing  that  teams  should  pay  partic- 
ular attention  to  is  the  practising  how  to  handle 
the  ball  when  the  player  is  on  the  run.  In  any 
fast  game  practically  all  of  the  passes  and  shots 
are  made  by  players  while  running.  Practise 
catching  and  throwing  the  ball  while  you  are  in 
motion.  Be  able  to  pass  or  shoot  accurately 
while  at  top  speed.  Players  that  have  mastered 
that  part  of  the  game  are  the  most  dangerous 
men  and  the  hardest  to  guard  closely. 

Now  as  to  the  defense.    I  said  before  that 


496        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

every  player  must  be  able  to  play  defensively 
when  the  other  side  has  the  ball.  At  such  a 
time  every  player  —  center,  forwards,  guards, 
every  one  —  must  single  out  an  opponent  and 
try  to  prevent  his  passing  or  shooting.  It  is  a 
mistake  to  try  to  '^  cover  "  the  same  man  al- 
ways. The  best  plan  is  for  each  player  to  take 
the  opponent  nearest  him,  no  matter  what  posi- 
tion he  is  supposed  to  play.  This  is  the  hardest 
thing  for  a  boys'  team  to  master.  Eemember 
that  it  is  a  game  between  two  teams,  not  five 
separate  games  between  five  different  pairs  of 
players.  Guard  as  a  team.  The  same  idea  is 
shown  when  a  football  defense  line  stays  un- 
changed although  the  opposing  line  men  drop 
back  or  shift.  This  means  even  more  alertness 
in  every  player,  yet,  difficult  as  it  may  appear, 
it  can  be  acquired  with  an  average  amount  of 
careful  practice. 

If  a  certain  member  of  the  other  side  should 
succeed  in  scoring  a  large  number  of  goals,  do 
not  necessarily  blame  the  man  who  played 
against  him.  It  is  very  seldom  that  any  one 
man  is  entirely  responsible  for  a  basket  made 
by  the  opponents ;  it  is  usually  due  to  a  number 
of  misplays  or  mistakes  in  judgment  by  the  rest 
of  the  team.  Similarly  the  man  that  scores  the 
largest  number  of  points  does  not  alwaj^s  de- 
serve the  greatest  share  of  the  credit;  before 
he  could  shoot  his  team  had  to  get  the  ball  and 
work  it  down  the  floor  into  a  position  where  he 


HOW  TO   PLAY   BASKETBALL      497 

could  shoot  the  basket.  When  faults  are  ap- 
parent or  good  points  very  evident  it  is  the 
team-play  which  is  responsible  rather  than  in- 
dividuals, for  it  is  team-play,  both  offensive 
and  defensive,  that  either  wins  or  loses  the 
game. 

In  games  where  the  dribble  is  allowed  there 
is  another  phase  in  the  defensive  play.  One 
player  should  always  take  care  to  be  between 
the  play  and  the  basket  he  is  defending.  This 
does  not  mean  that  a  guard  should  station  him- 
self on  a  certain  spot  and  wait  for  some  one  to 
attempt  a  dribble,  but  he  should  always  be  in 
a  position  to  cut  in  ahead  of  any  such  attempt. 
It  often  happens  that  all  the  other  players  have 
followed  a  play  into  the  other  half  of  the  floor. 
In  such  a  case  the  guard  may  follow  right  in, 
provided  he  make  sure  none  of  the  other  side 
are  so  placed  that  they  could  dribble  past  him 
and  get  a  free  shot.  This  player  is  not  "  loaf- 
ing ' '  by  any  means.  He  plays  up  and  down  on 
a  line  in  the  center  of  the  floor  and  must  watch 
both  sides  so  as  to  head  off  a  dribble  down 
either  side-line.  It  is  not  customary  for  any  one 
player  to  do  this  "  back  playing  **  continually. 
Usually  the  man  that  happens  to  be  farthest 
back  tends  to  it.  But  as  the  dribble  is  becoming 
more  and  more  restricted  each  year  and  is  des- 
tined to  be  entirely  eliminated  from  basketball 
some  day  it  is  not  worth  while  paying  too  much 
attention  to  it. 


498        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Play  the  Ball 

Another  fault  that  younger  teams  should 
seek  to  avoid  is  the  tendency  to  play  the  man 
rather  than  the  ball.  The  players  cannot  seem 
to  realize  the  time  and  points  they  lose  in  at- 
tempting to  hold  or  block  their  opponents.  Oc- 
casionally the  "  dirty  "  team  will  "  get  away 
with  it."  That  is  one  of  the  big  drawbacks  in 
all  sports :  the  possibility  of  winning  by  unfair 
means.  Sooner  or  later  every  basketball  player 
will  be  beaten  unfairly.  By  that  I  mean  that 
he  is  beaten  by  an  inferior  team  who  take  un- 
fair advantage.  The  natural  impulse  is  to  beat 
them  at  their  own  game,  but  it  never  pays  in 
the  long  run.  The  team  that  plays  a  clean,  fast 
game  is  sure  to  win  over  a  team  that  wastes 
time  and  energy  in  trying  to  "  body-check." 
After  all  it  is  the  ball  you  play  with,  also  it  is 
the  ball  that  your  opponents  must  play  with  in 
order  to  win.  Therefore  play  the  ball  always. 
If  the  man  you  are  placing  against  has  the  ball 
get  your  hands  on  the  hall.  Don't  try  to  spoil 
his  shot  or  pass  by  striking  his  arm  or  by  push- 
ing or  tripping  him.  Besides  risking  having 
a  foul  called  you  are  wasting  time  and  an  op- 
portunity. Get  the  hall.  If  you  can't  get  it 
entirely  away,  get  one  hand  on  it.  By  so  doing 
you  prevent  his  making  a  shot  or  an  accurate 
pass.  If  he  is  dribbling,  wait  until  he  starts  to 
bounce  the  ball  and  then  snatch  it  or  bat  it  out 


HOW-TO  PLAY  BASI^TBALL     499 

of  his  reacli.  A  team  that  plays  the  ball  en- 
tirely ought  to  beat  a  rough  team  easily.  If 
they  don't,  it  is  usually  because  they  try  to  re- 
turn the  rough  play  and  so  neglect  their  own 
style. 

A  striking  example  of  the  superiority  of  the 
fast-passing  team  that  played  the  ball  instead 
of  the  man  was  shown  by  the  team  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  a  few  years  ago,  the  year 
that  they  played  the  two  best  teams  in  the  East, 
Columbia  and  Pennsylvania.  Columbia  had  a 
heavy  team  composed  of  individual  stars  who 
have  yet  to  be  equaled  in  individual  excellence. 
They  relied  on  these  men  to  score  and  on  the 
other  heavy  men  to  get  the  ball  and  "  feed  " 
them.  When  they  lined  up  against  Chicago  it 
looked  like  an  easy  victory.  Chicago,  however, 
by  fast  passing  and  always  playing  the  ball 
more  than  made  up  for  their  lack  of  individual 
stars  and  won  the  game  by  a  comfortable  mar- 
gin. 

Later  on  in  the  same  season  this  same  Chi- 
cago team  was  to  play  Pennsylvania  for  the 
intercollegiate  championship.  Pennsylvania 
had  a  wonderful  team,  with  a  dribbler  who  was 
supposed  to  be  invincible.  The  best  guards  in 
the  East  had  failed  to  stop  his  scoring.  It  was 
on  dribbling  that  Pennsylvania  relied  mainly. 
Chicago  was  known  to  play  the  fast-passing 
game.  The  series  was  regarded  with  a  great 
deal  of  interest  since  it  would  show  which  style 


500        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

of  play  was  the  more  efficient.  The  Chicago 
men  had  been  instructed  on  stopping  dribbles. 
They  were  to  wait  until  the  man  started  his 
dribble  and  then  cut  in  and  get  the  ball  away. 
They  did  this  and  won  two  successive  games 
and  the  championship. 

So  much  then  for  the  general  outlines  of  the 
defensive  play.  It  must  be  fast,  clean  and  with 
well-developed  team-play.  But  there  are  a 
number  of  minor  details  that  it  is  well  to  know 
when  playing  on  the  defense.  First,  you  must 
see  how  your  opponent  shoots,  whether  from 
the  knees  or  from  the  chest.  All  players  have 
a  preference,  one  way  or  the  other,  and  in- 
stinctively shoot  that  way.  If  the  man  guard- 
ing knows  what  to  expect  he  can  much  more 
easily  prevent  a  shot.  Besides,  always  notice 
whether  a  man  is  left-handed  or  not.  Jump  for 
the  side  from  which  he  throws.  By  taking  ad- 
vantage of  such  points  you  may  break  up  a 
man's  whole  system  of  play. 

When  the  other  side  has  the  ball,  and  you 
wish  to  prevent  your  man  from  receiving  a 
pass,  do  not  face  him;  try  to  keep  one  hand 
touching  him,  without  holding  him,  of  course, 
and  watch  the  ball.  In  this  way  you  are  able 
to  intercept  almost  any  pass  that  can  be  made 
to  him. 

Sometimes  it  happens  that  a  man  has  a  free 
chance  to  pass  and  you  are  closing  in,  trying  to 
block  the  throw.    In  such  a  case  it  is  best  to 


HOW  TO  PLAY  BASKETBALL      501 

watch  the  man's  eyes  as  he  always  looks  where 
he  intends  throwing.  The  same  thing  is  true 
where  an  opponent  has  the  ball  out  of  bounds ; 
any  interference  or  partial  blocking  of  the 
throw-in  helps  to  break  up,  or  at  least  slow  the 
opponents'  team-play. 

Recovering  the  Ball 

Another  point  well  worth  noticing  is  recover- 
ing the  ball  when  a  shot  for  either  basket  is 
tried  and  missed.  Follow  the  course  of  the  ball 
and  try  to  foresee  on  which  side  of  the  basket 
it  is  going  to  drop,  and  how  far  back  into  the 
court  it  will  rebound.  Then  be  there,  and  get 
it.  With  a  little  practice  this  becomes  almost 
second  nature  to  a  player  and  is  of  great  service 
to  his  team. 

When  the  opponents  are  throwing  a  foul,  the 
man  that  shoots  must  be  covered  as  soon  as  the 
ball  reaches  the  basket  to  prevent  any  possible 
second  shot  by  him,  which  would  count  two 
points. 

These  are,  perhaps,  the  most  common  of  the 
great  number  of  situations  that  a  player  on  the 
defensive  has  to  face.  Of  course  every  game, 
almost  every  play  brings  in  some  new  varia- 
tion. There  is  only  one  fixed  rule  that  could 
cover  all  such  cases.  It  is  this,  **  Play  to  get 
the  ball."  Players  are  beginning  to  realize  that 
basketball  is  nine-tenths  getting  and  keeping 


502        THE   BOOK   OF   ATHLETICS 

the  ball  and  one-tenth  basket-shooting.  Every 
time  you  get  the  ball  from  the  other  side  and 
start  a  play  that  nets  a  score  you  are  entitled 
to  as  much  or,  perhaps,  more  credit  than  the 
man  that  shot  the  goal.  On  the  football  field 
in  1911  the  man  that  won  the  highest  indi- 
vidual honors  and  the  championship  for  his 
team  was  the  man  who  watched  for  his  chance 
and  succeeded  in  getting  the  ball  away  suddenly 
and  scoring  on  both  Yale  and  Harvard.  The 
alert  basketball  player  can  do  exactly  the  same 
several  times  each  game.  Wlien  his  opponents 
least  expect  it  he  can  often  intercept  a  pass  or 
snatch  the  ball  away  and  enable  his  team  to 
score.  It  is  plays  like  that  that  win  or  lose 
games  and  the  players  who  make  them  most 
often  are  the  most  valuable  players. 

All  that  I  have  said  heretofore  has  had  refer- 
ence only  to  the  technical  side  of  basketball  and 
the  purely  mechanical  requirements  of  the 
game.  But  there  is  much  more  in  basketball 
than  that.  As  in  every  sport,  to  be  a  good 
player  a  man,  besides  mastering  the  game's 
technicalities,  must  be  a  gentleman  at  heart. 
Basketball  is  no  game  for  the  man  who  loses 
his  temper,  or  tries  to  ''  slug  "  his  opponent, 
or  indulges  in  any  of  the  many  other  unsports- 
manlike tactics.  The  truly  excellent  player  is 
the  player  who  mil  fight  fairly  as  hard  as  he 
can  and  will  smile  good-naturedly  whether  he 
be  winning  or  losing.     After  all,  ha\dng  the 


HOW  TO   PLAY   BASKETBALL      503 

higher  score  is  not  the  most  important  thing 
in  true  sport.  The  man  who,  while  the  game  is 
in  progress  and  after  it  is  over  has  both  his 
self-respect  and  the  respect  of  his  team-mates 
and  opponents  is  the  one  man  that  is  always 
sure  to  win.  His  team  may  be  outscored,  but 
if  he  has  outpointed  and  outclassed  the  other 
side  in  showing  himself  a  truer  gentleman,  on 
the  scoreboard  of  his  own  conscience  and  that 
of  other  men's  opinion  he  is  an  easy  winner. 


BASKETBALL:    THE    OFFENSE 

BY    JAMES    A.    KEELLY 

The  offensive  part  of  basketball  is  essentially 
the  most  important.  Some  may  say  that  a  good 
defense  may  result  in  a  good  offense,  but  I  do 
not  think  this  is  so.  Possession  of  the  ball  is 
what  makes  the  opposing  team  defend  its  goal. 
Nothing  could  be  better  offense  than  to  retain 
possession  of  the  ball.  It  is  with  the  ball  that 
the  scores  are  made,  so  why  not  control  the 
score?  If  a  team  has  possession  of  the  ball 
often,  it  must  necessarily  develop  team-play  or 
individual  play.  Wlien  a  player  sees  a  chance 
to  shoot  or  pass  he  immediately  disposes  of  the 
ball. 

It  is  most  important  for  a  team  to  be  clever 
or  have  some  idea  of  dexterity  in  the  game  of 
basketball  in  order  to  be  among  the  winners. 
Cleverness  is  an  essential  part  of  the  game,  of- 
fensively and  defensively. 

Cleverness  is  a  prominent  feature  for  one 
who  dribbles.  He  must  be  able  to  exert  supreme 
control  over  the  ball  while  in  motion,  must  be 
elusive  —  especially  so  while  dodging.  He  must 
have  speed  and  courage.     He  cannot  be  cow- 

504 


BASKETBALL:    THE    OFFENSE     505 

ardly  while  dribbling.  A  good  dribbler  is  the 
hardest  sort  of  a  man  to  stop.  He  is  generally 
coming  directly  toward  you  and  at  full  speed. 
If  you  rush  at  him  quickly  he  evades  you  by 
clever  dodging.  If  you  stay  still  he  is  liable  to 
be  upset  or  upset  you. 

The  new  dribble  rule  has  affected  the  playing 
of  many  men,  especially  those  who  always  have 
played  a  dribbling  game.  According  to  the  new 
rule,  the  man  cannot  touch  both  hands  to  the 
ball  after  receiving  it  more  than  twice  and  still 
be  entitled  to  a  shot.  This  is  the  essence  of  the 
intercollegiate  rule.  Formerly  there  was  no 
prohibition  against  using  two  hands  as  often 
as  one  wished.  This  new  ruling  makes  a  player 
use  one  hand  oftener  in  dribbling,  which  is  un- 
doubtedly the  best  way.  It  is  much  more  diffi- 
cult to  use  two  hands  in  dribbling  than  one. 

A  slow  dribbler  is  a  hindrance  to  the  offense. 
He  must  be  quick  and  accurate  in  timing  and 
gauging  the  distance  he  has  to  cover  in  his 
dribble.  It  is  well  to  know  just  how  far  to  con- 
tinue the  dribble.  Many  a  good  chance  for  a 
shot  has  been  spoiled  by  a  player  dribbling  just 
once  too  often  when  he  could  have  completed  it 
earlier.  In  dribbling  a  player  ought  to  remem- 
ber that  it  is  best  to  be  advancing  as  rapidly 
as  possible.  Some  players  will  stand  and  drib- 
ble, making  no  advancement.  It  is  better  to 
hold  the  ball  and  not  dribble  if  no  advance  is 
being  made. 


506        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Always  dribble  while  in  motion  and  try  to 
dribble  toward  your  opponents'  goal.  No  rule 
can  be  laid  down  in  regard  to  this  as  many 
times  it  is  necessary  to  go  toward  your  ovna. 
goal. 

Much  may  be  said  against  advancing  toward 
your  own  goal.  If  a  team  would  advance 
toward  its  own  goal  only  when  necessary  then 
all  would  be  well.  The  question  then  arises 
when  is  it  necessary?  My  answer  would  be 
only  when  there  is  no  chance  for  a  shot  or  for 
team-play  to  advance  toward  your  opponents' 
goal.  In  many  instances  a  man  has  no  chance 
for  a  basket,  but  one  of  his  team-mates  is  behind 
him,  clear  for  a  shot.  If  the  ball  is  passed  back 
it  is  easier  for  the  player  behind  to  shoot.  The 
first  player  is  generally  covered,  or  about  to  be 
covered,  or  is  distracted  in  his  shot  in  some 
way.  Not  enough  plays  which  require  the  ball 
to  be  passed  backward  have  been  used,  and 
there  will  surely  be  more  of  these. 

Team-ivork 

I  believe  in  team-work,  more  so  than  in  indi- 
vidual playing,  provided  the  team-work  proves 
successful.  If  team-work  does  not  prove  suc- 
cessful then  I  believe  in  individual  playing.  By 
team-work  I  mean  plays  in  which  every  man  on 
the  team  is  concerned.  It  is  certain  that  the 
more  there  are  trying  to  obtain  possession  of 


BASKETBALL:    TLIE    OFFENSE     507 

tlie  ball  the  more  cumbersome  it  is  for  all  play- 
ers. The  fewer  there  are  trying  to  get  the  ball 
the  easier  it  is  to  break  up  plays  or  to  start 
plays.  Team-work  generally  proves  successful 
in  teams  which  have  jDlayed  together  for  some 
length  of  time,  say  two  years.  Each  player 
feels  that  he  knows  where  his  team-mates  will 
be  on  every  play.  If  this  is  the  case,  then  team- 
work ought  to  be  successful. 

Team-work  develops  instinct  among  the  play- 
ers; they  seem  to  think  and  play  as  do  their 
team-mates.  Fast,  clever  team-work  is  enough 
to  dazzle  any  team  which  relies  on  individual 
playing.  But  fast,  clever  team-work  is  some- 
thing which  is  rarely  seen. 

Now  in  regard  to  individual  playing.  If  a 
team  has  one  star  man,  accurate  in  shooting  — 
both  fouls  and  goals  —  it  has  a  very  valuable 
asset.  The  basketball  term  "  feeding  to  a 
man,"  means  passing  the  ball  to  one  man,  who 
is  supposed  to  be  the  most  accurate  shooter. 
This  "  feeding  "  game  is  a  good  one  provided 
the  right  man  is  located.  The  man  to  whom 
the  ball  is  fed  can  generally  be  found  in  the 
vicinity  of  his  opponents'  basket.  A  tall,  clever 
man  is  generally  the  kind  whom  it  would  be 
best  to  "  feed  "  to.  He  has  the  advantage  of 
being  able  to  get  the  ball  above  the  reach  of  the 
man  guarding  him,  provided  the  pass  is  what  it 
should  be.  He  has  the  advantage  of  a  long 
reach  for  the  ball. 


508        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

Passing 

Accuracy,  cleverness  and  skilfulness  in  pass- 
ing are  an  essential  in  basketball.  Nothing  is 
more  discouraging  than  to  see  a  man  make  a 
wild  pass.  In  some  cases  a  man  will  pass,  or 
rather  throw  the  ball,  not  having  the  slightest 
idea  where  it  is  going.  This  sort  of  passing  is 
demoralizing.  One  must  pass  the  ball  at  the 
proper  time.  For  instance,  a  slow  pass  across 
the  floor  to  a  man  going  at  full  speed  generally 
results  in  a  failure.  If  the  pass  is  to  be  a  short 
one  it  can  be  made  too  speedily.  Many  a  basket 
is  lost  on  too  hard  or  rather  too  swift  a  pass  at 
close  range. 

Passes  which  are  thrown  high  in  the  air  are 
of  no  use,  except  in  rare  cases.  When  passes 
are  made  this  way  it  gives  time  for  one's  oppo- 
nents to  cover  their  men.  Often  these  passes 
are  intercepted  by  one's  opponents.  Long 
passes  are  good  if  they  are  made  with  sufficient 
speed  to  carry  their  distance.  These  passes 
generally  travel  almost  parallel  to  the  floor,  but 
sufficiently  high  to  prevent  their  being  inter- 
cepted. Overhand  passes  are  the  best,  and  most 
commonly  used.  Few  underhand  passes  are 
used  nowadays. 

Long  passes  can  be  made  better  with  one 
hand  than  with  two.  In  fact  all  passes  can  be 
made  better  with  one  hand.  Passes  w^ith  two 
hands  used  generally  are  made  when  the  ball 


BASKETBALL;    THE   OFFENSE     509 

is  being  thrown  in  from  out  of  bounds  to  in- 
bounds. 

In  many  eases  a  pass  could  be  made  by  boun- 
cing the  ball  to  one's  team-mate.  This  how- 
ever is  seldom  done,  since  the  ball  does  not 
travel  as  fast  as  by  direct  passing.  A  swift 
pass  to  a  man  makes  him  feel  confident  when 
he  catches  it.  A  man  must  have  good  judgment 
in  catching  the  ball  or  he  may  injure  a  finger  or 
wrist.  In  many  cases  a  pass  can  be  made  by 
rolling  the  ball  along  the  floor  and  this  is  very 
often  done.  For  instance  if  a  man  was  covered 
and  had  the  ball  on  the  floor,  and  if  one  of  his 
team-mates  were  near,  he  could  roll  it  along 
the  floor  to  him. 

In  some  gymnasiums  the  walls  are  used  as  a 
means  of  passing,  for  instance,  where  there 
are  no  out-of-bounds  rules  and  the  wall  on 
one  side  is  such  that  a  ball  can  be  caromed 
from  it.  This  can  be  used  to  advantage. 
A  team-mate  can  stand  at  a  certain  spot 
and  receive  the  pass  after  the  carom.  No 
gymnasium  or  basketball  court  equipped 
in  modern  fashion  would  have  this,  but  it 
is  a  frequent  occurrence  in  small  gymna- 
siums. 

Signals 

Many  teams  base  a  great  deal  of  their  play 
on  the  use  of  signals ;  others  do  not.  A  system 
counts  to  a  great  advantage  in  any  sport,  and 


510        THE   BOOK  OF   ATHLETICS 

if  a  system  of  signals  can  be  developed  success- 
fully a  winning  team  should  result.  Some 
teams  have  signals  in  the  way  of  numbers,  that 
is  their  plays  are  numbered. 

If  number  one  play  is  wanted,  generally  the 
center  calls  aloud  "  one."  Signals  by  the  use 
of  the  hands  or  feet  are  common  among  most 
basketball  teams.  For  instance  some  teams 
will  have  the  captain  give  the  signals  by  pass- 
ing his  hand  through  his  hair,  or  placing  his 
hand  on  his  hip,  or  some  such  signal.  If  the 
right  hand  is  up  it  means  the  man  on  the  right 
of  the  center.  If  the  left  hand  is  up,  it  means 
the  man  on  the  left  side  of  the  center  is  to  re- 
ceive the  tip-off,  and  start  the  play. 

The  center  seems  to  be  the  best  man  to  give 
the  signals.  He  is  at  the  spot  where  the  play 
starts  and  should  be  capable  of  knowing  which 
play  or  signal  to  call  for  at  the  proper  time. 
Some  centers  give  signals  by  the  manner  or  di- 
rection in  which  they  walk  into  the  center  circle. 
If  a  center  should  walk  into  the  circle  from  the 
left  it  might  mean  that  he  was  to  tip  the  ball  to 
either  the  left  forward  or  left  guard.  Entering 
the  right  side  applies  as  above  to  the  right  for- 
ward and  guard.  Signals  can  be  given  by  a 
guard  or  forward. 

It  is  a  very  hard  thing  to  be  able  to  play  a 
game  without  having  your  signals  discovered. 
By  the  end  of  the  first  period  the  signals  are 
kno^vn.    It  would  be  a  good  plan  to  have  two 


BASKETBALL:    THE   OFFENSE     511 

sets  of  signals  in  case  one  should  be  found  out. 
The  change  could  be  made  without  much  diffi- 
culty. 

In  order  for  signals  to  work  successfully  the 
center  must  be  a  man  capable  of  outjumping 
his  opponent  at  the  toss-up  of  the  ball.  It 
doesn't  necessarily  mean  that  a  center  be  ex- 
tremely tall.  I  have  seen  centers  many  inches 
shorter  than  their  opponents  still  able  to  out- 
jump  them.  In  most  cases  the  taller  man  is 
the  best,  but  the  shorter  man  may  outjump  the 
taller. 

If  the  center  man  is  able  to  win  the  jump  or 
toss-up,  there  is  an  instant  advantage.  He  has 
the  play  started  toward  his  opponents'  goal. 
The  center's  team-mate,  generally  the  forward, 
should  be  ready  to  receive  the  tip-off  and  con- 
tinue the  play.  It  is  much  better  for  the  for- 
ward or  guard  to  receive  the  ball  while  in  the 
air  rather  than  when  it  hits  the  floor,  or  after 
it  has  hit  the  floor.  This  makes  the  play  faster 
and  allows  the  man  to  keep  the  ball  in  a  more 
advantageous  position. 

When  the  Ball  Is  Held 

A  common  play  for  a  jump  is  not  from  the 
center  but  in  most  cases  near  the  side-line. 
Here  again  a  signal  comes  in  handy.  If  a  man 
could  signal  to  his  team-mate  that  he  is  going 
to  knock  the  ball  out  of  bounds,  his  mate  could 


512        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

be  ready  to  get  it  as  soon  as  it  went  out  of 
bounds.  This  is  allowed  under  the  intercolle- 
giate rules.  But  under  the  A.  A.  U.  rules  the 
ball  would  have  to  go  to  the  opposite  side  from 
the  one  that  knocked  it  out. 

Securing  the  ball  out  of  bounds  is  a  distinct 
advantage  to  a  team.  It  allows  the  team  to 
start  the  play  with  really  no  opposition.  There 
is  the  opponent  who  tries  to  prevent  the  ball 
from  being  thrown  into  play,  but  he  should 
never  be  in  such  a  position  as  to  break  up  a  pass 
from  out  of  bounds.    This  is  an  important  pass. 

The  man  opposing  the  man  outside  generally 
stands  close  to  the  outside  man  with  his  arms 
in  the  air  in  an  endeavor  to  try  to  stop  the  pass. 
At  close  quarters  it  is  easier  to  pass  the  ball  by 
a  man  than  when  the  men  are  widely  separated. 
If  the  man  just  inside  the  out  of  bounds  line 
could  glance  quickly  behind  him  to  get  some 
idea  of  how  his  opponents  are  located  he  might 
be  able  to  break  up  the  pass,  as  he  has  some 
idea  in  which  direction  the  pass  is  going  to  be 
made.  A  play  which  when  started  from  out  of 
bounds  is  broken  up  immediately  before  reach- 
ing the  in-bounds  line  is  demoralizing.  It  is  a 
case  where  the  easiest  play  is  broken  up.  It  is 
a  play  which  never  ought  to  fail,  but  through 
carelessness  it  fails  more  often  than  any  other 
play.  Make  the  easy  plays  the  safest  and  the 
harder  ones  will  take  care  of  themselves. 

Some  men  are  more  clever  than  others  in  this 


BASKETBALL:    THE   OFFENSE     513 

game  of  basketball.  For  instance  a  forward  is 
generally  more  clever  than  a  guard.  The  for- 
wards must  be  wide-awake,  quick,  alert,  and 
last  of  all  clever.  They  are,  with  the  center, 
the  chief  scoring  players  in  the  game. 

The  center  is  the  pivot  man  and,  with  the 
forwards,  does  most  of  the  scoring. 

If  the  forwards  find  it  impossible  to  score  as 
much  as  they  should  the  guards  should  not  hesi- 
tate to  take  chances  to  count  goals.  Many 
teams  do  not  have  their  guards  come  down  the 
floor  enough  to  shoot  for  a  basket.  Clever 
shooting  guards  are  necessary  for  most  teams 
unless  the  forward  men  are  exceptional.  Every 
man  on  the  team  should  have  as  much  basket- 
shooting  practice  as  possible.  Baskets  count 
twice  as  much  as  fouls. 

Free  Throws 

Fouls  play  a  very  important  part  in  the 
scoring  of  the  present  day  game,  especially  so 
under  the  intercollegiate  rules.  If  a  clever  foul- 
shooter  can  be  developed,  he  is  a  valuable  man 
to  any  team.  If  he  can  he  counted  on  to  shoot 
seven-tenths  of  his  tries,  he  plays  an  important 
part  in  the  score.  Ten  intercollegiate  games  of 
the  past  season  were  really  won  by  superior 
basket-shooting.  More  were  won  by  superior 
foul-shooting.  Too  many  fouls  undoubtedly 
spoil  a  basketball  game,  and  this  was  often  the 


514        THE  BOOK  OF  ATHLETICS 

case  in  the  intercollegiate  series.  Some  teams 
have  a  good  foul-shooter  who  is  generally  a 
good  basket-shooter.  This  is  not  always  the 
case,  as  it  is  a  different  proposition  to  be  shoot- 
ing for  the  basket  while  in  motion,  as  is  gener- 
ally the  case,  from  what  it  is  when  one  is  shoot- 
ing at  leisure  from  the  foul-line.  A  man  who 
can  shoot  half  the  fouls  he  tries  for  is  main- 
taining a  good  average. 

Under  the  intercollegiate  rules  fouls  are  the 
chief  point-scoring  means.  Some  games  of  the 
past  season  contained  as  many  as  forty-one 
fouls.  Twenty-two  fouls  were  called  on  one 
team  and  nineteen  on  the  other.  There  were 
forty  minutes  of  playing  time.  This  makes  an 
average  of  a  foul  a  minute.  Games  of  this  sort 
are  not  interesting  to  watch.  There  w^ere  no 
reasons  for  so  many  fouls  being  called,  but  if 
the  officials  insist  on  calling  fouls  it  is  neces- 
sary to  have  a  good  foul-shooter  on  any  team. 

In  general  if  a  team  has  at  least  one  good 
dribbler,  a  clever  center  around  whom  a  team 
can  be  built,  a  good  foul-shooter,  a  signal  sys- 
tem, there  is  no  reason  why  it  should  not  be 
successful.  As  is  said  above,  possession  of  the 
ball  is  the  chief  factor.  This  is  so  of  any  game 
but  especially  in  basketball. 


GOLF 


THE  GAME  OF  GOLF. 

BY   FRANCIS   OUIMET 

When  I  think  of  the  game  of  golf  now  and 
what  it  was  fifteen  years  ago  I  cannot  help 
but  marvel  at  the  changes  that  have  taken 
place.  Most  important  is  the  personnel  of  the 
players  now  in  comparison  with  what  it  was 
then.  About  1905  you  seldom  saw  a  young 
golfer  on  the  links,  and  if  one  did  happen 
along  he  was  almost  a  curiosity.  In  other 
words,  the  game  was  looked  upon  as  an 
old  man's  game,  and  as  such  only  our  elders 
were  supposed  or  expected  to  play  it.  A 
boy,  for  example,  who  played  golf  in  preference 
to  baseball  or  football  was  looked  upon  as  a 
weakling,  unfit  for  the  other  more  strenuous 
games. 

And  yet  in  a  short  period  this  country  has 
gone  wild  over  golf  to  such  an  extent  that 
every  golf  and  country  club  is  filled  with 
memberships  and  there  are  many  anxious 
ones  on  the  waiting  lists,  while  new  courses 
are  springing  up  like  so  many  mushrooms  to 
relieve  the  congestion  of  practically  every 
course  that  may  be  situated  quite  near  a  city 
of  size  or  importance.  From  a  reliable  source 
I  have  learned  that  there  are  approximately 

517 


518     THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS 

three  and  a  half  miUion  golfers  in  this  country, 
and,  judging  from  the  game's  remarkable 
growth,  it  will  some  day  supplant  baseball  as 
the  most  popular  American  game.  Surely 
with  young  and  old,  male  and  female,  taking 
it  up  and  liking  it,  it  will  not  lack  for  support, 
for  once  a  golfer,  alwa3'*s  a  golfer. 

AATiat  is  this  game  that  everybody  seems 
to  go  crazy  over.^  Is  it  a  game  that  is  easy  to 
play.'^  Is  it  a  game  of  skill,  or  that  requires 
great  physical  prowess  to  be  played  success- 
fully.^ Yes,  it  is  a  game  of  skill,  and  it  does 
require  some  strength,  though  this  is  really 
the  very  least  of  its  requirements.  It  is  one 
of  the  tantalizing  sort  of  games  that  irritate 
you  beyond  measure  in  one  instance,  and  in 
the  next  you  get  more  satisfaction  than  from 
any  other  thing  you  have  ever  tried. 

Golf  and  other  sports  are  different.  There 
is  no  game  that  calls  for  more  courage  on  the 
part  of  the  player  than  does  golf.  Many 
think  that  because  you  do  not  come  into 
physical  contact  with  your  opponent  that  it 
is  a  namby-pamby  game,  but  the  player  who 
is  playing  in  an  important  golf  tournament 
can  suffer  more  mentally  in  this  game  than  in 
an}^  other,  and  j^et,  while  suffering,  so  to  speak, 
he  is  thoroughly  enjoying  himself. 

Golf  is  plaj^d  differently  from  what  it  was 
3^ears  back.  The  rules  of  the  game,  with  few 
exceptions,  are  about  the  same,  but  the  ball  is 


THE   GAME   OF  GOLF  519 

different,  and  with  the  advent  of  the  rubber- 
cored  golf  ball  came  a  game  far  above  the  old 
one  in  the  question  of  science.  The  hard 
gutta-percha  ball  was  much  easier  to  handle, 
for  the  very  good  reason  that  it  w^as  not  nearly 
so  resilient  as  the  present-day  ball.  The 
better  players,  such  as  Vardon,  Taylor,  and 
Braid,  soon  discovered  that  playing  with  a 
rubber-cored  golf  ball  required  much  more 
skill  than  was  necessary  in  using  the  hard  ball, 
and  to  them  we  owe  the  introduction  of  such 
golfing  shots  as  the  cut  shot,  or  the  purposely 
played  pull  and  slice. 

The  cut  shot  is  used  in  pitching  the  ball  to 
a  green  guarded  with  sand  traps.  All  that 
was  required  to  hold  the  hard  ball  on  a  green 
was  to  play  it  high  in  the  air.  Owang  to  its 
lack  of  resiliency,  it  usually  dropped  dead. 
The  livelier  ball  needed  a  spin  or  English  to 
hold  the  green,  and  if  such  were  not  imparted 
it  bounded  merrily  over  into  a  waiting  hazard. 
The  ''pull"  was  used  to  make  the  ball  roll 
long  distances,  because  it  had  an  overspin 
which  caused  it  to  roll  many  yards  beyond 
the  place  it  struck.  The  slice  was  played  for 
an  opposite  effect,  or  to  take  advantage  of 
certain  wind  conditions. 

The  medicore  golfer  seldom  appreciates  the 
advantages  of  an  intended  ''pull"  or  "slice," 
because  he  does  these  things  to  such  an  extent 
that  they  become  bad  faults,  causing  him  much 


520    THE    BOOK    OF    ATHLETICS 

trouble  and  annoyance.  As  an  example  of 
how  the  ''pull"  and  slice  operate,  I  will  relate 
an  incident  that  took  place  between  Harry 
Vardon  and  another  golfer.  They  were  play- 
ing a  hole  one  hundred  and  ninety  yards  long, 
and  the  wind  was  blowing  at  right  angles,  from 
right  to  left,  to  the  direction  they  had  to  go. 
Vardon 's  opponent,  having  the  honor,  selected 
a  driving  iron  and,  allowing  for  the  wind,  he 
played  well  to  the  right  of  the  green.  As  the 
ball  got  up  into  the  wind,  it  was  seen  to  break 
to  the  left,  or  I  should  say  curve,  and  so  well 
had  it  been  gauged  as  to  direction  that  it 
came  around  in  a  direct  line  for  the  flag,  but 
striking  on  the  green  it  rolled  on  and  over  into 
a  trap. 

Vardon  noticed  the  performance  very  care- 
fully, and  instead  of  using  a  club  similar  to 
the  one  used  by  his  opponent  he  used  his 
brassie,  which  was  ever  so  much  more  power- 
ful. Naturally  you  would  think  that  he  would 
go  well  over  the  green  with  this  club,  especially 
after  his  opponent  had  gone  beyond  with  a 
less  powerful  club.  Instead  of  playing  to  the 
right  as  did  the  other  feUow,  Vardon  started 
his  ball  to  the  left  with  a  slice.  It  curved 
around  in  the  direction  of  the  green,  and  owing 
to  the  fact  that  it  was  sliced  into  the  ^^^nd  it 
dropped  to  the  green  and  rolled  just  a  few  feet 
from  where  it  struck.  Now  Vardon  could 
have  played  the  same  kind  of  a  stroke  as  his 


THE   GAME   OF  GOLF  521 

opponent,  but  he  was  taking  advantage  of  the 
wind,  which  the  other  man  did  not  do,  and 
therefore  you  have  an  idea  as  to  how  one 
shot  is  sometimes  better  than  another. 

Then  George  Duncan,  the  originator  of  the 
famous  '^push  shot,"  gave  to  golfers  one  of  the 
most  spectacular  shots  ever  thought  of.  This 
particluar  stroke  sends  the  ball  flying  on  a 
line  and  low  toward  the  hole,  and  on  striking 
the  ground  it  stops  almost  instantly.  On  a 
windy  day  it  is  the  only  kind  of  a  shot  to  play, 
since  the  wind  has  little  or  no  effect  upon  it, 
while  it  is  likewise  useful  on  a  day  that  is  calm, 
because,  summing  the  shot  briefly,  it  is  a  mar- 
vel for  accuracy.  The  first-class  exponent  of 
the  ''push  shot"  invariably  finishes  at  the  top, 
and  this  style  of  shot  is  as  necessary  to  the 
golfer  who  would  be  successful  as  the  draw 
shot  is  in  billiards  to  the  expert. 

And  when  one  is  speaking  of  golfing  strokes 
apart  from  the  orthodox  ones,  a  word  or  two 
concerning  Joseph  Kirkwood  the  Australian 
professional  would  not  be  amiss.  To  golf  and 
golfers  he  is  what  Willie  Hoppe  is  to  billiards 
and  billiard-players.  Think  of  a  stroke,  tell  him, 
and  he  will  play  it.  No  other  man  living  has 
mastered  the  control  of  a  golf  club  and  ball  to 
the  same  degree  that  Kirkwood  has.  He  plays 
them  high  and  low,  straight  and  otherwise, 
and  can  play  them  out  of  bad  lies  as  easily 
with  a  wooden  club  as  he  can  with  a  mashie. 


522     THE    BOOK    OF   ATHLETICS 

Earlier  in  this  article  I  touched  upon  golf 
as  being  a  courageous  game  and  not  one  for 
the  weak-hearted  entrj''  to  engage  in.  First 
of  all,  it  is  a  mental  game  almost  entirely. 
You  are  quite  often  influenced  by  what  your 
opponent  does,  although  the  star  player  is 
never  affected  in  this  way.  But,  for  instance, 
two  players  are  all  square  going  to  the  home 
hole.  One  chap  is  nicely  on  the  green  in  two 
strokes  while  the  other  is  in  a  sand-trap.  Off- 
hand, you  would  say  that  the  match  is  over. 
Not  necessarily.  The  fellow  in  the  trap  plays 
out  dead  to  the  hole,  and  then  the  other  has 
to  call  upon  his  nerve  or  courage  to  pull  him 
through.  If  he  weakens  he  is  gone,  and  the 
mental  strain  is  unusually  severe. 

As  a  further  illustration,  cite  the  actual 
happening  that  took  place  at  Brookline  in  an 
amateur  championship,  semi-final  round.  The 
opponents  were  Chick  Evans  and  Bill  Fownes. 
The  scene  was  the  sixteenth  hole  at  the  Coun- 
try Club.  Evans  was  two  up  and  three  to 
play,  and  when  his  mashie  shot  landed  safely 
on  the  green  it  looked  all  over  for  Fownes,  be- 
cause his  ball  was  even  short  of  the  bunker 
guarding  the  green.  Did  Fownes  weaken.'* 
Not  a  bit.  He  pitched  on  to  the  green,  but 
was  still  some  distance  from  the  hole.  Then 
Evans  ran  his  ball  four  feet  past  the  hole,  which 
is  not  a  safe  distance  by  any  means.  Fownes 
holed  his  long  putt  and  Evans  missed,  and 


THE  GAME  OF  GOLF  523 

instead  of  losing  the  hole  and  the  match 
Fownes  actually  won  it,  thereby  reducing  his 
opponent's  lead. 

That  was  not  all,  he  won  the  next  hole  also, 
squaring  the  match,  and  then  the  last  one  for 
a  wonderful  victory.  The  odds  were  levelled 
one  hundred  to  one  against  him  j^et  he  had  the 
courage  to  fight  on  where  a  less  stout-hearted 
fellow  might  have  given  up.  It  takes  a  great 
deal  of  nerve  and  courage  to  pull  through 
under  such  conditions  as  these. 

Imagination  has  ruined  many  a  promising 
player.  He  imagines  he  cannot  do  certain 
things,  and  the  funny  part  of  it  is,  he  doesn't 
do  them.  For  years  I  took  much  time  on  the 
putting  greens,  and  just  before  I  was  read}^  to 
putt  a  short  one  I  would  get  the  idea  into  my 
head  that  I  could  not  hole  the  putt,  and  of 
course  I  would  not.  Then  it  occurred  to  me 
that  if  I  putted  quickly  I  would  not  think 
these  things,  or  such  things  as  missing  putts. 
It  worked  mighty  well,  and  to-day  I  putt  as 
rapidly  as  I  can,  in  fact,  before  I  have  time  to 
think  of  missing  the  putt,  and,  if  I  do  say  so,  I 
putt  ever  so  much  better  than  I  did. 


/ 


^ 


^OFCAUFOff^ 


^^^«UNlVER% 


<f3l33NYS01^ 


o  r   ir^  d 


"^iGAiNnawv^ 


^OFCAIIFOJ!5(>       .^Qf 


^(^Anvaan-^      ^oi 


^lOSANCEl^^ 


"^ajAiNn-av^^ 


"^aaMNd-jftV^ 


-55iMUBRARYQr 


^OFCAllFO«i^      ^OFCAUFOft^ 


iMBNIVERJ/^      ^y 


^jnyDJo"^    %ojnvjjo'^      <rii39Nvso# 


( 


'^^AHvaan-ii^ 


^OAHvaan^ 


^I^UONYSOl^ 


^•UBRARYQr^ 


^OFCAUF0«^ 


4\\EUNIVERS5j^ 

5 

fie 


<m30KVS01^ 


jJ\FUNIVEW/>ji. 


^lOSANCEl^^ 


'^/jjaAiNiimv^ 


^lOSANCEl^^ 
o 


^^eiUBRARY^yC. 

?i5 


<(5i33NVS0i=^     "^/jaaAiNfl-aftV 


.r  iinnilA/Ak 


rUt.llillXrCDr/^ 


Univcrsily  ot  Calilomia,  Los  Angele 


L  005  493  613  3 


*i^DNVS(n^      "^/SlQMNIl-aVS^        %0JnV3JO^      ^OJITOiO"^ 
j^\\\EUNIW^       ^IMCE^f^         ^.omilFOffi/,        ^.OFCAUFOff^^ 

'^  '^        '^     '^^  UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


<rii3DNvs(n=^     ^aaAiNflm^- 


AA    001  170  473   1 


^lUBRARYdk, 


^OF-CAUFOfti^ 


^ojnwjo'f^     ^uwsoi'^ 


"^^AHvaan^^ 


^OfCAUF0«^ 


C5 

^  '         -   _, 

^(?Aavnan-a^ 


I' 


^MIIINIVERSJJ^ 


<Ql3DNVS(n^ 


^lOSANCEl^^ 


%aaAiNn-3\X^ 


«^^WEUNIVER% 

•7» 


<f^33NVS01^ 


^^WEUNIW/^ 


<ril30NYS01^ 


%a3AiNn-3ftV^ 


-jAlUBRARYO?. 
^•1  li--'^ 


-j^UBRARY^A, 


^<JojnvDjo'^ 


^OF'CAUFOfti^ 


^OFCAUFOS^ 


^^Aavaan^" 


^^AHvaan^ 


.>\lUBRARY«/> 


<^^tllBRARYQ^. 


.\WtUNIVERS/A       .v\lOSANCEl£r>. 


